FANUC ROBODRILL -T14iCe FANUC ROBODRILL -T14iCLe FANUC ROBODRILL -T14iCSe FANUC ROBODRILL -T21iCe FANUC ROBODRILL -T21iCLe

FANUC ROBODRILL -T21iCSe OPERATORS MANUAL

B85014EN/01

The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is :

Product Name FANUC ROBODRILL T14iCe (CLe, CSe) FANUC ROBODRILL T21iCe (CLe, CSe) Controller : A04B0079B241 A04B0079B251 FANUC Series 18iMB Mechanical Unit : A04B0079B111 A04B0079B112 A04B0079B113 A04B0079B114 Abbreviation T14iCe (CLe, CSe) T21iCe (CLe, CSe)

S No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. S All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible.

B85014EN/01

PREFACE

PREFACE

1. INTENDED USE OF THE PRODUCT The FANUC ROBODRILL T14/21iCe series are vertical drilling machine that operates under control of a CNC (computer numerical control unit). It can be used for drilling, tapping, and light milling. It should not be used for any other purposes. 2. DEFINITION OF USERS 2.1 Operator In this document, the term operator refers to a person who operates a machine. The operator must read this manual to understand the contents of the manual. If the operator uses the machine without understanding the contents of the manual, the operator or people around the operator may be in serious danger. The operator is not allowed to carry out any maintenance that involves : (1) Any work that becomes possible only after a cover whose removal requires a tool (fixed cover) is removed. (2) Installing the machine or moving it from one place to another 2.2 Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance This person should have completed an advanced course at the FANUC Robomachine School or have the equivalent knowledge and should also be qualified by the company or organization to which that person belongs. The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance must observe the cautions described below :
Cautions that Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance must observe during maintenance
1. Before starting to remove a cover whose removal requires use of a tool (fixed cover), switch off the power to the machine. 2. Before switching on the power to the machine with its cover removed, make sure that nobody is beside the machine. 3. Before starting to run the machine with its cover removed, make sure that anything extraneous, like a tool, is not left in the machine. 4. When adjusting the machine electrically with is cover removed, be careful for shock hazards. Be sure to use electrically insulated tools (such as a plastic screwdriver). 5. The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance shall not be engaged in replacement of any electrical components other than fuses and memory backup batteries. Only the maintenance engineer is allowed to replace such electrical components.

p1

PREFACE

B85014EN/01

2.3 Maintenance Engineer This person should have sufficient mechanical or electrical knowledge to be capable of maintenance and have also completed a maintenance course at the FANUC FA School or FANUC Robomachine School. Alternatively, the person should have the equivalent knowledge and should also be qualified by the company or organization to which that person belongs. Maintenance engineer are allowed to be engaged in : (1) Installing the machine and moving it from one place to another (2) Repairing the machine (such as replacing mechanical components, and electrical components requiring setting or adjustment after replacement) The maintenance engineer must also observe the cautions described above. Experienced maintenance engineer especially are alerted to accidents that may occur from negligence or carelessness. 3. ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is :
Product Name FANUC ROBODRILL T14iCe (CLe, CSe) FANUC ROBODRILL T21iCe (CLe, CSe) Controller : A04B0079B241 A04B0079B251 FANUC Series 18iMB Mechanical Unit : A04B0079B111 A04B0079B112 A04B0079B113 A04B0079B114 Abbreviation T14iCe (CLe, CSe) T21iCe (CLe, CSe)

The following manuals are related to this machine : (1) FANUC ROBODRILL a-T14iCe/T21iCe OPERATORS MANUAL (B85014EN) : This manual. Describes how to operate and maintain this machine. (2) FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isMB OPERATORS MANUAL (B63534EN) : Describes how to operate numerical control (NC) units and how to prepare programs. (3) FANUC ROBODRILL a-T14iCe/T21iCe MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B85015EN) : Describes alarms, troubleshooting, and replacement of parts. (4) FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B63525EN): Describes troubleshooting and adjustment of NC units. Before using this machine, be sure to read the necessary part of manual (1). For daily handling or for reference, use manuals (1) and (2). Use manuals (3) and (4) for troubleshooting, replacement of parts, and adjustment of the machine. The NC unit used for this machine is an exclusive controller used for T14iCe/T21iCe.
p2

B85014EN/01

PREFACE

For the basic specification and the optional specification to which the NC unit is applicable, refer to the principal specification attached to this manual and the copy of the order specification. The description of manuals (1) and (3) has priority over that of manuals (2) and (4). When there are differences between the description of the manuals, the description in manuals (1) and (3) applies. This manual has the following contents : SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: I OUTLINE : Explains safety precautions, cautions, and warning labels of the machine. Description of what can be done with this machine. The names of the parts and the description of the equipment and devices used with this machine are given. II ROUTINE The flow of operation for machining is OPERATIONS : described. III DETAILED Each of the machining operations that can be OPERATIONS : done with this machine is described in detail. IV INSTALLATION : Instructions for initially installing or moving this machine are given. V MAINTENANCE : Routine inspection to be done daily before starting machining, periodic inspection, and replacement of the expendable parts are described. APPENDIXES : The principal specification, various figures and tables, and other useful information are compiled. Before using this machine for the first time, read Chapters I and II. If the machine has been installed yet, read Chapter IV. Also, before moving this machine, be sure to read Chapter V. Prepare a schedule for inspection and maintenance. Individual operation on this machine is described in Chapter III. For NC operation, however, refer to manual (2). In this manual the soft keys, the keys on the MDI operators panel, and the keys on the machine operators panel are indicated as shown below. (For details on each key, see Section 12). D Soft keys displayed on the bottom of the screen : Enclosed in [ ] (Example) [PARAMETER], [ALARM] D Keys on the operators panel (function keys, edit keys, and so forth) : Enclosed in < > (Example) <CANCEL>, <INPUT>

p3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Before using the machine, be sure to read this manual and understand the contents of the manual thoroughly. Using the machine with insufficient understanding can lead to an accident. First, read this chapter on safety (SAFETY PRECAUTIONS). After fully understanding the contents of this chapter, use the machine. 1. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE The ROBODRILL T14/21iCe adopts a door interlock system that stops the machine when the door is open. This is to protect the operator from dangerous situations. The door interlock system consists of an electromagnetic lock switch, control circuit, and software. A light that lights the machining area can be installed inside the splash guard. The following provides an outline of the machine and the safety equipment.

s1

B85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Electromagnetic lock switch Fixed cover

Internal Light

Operators panel

Fixed cover

Window

Front door

Fixed cover

T14(21)iCe/iCLe

Electromagnetic lock switch Fixed cover

Internal Light

Operators panel Fixed cover

Window

Front door

Fixed cover

T14(21)iCSe

s2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B85014EN/01

(a) Electromagnetic lock switch The electromagnetic lock switch is installed in the upper part of the front door of the splash guard. When a door open operation is performed, the spindle and X, Y, and Zaxis operations stop. After the spindle and X, Y, and Zaxis operations have stopped, the door lock is released, allowing the operator to open the door. When the machine is delivered, a key to release the door lock is supplied with the machine. This key is used to open the door when the power supply is not connected to the machine. After installing the machine, keep the key in the maintenance section. Never hand this key to the operator, and never leave the key inserted in the machine. During machine operation, never open the door by using this key. (b) Fixed covers Fixed covers are installed around the movable part of the machine. 2. CAUTIONS When operating the machine, read specifications and other manuals on safety to ensure safety. a) Mechanical danger Handle workpieces with care. (1) Be careful with sharp edges and burrs of workpieces. A workpiece will have sharp edges and burrs especially after it is machined. Be careful not to get cuts when handling it. Wear a protector such as gloves for safety. (2) Fasten a workpiece onto a jig securely. When mounting a workpiece on a jig on the table, be sure to fix it to the securely. If not, the workpiece may come off the jig and fly away when it is machined. This is very dangerous. (3) Do not machine a flammable workpiece. Some workpiece are flammable. Do not process such workpieces on he cutting machine, or otherwise they may catch fire. (4) When mounting or dismounting a heavy workpiece, use a crane or the like. The crane or the like shall be used to lift anything that is apparently heavy (20 kg or more), cannot be held by hands, or you feel heavy when you try to lift it. Handle cutters with care. (1) When using or exchanging a cutter, be careful not to get cuts on its sharp edge. When handing a cutter, wear a protector such as gloves. (2) When disposing of cutters, observe any regulations and rules applicable to dangerous objects.

s3

B85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(3) A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, and similarly a cutter may be hot immediately after it is used. If you touch such objects directly with your hand, you may get burned. This is true especially if no coolant is used when machining. Wear a protector such as heatresistant gloves, as required. (4) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining condition that sparks are caused to fly. Check the machining condition, cutting fluid, material, and type beforehand. (5) Make sure that the cutter is fastened onto the securely. The cutter shall be neither worn out nor broken. (6) When mounting a tool on the turret, fasten it securely according to the applicable instructions. If a tool is mounted incorrectly, if may come off accidentally. Carefully handle cuttings. In handling cuttings, be careful not to hurt yourself. Wear protectors such as gloves. Be careful when operating the machine with the safety door (front door) open. The following manual operations are possible with the safety door open. D Movement along the X, Y, or Zaxis at 1.9 m/min or less D Additional axis movement at 600 degrees/min or less D Manual handle heed D Spindle rotation speed at 100 min1 or less Do not get close to moving components such as table or turret when the safety door (front door) is open. Air blow operation can be turned on with the safety door open. When turning on air blow operation with the safety door open, wear safety goggles to protect the eyes from chips. Be careful not to slip on coolants or lubricants (grease or oil). (1) If a coolant or lubricant gets to your hand, immediately wipe it off with a rag. If the hand is dirty with a coolant or lubricant, it is very slippery. It is dangerous to operate the machine with such a slippery hand. (2) A floor with a coolant or a lubricant on it is very slippery. It can cause serious falls. It a coolant or lubricant spills over around the machine, immediately wipe it up. Make sure that metal chip are not accumulated at the coolant outlet on the rear of the machine or in the metal chip holder, so the coolant is not leaking.
s4

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B85014EN/01

b) Electrical danger When performing maintenance work, turn off the power. (1) Be sure to turn off the power whenever performing maintenance work. (2) After maintenance work, reinstall all removed parts including screws. c) Thermal danger Always wear heatresistant gloves when handling hot objects. A workpiece may be hot immediately after it is machined, and similarly a cutter may be hot immediately after it is used. If you touch such objects by hand, you may get burned. This is true especially if no coolant is used during machining. Some components of the machine can also get hot. Be careful not to touch them. When handling such hot objects, wear a protector such as heatresistant gloves. The following machine components can get hot : (1) Servo motor of each axis (such as X, Y, Z, and additional axes) (2) Spindle motor (3) Coolant motor (4) Power line (5) Heat generating sections (such as a transformer and heat sink) in the NC cabinet d) COOLANTS AND LUBRICANTS Do not inhale, or expose any part of the body to, coolants or lubricants (such as grease and oil). Coolants and lubricants are very bad for your health, if you inhale, or are exposed to, them. Take the following precautions. In case you should have inhaled or touched directly any coolant or lubricant, get the applicable treatment listed below.
Part of the body exposed Precaution Medical treatment

Respiratory organs Do not inhale vapor or mist. If you feel anything abnor(such as mouth and mal with your body, immedinose) ately see a doctor and receive medical treatment. Skin (especially Do not touch directly as If a coolant or lubricant gets one with a scratch much as possible. on your skin, wash it away or a wound) with tap water or soapy water. If you feel anything abnormal with your body, immediately see a doctor and receive medical treatment.

s5

B85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Part of the body exposed Mucous membrane (such as eyes)

Precaution

Medical treatment

Wear goggles to protect the If a coolant or lubricant gets eyes from any spattering in your eye, keep washing coolant or lubricant. the eye in sufficient running tap water for 15 minutes or longer. If you feel pain or anything abnormal with the eye, immediately see an ophthalmologist (eye doctor) and receive medical treatment. Be careful not to drink acci- If you have drunk a coolant dentally. or lubricant accidentally, do not try to vomit it up. Instead, see a doctor and receive medical treatment.

Digestive organs (such a mouth)

Handle coolants and lubricants (grease and oil) with care. (1) Do NOT use flammable coolants. Be careful that coolants and oil can catch fire even if they are not flammable. Pay sufficient attention to the condition and way that you use coolants and lubricants. (2) When storing coolants and lubricants, handle them in the same way as other petrochemical products. When disposing of them, observe any regulations and rules applicable to industrial wastes. (3) Coolants become very harmful, when they get rotten. Before a coolant gets rotten, exchange it with a new supply. If a coolant is rotten, stop using it immediately, and exchange it with a new supply. (4) When handling coolants and lubricants, observe the instructions from the manufacturers. NOTE With the ROBODRILL, nitrile rubber (NBR), hydrogenerated nitrile rubber (HNBR), and fluororubber are used as shielding and protection materials. Do not use a coolant that can swell nitrile rubber (NBR), hydrogenerated nitrile rubber (HNBR), and fluororubber. Do not use a strong coolant that can peel off coating.

s6

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B85014EN/01

Use recommended lubricant. The following lubricants are recommended:

Brand ALVANIA GREASE NO. 1 ALVANIA GREASE NO. 2 MULTEMP LRL NO. 3 MOLY HD GREASE MOLYSPEED GREASE NO. 1 ARCANOL L74V ANTIRUST P- 1000 ANTIRUST P- 3600 Super MULPUS 68 UNIWAY 68 Mobil Vactra Oil No.2 TETOLA OIL 68 Tonna Oil T68 FEBIS K68 Mobil Oil corp. SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. EXXON Nisseki Mitsubishi KYODO YUSHI SUMICO Manufacturer SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. K. Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL TURRET GEAR SPINDLE NOSE GEAR BALL SCREW (X, Y, Z) SPINDLE TOOL CLAMP SPRINGS TURRET MECHANISM INSIDE SPINDLE BEARING GUIDE RAIL (X, Y, Z) TAPERED PORTION OF THE SPINDLE TABLE SURFACE GUIDE RAIL (X, Y, Z) BALL SCREW (X, Y, Z) When exchanging Tool clamp springs When overhauling Turret mechanism When exchanging Spindle bearings At the time of packing, transportation, and storage. Timing of application At the time of maintenance

SUMICO FAG Nisseki Mitsubishi

Replenish when the leavings in the pump becomes scarce.

s7

B85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Use recommended coolant. The following coolants are recommended:

Type Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. Oily SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. Mobil Oil Corp. NIPPON OIL COMPANY IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. Watersoluble SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. MOBIL OIL CORPORATION Yusiro Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Brand UNICUT TG20 DAPHNE CUT AS25F SPEED SC22A Bakumaru 15J UNISOLUBLE HDM UNISOLUBLE HD DAPHNE MILCOOL SD DROMUS OIL EPL MOBIL MET 150 MOBIL MET 150 Yusiroken EZ20

Even when recommended coolant is used, it may adversely affect machine parts or coating depending on how the coolant is used. Therefore, use coolant carefully. When using coolant other than recommended coolants, pay special attention to use conditions and a method. Some coolants may adversely affect the human body, machine, and/or environment. Be careful not to cause a fire. (1) Do not machine workpieces under such a machining condition that sparks can be caused to fly. The operator shall check the machining condition, cutting fluid, workpiece material, and cutter type beforehand. (2) Do not machine flammable workpieces. Some workpieces are mode of flammable materials. Before machining a workpiece, check its material. (3) Pay attention to coolants and oil. Do NOT use flammable coolants or oil. Be careful that coolants and oil can catch fire even if they are not flammable. Pay sufficient attention to the condition and way that you use a coolant or oil. (4) Keep combustible and flammable substances away from the machine. Do not place flammables (such as paint thinner or gasoline) around the machine. Moreover, do not use a spray around the machine. (5) Get a fire extinguisher on hand in the event of a fire. e) Danger due to unreasonable forms When installing the machine, provide service access clearances. When installing the machine, provide service access clearances. When ascending to a high place, secure a footing.
s8

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B85014EN/01

When mounting or dismounting a 20kg or heavier workpiece or machine component, use a crane or the like. Use a crane or the like to lift anything that is apparently heavy, cannot be held by hands, or you feel heavy when you try to lift it. Do not work in an unnatural posture. It is dangerous to work in an unnatural posture, reaching out to mount or dismount a workpiece on the table when it is far away from you. When working with a workpiece on the table, bring the table sufficiently toward you beforehand so that you can work safety. When working in a high place, use a ladder, and secure a footing. When working in a high place, use a ladder, and secure a footing. f) CLOTHING Always wear safe clothing when working. Wear protective clothing. Always wear a cap when working. Long hair can be caught in machines. This is very dangerous. Besides, long hair narrows your field of vision. Always wear a cap when working. Always wear safety shoes when working. Wear safety shoes to protect the feet if anything drops on them. When handling a cutter, workpiece, or metal chips, wear gloves. A machined workpiece has sharp edges and burrs. Be careful not to get cuts when handling it. When using or exchanging a cutter, be careful not to get cuts on its sharp edge. When handling metal chips, be careful not to get cuts. g) Cautions on power supply, instability, and functional impairment Pay attention to the storage and packing methods. When storing or packing the machine, observe the following: (1) Secure the spindle top and table with fastening materials for transportation. (2) Apply rust resisting oil to portions that may rust.
s9

B85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(3) Secure the turret mechanism with nylon bands. For details, see the chapters on the storage and packing methods in this manual. When lifting the machine, pay attention to the capacity of the crane used. When lifting the machine, pay attention to the balance of the machine. Also, pay attention to the capacities of the crane and hook. Machine weight: T14/21iCe 2000 kg T14/21iCLe 2100 kg T14/21iCSe 1950 kg Do not handle the operators panel or display unit with your hands in gloves. If you handle the operators panel or display unit with your hands in gloves, you may press the wrong key or more than one key at a time, possibly causing the machine to run incorrectly or damaging the workpiece, cutter, or even the machine. When pressing the keys on the operators panel, do not wear gloves. Install the machine on a flat, secure floor. The floor on which the machine is to be installed shall: (1) Withstand a load of 2 t without raising a problem (such as deformation). (2) Be flat, with no projection or dent. (3) Be hard, without being deformed under a pressure of 1.5 Mpa (15 kgf/cm2). (4) Be smooth. (5) Not deteriorate with time. (6) Not deteriorate in an environment for everyday operation. If the machine is installed in a place not meeting any condition above, a failure can occur, possibly resulting in a dangerous situation. Besides, it is impossible to make the most of the machine. Perform inspections and maintenance to ensure safety. Inspections Perform the following inspections periodically: * Check that the cutter is attached to the arbor securely to allow normal machining. The cutter must be free from wear and breakage. * If the jig is defective, a workpiece may come off. Check that the jig is free from defects. * When a hydraulic or pneumatic device is installed in the jig, check whether appropriate pressure is supplied. If the pressure is too low, a proper clamping force cannot be applied, which allows the workpiece to come off the jig. If the pressure is too high, the hydraulic or pneumatic device is damaged, and so the jig does not work.
s10

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B85014EN/01

* Check that the leveling bolt is not floating from the mount. * Press the emergency stop button to check that the machine stops normally. * Check that when a tool change is performed at a position where no tool is present, an alarm is issued. * Check that the Zaxis brake functions normally. Check that the amount of the displacement on the Zaxis between before and after the emergency stop button is pressed is 0.1 mm or less. * Check that the door is locked. * Check that the bolts fastening the fixing covers are tightened securely. * Check that machine operation is not obstructed by accumulated cuttings. * Check that cuttings accumulated at the exit of the coolant in the rear part of the machine or in the receptacle of cuttings do not cause coolant to leak out. Maintenance Perform the following maintenance operations periodically: * Greasing the gear at the end of the spindle and turret gear: Every 200 operation hours * Greasing the LM guide block: Every 1000 operation hours * Greasing the ball screws: Every 1000 operation hours * Greasing the LM guide of the turret: Every 2000 operation hours * Replacing the coned disc spring: Every 1,000,000 times of tool change * Central lubricating device (optional): Add oil when the oil level in the pump is low. For details, see the chapter on maintenance in this manual. Before opening the safety door, make sure that the Zaxis dose not come down. The Zaxis (spindle head) comes down once in a while because of the defective Zaxis brake failing to work. Before opening the safety door, make sure that the Zaxis does not come down. When the safety door is open, be careful that the Zaxis may come down. While working underneath the Zaxis, place a wooden block between the table and spindle head so that the Zaxis will not come down even if the brake fails to work. Fix a tool on the turret securely. When fixing a tool on the turret, observe the applicable instructions to fasten it tightly. If a tool is fixed incorrectly, it may come off accidentally. Be careful when opening the safety door with the power switched off. When opening the safety door with the power switched off, observe the following :
s11

B85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(1) Make sure that the spindle is not rotating by inertia. If the power is switched off when the spindle is rotating, it will keep rotating by inertia because it is no longer under control. (2) Make sure that the Zaxis (spindle head) does not come down. The operator shall not open the NC cabinet door. There are high voltages, hence shock hazards, inside the cabinet. The operator shall not remove a fixed cover. There are objects rotating or moving at high speed inside the fixed cover. If it is removed, the following may occur : D Danger of contacting with objects rotating or moving at high speed D Chance of a broken cutter or workpiece flying D Change of a cutting chips flying D Chance of a coolant spattering out of the machine D Chance of noise leaking Do not switch on the power to the machine when a fixed cover is removed. Before removing the fixed cover, switch of the power to the machine. Before switching on the power after maintenance, attach the fixed cover. Do not switch on the power with a fixed cover removed. If it is necessary to run the machine, for example, for maintenance with the fixed cover removed, maintenance engineers and servicepersons having accurate knowledge and competence for the applicable maintenance items should do this maintenance. When replacing maintenance parts, exercise care. When replacing maintenance parts, use a specified method to replace the parts properly. During replacement, the power must be off. If a replacement is not performed properly, the machine will not operate normally. After completing replacement, reinstall all removed parts including screws. Before removing the Zaxis motor, be sure to fasten the spindle top and table securely with packing materials. The Zaxis motor has a builtin brake. Therefore, if the Zaxis motor is removed without fastening the spindle top and table with packing materials, the Zaxis falls. Be careful not to be caught with an automatic door. If the machine is provided with an automatic door option, the safety door is opened and closed automatically by program. Be careful not to be caught with the automatic door when working. (Should you be caught with the automatic door, resulting in excess force being applied to it, the safety door is disconnected from the drive unit.)
s12

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B85014EN/01

h) Other cautions Telescopic covers on the x and y axes When leaving the machine unused for a long period of time. If it is intended for dry cutting (cutting without using any coolant), apply a lubricant to the surfaces of the telescopic covers by spraying or a similar method. This will assure rust prevention and smooth sliding. Bowl of the regulator The bowl of the regulator is made of polycarbonate. Do not use organic solvents or the like. Avoid using the bowl in such an atmosphere that can deteriorate polycarbonate. Top cover When using the cover to fully cover the entire machine, always use a mist collector. Otherwise, the inside of the machine becomes full of mist, which results in a failure. 3. WARNING LABELS Warning labels have been attached where special care is required during daily operation. The labels posted on the machine are described below. Keep all warning labels visible. Do not stain, scratch, or remove a warning label. Be aware of a tool on the turret or spindle head. This warning label is on the turret cover. During operation, the turret may suddenly rotate or the spindle may be lowered. When approaching the table to exchange a workpiece, for example, pull the table towards you. Stay away from the turret.

There are hazards from electrical shocks. This warning label is on a door or other sections of the NC cabinet. Any person other than the serviceperson shall not touch cables or metal parts around the label.
s13

B85014EN/01

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Before opening the safety door, make sure that the machine is not running. Do not go inside the machine. This warning label is on the front surface of the machine. Even when the power to the machine is switched off, the spindle may be rotating by inertia, or the Zaxis may drop because of a defective brake. (JAPAN and export standard)

Be careful not to get caught with the automatic door. This warning label is on the front surface of the machine, if it is equipped with the automatic door (option). The automatic door (option) may move suddenly by program.

* If a warning label is missing, request one from a nearby FANUC service station or dealer.
s14

B85014EN/01

Table of Contents

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1

I. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 1.3 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USE OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1
3
4 5 8

2. PART NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 2.2 2.3 MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONTROLLER RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIEW AND COMPONENTS OF THE OPERATORS PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
10 12 13

3. OPERATORS PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. BASIC OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 SCREEN SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 4.1.2 Switching between the QUICK Screen and CNC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CNC Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrangement of the Letter Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14 19
20
20 20

4.2

ENTERING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2.1

22
22

5. TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. JIGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24 31 32

II. INSTALLATION
1. CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 2.2 PREPARATION BEFORE TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37 38
39 41

3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 INSTALLING LEVELING BOLTS AND BLOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE EYEBOLTS FOR LIFTING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING THE PACKING PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 3.4.2 Cabling and Phase Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting of Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42
43 44 45 46
46 50

c1

Table of Contents

B85014EN/01

3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11

CONNECTING THE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVAL OF CORROSION PREVENTIVE GREASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNTING A ZAXIS MOTOR AT MACHINE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEVEL ADJUSTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MOUNTING TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INSTALLING THE COOLANT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YAXIS TELESCOPIC COVER (YCOVER F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51 53 54 56 57 58 61

4. PACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

62

III. ROUTINE OPERATIONS

1. OPERATING POSITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 2.2 SWITCHING POWER ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCHING POWER OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

65 67
68 69

3. EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 LOCKING THE SAFETY DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESTRICTIONS ON THE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE WITH THE SAFETY DOOR OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF THE SAFETY DOOR IS UNLOCKED DURING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOOR WHEN THE POWER IS OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCHING OF SAFETY DOOR LOCK CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

70 71
72 73 74 75 76 77

5. MOUNTING TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. COOLANT SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. TRIAL RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 10.2 10.3 STARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STOPPING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESTARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

78 79 81 82 83 88
89 90 91

11.POWER SHUTOFF METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1 AIR SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

92
93

c2

B85014EN/01

Table of Contents

11.2

ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

94

IV. DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONSTITUTION OF QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Descriptions of Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Switching Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3.1 Soft Keytriggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2.3.2 1.2.3.3 Screen Number and PAGE Key Triggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MENU OPERATION Keytriggered Screen Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

97
98 99
99 100 101 101 101 102

1.3

EXPLANATION OF EACH SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 1.3.6 1.3.7 1.3.8 1.3.9 1.3.10 1.3.11 Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate/Tool Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Life Management Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pallet Setting Screen (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Operation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAINTENCE/SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOSIS/ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103
103 104 106 110 112 115 117 118 120 124 126

2. CREATING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

2.1 EDITING A PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Program Nos. in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calling a Program in Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Speed Function (S Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous Function (M Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Function (T Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Orientation Function (M19 Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

128
128 129 132 132 132

2.2

PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6

133
133 133 134 137 138 139

2.3

PLAYBACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

3.1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 3.1.2 NC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PMC Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

146
146 148

3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5

CHANGING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING OFFSET DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHANGING WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Custom Macro Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149 152 154 156

156

c3

Table of Contents

B85014EN/01

3.5.2

Setting and Displaying Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

157

4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

4.1 4.2 4.3 MANUAL OPERATION OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AXIS MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 160 161

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

5.1 5.2 MDI RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 5.2.1 5.2.2 MDI Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for Memory Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Memory Running Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings for Remote Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Running Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Block (SINGL BLOCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold or Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Running Execution During Automatic Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDI Command Execution During Automatic Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M01 Stop (OPT STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Block Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW, TRVRS 25%, TRVRS 100%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

163
163

MEMORY RUNNING (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

167
167 168

5.3

REMOTE RUNNING (REMOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.3.1 5.3.2

170
170 170

5.4

SETTINGS AND OPERATIONS OF AUTOMATIC RUNNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8

172
172 173 173 173 174 174 175 175

6. TOOL CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 TOOL CHANGE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMANDS WITH M CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL CHANGE KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MEASURES WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS DURING TOOL CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 178 179 180

7. SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

7.1 ROTATION OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 Method Using the M Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Operators Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Rotation When the Safety Door is Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

182
182 182 183

7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5

SPINDLE OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE LOAD METER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE MOTOR CHARACTERISTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

184 185 186 187

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES . . . . . . . . 188

8.1 CNC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.1 8.1.2 Alarm Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common to Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnose/Alarm Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

189
189 190

8.2

QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 8.2.2

191
191 191

c4

B85014EN/01

Table of Contents

8.3

COMMON TO CNC SCREEN AND QUICK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

192

9. RELEASING OVERTRAVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 10.RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 11.INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
11.1 11.2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETAILS OF THE RELATED PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 197

12.QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

12.1 12.2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FEATURES AND NOTES OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 12.2.2 Features of QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browse Mode and Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting an Edit Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Input of G and M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Input of Words by Input Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy and Move (by Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Search for the Specified Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering a Macro Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering a Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting and Cancel of Continuous Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting of Inserting or Overwriting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen Change and Program Selection after Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

205 206
206 206

12.3

QUICK EDITOR SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3

207
207 208 208

12.4

INPUT FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4

209
209 210 211 211

12.5

EDITING FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.5.1 12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.4 12.5.5 12.5.6 12.5.7 12.5.8 12.5.9 12.5.10 12.5.11 12.5.12 12.5.13 12.5.14

212
212 213 215 216 217 217 218 219 219 220 220 220 220 221

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.A.P iM) . . . . . . . . . . . 222

13.1 13.2 OVERVIEW (SUPER C.A.P iM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1 13.2.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PreTool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Geometry Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223 224
224 225

13.3

SETTING SEVERAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.3.1 13.3.2 13.3.3 13.3.4 13.3.5

228
229 231 234 236 237

c5

Table of Contents

B85014EN/01

13.4 13.5

CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MACHINING PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.3 Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimal Process Editing Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Path Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC Statement Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

239 251
253 255 258

13.6

MACHINING PROGRAM CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.6.1 13.6.2

261
261 269

13.7 13.8 13.9

NC STATEMENT OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.7.1

274
274

DATA I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STANDARD DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13.9.1 13.9.2 13.9.3 13.9.4 Cutting Condition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PreTool File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

276 278
278 279 282 283

14.AI TOOL MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL LIFE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TOOL GROUP CREATION AND AUTOMATIC TOOL EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4.1 14.4.2 14.4.3 Setting a Tool Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Registering a Tool Length Compensation Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

285 286 290 293

293 294 294

14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8

CONFIRMING THE CURRENT STATUS AND CLEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SUPPLEMENT TO PROGRAM COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM MESSAGES DISPLAYED BY THE AI TOOL MONITOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIGNAL OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

295 297 300 301

15.EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OUTPUT SIGNAL CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.4.1 Detailled Description of Input/Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

303 304 306 307

313

EXTERNAL INTERFACE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELAY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.8.1 15.8.2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8.2.1 Internal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8.2.2 Pin allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8.3.1 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8.3.2 Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.8.3.3 Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

329 333 334 335

335 335 335 336 336 336 337 337

15.8.3

c6

B85014EN/01

Table of Contents

15.9

USER TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.9.1 15.9.2 15.9.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9.3.1 Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.9.3.2 Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

338
338 339 340 340 340

15.10 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.10.1 15.10.2 15.10.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10.3.1Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.10.3.2Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

341
341 341 346 346 346

15.11 RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15.11.1 15.11.2 15.11.3 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11.3.1Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.11.3.2Outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

347
347 347 350 350 350

16.ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 351

16.1 16.2 16.3 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENABLING THE ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . ADJUSTING THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16.3.1 16.3.2 History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Displacements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

352 353 354

354 355

17.AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 18.COOLANT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

18.1 18.2 COOLANT UNIT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MACHINE CLEANING COOLANT CONTROL (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 364

19.BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 20.OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 21.INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 22.STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 23.ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.5 23.6 23.7 SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CALCULATING THE FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR (DETECTION MULTIPLY DMR) . . . . . . . . . . GRID SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REMOVING AUXILIARY AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVO PARAMETERS (STANDARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDEX TABLE FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c7 373 375 376 377 378 379 390

Table of Contents

B85014EN/01

23.8

ADDITIONAL AXIS CABLE FOR THE INDEX TABLE (JAPAN AND EXPORT STANDARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23.8.1 23.8.2 23.8.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (4th axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

396
396 397 398

24.AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

24.1 24.2 24.3 24.4 24.5 24.6 24.7 COMMAND FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMPENSATION METHOD BY USING AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT . . MEASURING LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS AND MACRO VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM MESSAGES AND RELEASING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MACRO PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 412 413 414 415 416 421

25.SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 OUTLINE OF THE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTING THE SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTINGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 427 428 429 431

26.FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

26.1 26.2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26.2.1 26.2.2 26.2.3 Setting Up Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up FACTOLINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting NC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

434 435
435 438 439

26.3 26.4 26.5 26.6

LOGGING DATA FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SWITCHING TO FACTOLINK SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SELECT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOGGING DATA FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

440 441 442 443

27.HIGHSPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . 444

27.1 27.2 27.3 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STARTING AND ENDING THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DNC OPERATION USING THE DNC OPERATION MANAGEMENT PACKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . 445 445 445

28.CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

28.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.1.1 28.1.2 28.1.3 Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centerthrough Pump Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

447
447 447 448

28.2

NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.2.1 28.2.2

449
449 449

28.3

APPEARANCE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE COOLANT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

450

c8

B85014EN/01

Table of Contents

28.3.1 28.3.2

Appearance of the Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Names and Functions of the Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Operation After Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Command M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing the Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Maintenance Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant Circuit Diagram of Centerthrough Coolant Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressed Air Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands in a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters (PMC Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DI/DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/Output Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/OutputInput . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

450 453

28.4

INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.4.1 28.4.2 28.4.3 28.4.4 28.4.5

457
457 457 457 458 459

28.5

OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.5.1 28.5.2 28.5.3

460
460 460 460

28.6

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.6.1 28.6.2 28.6.3 28.6.4 28.6.5 28.6.6

461
461 461 463 464 465 465

28.7

MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28.7.1 28.7.2

466
466 466

28.8

CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT AND COMPRESSED AIR . . . . . .

28.8.1 28.8.2

468
469 470

28.9

CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28.9.1 28.9.2 28.9.3 28.9.4 28.9.5 28.9.6 28.9.7 28.9.8 28.9.9 28.10.1 28.10.2 28.10.3

471
471 471 471 471 472 473 474 475 475

28.10 ELECTRIC CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER THROUGH COOLANT . . . . . . . . .

476
476 477 478

29.AI HIGHPRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/MODELER CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 30.HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
30.1 30.2 30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACCELERATION AND SERVO DELAY COMPENSATION (TYPE A/B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INPUT SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 482 483 483 484 485 486

c9

Table of Contents

B85014EN/01

31.HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

31.1 31.2 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CANNED CYCLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31.2.1 31.2.2 31.2.3 31.2.4 31.2.5 31.2.6 31.2.7 Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 through G83 Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retreat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SingleBlock Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to Initial Point/Point R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rapid Traverse Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

488 489
492 493 493 493 493 493 493

31.3 31.4 31.5

ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXAMPLE OF CYCLE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

494 495 496

32.TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

32.1 32.2 32.3 32.4 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 499 500 501

33.MACRO CALL USING G CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 34.SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
34.1 34.2 34.3 34.4 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 505 506 509

35.TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

35.1 35.2 35.3 35.4 35.5 35.6 35.7 35.8 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTERNAL INTERFACE SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE ROTATION DISABLE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOMATIC TURNOFF OPERATION OF THE TOUCH PROBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518

36.MANUAL GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

36.1 36.2 36.3 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATION OF THE MANUAL GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.3.1 36.3.2 36.3.3 36.3.4 Explanation of Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching Over to Manual Guide Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

520 521 522

522 524 526 527

c10

B85014EN/01

Table of Contents

36.3.5 36.3.6 36.3.7 36.3.8 36.3.9 36.3.10 36.3.11 36.3.12

Creation of NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Check (Graphic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert to NC Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy and Deleting of NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto and MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back Ground Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Cycle Function (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.12.1Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.12.2Creating a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.12.3Measurement Cycle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.12.4Drawing Function and NC Statement Conversion Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.3.12.5Output of Measurement Results to Custom Macro Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

529 557 560 563 568 571 574 576 576 577 586 586 586

V. MAINTENANCE
1. DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
1.1 DAILY CHECKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replenishing the Tank with Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting Cutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting Each Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Cut Scraps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting Each Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle Runin (for 15000min1 Specification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

592
592 592 593 593

1.2

WORK AT CLOSING TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4

594
594 596 596 597

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

2.1 LUBRICATING EACH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 Greasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Greasing and Oiling Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery Replacement Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

601
601 609 613

2.2 2.3 2.4

SPECIFIED BRANDS OF LUBRICANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2.1 2.3.1 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3

616
616

MAINTENANCE OF AC SPINDLE MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . REPLACING EXPENDABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

617
617

618
618 618 618

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621 4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . 630
5.1 5.2 5.3 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RESETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECKING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 632 633

c11

Table of Contents

B85014EN/01

5.4

REGISTERING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

634

6. RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

APPENDIXES
A. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 B.5 B.6 SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMENSIONS OF THE TABLE SURFACE AND T GROOVE (NOMINAL WIDTH: 14) . . . . . . DIMENSIONS OF THE INSIDE OF THE SPLASH GUARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMENSIONS OF THE SYSTEM AROUND THE COOLANT OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIMENSIONS OF THE END OF THE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIST COLLECTOR MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 650 653 656 657 658

C. G CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659 D. OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 E. STATUS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 F. ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
F.1 F.2 ERROR CODE DISPLAYED ON LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPINDLE AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F.2.1 F.2.2 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

669 727
727 732

F.3 F.4 F.5

POWER SUPPLY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

734 735 737

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744

G.1 G.2 OPERATOR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIAGNOS MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745 749

H. PMC PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753 I. RECOMMENDED ATA CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
J.1 J.2 EMBEDDED ETHERNET AND PCMCIA ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.2.1 J.2.2 J.2.3 J.2.4 FACTOLINK Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FOCAS1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DNC1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

775 776
776 776 778 779

c12

B85014EN/01

Table of Contents

J.2.5

Functional Differences between the Embedded Ethernet Function and the Ethernet Function Based on the Option Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Setting of the FACTOLINK Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.3.1.1 Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.3.1.2 J.3.1.3 J.3.1.4 FACTOLINK parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

780

J.3

SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.1

782
782 782 783 785 788 789 789 789 790 794 795 796 796 796 797 800 801 802 802

J.3.2

J.3.1.5 Configuring a large network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.3.2.1 Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.3.2.2 J.3.2.3 J.3.2.4 FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.3

J.3.2.5 Configuring a large network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.3.3.1 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.3.3.2 J.3.3.3 J.3.3.4 FTP file transfer parameter setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.3.4

J.3.3.5 Configuring a large network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Communication Parameter Input Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.4 J.5

SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

J.5.1 J.5.2 FACTOLINK Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FTP File Transfer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.5.2.1 Host file list display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J.5.2.2 J.5.2.3 J.5.2.4 J.5.2.5 J.5.2.6 J.5.2.7 Host file search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host file deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC program input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC program output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input/output of various types of data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and changing of the connection host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

810 812
812 813 813 816 816 817 818 819 826

J.6 J.7 J.8

EMBEDDED ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.8.1 J.8.2 J.8.3 J.8.4 Check Items Related to Connection with the HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the Setting of Each Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

828 830 836

836 836 837 838

J.9

ERROR MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J.9.1 J.9.2 J.9.3 J.9.4

841
841 841 842 842

J.10

GLOSSARY FOR ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

843

c13

I. OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

1. OUTLINE

OUTLINE

T14/21iCe series are vertical CNC drills capable of performing efficient simple milling in addition to drilling and rigid tapping.

1. OUTLINE

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

1.1
FEATURES

(1) Linear machining and arc machining High precision linear and arc milling at various angles can be done. Drilling and tapping can also be done. (2) High speed turret The turret permits shortcut random selection to enable highspeed tool changes. It is not necessary to consider tool interference because the spindle goes down independently. (3) Rigid tapping For rigid tapping in which the spindle and the Z axis are synchronously fed, a tap with a floating mechanism is not required. This enables precision tapping in a short time. (4) Abundant NC functions A variety of NC functions supporting various types of machining ranging from parts machining such as drilling and tapping to milling and model machining are provided. (5) Absoluteposition detecting system The absoluteposition detecting system is one of the standard features. Return to the reference position is not required after switching the power on (annual battery replacement is necessary). (6) Highly reliable The problems that conventionally occurred with pneumatic or hydraulic technology have been solved using electronic technology. As a result, reliability has been sufficiently enhanced and easy maintenance is assured. (7) Optimum spindle speed selection The spindle speed of the spindle motor can be changed over a wide range: 80 min1 to 8,000 min1 (150min1 to 15000min1 as option). The spindle speed is programmable at every 1 min1 and therefore the optimum spindle speed can be set. (8) High performance AC servo motor As the servo motors for the Xaxis, Yaxis, and Zaxis, AC servo motors are used. So, no maintenance including brush replacement is required. The rapid traverse rate along each axis is 48 m/min (Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis), so that waste time can be minimized when cutting is not performed. (9) Quick operation function A quick operation function beyond the operability of the conventional CNC machine tools is provided as standard. This function enables the operator to operate the machine as desired with the graphical screen and guidance. (10)Safety functions The safetyrelated functions of this machine comply with category 3 in accordance with the EN9541 European Safety Standard. This machine was manufactured in accordance with Appendix 1 of the 98/37/EC Machine Directive.

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

1. OUTLINE

1.2
USE OF THE MACHINE

The FANUC ROBODRILL T14/21iCe series machines are vertical drilling machines that perform cutting (such as drilling, tapping, and milling) under control of a CNC (computerized numerical controller). Do not use the FANUC ROBODRILL T14/21iCe series machines for any purpose other than stated above. The cutting power of the ROBODRILL varies with the workpiece type, cutter, coolant, and other factors. For details, refer to the applicable cutter or coolant operators manuals. The following table lists examples of machining with the ROBODRILL.
Workpiece Drill diameter (mm) Material Spindle speed S (min1) Feedrate F (mm/min) Coolant Load meter (%) S45C 20 HSS 398 80 No. 5 of JIS type 2 135 FC200 25 HSS 382 115 ADC12 30 HSS 637 255

No. 2 of JIS type 1 (diluted to 1:9) 140 140

Workpiece Tapping screw designation Pitch Spindle speed S(min1) Feedrate F (mm/min) Coolant Precision

S45C M16 2 298 596 No. 5 of JIS type 2

FC200 M20 2.5 264 660

ADC12 M24 3 219 657

No. 2 of JISW type 1 (diluted to 1:9) Qualified for JIS class 2

These values depend on the types and rigidity of tooling, cutters, jigs, and workpieces, the property and supply state of coolant, and so forth. The following table lists the specifications of the machines. (T14iCe series)
ITEM T14iCSe
Travel X- axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) Y- axis (Cross movement of saddle) Z- axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) Distance from table surface to spindle edge surface Distance from the front surface of the column to the center line of the spindle Table Area Load capacity Type Spindle Feedrate Spindle speed range Type of spindle taper hole Rapid traverse feedrate cutting feedrate 630 330mm 150kg (unifom load) 300mm 300 + 10mm 330mm 150 to 480mm 400mm 650mm 400mm 850mm 410mm

SPECIFICATIONS T14iCe
500mm 400mm

T14iCLe
700mm

200kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load) 80 to 8000min- 1 7/24 taper No. 30 (X, Y, Z) 48,000mm/min 1 to 15000mm/min

314mm slots with a space of 125mm

1. OUTLINE

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

ITEM T14iCSe
Turret Tool change system Type of tool shank Type of retension knob Tool storage capacity Maximum tool diameter

SPECIFICATIONS T14iCe T14iCLe

Turret type (spindle independent from turret) MAS BT30 MAS P30T- 1 (45 ) 14 Distance from taper gage line /max. diameter: 0 to 28mm /50mm 34 to 120mm /80mm 120 to 250mm /40mm] (80mm : in case 3kg tool mass) 200mm 250mm (Its depended on spec.) Random shortest path Max. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 15kg) or Max. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 22kg) Approx. 0.9 sec. or Approx. 1.4 sec. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR 5. 5 kW (10 min rating)/ 3. 7 kW (continuous rating) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL M8i X, Y, Z : M8i (2.0 kw) 200V AC + 10% to 15%, 3phase, 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220V AC +10% to 15%, 3phase, 60Hz 1Hz, "10kVA 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure) 0.15m3/min (150 /min) (at atmospheric pressure) 2236 10mm 995mm 2207mm Approx. 1650kg 1565mm 2027mm Approx. 2000kg 0.010mm/300mm 0.002mm 2115mm 2027mm Approx. 2100kg

Maximum tool length Method of tool selection Maximum tool mass

Tool changing time (tool to tool) Motor Spindle drive motor

Feed motors Power sources Electrical power supply

Compressed air supply Machine size Machine height Floor space Mass of machine with the control section Accuracy (measured in compliance with JIS B 6201) Positioning accuracy Repeatability

(T21iCe series)
ITEM T21iCSe
Travel X- axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) Y- axis (Cross movement of saddle) Z- axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) Distance from table surface to spindle edge surface Distance from the front surface of the column to the center line of the spindle Table Area Load capacity Type Spindle Feedrate Spindle speed range Type of spindle taper hole Rapid traverse feedrate cutting feedrate 630 330mm 150kg (unifom load) 300mm 300 + 10mm 330mm 150 to 480mm 400mm 650mm 400mm 850mm 410mm

SPECIFICATIONS T21iCe
500mm 400mm

T21iCLe
700mm

200kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load) 80 to 8000min- 1 7/24 taper No. 30 (X, Y, Z) 48,000mm/min 1 to 15000mm/min

314mm slots with a space of 125mm

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

1. OUTLINE

ITEM T21iCSe
Turret Tool change system Type of tool shank Type of retension knob Tool storage capacity Maximum tool diameter

SPECIFICATIONS T21iCe T21iCLe

Turret type (spindle independent from turret) MAS BT30 MAS P30T- 1 (45 ) 21 Distance from taper gage line /max. diameter: 0 to 28mm /50mm 34 to 120mm /80mm 120 to 250mm /40mm] (80mm : in case 3kg tool mass) 190mm 250mm*1 Random shortest path Max. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 23kg) or Max. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 23kg) Approx. 1.8 sec. or Approx. 2.4 sec. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR 5. 5 kW (10 min rating)/ 3. 7 kW (continuous rating) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL M8i X, Y, Z : M8i (2.0 kw) 200V AC + 10% to 15%, 3phase, 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220V AC +10% to 15%, 3phase, 60Hz 1Hz, "10kVA 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure) 0.15m3/min (150 /min) (at atmospheric pressure) 2236 10mm 995mm 2207mm Approx. 1650kg 1565mm 2027mm Approx. 2000kg 0.010mm/300mm 0.002mm 2115mm 2027mm Approx. 2100kg

Maximum tool length Method of tool selection Maximum tool mass

Tool changing time (cut to cut) Motor Spindle drive motor

Feed motors Power sources Electrical power supply

Compressed air supply Machine size Machine height Floor space Mass of machine with the control section Accuracy (measured in compliance with JIS B 6201)
*1

Positioning accuracy Repeatability

Its depended on spec.

Environmental conditions Ambient temperature Operating: 0_C to 45_C Storage or transportation: 20_C to 60_C Temperature drift 1.1_C/min or lower Humidity Usual: 75% or lower (relative humidity) Shortperiod: 95% or lower Vibration 5 m/s2 (0.5G) or lower Atmosphere No corrosive gas No flammable gas

1. OUTLINE

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

1.3
SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL

The equivalent continuous Aweighted average sound level measured on the shop floor where the machine is installed is 70 dB or lower. The following table lists the measurement conditions.
The following table lists the measurement conditions.
Item Program Tool Workpiece material Cutting depth Coolant Cycle time Measurement time O400 See the table below. S45C (15(l) 9.5(w) 3(d)cm) 1mm See the table below. 57s 57s Condition

Measurement conditions
Item Tool Tip Coolant Manufacturer SANDVIK SANDVIK Yushiro Model RA265.280 (with six teeth) SM30 Yushiroken EZ20

D Program used O400 G91G28Z0; G00G40G49G80G90; G54G28X0Y0Z0; M06T01; M03S800; G00X0Y0; G00G90G43Z1.H01; M08; G01G90Z1.F600; X250.; Y40.; X0; M05; G91M09; G28Z0G49; M02;

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

2. PART NAMES

PART NAMES

2. PART NAMES

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

2.1
MACHINE

Fig.2.1 (a) Inner view of Machine

10

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

2. PART NAMES

Fig.2.1 (b) Outer view of Machine

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

Spindle motor X axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) Y axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) Z axis servo motor (Serial pulse coder) Column Bed Table Saddle Leveling block Spindle head Turret support Turret

(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

Grip Tool Turret gear Spindle (MS) gear X axis telescopic cover Y axis telescopic cover (front side) Y axis slide cover Z axis takeup cover Splash guard Controller operators panel Controller rack

11

2. PART NAMES

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

2.2
CONTROLLER RACK
1 2 3 4

Fig.2.2 Inside of Controller rack

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Power supply Spindle amplifier Servo amplifier Connector panel

(5) (6) (7)

Backup battery for pulse coder Circuit breaker Power panel

12

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

2. PART NAMES

2.3
VIEW AND COMPONENTS OF THE OPERATORS PANEL

(3) Memory card slot (1) LCD

(2) Soft keys

(4) Power switches

(5) Operation keys

(8) Override (6) Manual pulse generator (7) Input protection key

(9) Cycle start feed hold

(11)RS232C interface

(10)Emergency stop button

13

3. OPERATORS PANEL

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

OPERATORS PANEL

10

8 9

13

16

15

17

Fig.3 (a) Standard type operators panel

14

20 1 2 11 12 2 18 19

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

3. OPERATORS PANEL

Fig.3 (b) Full keyboard type operators panel

15

3. OPERATORS PANEL

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

No. 1 2

Name Power switches Operation mode selection keys

Function These switches turn the control power on and off. (When an alarm is issued, you cannot sometimes turn off the power.) [MANUAL (HANDLE) key] Selects the mode that allows the manual pulse generator to be used to cause movement along each axis. [AUTO (MEMORY) key] Selects automatic operation (memory) mode. With the standard operators panel, this key is also used to select remote operation mode. [MENU (MDI) key] Selects MDI operation mode. When this key is pressed while QUICK screen is being displayed, MENU OPERATION screen appears. [EDIT key] Selects program editing (EDIT) mode. [(REF.POINT) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects reference position return mode. [(JOG) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects jog mode. [(REMOTE) key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects remote operation mode. [Spindle operation key] Turns and stops the spindle. [Spindle speed override keys] These keys change the spindle speed specified with the S function by 30 to 200%. Decrease : The spindle speed is decreased. 100% : The spindle speed specified with the S function is restored. Increase : The spindle speed is increased. (When the front door lock is released, the spindle override is invalid.) When this key is pressed when the LED of the MENU (MDI) key is on, a tool change to the adjacent tool on the right on the turret takes place. Turns coolant or cuttings air blow on and off. Releases the lock of the front door. After the lock is released, you can open the door. [Axis selection keys] In manual mode (reference position return, jog, or handle mode), these keys are used to select the target axis for movement and the movement direction. In reference position return and jog modes Movement is made only when the key is being pressed. In handle mode A target axis for movement is selected. [Handle magnification selection keys] In handle mode, these keys are used to select the amount of travel per handle feed unit.

Spindle operation key Spindle speed override keys

4 5 6 7

Tool change Coolant DOOR Axis selection keys

Handle magnification selection keys 8

Operation selection [SINGLE BLOCK key] keys Selects the function of executing one block in automatic operation then stopping automatic operation. [DRY RUN key] Selects the function that sets the rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate to the jog feed rate in automatic operation, ignoring the programmed F feedrate. [M01 STOP key] Selects the function that stops operation after executing a block containing M01 in a program. [/ SKIP key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects the function that suppresses the execution of blocks containing / in a program. [AUTO P.OFF key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Selects the function that turns off the power automatically when a program terminates or when an alarm is issued.

16

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

3. OPERATORS PANEL

No. 9 10 11 12

Name Rapid traverse override keys Alarm/status key QUICK/NC Key Alphabet key (ABC@@@Z)

Function These keys are used to select the rapid traverse rate. (The 50% key is provided only for the full keyboard type.) Displays information about alarms, operator messages, diagnosis, and so forth in a window. Switches the LCD display between QUICK screen and CNC screen. Turns on and off the alphabetical character input function using soft keys. When this key is set to ON, alphabetical characters are indicated in soft keys to allow you to enter alphabetical characters. (For the standard type operators panel only) [Page keys] Used to change pages and screens. [Cursor keys] Used to move the cursor. [Numeric keypad] Used to enter numeric values. [Alphabet keys] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Used to enter alphabetical characters. [Reset key] Used to, for example, release an alarm. [Input key] Used to enter data. [Cancel key] Cancels characters or numbers being entered. [Alter key] Replaces the portion indicated by the cursor with a new command during program editing on CNC screen. [Insert key] Inserts a new command after the command indicated by the cursor during program editing on CNC screen. [Delete key] Deletes the command indicated by the cursor during program editing on CNC screen. [Help key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Used to display the help screen of CNC screen. (You cannot use this key when QUICK screen is being displayed.) [Shift key] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Used to enter a character indicated in the lower right part of each address and numeric key. [Screen change keys] (provided for the full keyboard type only) Used to switch between screens within QUICK screen. <POS> Changes the screen display to a position indication screen. ABS, REL, ALL, MONITOR, etc. <PROG> Changes the screen display to a program indication screen. PROG, [MDI], FROPY, etc. <OFFSET/SETTING> Changes the screen display to an offset indication or setting screen. OFFSET, SETING, WORK, etc. <SYSTEM> Changes the screen display to a parameter or diagnosis screen. PARAMETER, STATUS, [PMC], etc. <MESSAGE> Changes the screen display to an alarm or operator message screen. Alarm, Diagnose, History, etc. <GRAPHIC> Changes the screen display to a graphics display. Used to operate each axis (X, Y, Z) of the machine manually (in handle mode).

13

MDI keys

14

Manual pulse generator

17

3. OPERATORS PANEL

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

No. 15

Name Cycle start/ feed hold

Function Automatic operation starts when you press the start button. During operation, the start button is turned on in green. When you press the stop button, the machine is placed in temporary halt state (feed hold state). In this state, the temporary stop button is turned on in red. [Feedrate override dial] The feedrate specified with the F function for an axis is changed by 0 to 200%. For the standard type operators panel, the feedrate in dry run operation can also be changed with this dial. [Jog override dial] (provided for the full keyboard type only) The feedrate in jog mode and dry run operation is changed. Used to stop machine movement in a moment in case of emergency. When this key is set to ON, editing and input of programs and data are disabled. Used to connect an external I/O device such as the Handy File. A memory card such as an ATA card is inserted into this slot.

16

Override

17 18 19 20

Emergency stop button Input protection key RS232C interface Memory card slot

18

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

4. BASIC OPERATIONS

BASIC OPERATIONS

19

4. BASIC OPERATIONS

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

4.1
SCREEN SWITCHING

The screens for the ROBODRILL are grouped into the following two types. CNC screen This is a typical FANUC Series 18iMB screen.

[Characteristics of the display] D The title bar is yellow. D The characters displayed on the right half of the title bar are large.

Fig.4.1 (a) CNC screen

QUICK screen This is specially developed for the ROBODRILL.

[Characteristics of the display] D The title bar is blue. D The current time is displayed on the right half of the title bar.

Fig.4.1 (b) QUICK screen

4.1.1
Switching between the QUICK Screen and CNC Screen

The QUICK screen and CNC screen are alternately displayed each time the QUICK/NC button is pressed.

4.1.2
CNC Screen Switching

The CNC screen is classified as one of the following: <POS> : Displays the current position. <PROG> : Enables you to edit and view programs. <OFFSET/SETTING>: Enables you to specify offset and workpiece coordinate data. <SYSTEM> : Enables you to set parameters. <MESSAGE> : Displays alarms and operator messages. <GRAPHIC> : Draws tool paths and animated graphics patterns. These screen groups can be selected as stated below:
20

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

4. BASIC OPERATIONS

(Operators panel of standard type) To select one of the following screen groups, press the numeral key labeled the corresponding screen group name, then press a page key.

(POS group)

(PROG group)

(OFFSET/SETTING group) + (SYSTEM group) or Switched to the respective screen group

(MESSAGE group)

(GRAPHIC group)

(Operators panel with a full keyboard) Press one of the following keys.

21

4. BASIC OPERATIONS

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

4.2
ENTERING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS

On the standardtype operators panel, soft keys are used to enter alphabetic characters. Press the key on the operators panel.

Soft keys labeled alphabetic characters appear, enabling alphabetic characters to be entered. Pressing the mode. key again cancels the alphabetic character entry

D On the QUICK screen, alphabetic character entry is available only to the functions that require entering alphabetic characters. D No alphabetic character entry is available on the GRAPHIC screen (such as the PATH GRAPHIC/SOLID GRAPHIC).

4.2.1
Arrangement of the Letter Keys
O G F

The letter keys are arranged in either the HALF pattern for program entry or the FULL pattern for comment entry. HALF pattern arrangement (switched using a soft key at either end).

ALTER

DELETE

FULL

ALTER

DELETE

This key switches the mode between FULL and HALF.

22

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

4. BASIC OPERATIONS

FULL pattern arrangement (switched using a soft key at either end).

SPACE

ALTER

DELETE

&

HALF

ALTER

DELETE

This key switches the mode between FULL and HALF.

23

5. TOOLS

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

TOOLS

The standard tools of the former Japan Machine Tool Builders Association (MAS4031982 BT30 P30T1) can be used. When you purchase tools, confirm the shape and dimensions by referring to the figure of the taper shank (MAS4031982 BT30) and the pull stud (MAS4031982 P30T1) of the Japan Machine Tool Builders Association standard shown below.

Fig.5 (a) Taper Shank

Fig.5 (b) Pull Stud

The standard tools of the German industrial standard (DIN 69871A30) can be used with the machine conforming to the DIN GRIP standard. Use the pull stud manufactured by FANUC (A2906056X801).
24

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

5. TOOLS

The shapes and the dimensions of the taper shank (DIN 69871A30) and the pull stud (A2906056X801) of the German industrial standard are shown in the figures below.

Details of the X portion

Fig.5 (c) Taper Shank

Fig.5 (d) Pull Stud

25

5. TOOLS

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

Centerthrough specification The shape and dimensions of pull studs that comply with the centerthrough specification are shown below.

O RING

Fig.5 (e) Pull Stud (MAS)

O RING

Fig.5 (f) Pull Stud (DIN)

26

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

5. TOOLS

Doubleplane bound center through spindle (NC5) specification The figures and dimensions of a taper shank and pull stud based on the doubleplane bound center through spindle (NC5) specification are shown below.

Fig.5 (g)

Taper shank

NOTE 1 The distance (0.1 to 0.15) between the 30.4 reference diameter and 46 end face is an adjustment value dedicated to the ROBODRILL.

Fig.5 (h)

Pull stud (without center through)

27

5. TOOLS

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

Fig.5 (i)

Pull stud (with center through)

In the T14/21iCe series, the maximum tool diameter, length, and weight are limited as listed below. Before operating the machine, check the dimensions and weight of the tool. (1) Maximum tool diameter
Length (mm) from the taper gauge surface 34 or less From 34 (exclusive) to 120 (inclusive) From 120 (exclusive) to 250 (inclusive) Maximum diameter (mm) 65 80 40

(2) Maximum tool length T14iCe/CLe

MACHINE SPLASH GUARD 1 door 2 doors HIGH COLUMN 100 mm 1 door 2 doors HIGH COLUMN 200 mm 1 door 2 doors HIGH COLUMN 300 mm 1 door 2 doors without Auto door 250mm 250mm 235mm 215mm 250mm 215mm 250mm 250mm with Auto door 250mm 250mm 235mm 215mm 235mm 215mm 235mm 215mm

STANDARD

28

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

5. TOOLS

T14iCSe 200mm T21iCe/CLe

Product T21iCe/CLe MACHINE SPG 1 door SPG 2 doors T21iCse HIGH COLUMN 0,100mm HIGH COLUMN 200mm Maximum tool length 250mm 215mm 190mm 90mm

(3) Maximum tool mass:

2 kg (total mass: 15 kg)/3 kg (total mass: 22 kg) When mounting a tool of 2 kg or more (up to 3 kg), set the tool mass to 3 kg. (From a viewpoint of safety, 3 kg is factoryset.) Keep relay K0.4 = 0 K0.4 = 1 3 kg setting 2 kg setting.

250 (Depend on specifications see Tables) 200 (T14iCSe) 190 (Depend on specifications see Tables) Fig.5 (j) Tool Limits

(T14iCe/CLe, T21iCe/CLe) (T21iCSe)

Be careful not to use tools that do not satisfy the dimensional restrictions above. Otherwise, the troubles listed below can occur. (1) A tool longer than the maximum tool length can interfere with the splash guard in turret turning. (2) When the maximum tool diameter is exceeded: * Rigid tapping may not be able to be performed normally. (3) When the maximum tool weight is exceeded: * Trouble can occur when the tool is changed. * If an excessively heavy tool is used, the temperature of the spindle bearing rises abnormally, reducing the life of the spindle bearing. (Setting the tool mass) (1) Specify the following PMC parameters: K00#4 = 0: Changes the tool mass to 3 kg.
29

5. TOOLS

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

K00#4 = 1: Changes the tool mass to 2 kg. NOTE Bit 4 of parameter K00 is set to 0 (tool mass of 3 kg) before shipment from the factory. (2) Turn the power OFF. (3) Turn the power ON. The following message appears on the screen. PARAMETER FOR TOOL MASS 3kg IS SET. ARE YOU SURE? or PARAMETER FOR TOOL MASS 2kg IS SET. ARE YOU SURE? (4) Click soft key [EXEC] or [CANCEL]. To automatically change the NC parameters related to the tool mass, click [EXEC]. To return bit 4 of parameter K00 to the previous value and cancel the changing of the NC parameters related to the tool mass, click [CANCEL]. (5) If [EXEC] is clicked in the above step, turn the power OFF and then ON again according to the guidance.

30

B85014EN/01

OUTLINE

6. JIGS

JIGS

Three Tshaped grooves with the nominal size of 14 mm are provided at intervals of 125 mm on the top surface of the table. (See Appendix B, DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE.) NOTE A maximum load of 200 kg (Max 150kg for T14iCSe and T21iCSe), including jigs and workpieces, can be put on the table. Avoid putting more on the table than the maximum load.

31

7. COOLANT

OUTLINE

B85014EN/01

COOLANT

The capacity of the coolant tank of the ROBODRILL T14/21iC series are approximately 100 or 200 litres. When watersoluble coolant is thinned with water, take every precaution so water does not drop on the machine or the NC unit. FANUC recommends the following coolants (cutting fluids).
Type Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. Oily SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. Mobil Oil Corp. Nisseki Mitsubishi IDEMITSU KOSAN CO. LTD. Watersoluble SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. MOBIL OIL CORPORATION Yusiro Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Brand UNICUT TG20 DAPHNE CUT AS25F SPEED SC22A Bakumaru 15J UNISOLUBLE HDM UNISOLUBLE HD DAPHNE MILCOOL SD DROMUS OIL EPL MOBIL MET 150 MOBIL MET 150 Yusiroken EZ20

NOTE On the ROBODRILL, nitrilebutadiene rubber (NBR) and fluorination rubber are used as sealant and protective materials. Do not use so strong coolant that will cause paint to peel off.

32

II. INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

CAUTIONS
The machine shall be moved or installed by the maintenance personnel.

Moving or installing the ROBODRILL requires understanding it in details. No person other than the maintenance personnel of the ROBODRILL shall move or install it. The term maintenance personnel refers to those people who have working knowledge about machinery and electricity for maintenance and have finished the maintenance course of the FA school or ROBOMACHINE school or who have equivalent knowledge and have been certified by the company they work for. Fork lift or crane operators in charge of moving the ROBODRILL shall have the relevant license.
To lift the machine, use a crane with an allowable load of at least 3 tons.

Do not use a crane, hook, or rope whose allowable load is below 3 tons to lift the machine. If the machine gets out of balance when lifted, put it down on the floor, and adjust the length of the hook and rope, then lift it again.
Place the machine on a flat, stable floor.

The floor on which the machine is installed must satisfy the following conditions: 1. Placing a load of 2.5 tons on the floor does not deform it or develop any other trouble. 2. The floor is completely flat, with no protuberance or hollow. 3. The floor surface is hard enough to withstand a pressure of 1.5 MPa (15 kgf/cm2), without being deformed. 4. The floor surface is smooth. 5. The floor will not deteriorate with time. 6. The floor will not deteriorate in regular use. If the floor does not meet any of the above conditions, it can develop a failure, making it impossible to make the most of the machine performance.
Allow a service clearance in an area where the machine is installed.

Illuminate in the shop floor with a sufficient brightness.

Working in a dark place can invite an incorrect operation, leading to an accident. The shop floor on which the machine is installed must be illuminated with at least 300 luxes. It is recommended that an optional intramachine lamp be installed.

35

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

Pay attention to how the mechanism is saved and packed.

When transporting the machine or leaving it unused for a long time, observe the following: 1. Fix the spindle head and table with packing materials. 2. Apply a rust inhibitor to the specified portions of the machine. 3. Fix the turret mechanism with nylon ties.
Firmly secure the spindle head and table with the packing materials before removing the Zaxis motor.

The Zaxis motor incorporates a brake. If the Zaxis motor is removed without the spindle head and table first being secured with the packing materials. therefore, the Zaxis will fall out.

36

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

1. CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

CHECKING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

(1) Power supply voltage, frequency (Hz), and power capacity (kVA) Check the following nameplate on the upper side of the NC rack:

JAPAN and export standard

If the value of the power supply voltage indicated on POWER SUPPLY V V in the nameplate is in the range of +10% to 15%, the power supply voltage is valid. (220V is valid for only 60Hz) (3 PHASE = three phases) If the frequency is 50 "1 or 60 "1 Hz, it is valid. (2) Ambient temperature In operation In storage or transportation (3) Temperature change Within 1.1 _C/min. (4) Humidity Normal Temporary : 75% or less (relative humidity) : 95% or less : 0 _C to 45 _C : 20 _C to 60 _C

(5) Compressed air supply 0.49 MPa, 150 N /min

37

2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE

38

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE

2.1
PREPARATION BEFORE TRANSPORTATION

Prepare for transporting the machine according to the following steps: (1) Remove the Yaxis telescopic cover (at the front). (2) Remove the coolant nozzle base at the bottom of the spindle head. (3) Move the table to the position indicated by the machine coordinates X=250(T14/21iCe)/350(T14/21iCLe)/150(T14/21iCSe), Y=300(T14(21)iCe, iCLe)/277(T14(21)iCSe). (4) Firmly secure the packing plate using the M12 tapped hole on the top rear of the table. Be careful not to damage the top of the table.

Fig.2.1 (a) Securing the Packing Plate (at the Table)

(5) Slowly lower the spindle head to the position where Z=282. Be careful not to hit the spindle head against the packing plate. (6) Check whether the position of the hole on the packing plate is aligned with that of the tapped hole for installing the coolant nozzle base at the bottom of the spindle head. If not, move the table slightly to make the adjustment. (7) After the hole position is aligned correctly, lower the spindle head until it touches the packing plate. (8) Turn off the power. (9) Fix the spindle head to the packing plate with an M12 30 bolt, spring washer, and plain washer.

Fig.2.1 (b) Securing the Packing Plate (at Spindle Head)

39

2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

(10)Secure the turret with the nylon band or equivalent.

Turret supprt

Turret Spring

Nylon band Bolt Turretcam Cam groove

Fig.2.1 (c) Securing the Turret

(11)Install two M30 eyebolts in the upper front of the bed and on top of the column.
M30 eyebolt

M30 eyebolts Fig.2.1 (d) Transportation status

NOTE Be sure to make the above preparations before transporting or lifting the machine.

40

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

2. TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE

2.2
TRANSPORTATION

Fig.2.2 Lift the machine

Three eyebolts and a rope or cable are used to lift the machine. NOTE 1 Use a rope or cable whose permissible load is 3000 kg or more. 2 Be very careful not to impact the machine when lifting it. That is, lift the machine slowly. 3 If the rope can directly touch the machine, insert cloth or wood between the rope and the machine to prevent the machine from being damaged.

41

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

42

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

3.1
INSTALLING LEVELING BOLTS AND BLOCKS
T14/21iCe

Position the attached leveling blocks under the four leveling bolts and slowly put the machine on the blocks. Set the nuts over the casting (bed).

Leveling bolt

Nut

Leveling block T14/21iCSe

T14/21iCLe

Fig.3.1 Mount the YC stand with the shown surface (surface with white resin) facing forward.

43

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

3.2
REMOVING THE EYEBOLTS FOR LIFTING THE MACHINE

Remove the two M30 eyebolts on the top front of the bed.

44

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

3.3
REMOVING THE PACKING PLATE

Untie the nylon band that secures the turret. Remove the packing plate according to the following steps: (1) Remove the bolts fixing the packing plate on the top of the table and at the bottom of the spindle head. (2) After turning on the power, slowly raise the spindle head and remove the packing plate. (See II3.4 for connecting the power supply.) (3) Remove three eye bolts.

45

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

3.4
CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY 3.4.1
Cabling and Phase Matching
Connect the power cable to the power distribution board. Then, connect the coolant to the terminals of the coolant motor (U.V.W.G.). Phase Matching Connect an input terminal block phase rotation meter as shown in Fig. 3.4.1 (a), and connect the power supply so that the phase rotation meter disk rotates clockwise.
To switchboard

Phase rotation meter Circuit breaker

Fig.3.4.1 (a) Connecting of Phase Rotation Meter

46

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

Fuses Fuses are located in the control unit cabinet as shown below. Confirm these fuses are not blown out.
Fuses (F1 to F5)

Fuses (F6)

Fig.3.4.1 (b) Locations of Fuses (1/5)

Fuses (1A)

Fig.3.4.1 (c) Locations of Fuses (2/5)

47

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

Fuses (3.2A) Fuses (2.0A) Fuses (1.0A)

Fuses (1A)

Fuses (1A)

Fig.3.4.1 (d) Locations of Fuses (3/5)

48

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

Rear side of LCD

CP1

FUSE

Fuses (5A) Fig.3.4.1 (e) Locations of Fuses (4/5)

Fuses (5A)

Fig.3.4.1 (f) Locations of Fuses (5/5)

49

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

3.4.2
Setting of Input Power Supply

Check the following items for each input power supply. Current values of thermal relay
Thermal Relay Coolant Flood coolant MCC1 MCC2 Set Value 1.8A (NOTE) 2.1A

NOTE Adjust the setting to the midpoint of 1.4 A and 2.2 A. (MCC1) Adjust the setting to the midpoint of 1.7 A and 2.6 A. (MCC2)

50

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

3.5
CONNECTING THE COMPRESSED AIR SUPPLY

Compressed air is used for spindle air blow and for opening and closing the automatic door in the ROBODRILL T14/21iCe series. Connect the compressed air supply satisfying the following specification with the IN port (PT 1/4 inch) of the filter regulator at the rear of splash guard. Specification: 490 kPa (5 kgf/cm2 of gauge pressure) 0.5 m3/min (for a machine with an automatic door opening +0.02 m3/min are added, respectively.)

51

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

Regulator

Pressure adjustment valve (to be pulled up and turned)

Top view Air supply inlet

Primary filter/regulator Pressure setting : 0.5MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.4MPa to 0.6MPa)

Pressure switch Pressure setting : 0.3MPa

Air sealing regulator Pressure setting : 0.04MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.03MPa to 0.05MPa)

Speed controller fully opened

Primary filter/regulator Pressure setting : 0.5MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.4MPa to 0.6MPa)

Rotaryunion regulator Pressure setting : 0.3MPa (Pressure range mark : 0.26MPa to 0.34MPa)

Pressure switch Pressure setting : 0.3MPa

Air sealing regulator Speed controlPressure setting : 0.04MPa ler fully (Pressure range mark : opened 0.03MPa to 0.05MPa)

52

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

3.6
REMOVAL OF CORROSION PREVENTIVE GREASE

The following parts are coated with corrosionpreventive grease for preventing them from being corroded during transportation. Remove the corrosionpreventive grease from these parts. D Rolling guides (LM guides) for X, Y, Z axis D Internal face of spindle taper part D Upper face of table D Turret rear side and spindle nose gears (After removing anticorrosive grease, apply lubricating grease. Refer to V2.1.1).

53

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

3.7
MOUNTING A ZAXIS MOTOR AT MACHINE INSTALLATION

The ROBODRILL -T14/21iCe may be shipped with its Z-axis motor dismounted. In this case, the Z-axis motor must be mounted so that the factory-set machine zero point is reestablished correctly when the machine is installed. To achieve this, follow the procedure below. (1) Turn off the power to the machine, or check that the power to the machine is already off. (2) Remove the cover from the Zaxis housing. (These items are packaged separately when shipped.) (3) Wipe off any rust inhibitor grease from the coupling. (4) After making sure that the motor shaft is provided with a key, place the servo motor on the housing with the motor shaft key aligned to the key groove of the coupling.

Coupling

Retaining screw Tightening torque : 1.4KN (145kg.cm)

(5) As shown below, after making sure that the motor connector is on the lefthand side of the machine as viewed from the front of the machine, tighten the motor mounting bolts. If the motor and housing mounting bolt holes are not in line, align them by rotating the motor manually with a relatively strong force.

54

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

(6) Fasten the coupling retaining bolts on the motor shaft side to a specified torque (1.4 kN or 145 kg.cm). If the bolts are in such a phase that tightening is impossible, turn on the power and move the Zaxis manually to put them in a phase that allows tightening, then tighten them. (Do not perform automatic operation with the bolts for the coupling loose.) (7) Connect the three Z-axis motor cables. (8) Mount the Z-axis housing cover, then tighten the screws. (9) After turning on the power, make a reference position return.

Cover

NOTE 1 The motor grid position used as the reference for the zero point varies from one servo motor to another. If a servo motor is mounted in other than its original machine, the machine zero point will shift, causing abnormal machine operation. To avoid this, motors must be mounted only on the machine with which they are supplied. 2 After motor installation, an alarm is issued to request origin return when the power is turned on. For an explanation of how to perform origin return, see Section V3.

55

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

3.8
LEVEL ADJUSTING

After removing the devices for transportation, level the machine tool. (1) Turn on the power and move the table to the middle of X and Yaxis stroke. (2) After loosening fixing nuts, adjust the leveling bolts to a suitable length. (3) Adjust for level by the four leveling bolts by turns to within 0.04 mm/m using the 150 mm JIS first class level. Finally, secure the leveling bolts with the fixing nuts. (4) Confirm that level is maintained, to within 0.04 mm/m at the stroke end of the positive and negative sides of the Y axis.

Fig.3.8 Leveling

56

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

3.9
MOUNTING TOOLS

(1) Attach one arbor to the grip through the notch of the cover at the right rear of the turret. (2) Press the (3) Press the key on the MDI operators panel. key, which is one of the rapid traverse selection

buttons on the machine operators panel. (4) Press the key on the machine operators panel. Change cutting

tools once under noload running. Then, check whether tools were changed smoothly. If not, prepare to press the EMERGENCY STOP key immediately. (5) Attach one arbor to the grip through the notch. (6) Press the key.

Check whether the arbor and the spindle head are firmly clamped together. NOTE If the arbor is not correctly attached to the grip, a failure such as tool dropping occurs. If tools can be changed smoothly, any of the rapid traverse selection buttons may be pressed on the machine operators panel. (7) After repeating the same procedure, check whether fourteen and twentyone arbors are gripped in the turret. (8) Turn off the power. NOTE 1 The turret is finely adjusted. Do not carelessly grab or apply load to the turret. 2 The weight of an arbor to be installed in the turret must be 2 kg max. The total weight of the fourteen arbors must not exceed 15 kg and 23kg. When mounting a tool of 2 kg or more (up to 3 kg), set the tool mass to 3 kg. The tool mass is factoryset to 3 kg to assure operator safety. 3 Take into consideration the weight of each arbor when installing the arbors so that the turret is not out of balance in weight.

57

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

3.10
INSTALLING THE COOLANT UNIT

After installing the machine, install the coolant unit (and floodcoolant unit) according to the following steps: (1) Install the coolant tank at the back of the machine, or under the NC rack. The coolant tank must, however, be installed so that the pump is positioned at the right of the machine, when viewing the machine from the front. (2) Install the nozzle at the bottom of the spindle head. (3) Connect the pump to the nozzle, and the pump to the pipe of the floodcoolant unit. (4) Connect the controller rack to the pump terminal with the coolant cable. NOTE Insulate the terminals using vinyl caps.

Pump for coolant unit

Pump for flood coolant unit

Fig.3.10 (a)

58

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

Fig.3.10 (b)

59

3. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

(5) Press the coolant button. Check that the pump rotates in the direction shown by the arrow when viewing the pump from the window on the top of the pump. Then stop the rotation of the pump.
Direction of rotation

Fig.3.10 (c) Pump and Surrounding Area

(6) Supply the coolant to the coolant tank.

60

B85014EN/01

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

3.11
YAXIS TELESCOPIC COVER (YCOVER F)
(1) Mount the YC stand with the shown surface (surface with white resin) facing forward. (2) Mount a telescopic cover. Temporarily tighten the flange securing bolts. (3) Move the telescopic cover, along the Yaxis toward you, as much as possible. Push in the free covers as far as possible, so that the telescopic cover does not push the stopper vertically. Then, tighten the flange securing bolts.
Cover fixed to the saddle

Saddle Flange securing bolt

Free cover Head

Fig.3.11

61

4. PACKING

INSTALLATION

B85014EN/01

PACKING

When the machine is moved, transported, or lifted, the machine must be packed to prevent the machine from being impacted. Pack the machine according to the following steps: (1) Sufficiently clean the top of the table and the inside of the splash guard so that cuttings or other foreign matter do not remain in the machine. (2) Remove the tools from the turret. (3) See II2.1 when packing the machine.

62

III. ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

1. OPERATING POSITIONS

OPERATING POSITIONS

The following figure shows the working places for the T14/21iCe series.
Front door Coolant unit Operators panel

Left Fixed cover

Right Fixed cover

Table Internal Light

65

1. OPERATING POSITIONS

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

The following table lists the operating positions and working places.
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Operation Workpiece change and jig setting Program editing and data input/output Power on/off Tool change Chip cleaning Coolant replenishment Fuse replacement Air pressure supplying and shutting off Greasing Lubricant replenishment for the lubrication unit Fluorescent lamp replacement Spindle motor cleaning Operating position Working place Viewed from A A A,B A

Machine front section Operators panel and table top Machine front section Operators panel Machine front/rear section Machine front/rear section Machine rear section Machine rear section Machine rear section Machine front section/both sides Machine rear section Operators panel and controller cabinet rear section

Machine front section Turret

Inside the splash guard and coolant unit A,B Coolant unit Inside the controller cabinet Air unit Inside the splash guard Lubrication unit B B B A,C,D B A A

Machine front section Intramachine lamp Machine front section Spindle motor

Before greasing, turn off the power, and remove the fixed side covers and the protective cover. Do not perform operation at a location other than the operation locations described above. Working in the following places, for example, is likely to be hazardous because of a bad working condition or unstable footing. D Inside the machine D On top of the controller cabinet D On top of the column D On top of the splash guard D On top of the turret support

66

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF

SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF

67

2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

2.1
SWITCHING POWER ON

(1) Turn the handle of the circuit breaker on the control unit rack until it clicks in the ON position. (Check that the door of the control unit rack is closed. If it is open, close it before turning the breaker handle to the ON position.)

Fig.2.1 Turning the Breaker On

(2) Turn the power on by pressing the POWER ON button on the operators panel.

(3) Several seconds after switching the power on, the NOT READY display on the CRT screen disappears, and the machine is ready for operation. (4) Confirm that the fan motor for ventilation of the control unit rack running. NOTE When the power is switched on, do not simultaneously press any button (on the MDI panel or the machine operators panel) other than the POWER ON button.

68

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

2. SWITCHING POWER ON AND OFF

2.2
SWITCHING POWER OFF

(1) Confirm that the lamp of the CYCLE START button on the operators panel is not lit.

Confirm this lamp is off.

(2) Confirm that no movable parts of the machine are moving. (3) If any input/output device is connected, turn it off. (4) Press the POWER OFF button.

(5) Turn the circuitbreaker handle on the door of the control unit rack to the OFF position.

Fig.2.2 Turning the Breaker Off

NOTE 1 If the door of the control unit rack is not locked, the door opens when the breaker handle is fully turned to the OFF side. Normally, the door should be locked. 2 When the power is switched off, do not simultaneously press any key (on the MDI panel or the machine operators panel) other than the POWER OFF key. 3 An automatic power disconnect function is available. It turns the power off automatically at the end of a program (M30). (See Section IV17.)

69

3. EMERGENCY STOP

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

EMERGENCY STOP

This button is used to instantly stop the movement of the machine at the time of an emergency. If the machine shows unexpected operation, all operation of the machine can be stopped by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button. When the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, the following events occur: (a) All moving axes stop immediately. (b) The rotating spindle stops immediately. Coolant stops its operation. And all the automatic operation nor manual operation become unoperable state. (c) The control unit is reset and the machine alarm status is assumed. (d) The Z axis slightly descends. If the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed while tool change is in progress, the following takes place depending on the status of operation: (a) If the spindle orientation is in progress, the spindle stops immediately. (b) If the Z axis is ascending, the Z axis stops moving immediately and the spindle is freed from the controlled status. (c) If the turret is rotating, it stops quickly. (d) If the Z axis is descending, the Z axis stops moving immediately and the spindle is freed from the controlled status. (See Section V4 for recovering the machine after pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button during the tool change job.)

Fig.3 EMERGENCY STOP Button

The EMERGENCY STOP button is locked when it is pressed. It is unlocked when it is turned clockwise. NOTE 1 The emergency stop operation should be done before anything else when danger arises. Be prepared to press the button whenever necessary. 2 The emergency stop causes electric current to the motors to be cut off. 3 Before releasing the emergency stop, remove the cause of the problem.

70

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR

OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR

The FANUC ROBODRILL T14/21iCe series monitors the state of the splashguard front door (safety door), using a controller. To assure safe use of the machine, there are restrictions on the operation of the machine with the safety door open. During machine operation, unlocking the safety door (pressing the <DOOR> key on the operators panel) suspends the operation. This function is known as a splashguard door interlock function.
Electromagnetic lock swich

Front door

T14(21)iCe/iCLe
Electromagnetic lock swich

Front door

T14/21iCSe
71

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

4.1
LOCKING THE SAFETY DOOR

The safety door is equipped with a lock mechanism, which usually prevents the door from opening. Performing either of the following steps unlocks the door, allowing you to open it. D Press the <DOOR> key. D Issue M02 or M30 (if bit 6 of PMC parameter K12 = 1). When the safety door is unlocked, the <DOOR> key LED on the operators panel lights. Performing the following steps locks the safety door. When the safety door is open: D Close the safety door. When the safety door is closed (but not locked): D Press the <DOOR> key on the operators panel. When the safety door is locked, the <DOOR> key LED on the operators panel goes off. (If the safety door is released immediately before it is completely closed, the operator message 2004 DOOR IS UNLOCKED FORCIBLY is displayed. This message, however, does not indicate a failure.) In the following cases, the safety door cannot be unlocked. D Within about 20 seconds after the power is turned on. D When the spindle or an axis is moving. D When an alarm occurs for the spindle or an axis, and safety cannot be confirmed.

72

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR

4.2
RESTRICTIONS ON THE OPERATION OF THE MACHINE WITH THE SAFETY DOOR OPEN

The following restrictions are placed on the operation of the machine with the safety door open. 1) Automatic operation is impossible. 2) MDI operation is impossible. 3) No coolant can be supplied. However, an air blow is output even when the safety door is open. 4) Tool exchange is impossible. 5) There are speed limits to manual operation. Only the following operations are possible. D Spindle rotation of 100 min1 or less (Machines designed to the CE marking specification are excluded.) D Manual X, Y, and Zaxis movement of 2 m/min or less D Manual additional axis movement of 700 degrees/min or less D Manual handle feed 6) During manual operation with the safety door open: D If the mode is switched, the spindle and each axis stop. D When the safety door is closed, the spindle and each axis stop.

73

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

4.3
IF THE SAFETY DOOR IS UNLOCKED DURING OPERATION

When the safety door is locked (closed), unlocking it (pressing the <DOOR> button on the operators panel) stops the machine in the sequence stated below. 1) The spindle and axes are decelerated to a stop by effecting feed hold. 2) If tool change is under way, the machine is stopped after the tool change is completed. 3) Coolant and air blow output operations stop. 4) If rigid tapping is under way, after the drill bit reaches the hole bottom or R point, the spindle and axes are decelerated to a stop with the rigid mode retained. 5) If dwelling is under way, the dwelling is brought to a pause. 6) If spindle orientation is under way, the machine is stopped after the orientation is finished. To resume automatic operation, follow the steps below. 1) Close the safety door without doing anything else.(Closing the door locks it automatically.) If the door is closed but not locked, press the DOOR button on the operators panel. 2) If the spindle was rotating when the safety door was opened, press the spindle rotation button during the manual mode to cause the spindle to start rotating. (If the spindle is not started to rotate, operator message No. 2009 will be displayed when the start button is pressed, in which case it is impossible to resume automatic operation.) 3) If coolant and air blow output operations are performed, press the coolant button then perform another coolant output operation. (If the coolant button is not pressed, automatic operation is resumed with no coolant supplied when the start button is pressed.) 4) Select the operation mode, and press the start button.

74

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR

4.4
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOOR WHEN THE POWER IS OFF
(1) To open the door when the power is off, use the LOCK/UNLOCK key. (2) When the power is on, do not use the LOCK/UNLOCK key to open the door. If you open the door with the unlock key, the message 2004 DOOR IS UNLOCKED FORCIBLY is displayed. (3) When the power is off, no operator is allowed to open the door. (4) If you need to open the door when the power is off, ask the maintenance personnel. (5) To open the door when the power is off, the maintenance personnel must use the LOCK/UNLOCK key, which is managed by the sector in charge of maintenance. Do no leave the key attached to the door.
KEY

Electromagnetic lock swich

Unlocked state

Locked state

75

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

4.5
SWITCHING OF SAFETY DOOR LOCK CONTROL
PMC parameter K11.7 Setting *0 1 K12.6 0 *1

A machine operation related to the locking/unlocking of the safety door can be selected. (1) Safety door control when machining ends Whether to unlock the safety door when machining ends can be selected.
Function

When M00/M01 is specified, the safety door is not unlocked. When M00/M01 is specified, the safety door is unlocked. When M02/M30 is specified, the safety door is not unlocked. When M02/M30 is specified, the safety door is unlocked.

The settings marked with * are factory settings. When an automatic door (option) is mounted, these parameters are ignored (assumed to be set to 0). (2) Safety door control in singleblock operation Whether to unlock the safety door automatically when operation stops in the singleblock operation mode can be selected.
PMC parameter K11.1 Setting *0 1 T82 (No.42) *2000(ms) Function The safety door is not unlocked when operation stops in the singleblock operation mode. The safety door is unlocked when operation stops in the singleblock operation mode. Wait time from the stop of operation in the singleblock operation mode until the safety door is unlocked

The settings marked with * are factory settings. (3) General safety door control Whether the safety door is automatically unlocked when operation stops in the singleblock operation mode can be selected.
PMC parameter K12.7 Setting *0 Function S The safety door is not unlocked when the power is turned on. S The safety door is locked when the safety door is closed. S The safety door is not locked when automatic operation/MDI operation is started. S The safety door is not unlocked after a tool change is made using the tool change button on the operators panel. 1 S The door is unlocked when the power is turned on. S The door is not locked even when the safety door is closed. S The safety door is locked when automatic operation/MDI operation is started. S The safety door is unlocked after a tool change is made using the tool change button on the operators panel.

The settings marked with * are factory settings.

76

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

4. OPENING/CLOSING THE SPLASHGUARD DOOR

4.6
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Before opening the safety door, make sure that the Zaxis does not come down. The Zaxis (spindle head) comes down once in a while because of the Zaxis brake failing to work. Before opening the safety door, make sure that the Zaxis does not come down. When the safety door is open, be careful that the Zaxis may come down. During maintenance underneath the Zaxis, place a wooden block between the table and spindle head so that the Zaxis will not come down even if the brake fails to work. Be careful when opening the safety door with the power switched off. Before opening the safety door with the power switched off, make sure that the Zaxis (spindle head) does not come down.

77

5. MOUNTING TOOLS

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

MOUNTING TOOLS

Confirm that all cutters to be used are firmly held on the tools and that the cutters have no abnormal wear or chips. The used tools must not exceed the maximum tool diameter, the maximum tool length, or the maximum tool weight. For details of the tools that may be used and for the installation of tools, see Section I3, TOOLS. Install each tool by pushing it into the respective grip until it stops.

After mounting the tools, check whether they are firmly installed. Install the tools so that they are welldistributed over the turret, and so that there is no gross imbalance of weight.

78

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

6. MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES

MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES

To fix the jigs on the table, the Tbolt having the nominal diameter of 14 mm (as specified in JIS B 1166) or the Tnut having the nominal diameter of 14 mm (as specified in JIS B 1167) can be used.

Using a Tbolt

Using a Tnut

Before starting automatic running, confirm the following: (a) Confirm that the jigs are firmly fixed on the table. (b) Confirm that the workpieces are firmly fixed on the jigs. Especially, when an air cylinder jig is used, confirm that the necessary air pressure is obtained. NOTE 1 The maximum load capacity of the T14(21)iCe/iCLe table is 250 kg and of the T14/21iCSe table is 150 kg. 2 When the load to be placed on the table weights 100 kg or more, change the setting of permissible mass of workpiece to more than 100 kg on the QUICK screen. If operation is continued with less than 100 kg set, a servo alarm may be generated.

79

6. MOUNTING JIGS AND WORKPIECES

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Set table load

80

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

7. COOLANT SUPPLY

COOLANT SUPPLY

Check that the amount of coolant is sufficient. If the amount of coolant is insufficient, add some in the manner shown below:

Some water soluble coolants solidify when the stock solution is put into water or coolant solution. When water soluble coolant is used, use another container to thin the stock solution well before pouring it into the tank. If the coolant is water soluble, a substantial portion of coolant reduction is caused by the evaporation of water. If no degradation of quality is noticed, only adding water may be necessary. NOTE Do not spill water into the splash guard. Water can cause corrosion.

81

8. PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION]

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

PREPARING PROGRAMS [CNC OPERATION]

Call the program according to the following procedure.

Press to select [CNC operation].

(1) Press the mode selection key operation mode (MEM). (2) Press screen. and

to put the machine in the

in the stated sequence to select the program

(3) Call the program by specifying its program number. Example) To call O0010, press and in the stated

sequence to select the soft key O search on the screen. Program O0010 will be called. NOTE If O0010 is not found, an alarm is issued. Press the reset key and enter the program number again. This is the end of preparation for automatic operation.

82

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

9. TRIAL RUN

TRIAL RUN

The following functions can be used for trial run. (a) SINGLE BLOCK Single block is the function that executes one block of the program each time the CYCLE START button is pressed. (1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key to set the single block.

One block of the program is executed and the machine tool stops. When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the next block is executed and the machine tool stops. To release the single block mode press the SINGL BLOCK key again. NOTE 1 For G28 and G29, after the single block is executed, the machine tool stops even during machining. 2 The single block stop point in a canned cycle is any of the end point 1, 2, or 6 in the figure shown below.
1

Rapid traverse Cutting feed 4

3 For a tool change sequence, the machine tool stops at the specified point and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.

83

9. TRIAL RUN

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(b) DRY RUN When dry run is effected, the Ffunction specified in the program is ignored and the feedrate is set to the maximum jog feedrate at rapid traverse or cutting feed command.

Dry run key

NOTE 1 During tool change operation, the dry run function cannot be turned on/off. 2 The rapid traverse rate can be held as it is by changing the sixth bit (RDRN) of parameter 1401 from 1 to 0. For details, refer to the NC Operators Manual. (c) MACHINE LOCK By making the machine lock on, the machine tool can be displayed as if it were moving although it is not. The display changes momentarily at the specified speed. This operation support function is used for program check. To switch machine lock, operate with the quick screen SEQ. SELECTION. NOTE 1 Even if the G27 or G28 command is executed, the reference position LED (HOME) does not light because the machine tool does not move to the reference position. 2 All M and S functions except M06 (tool change command) are executed. 3 After executing a machine lock operation, be sure to turn the power off then back on.

84

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

9. TRIAL RUN

(d) Z AXIS LOCK When the Z AXIS LOCK is on, only the Z axis enters the machine lock status. This Z axis lock is useful in checking the program contents by drawing the axis movement with a ballpoint pen. To switch Z axis lock, operate with the quick screen SEQ. SELECTION. NOTE 1 Even when the G27 or G28 command is executed, the reference position lamp does not light because the machine tool does not move to the reference position. 2 The Mfunction and the Sfunction are executed. (Only the tool change command, M06, is not executed.) 3 After executing a Zaxis lock operation, be sure to turn the power off then back on. (e) RAPID TRAVERSE RATE OVERRIDE

An override of 100%, 25%, or LOW can be applied. If an override of 25% is applied when the rapid traverse rate is 48 m/min, the rapid traverse rate becomes about 12 m/min. When an override of LOW is applied, the fixed rapid traverse rate 400 mm/min is used. A rapid traverse command for applying this override is as follows: (1) Rapid traverse by G00 (2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle (3) Rapid traverse at G27, G28, or G29 (4) Manual rapid traverse (5) Rapid traverse for manual return to the reference position (6) Rapid traverse in tool change sequence The following operations are related to the trial run: (For details of each operation, see Section III3, EMERGENCY STOP and Section IV5.4, Settings and Operations of Automatic Running.) (a) CYCLE START Operation is started by pressing the CYCLE START button. When the CYCLE START button is pressed in the feed hold mode, operation is restarted.

CYCLE START button

(b) FEED HOLD

85

9. TRIAL RUN

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, traverse of the axes stops during traverse. For restart, press the CYCLE START button. The status of stopping by the feed hold function is called feed hold status.)

FEED HOLD button

(c) RESET Automatic running is suspended by pressing the <RESET> key. The <RESET> key is used for other purposes, such as releasing the alarm.

<RESET> key

Trial run is performed using the functions described above. Generally, the dry run function need not be used when a proven machining program is used. Dry run is useful for checking that the F values in the program are appropriate or for conducting a trial run to check the operation of a program that is used for the first time. The following is the description of an example of a normal trial run: (1) Show the program screen in the AUTO mode, and call the program to be used.

+
Memory mode button Program screen

Number input + [O.SRH] Calling a program

(2) Enable the single block function and apply rapid traverse override 25%.

Single block enabled

Rapid traverse feedrate override 25%

(3) Press the CYCLE START button as necessary, and check each operation of the program. (If you encounter an unexpected operation, immediately press the FEED HOLD button.)
86

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

9. TRIAL RUN

CYCLE START button

FEED HOLD button

(4) At a position where the workpiece and the tool are close to each other, set the rapid traverse override to LOW.

Rapid traverse override LOW

(5) Stop operation by pressing the FEED HOLD button just before the workpiece and the tool contact each other. Check the depth of the cut, the workpiece coordinate system, the cutter compensation in the program, and the remaining traverse amount of the current block that is displayed on the program check screen.

Check the depth of cut, remaining traverse amount, etc.

(6) Confirm that the machining status is not abnormal in the machining block. (7) When a series of machining checks have been finished and the program has been executed, the trial run ends. (8) Disable the single block function, apply the 100% rapid traverse feedrate override, and perform regular operation.

Single block disabled

100% rapid traverse override

87

10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

10

AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

Machine operation that follows the program is called automatic running. The starting, stopping, and restarting procedure of automatic running is described in this section. (For details of each operation, see Section IV5, AUTOMATIC RUNNING.)

88

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

10.1
STARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING

(1) Show the program screen in the memory mode and call the program to be used.

+
Memory mode button Program screen

Number input + [O.SRH] Calling a program

(2) Press the CYCLE START button.

When the CYCLE START button is pressed, automatic running starts, and the CYCLE START lamp lights.

89

10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

10.2
STOPPING AUTOMATIC RUNNING

The feed hold function or the single block function stops automatic running. (a) Stop by feed hold function

When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, automatic running stops, and the FEED HOLD lamp lights. At the same time, the CYCLE START lamp goes off. (b) Stop by single block function

When the single block function is enabled, the machine atops after executing one block of the program. When the CYCLE START button is pressed again, the machine stops after executing another block.

90

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

10. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

10.3
RESTARTING AUTOMATIC RUNNING

Press the CYCLE START button again to restart automatic running.

When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the automatic running restarts, and the CYCLE START lamp lights. At the same time, the FEED HOLD lamp goes off.

91

11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

11

POWER SHUTOFF METHODS

92

B85014EN/01

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS

11.1
AIR SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD

Removing the hose from the supply inlet or closing the regulator pressure adjustment valve shuts off the air supply.

Regulator

Pressure adjustment valve (to be pulled up and turned)

Top view Air supply inlet

Compressed air is used as a spindle taper air blower. The residual pressure can be released by closing the regulator pressure adjustment valve.

93

11. POWER SHUTOFF METHODS

ROUTINE OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

11.2
ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF METHOD

Setting the main circuit breaker handle on the rear of the machine shuts off all electric power supplies on the secondary side of the circuit breaker. Note that the power on the primary side remains live. Also keep in mind that the following units may be connected to the primary side of the main circuit breaker. 1. External power supply transformer (if provided) 2. Nonstandard peripheral unit (if installed)
Controller rack

94

IV. DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

QUICK SCREEN

97

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.1
OVERVIEW

QUICK SCREEN is the exclusive screen to ROBODRILL. By using QUICK SCREEN, it is possible to operate the machine and to create a machining program even if a operator is not used to CNC operation. And a operator who is used to CNC operation well, too, can perform various operations by using QUICK SCREEN easily.

98

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

1.2
CONSTITUTION OF QUICK SCREEN 1.2.1
Overview
QUICK SCREEN is constituted as follows.

11: COORDINATES/OFFSET

12: DATA I/O SET UP 13: TOOL LIFE

14: PALLET SETTING

(Note 1)

21: AUTOMATIC OPERATION

1: MENU OPERATION 2: MENU OPERATION

22: QUICK C. A. P.

(Note 2)

23: QUICK EDITOR

(Note 3)

24: COUNTER

31: SEQ. SELECTION

MAINTENANCE

32: MAINTENANCE SETTING

33: DIAGNOSE / ALARM

NOTE 1 Option 2 For conversational programming screens, see Section 13, QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING and Section 36, MANUAL GUIDE in Part IV. 3 A detailed explanation is provided in manual of Appendix IV12. QUICK EDTIOR.

99

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.2.2
Descriptions of Screen Displays
(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(9)

(7)

(8)

(10)

(1) Screen name The number and name of the currently selected QUICK SCREEN are displayed. (2) Selected program number The number of the currently selected program is displayed. (3) Current time The current date and time are displayed. (4) Cursor The selected entry item is indicated. The cursor is moved using the cursor keys on the operators panel. (5) Display of an entered value or operation guidance message The data entered from the operators panel is displayed. If an entered value or selected soft key is invalid, a guidance message is displayed. (6) Display of maximum and minimum values A range of values that can be entered to an item where the cursor is set is indicated. (7) Screen switching soft keys These soft keys are used to select a QUICK SCREEN. (8) Function selection soft keys These soft keys are used to select a function on an individual screen. (9) Screen group display soft key This soft key is used to display a screen group name at (7) when the display is switched to the screen of a different group (for example, from COORDINATES SCREEN SET UP group) to AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN OPERATION group.
100

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

(10)Function selection switching soft key This soft key is used to switch functions displayed on the function selection soft keys (8). It is used if a screen has many functions. (This soft key is usable when it has a triangle mark.)

1.2.3
Screen Switching Methods

The following three methods can be used for QUICK SCREEN switching: D Soft keys D Screen number and PAGE key D <MENU> (<MDI>) key

1.2.3.1
Soft Keytriggered Screen Switching

The leftside six soft keys are used for screen switching. [Example: Switching from the 11:COORDINATES/OFFSET SCREEN to the 23:QUICK EDITOR SCREEN]

PRESS

Screen group names are displayed on the respective screen switching soft keys.

PRESS

The menu of OPERATION group is displayed on SOFTKEYS for screen change.

PRESS

The QUICK EDITOR SCREEN is displayed.

1.2.3.2
Screen Number and PAGE Key Triggered Screen Switching

Numeral and page (previous or next page) keys are used for screen switching. [Example Switching to the 21:AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN] Click the <2>, <1>, and <PAGE key> in the stated sequence, because the screen number of the AUTOMATIC OPERATION SCREEN is 21.
101

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.2.3.3
MENU OPERATION Keytriggered Screen Switching

In addition to the methods described above, a special key can be used to display the MENU OPERATION SCREEN; no other screens can be displayed using a special key. When a QUICK SCREEN is displayed, pressing the <MENU> (<MDI>) key on the operators panel displays the MENU OPERATION SCREEN.

102

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

1.3
EXPLANATION OF EACH SCREEN 1.3.1
Menu Screen
The constitution of QUICK SCREEN is displayed. The position of each screen is seen by displaying this screen. (This screen is displayed by pressing 1 and PAGE KEY (Y or B).)
(1) (2)

Item 1 2 SCREEN GROUP NAME AND NUMBER OF EACH SCREEN

Contents QUICK SCREEN is classified into three groups, i. e. SET UP, OPERATION, and MAINTENANCE. The number and name of the screen in each group are displayed.

103

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.3.2
Menu Operation

This screen is used to perform one block running by conversational operations. (Correspondence to MDI running on CNC SCREEN.) It is possible to run the machine tool by inputting data in accordance with instructions easily even if a operator is not used to CNC operation.

Item 1 TOOL CHANGE

Contents This function is used to change a tool for another by conversational operations. The guidance is displayed on screen. Input data and press CYCLE START button in accordance with the instructions. Then TOOL CHANGE will be finished. This function is used to move axes to arbitrary position by conversational operations. The guidance is displayed on screen. Input data and press CYCLE START button in accordance with the instructions. Then MOVEMENT OF AXES will be finished. This function is intended to rotate and stop the spindle easily, using menus. A specified operation is performed when you enter data according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button. This function is intended to make a reference position return for a specified axis easily, using menus. A reference position return for the specified axis is completed when you operate according to guidance messages displayed on the screen. This function is intended to cancel a canned cycle, cutter compensation, and tool length compensation easily, using menus. A specified item is canceled when you select the item according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button.

AXES MOVEMENT

SPINDLE REVOLUTIONS

RESTORATION TO THE REFERENCE POINT CANCEL

104

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item 6 EXTERNAL SIGNAL

Contents This function is intended to output M codes easily, using menus. A specified signal is output when you enter data according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button. This function is intended to clamp and unclamp additional axes easily, using menus. A specified operation is performed when you select the corresponding item according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button. This function is intended to execute NC language commands for one block easily, using menus. A specified operation is performed when you enter data according to guidance messages displayed on the screen and press the CYCLE START button.

CLAMP

NC LANGUAGE

To perform an operation described above, enter the corresponding number, from 1 to 8.

105

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.3.3
Coordinate/Tool Compensation

This screen enables you to set up a workpiece coordinate system, a tool compensation amount, and table payload. It can also be used to save and restore the data you set up.

(1)

(2)

(6)

(4)

(3)

(5)

Item 1 2 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM AUTOMATIC SETTING

Contents The present position of tool and the origin of workpiece coordinate system are displayed graphically. Input the workpiece coordinate system number.

The current machine position can be set as the origin of the workpiece coordinate system. A position determined by adding desired adjustment values to the current machine coordinates can also be set. The following WINDOW is displayed by pressing [AUTO SET] of SOFTKEY.

Clicking the [XEXEC] or [YEXEC] soft key automatically sets up, as a workpiece coordinate system origin, the sum of the current machine coordinate and adjustment value for an individual axis. Supplement) When adding the Zaxis to the automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K0 bit 2 = 1

106

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item 4 SETUP FILE

Contents This screen enables you to save and restore all setup data (such as workpiece coordinate system, tool compensation amount, and tool life management data) and machining programs at a time, thus curtailing the required setup time. Clicking the SET UP FILE soft key displays a list of setup files in a window as shown below. The cursor can be used to select one of 30 setup files. The selected file can be called, registered, and deleted.

(a) Item a READ

(b) Contents

(c)

The selected setup file is read from storage memory and used for automatic setting of the setup data. If the setup file contains a program, it is possible to select whether to save the program to the CNC memory. If a program included in the file list is available, it is called and set at the start position. This is, however, impossible if the program is not in memory.

107

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Item b REGISTER

Contents Clicking the REGISTER soft key displays the window and soft keys that can be used for registration. Enter the target file name and program number, and the date, then click the #293 soft key. The following data can be saved. @ Workpiece coordinate system, workpiece coordinate system offset, and 48 workpiece coordinate systems (option) (300 workpiece coordinate systems (optional) are not stored.) @ Tool compensation amount (lengthfigure, lengthwear, radiusfigure, and radiuswear when the option for tool compensation memory C is selected) @ Table payload @ Magazine data tool management number @ TOOL LIFE AI tool monitor setting and tool group setting @ PRODUCT MANAGEMENT function (ON/ OFF), name, and M code @ PALLET SETTING machining program number (option) @ Machining programs (whether to register them can be selected, and the maximum registerable size is 17 Kbytes.)

DELETE

The SET UP FILE data registered in a memory can be deleted.

108

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item 5 OFFSET

Contents Clicking the OFFSET soft key displays the window that can be used for tool compensation amount setting as shown below. Move the cursor to the desired number, using the cursor and page keys, and enter a compensation amount. Also available is a function that automatically sets the current Zaxis machine coordinates as a compensation amount. (AUTO SET soft key)

Supplement) Lengthfigure, lengthwear, radius figure, and radiuswear data can be displayed/input when the option for tool compensation memory C is selected. 6 TABLE PAYLOAD Select the [>=100kg] or [<100kg] soft key. @ [<100kg] R If the total load (such as workpiece and jigs) on the table is not heavier than approximately 100 kg. @ [>=100kg] R If the total load on the table is 100 kg or heavier.

109

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.3.4
Data I/O Screen

This screen enables you to transfer data (such as machining programs and parameters) with a memory card and floppy disk. It also enables you to set up a data server and remote buffer for use.

(2)

(3)

(1)

Item 1 MENU

Contents This screen enables you to transfer data (such as machining programs and parameters) with a memory card and floppy disk. It also enables you to set up a data server and remote buffer for use. Select the location to which an input/output device is connected. CH10 CH11 : RS232C on the operators panel : RS232C on the operators panel

I/O channel

Memory card : Memory card slot beside the LCD. Select this when data is input to or output from a memory card. Remote buffer: Reader/punch panel (optional) in the control cabinet. Select this when using a remote buffer. Data server : Data server (optional). Select this to enable programmed operation by a data server.

COMMUNICATION Several pieces of parameter on DATA I/O and their PARAMETER present values are displayed in this section. And parenthesized values are standard ones. Each value can be modified by pressing [CHANGE PARAM] of SOFTKEY. By pressing [CHANGE PARAM], cursor is displayed and a display of SOFTKEY is changed for [I/O SELECT]. After modifications, press [END] of SOFTKEY.

110

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

* PROGRAM and SET UP FILE If PROGRAM or SET UP FILE is selected, the following screen is displayed and then data can be written or read easily by using FANUC Handy File or FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTER or a Memory card.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

Item 1 CNC PROGRAM LIST (SET UP FILE LIST) FILE LIST

Contents If you select 1: PROGRAM, the CNC program list appears. If you select 9: SETUP FILE, the Set up file list appears. File list in a floppy disk or a memory card is displayed by pressing [FILE LIST] of SOFTKEY. Up to 200 files can be displayed. CNC PROGRAM or SET UP FILE in a CNC memory can be written in a floppy disk or a memory card. A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be read in a CNC memory. A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be renamed. A file in a floppy disk or a memory card can be deleted. This screen is closed, by pressing [END] of SOFT KEY.

WRITE

4 5 6 7

READ RENAME FILE DELETE FILE END

NOTE 1 Communication parameter has to be standard setting, except for I/O channel and baud rate. 2 Multivolume file cannot be treated. 3 As a memory card, use an SRAM card/ATA card. (The FROM card cannot be used.)

111

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.3.5
Tool Life Management Screen

This screen enables you to set data related to the AI tool monitor function.

(5) (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Item 1 AI TOOL MONITOR

Contents Specify whether to use the AI tool monitor function. OFF : The AI tool monitor function is disabled. ON : The AI tool monitor function is enabled according to the setting of 2 through 4.

2 FILE No. SETTING

Set a reference load data file number for each tool. Pressing the FILE key causes a file number to be displayed on the screen. Select the machine operation to be performed when spindle load w warninglevel load. OFF : Machining is continued as is. FEED DOWN : Tool movement is decelerated to reduce the load on the tool. Machining is continued. TOOL CHNG : Machining is continued; when the next tool change command is specified, the tool is changed to a reserved tool registered in the same group.

OPERATION WHEN WARNING LOAD IS REACHED

DOWN+CHNG : Tool movement is decelerated; when the next tool change command is specified, the tool is changed to a reserved tool registered in the same group. MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped, and the tool is moved along the Zaxis to the machine zero point. Moreover, spindle rotation and coolant output are stopped, and an alarm is displayed.

112

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item 4 OPERATION WHEN BREAKAGE LOAD IS REACHED (AI tool monitor function)

Contents Select a machine operation to be performed when spindle load w breakagelevel load. OFF : Machining is continued as is. MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped, and the tool is moved along the Zaxis to the machine zero point. Moreover, spindle rotation and coolant output are stopped, and an alarm is displayed. This box displays monitored information (such as the load information and tool group information about the tool in current use) or a list of spindle load level files.

MONITORED INFORMATION DISPLAYS OR SPINDLE LOAD LEVEL FILE LISTING REFERENCE LOAD CALCULATION AND REGISTRATION INTO FILE

When the [SPNDL LOAD] soft key is pressed, the following windows are displayed:

After moving the cursor to an item related to the target file number with the page and cursor keys, clicking the [CALC.] soft key calculates the WARNING and BREKAGE values from a DETECTED and NDIA. set up for the file number. To set the obtained values in a file, click the [ENTRY] soft key. A value can be entered directly in an item indicated by the cursor. 7 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE SPINDLE LOAD LEVEL FILE LIST AND THE MONITOREDINFORMATION DISPLAY This soft key selects a list of spindle load level files or monitored information as a display in the right section of the screen ((5)). If monitored information is displayed, clicking the FILE soft key displays a list of spindle load level files. If a list of spindle load level files is displayed, clicking the [MONITOR] soft key displays monitored information. If monitored information is displayed, clicking the page key changes the display to another tool group. If a list of spindle load level files is displayed, clicking the page key changes the display to another file number. Information (such as use status and lifetime), currently being displayed about the tools in a tool group, is cleared. When the [TOOL GROUP] soft key is pressed, the window shown below is displayed.

CLEAR TOOL INFORMATION TOOL GROUP SETTING

113

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15) Item 10 GROUP No.

(16)

Contents GROUP No. is changed from 1 to 14 by pressing PAGE KEY. The maximum number of groups and the maximum number of tools that can be registered per group can be changed by setting the following NC parameters:
No.6800 bit 1 0 0 1 1 No.6800 bit0 0 1 0 1 Maximum number of groups 16 32 64 128 Maximum number of tools 16 8 4 2

The maximum number of groups and maximum number of tools are factoryset as follows: T14iC series: Maximum number of groups = 16, maximum number of tools = 16 T21iC series: Maximum number of groups = 32, maximum number of tools = 8 11 LIFE TOOL LIFE LIMIT (BY CYCLE QUANTITY OR TIME) TO TRIGGER AN EXPIRATION ADVANCE NOTICE 12 USED COUNT or TIME Specify the value of tool life of each group. Specifies the timing when the tool life expiration advance notice signal is to be output. The signal is output when the number of times or the duration that the last tool was used becomes greater than or equal to: Tool life (by cycle quantity or time) minus tool life limit (by cycle quantity or time) to trigger an expiration advance notice

The present USED COUNT or TIME is displayed graphically. Clicking the USED COUNT ([USED TIME]) soft key changes USED COUNT (TIME).

114

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item 13 TOOL INFORMATION

Contents The state of the tool is displayed in TOOL INFORMATION as USING, LIFE, or WARNING. (Note) USING LIFE : tool which is on use in the group. : tool which arrived at the life.

WARNING : tool whose spindle load value detected by tool monitor function was beyond the warning value. 14 TCODE, HCODE, and DCODE Set the tool number (TCODE) that belongs to the target group, the tool length compensation number (HCODE) for the target tool, and the cutter compensation value number (DCODE) as required. Enter 0 for an item if it is not used. Select COUNT or TIME as a means to judge TOOL LIFE by pressing [LIFE JUDGE.] of SOFTKEY. It is possible to strike off TOOL INFORMATION in the group.

15 CHANGE OF JUDGEMENT OF TOOL LIFE 16 CLEARANCE OF TOOL INFORMATION

1.3.6
Pallet Setting Screen (Option)

If a machining program number is set up for each of workpieces mounted on two pallets (A and B) in advance, the machining programs can be automatically called and executed.

(1) (2) (3)

115

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Item 1 SETTINGS OF MACHINING PROGRAM

Contents Specify a machining program number for each pallet (A and B). The specified program numbers are set to the following macro variables respectively. #998 : A machining program number for the pallet A. #999 : A machining program number for the pallet B. The machining program number for the current pallet on the table is set in #990. (NOTE 1) Do not use the macro variables above (#990, #998, and #999) for other use. (NOTE 2) Create a machining program as a subprogram.

USE OF THE WORK NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION

Specify whether the work number search function is used for each pallet. ON The work number search function is used. In other words, the specified program number (1) is set to #990 after pallet change and then the program is called and executed.

OFF The work number search function is not used. In this case, the number 9023 is set to #990 after pallet change and then the program O9023 is called and executed. (O9023 is already registered and no machining is performed by O9023. ) The program O9023 is registered beforehand. Do not modify the program. An example of main program is shown below. * main program
* O0001 ; M65 ; M98 P#990 ; M01 ;

M code for pallet changing operation. Calling of a machining program (subprogram) corresponding to the pallet on the table. The program is stopped when M01 STOP button on the operators panel is ON. Return to the head of a program.

M99 ;

DISPLAY OF ALARM ON PALLET CHANGER

Alarms occurred to the pallet changer are displayed. [Varieties of alarm] SAFETY DOOR/PALLET SETTING DETECTION/ PALLET TRANSPORT /PALLET EXIST OR NOT/ LOCK UNLOCK (PALLETA) /LOCKUNLOCK (PALLETB) /AUTOMATIC DOOR/PALLET UNCLAMP

116

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

1.3.7
Automatic Operation Screen
(1)

This screen enables you to select the desired machining program and get it ready for operation. It is useful to check a program because it displays a running program and magnifies the display of coordinate values.

(2) (4)

(5) (6) Item 1 MAGNIFIED COORDINATE DISPLAY

(1)

Contents Workpiece coordinates, machine coordinates, or remaining travel distance can be displayed in largesize text. Each time the [COORDINATE] soft key is pressed, the magnified display changes as follows: workpiece coordinates > machine coordinates > remaining travel distance.

2 3

MONITOR DISPLAY RUNNING PROGRAM DISPLAY MODAL INFORMATION DISPLAY PROGRAM SELECTION PROGRAM ACCESS

The feedrate, spindle rotation speed, and spindle load meter reading are displayed. In automatic operation (MEM) mode, the selected program is displayed. Modal information is displayed.

Pressing the [PROG. SELECT] soft key displays a list of programs. A desired program can be selected from the list. When the [PROG. REWIND] soft key is pressed, the beginning of the current program is accessed.

117

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.3.8
Counter

This screen enables you to set up the production quantity count function. It also displays the current use status and elapsed operation time for all tool groups.
(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

118

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item 1 PRODUCTION/ QUALITY COUNTER

Contents This box offers two counters for production quantity counting. FUNCTION : If the counter is to be used, set this item to ON. If not, set it to OFF. : An arbitrary name consisting of numerals, alphabetic letters, and symbols can be set up. To enter alphabetic letters or symbols, press the <ABC@@@Z> key on the operators panel.

NAME

PARTS COUNT,TOTAL COUNT : These items represent the number of counted products and the total number of products, respectively. It is also possible to enter a value in these counters. PARTS REQUIRED : The scheduled number of products is entered in this item. When the actual number of products reaches the scheduled number, it is possible to turn on a status display lamp. The operator message PRODUCTION IS COMPLETED is displayed when a scheduled number of products are created. PIECE COUNT : The number of products per cycle (count scaling factor) is entered in this item. The two counters stated above are incremented by a value entered in PIECE COUNT. M CODE : An M code for counting products is selected using a soft key. When the selected M code is issued, the number of the current products and the total number of products are incremented. A dedicated M code (M91 or M92) is available for incrementing each of the two counters.

TOOL COUNTER

This box lists the tool number (TCODE) of a tool in current use, how many times or how long it was used, and its service life value for all tool groups. If a tool in current use is the last one in a tool group, the tool number is prefixed with an asterisk (*). The box enables you to check the use status of all tool groups at a glance. To set up tool groups, click the TOOL GROUP soft key.

119

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Item 3 SERVICE TIME RUN TIME

Contents : The cumulative automatic operation time (excluding the time when the machine is at a stop or pause) is displayed.

CYCLE TIME : The duration of one cycle of automatic operation (excluding the time when the machine is at a stop or pause) is displayed. This value is automatically preset with 0 when the cycle starts from a reset state or when the power is turned off. 4 TOOL GROUP SETTING This soft key enables you to set up tool groups. This function is exactly the same as the tool group setting on the TOOL LIFE. See the descriptions about the TOOL LIFE for details.

1.3.9
Sequence Selection
(1)

This screen enables you to set up machine operation modes.

(2)

(3)

120

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item 1 FLOOD COOLANT INTERNAL LIGHT BLOCK SKIP AUTOMATIC POWER OFF REMOTE MODE TEACHING IN (from the preceding page)

Contents Position the cursor to the desired setting item, then select the [ON] or [OFF] soft key.
OFF ON

(When ON is selected, the switch graphic appears to have been pressed, and a black dot (S) appears in an upperleft corner of the switch graphic.) The functions of each item are as follows. (1) Various kinds of setting The following items can be set up.
Item FLOOD COOLANT (Option) Branch ON OFF Functions Coolant is supplied by flood coolant unit. Coolant is not supplied.

INTERNAL LIGHT

ON OFF

The internal light goes on. The internal light goes off.

REMOTE MODE (Note 1)

ON

The machine tool is run according to a program stored in external memory. The machine tool is run according to a program stored in CNC memory. When M30 is specified, the power to the CNC is turned off about five seconds later. The power of the CNC unit is not turned off automatically. Commands in program blocks that contain a slash (/) are skipped. Commands in program blocks that contain a slash (/) are executed. The machine runs as directed by programs. (Normal operation) Programs are executed without running the machine. This is intended to check the programs. Each coordinate displayed on the screen is updated according to move commands. M and S functions are executed. Programs are executed without movement along the Zaxis. This is intended to check the programs. Commands in program blocks that contain a slash (/) are skipped. Commands in program blocks that contain a slash (/) are executed. The machine runs as directed by programs. (Normal operation) Programs are executed without runrun ning the machine. This is intended to check the programs. Each coordinate displayed on the screen is updated according to move commands. M and S functions are executed. Programs are executed without movement along the Zaxis. This is intended to check the programs.

OFF

AUTOMATIC POWER OFF (Note 1) (Note 2)

ON

OFF

OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (Note 1)

ON OFF

MACHINE LOCK

OFF ALL

OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP (*1)

ON OFF

MACHINE LOCK

OFF ALL

121

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Item
Item TEACHING IN

Contents
Branch ON Functions The machine position obtained by manual operation can be stored in memory and can be used to create a program. The above function cannot be used.

OFF

(NOTE) This item is not displayed for a full keyboardtype operators panel. Use the corresponding button on the operators panel. 2 REFERENCE LOAD CALCULATION AND REGISTRATION INTO FILE FUNCTIONS Clicking the FUNCTIONS displays the following window.

AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL FUNCTION SELECTION (Option)

Specify the automatic door control functions (F = ON f = OFF). DOOR CLOSING BY START BUTTON: When the cycle start button on the ROBODRILL operators panel is pressed the door is automatically closed and program operation is started. DOOR OPENING BY M30: When M30 is specified, the door is opened automatically. DOOR OPENING BY M00, M01: When M00 or M01 is specified, the door is opened automatically.

AUTOMATIC POWER OFF

This item enables you to set up connections for effecting the automatic power shutoff function. Selecting ON enables the following function. POWER OFF BY ALARM: The automatic power shutoff function works if an alarm condition occurs. RELEASE AT TURN ON THE POWER: The automatic power shutoff function is set to OFF when the power is turned on. (This function is unavailable to the full keyboardtype operators panel.)

SPINDLE SPEED(DOOR OPEN) (except for the CE marking specification)

If the following conditions are all satisfied during the time set here (in minutes), the screen is erased to protect the LCD.

122

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item SCREEN SAVER

Contents The screen display is cleared to prolong the life of the LCD screen if no key input is made for the duration (in seconds) specified in this item. Set 0 when this function is not to be used. @ Neither a key (except some) on the operators panel nor a soft key is operated. @ No alarm or operator message is issued. @ Both singleblock and dry run modes are OFF. If this function is not to be used, it must be reset to 0. If either of the following functions is met after all displays on the screen are erased, they appear again. @ A key (except some) on the operators panel or a soft key is operated. @ An alarm or operator message is issued.

INITIAL SCREEN(POWER ON) INITIAL OPE.MODE(PW ON)

This item enables you to select the screen to be displayed when the power is turned on. This item enables you to select the status in which the machine is to be when the power is turned on. MDI/LOW : The machine is in the MDI mode, and the rapid traverse rate is LOW.

AUTO/100%: The machine is in the MEM mode, and the rapid traverse rate is 100%. M08 COMMAND SELECTION COOLANT BUTTON SELECTION 3 BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT Select the use of the M08 command between coolant control and air blow control. Select the use of the coolant button on the operators panel between coolant control and air blow control. Set the brightness of background color to one of five supported levels. The standard background color is the third one.

123

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.3.10
MAINTENCE/SETTING

This window enables you to perform various types of maintenance and setup. To execute any function in this window, enter the corresponding number (from 1 to 6).

Item 1 TURRET RESTO.

Contents If the machine stops during tool change because of an alarm being issued or the power being turned off, it becomes necessary to restore the turret to the normal position. See Chapter 4, Automatic Turret Restoration, of Part V for details. If the pulse coder cable is removed during motor replacement, the controller loses the machine zero point, resulting in an alarm being issued for a reference position return. In this case, it is necessary to set the motor to the machine zero point. See Chapter 3, Servo Motor Zero Point Restoration Method, of Part V for details. This function is used if all parameters have been lost for some reason or you want to return the parameters to the values to which they were factory set. It can also be used to compare and check the current parameter settings with the factory settings. See Chapter 5, Parameter Resetting, Checking, and Registering, of Part V for details. This function is used in pulling out a tapping tool from a workpiece if it has been caught in it. See Chapter 6, Rigid Tap Retracting, of Part V for details.

MOTOR ORIGIN

PARAMETER

RIGID TAPPING

124

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

1. QUICK SCREEN

Item 5 EXT.INTERFACE

Contents This function enables you to set up and use only the desired signals on the terminal board of the ROBODRILL. See Chapter 15, External Interface Function, of Part IV for details.

COMMUNICATION This function enables you to set up the communication parameters that are needed in using the FACTOLINK function. See Chapter 26, FACTOLINK Function, of Part IV for details.

125

1. QUICK SCREEN

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

1.3.11
DIAGNOSIS/ALARM

This window enables you to check the cause of machine trouble.

(2) (3) (1) (4)

(5) Item 1 ALARM,DIAGNOSTIC COORDINATE DISPLAY RUNNING PROGRAM DISPLAY DIAGNOSTIC MONITOR Contents

(6)

These boxes display an alarm, diagnosis information, or operator message. See Appendixes 6 and 7 for details. The workpiece coordinates, machine coordinates, and remaining travel are displayed. In automatic operation (MEM) mode, the selected program is displayed. These items indicate the operating status of the machine. When a circle is yellow, it is active. The detailed description about the cause is given in (1). Interlock Hold Reset : Axial movement inhibited : Program operation stopped : Reset state

2 3 4

Start inhibited : Program operation start inhibited The detailed cause is displayed in 1. 5 ALARM/DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY PAGE SWITCH SAFETY MONI. Another page of the alarm/diagnostic display is displayed. This soft key enables you to monitor various signals related to door lock control.

126

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

CREATING A PROGRAM

127

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

2.1
EDITING A PROGRAM 2.1.1
Creating a Program
(1) Put the system in the EDIT mode. (2) Turn off the protect key. (3) Press the screen. (4) Enter the number of a program, insert the necessary words sequentially, then press the <INSERT> key. + function key to display the PROGRAM

128

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

2.1.2
Modifying a Program

A program can be modified by changing, inserting, or/and deleting words. Before modifying a program, select the EDIT mode and press the + key. When the PROGRAM screen is displayed, start the

following operation: (1) To change a word

Cursor
Position the cursor on the word to be modified using the cursor keys.

(Example)

Enter a new word.

Press the <ALTER> key.

129

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(2) To insert a word

Cursor
Position the cursor on the word to be modified using the cursor keys.

(Example)

Insert the necessary word.

Press the <INSERT> key.

130

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

(3) To delete a word

Cursor
Position the cursor on the word to be modified using the cursor keys.

(Example)

Press the <DELETE> key.

(*) The cursor can be moved by one of the following three methods: (1) By the cursor keys
Cursor

Press either of the cursor keys. (2) By the S key (Example) When moving the cursor to the next S address or Press the S key, then press the cursor key.

(3) By specifying the word (Example) When moving the cursor to the next S800 word Enter the word S800, then press the cursor key.

131

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

2.1.3
Deleting a Program

(1) Select the EDIT mode. (2) Press the screen. (3) For example, when the number of the program to be deleted is 01000, enter key. then press the <DELET> + function key to display the PROGRAM

2.1.4
Checking Program Nos. in Memory

(1) Put the system in the EDIT mode. (2) The contents of memory and the contents of programs are displayed alternately by pressing the [O.SRH] key.

2.1.5
Calling a Program in Memory

(1) When the number of the program is not identified (1) Select the EDIT mode. (2) Press the following keys: or [O.SRH]

(2) When the number of the program is identified (1) Select the EDIT mode. (2) For example, when the number of the program to be called is O1000, press the following keys: or [O.SRH] NOTE When the called program is not found, an alarm indication appears on the screen. In this case, press the <RESET> key to release the alarm.

132

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

2.2
PROGRAMMING 2.2.1
General
S codes are used for spindle speed control, M codes are used for ON/OFF of the various functions of the machine tool. When move command and an S or M code are commanded in the same block, the S or M function is executed simultaneously with the move command except some M codes. (Example 1) N1 G01 X50.0 Y50.0 M03; (Spindle rotation clockwise)

Y The spindle starts to rotate clockwise at the same time when the axes begin to move. 50

50 X

Only commands M00, M01, M02, M05, M09 and M30 start to be executed when the move command is finished. (Example 2) N10 G01 X50.0 Y50.0 M05; (Spindle stop)

Y
Spindle stops at the end of move command.

50

50 X

2.2.2
Spindle Speed Function (S Function)

The spindle speed is directly controlled by address S and a following 2 to 4digit number. (Example) S 150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 min1 S 4000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,000 min1 NOTE Spindle speed can be specified ranging from 80 min1 to 8,000 min1 (standard), 150 to 15.000min1 (15.000min1 spindle) in increments of 1 min1.

133

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

2.2.3
Miscellaneous Function (M Function)
M code M00 M01 M02 M03 M04 M05 M06 *M07 *M08 *M09 *M10 *M11 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M22 M23 M24 M28 M29 M30 *M32 *M33 *M34 *M40 *M41 Program stop Optional stop End of program Spindle CW Spindle CCW Spindle STOP Tool change Air blow ON Coolant ON Coolant OFF Clamp Unclamp Touch Probe ON Touch Probe OFF Orientation Name

Up to three M codes can be specified at the same time. An M code not marked with * in the table below must be specified as the first M code.
Table 2.2.3 M Function Meaning The machine stops after M00. The machine stops after M01. The machine finishes the program. The spindle starts to rotate clockwise. The spindle starts to rotate counterclockwise. The spindle will stop. A tool changed will be done. The air for chip will blow. The coolant oil will blow. The coolant oil will stop. When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of additional axis specifications, the 4axis is clamped. When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of additional axis specifications, the 4axis is clamped. Turn on power to the touch probe. Turn off power to the touch probe. The spindle sets the positioning. Stops the centerthrough coolant pump. Starts the centerthrough coolant pump. Supplies coolant from the tool tip. Outputs air from the tool tip. Stops centerthrough coolant/air purge. I I I I I I I D I Sequence D D D I I D I I I D

Centerthrough coolant pump OFF Centerthrough coolant pump ON Centerthrough coolant ON Air purge ON Centerthrough coolant/air purge OFF

Small hope peck drilling cycle ON Turns smalldiameter, deep hole drilling cycle mode ON. (Option) Rigid mode End of program Peck cycle Peck cycle Peck cycle AI function disable AI function enable Tapping cycle is rigid mode The machine finishes the program. Triggers AI function no-load detection. Judges on AI function no-load detection. Ends AI function no-load detection. Disables the AI function. Enables the AI function.

D I I I I I

134

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

M code M42 *M43 M44 M45 M46 *M50 (NOTE2) M52 M53 *M60 to M65 *M71 *M72 *M73 *M74 *M76 *M77 M80 to M89 M90 *M91 *M92 M93 M94 M95 M96 M97 M98 M99 M100 to M129 M198 Air blow ON Not used Not used

Name _ Tool life status check Programmed data rewrite _ _

Meaning Used by the machine a menu. Checks current tool life status for processing. Sets the data of AI tool minitor. Used by macroprogram 09029. Used by macroprogram 09029. The air for chip will blow.

Sequence I I I

Automatic door opening/closing and output signal ON until answer comes The 4axis clamp The 4axis unclamp Xaxis mirror image ON Yaxis mirror image ON The 4axis mirror image ON Mirror image OFF For external interface Not used Product control counter 1 Product control counter 2 Not used Not used Not used Interruption type custom macro ON Interruption type custom macro OFF Calling of subprogram End of subprogram For external interface Subprogram call from external memory

In the case of splashguard B with automatic door opneing/closing specifications, the door opens/closes automatically. When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of additional axis specifications, the 4axis is clamped. When clamp/unclamp signal is used by means of additional axis specifications, the 4axis is unclamped. Xaxis turns the mirror image function ON. Yaxis turns the mirror image function ON. The 4axis turns the mirror image function ON. Mirror image is OFF See IV15(5), M code output function. I

Counts the amount of products for counter 1. Counts the amount of products for counter 2.

I I

Enables the custom macro interrupt function. Disables the custom macro interrupt function.

I I

See IV15(5), M code output function.

135

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE 1 I and D in the column Sequence means as follows: I : This function will be active as soon as the block is read. D This function will be active after all commands in the block have been executed. 2 To be specified as the first M code when the center through coolant specification is applied. (1) M00: Program stop Automatic operation is stopped after a block containing M00 is executed. Even when the program is stopped, all modal information remains unchanged as in single block operation. The automatic operation can be restarted by pushing the CYCLE START button. In the status light (option) specifications, a yellow display lamp illuminates. (2) M01: Optional stop Similar to the M00, automatic operation is stopped after a block which contains M01 is executed. This code is effective only when the optional stop switch is ON on the operators panel. In the status light (option) specifications, a yellow display lamp illuminates. (3) M02, M30: End of program (a) Indicates the end of the main program. Used when the program is loaded in memory from tape. (b) Ends automatic operation and resets. (c) For memory operation, passes program control to the beginning of the program. (d) In the status light (option) specifications, the yellow display lamp blinks. (e) M30 puts the automatic power turnoff function into effect, provided that the function is enabled. (4) M29: Rigid mode When M29 Sxxxx is commanded previous to tapping/reverse tapping cycle command, the machine becomes rigid mode. Refer to IV2.2.6. (5) M32 to M34, M40 to M46: AI tool monitor These M functions are related to the AI tool monitor. For details, see descriptions about the AI tool monitor. (6) M60 to M65: Automatic opening and closing of the door This function is provided for the splash guard with an automatic door. With this function, the door can be opened while a program is being executed to access the inside of the machine. After the access is completed, the door can be closed automatically by applying an external signal to the machine. After the door is closed, program execution resumes. This function is useful when a robot or pallet changer is used. (7) M98: Calling of subprogram This code is used to enter a subprogram. Refer to Execution of subprogram in the Operators Manual of NC for details. (8) M99: End of subprogram This code shows the end of a subprogram. Executing M99 takes the control back to the main program. Refer to Preparation of Subprograms in the Operators Manual of NC for details.
136

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

NOTE If there is a block following M00, M01, M02 or M30, it is not read into the buffer. Do not use M codes M00 to M99 for the external M code BCD output function.

2.2.4
Tool Function (T Function)

Specify a tool position by using a 2digit or 3digit number after T. M 0 6 T VV ( VV : Tool number) or M 0 6 T VVV ( VVV : Tool group number) A tool thus specified can be randomly specified via the shortest path. When using the tool life management function, specify a tool group number in the T code. In addition to the T function, the following incremental command can be specified: M 0 6 P n (n : the nth from present tool position with CW) NOTE 1 When T is not specified in a command such as M06, the current tool is changed to the tool with the adjacent tool number on the right. 2 When a tool number other than 01, 02, ..., 14(*) is specified, alarm 251 (an ATC error) is issued. 3 If a value other than 1, 2, ..., 14(*) is specified in n after P, the remainder obtained by dividing the value by 14(*) is assumed. For example, when 58 is specified in n, n is assumed to be 2. 4 When a tool change command is executed during cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or a canned cycle, alarm 251 (an ATC error) is issued. Before executing the tool change command, be sure to cancel cutter compensation, tool length compensation, and canned cycle. (G49 and G80 can be specified in the block that specifies M06.) 5 When Tool change sequence is being executed, Z axis must not be moved by manual operation after stopping the Tool change sequence by single block or pressing the FEED HOLD button. 6 When the tool change (M06) command is specified, coolant stops. Therefore, specify the command to turn on the coolant (M08) in the next block as necessary. (When bit 7 of PMC parameter K0 is set to 0) * For the T21iCe series, up to 21.

137

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

2.2.5
Spindle Orientation Function (M19 Function)

a) M19 ; The spindle stops at the position of angle specified in parameter (Note) by means of this command. NOTE At this time of the shipment the spindle stop position is adjusted so that the spindle key is parallel with the Yaxis direction. b) M19S__; Angle specification (0_ to 359_) This command enable the angle (0_ to 359_) to be specified. NOTE 1 This command is effective until a spindle rotation command (M03, M04), spindle stop command (M05), or a command specifying a miscellaneous function for terminating the program (such as M00 and M01) is executed. (The reset key stops spindle excitation but does not cancel a command.) When a tool change is specified during this command, alarm 252 (an ATC spindle alarm) is issued. When a spindle index function command is executed during rigid tapping, alarm 1007 (M19 not permitted during tapping) is issued. 2 Do not execute this command during canned cycle. In fine boring (G76) and back boring (G87), the spindle index is automatically performed and the table shifts. Table shift direction is set in parameter No. 5101.

138

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

2.2.6
Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29)

(1) General Tapping cycle (G84) and reverse tapping cycle (G74) are effective in both of rigid mode and conventional mode. These modes are switched by M code. Rigid tapping is performed by simultaneously feeding the spindle and the Z axis without the floating tapper, therefore, effective for highspeed and highaccuracy tapping. (2) Command format
Z_ R_ P_ Q_ F_ K_ ; Repeat number Cutting feedrate Depth of cut in the peck tapping cycle Dwell time at the bottom of tapping and Rpoint return Position command at Rpoint Position command at the bottom of tapping Position command of tapping

G jj

X_

Y_

G74 Reverse tapping cycle G84 Tapping cycle

NOTE 1 The machining start point in a peck tapping cycle and clearance d in a highspeed peck tapping cycle are specified in parameter 5114 or 5115. 2 A peck tapping cycle is validated by the Q command in the tapping cycle. When Q0 is specified, no peck tapping cycle is executed. (3) Rigid mode To specify the rigid mode, M29Sxxxx; is commanded previous to tapping/reverse tapping cycle command. The spindle is stopped, and tapping/reverse tapping cycle is the following command becomes rigid mode.
... ... M29Sxxxx; G jj X___ Y___ Z___ R___ P___ Q___ F___ K___ ; X___ Y___; X___ Y___; ... ... G80; ... ... Rigid mode

139

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

F ___ Sxxxx; Lead of thread Sxxxx should be less than 5000 (5000 min1) 6000 (6000 min1) (15000 min1 spindle). When a value greater than it is command, PS alarm (No. 200) will occur in the GVV block. F ___ should be less than 15000 (15 m/min). If a value more than 15000 is commanded, the feed rate does not exceed 15000 (15 m/min). It is impossible to input Sxxxx again before inputting GVV , after having input Sxxxx once. Do not specify M29 during the canned cycle in the conventional mode. In any case, a PS alarm (No. 203) occurs. When the rigid tapping cycle ends, the spindle stops, that is, S0 is specified. After specifying G code (G80, other canned cycle G code, or G code in group 01), rigid mode will change to former mode. NOTE 1 GVV indicates the reverse tapping cycle (G74) and tapping cycle (G84). 2 Be sure to input Sxxxx in the M29 block. Even when the canned cycle cancel (G80) is entered without executing the tapping cycles (G74, G84) after the rigid mode is selected by M29Sxxxx;, the rigid mode is not released. 3 Specify M29Sxxxx independently without fail. 4 Dont specify M03, M04 and M05 in the block just after G80. 5 Dont specify M03, M04 and M05 in the block between M29Sxxxx and G80. (4) Conventional mode (floating tap) Command method in conventional mode remains. Refer to the NCs OPERATORS MANUAL for details.
... ... M03 (or M04) Sxxxx; G jj X___ Y___ Z___ R___ P___ Q___ F___ K___ ; X___ Y___; X___ Y___; ... ... G80;

140

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

(5) G84 (Tapping cycle) Command method in conventional mode remains. G84 in rigid mode is shown below.

G84 (G98)

G84 (G99)

Spindle stops Initial point Movement 1 Movement 6 Movement 2 Spindle tops rotates CW Movement 3 Movement 5 Spindle tops rotates CCW Point Z Movement 4 P Point R Spindle stops

Spindle stops Initial point

Spindle tops rotates CW

Point R

Spindle stops

Spindle stops

Spindle stops

Spindle tops rotates CCW Point Z

Rapid traverse Synchronous feeding of Z axis and spindle P Dwell

NOTE 1 Feedrate override during synchronously feeding Z axis and spindle is assumed 100%. Override of spindle is also assumed 100%. 2 Single block When executing tapping cycle in single block, the machine dwells or stops at terminate points of movement 1, 2 and 6. 3 Feed hold When specifying feed hold while movement 3 through 5, FEED HOLD lamp will be lit immediately, but the machine will not stop immediately and stops after movement 6 will finish. When specifying feed hold while movement 6 is executed, the machine will stop immediately.

141

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(6) G74 (Reverse tapping cycle) Command method in conventional mode remains. G74 in rigid mode is shown below.

G74 (G98)

G74 (G99)

Spindle stops Initial point

Spindle stops

P Spindle tops rotates CCW Spindle tops Point R Spindle stops Spindle tops rotates CW Point Z Spindle stops P Spindle stops P rotates CCW

P Point R Spindle stops Spindle tops rotates CW Point Z

Rapid traverse Synchronous feeding of Z axis and spindle P Dwell

Refer to notes in (5), G84 tapping cycle.

142

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

2.3
PLAYBACK

The machine position obtained by the manual operation is inserted in a program and a program can be created. In other words, after the tool is moved by the manual operation (jog or handle feed), the tool can be moved by the same distance in the automatic operation (playback). Words other than X, Y, Z (B, C, D, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, EOB) can be registered in the memory by exactly the same operation as EDIT mode. The machine position is inserted by the following procedure. (1) Set TEACH IN switch to ON on the QUICK screen.

(2) Set the mode switch to EDIT. (3) Move the machine to the required position by handle or jog. (The mode must be EDIT.) (4) Push the + key.

(5) Enter the address X [X] . (6) Push the key, then the machine position along the X axis

is stored in the memory. If the current machine position is X10.521 Y30.270 Z15.0, for example, X10521 is stored in memory as Xaxis coordinate value, by pushing the key.

Content stored in the program = X10521 Push [ Y ], , [ Z ] and keys, then the machine

position along the Y and Z axis is stored in the memory respectively.

143

2. CREATING A PROGRAM

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE 1 After entering the address X, Y or Z, enter numerical values and push key then the values entered in the

machine position are added and registered. This is used to correct the machine position through key entry. 2 The cordinate value registered in this way is an absolute coordinate. Enter G90 (Absolute command) at the head of a program. 3 Insert in the same way as edit operation for program commands other than machine position. 4 Insert an EOB ( completes.

[;] ,

), and one block registration

144

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

145

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

3.1
DISPLAYING PARAMETERS
NOTE Modes need not be changed when parameters are only monitored. Modes can be monitored even automatic operation.

3.1.1
NC Parameter

Follow the procedure below to display parameters. (1) After pressing the key, press the and the section select

soft key [PARAM] to select the parameter screen.

Soft key display (section select) Backward menu key Soft keys Forward menu key

(2) The parameter screen consists of multiple pages. Use step (a) or (b) to display the page that contains the parameter you want to display. (a) Use the page select key , or the cursor move keys

to display the desired page. (b) Enter the data number of the parameter you want to display from the keyboard, then press the [NO.SRH] soft key. The parameter page containing the specified data number appears with the cursor positioned at the data number. (The data is displayed in reverse video.) NOTE If key entry is started with the section select soft keys displayed, they are replaced automatically by operation select soft keys including [NO.SRH]. Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key can also cause the operation select keys to be displayed.

146

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

Data entered from the keyboard Soft key display (section select)

Cursor

147

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

3.1.2
PMC Parameter
(1) After pressing and in the stated sequence, clicking the

chapter selection soft key [PMC] selects the PMCPRM. (2) Clicking the [PARAMETER] and [KEEPRL] softkeys in the stated sequence displays the PMC PRM(KEEP RELAY).

148

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

3.2
CHANGING PARAMETERS
NOTE Parameters can be changed only in the MDI mode when the machine is stopped or in the emergency stop state. Some parameter settings, for example, those for machine operation, can be changed. After changing parameters, the machine may not operate, or something dangerous may occur depending on the situation. Therefore, parameters are usually not changeable (i.e., writeprotected). Before changing the data of a parameter, be sure to check the number of the desired parameter and the data to be set. Following is the procedure for changing NC parameters. (1) Enter the MDI mode, or bring the machine to an emergency stop. (2) Enable parameter writing. (2)1 To display the setting screen, press the then the [SETTING] section select soft key. The first page of the setting screen appears. After pressing and in the stated sequence, click + key,

the chapter selection soft key [SETTING]. (2)2 Position the cursor on PARAMETER WRITE using the cursor move keys.

(2)3 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys.)

149

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Data entered from the keyboard Soft key display (operation select)

(2)4 To set PARAMETER WRITE= to 1, press the [ON:1] soft key, or alternatively enter 1 and press the [INPUT] soft key. From now on, the parameters can be set. At the same time an alarm condition (P/S 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE) occurs in the NC. (3) To display the parameter screen, press the + key, then

the [PARAM] section select soft key. (4) Display the page containing the parameter you want to set, and position the cursor on the parameter. (5) Enter data, then press the [INPUT] soft key. The parameter indicated by the cursor is set to the entered data. Example: 12000 [INPUT]

Cursor

Data can be entered continuously for parameters, starting at the selected parameter, by separating each data item with a semicolon (;). Example: Entering 10;20;30;40 and pressing the [INPUT] key assigns values 10, 20, 30 and 40 to parameters in order starting at the parameter indicated by the cursor. (6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) as required.
150

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

(7) If parameter setting is complete, set PARAMETER WRITE= to 0 on the setting screen to disable further parameter setting. (8) Reset the NC to release the alarm condition (P/S 100). If an alarm condition (000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER) occurs in the NC, turn it off before continuing operation. The program protection key can be used to enable or disable parameter entry. Set bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3297 to 1. If the program protection key is set to ON: Parameters cannot be changed. If the program protection key is set to RELEASE: Parameters can be changed. If this function is used, it is impossible to enable PARAMETER WRITE on the SETTING.

151

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

3.3
CHANGING OFFSET DATA

For example, lets set the compensation amount with compensation No. 001. Suppose that the setting is 100.0.

Soft key [OFFSET]

OFFSET screen appears.

Move the cursor to the target number for setting. Here, place the cursor at 001.

152

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

Enter the following values:

153

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

3.4
CHANGING WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM DATA

For example, lets set an offset value of the workpiece reference position in the G54 system. Assume that the X value is 250.0 and the Y value is 190.0.

Soft key [WORK]

The WORK OFSET (workpiece offset) screen is displayed.

Move the cursor to the number to be set. In this example, move the cursor to Y in No. 1 (offset value of the workpiece reference position in the G54 system).

No. 01

154

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

Enter the following values:

155

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

3.5
CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLES 3.5.1
Custom Macro Variables
Variable name Local variables (can be used by user) Common variables (can be used by user) Additional common variables

As shown in the table below, custom macro variables are classified into common variables and system variables according to their variable numbers.
Types of variables Variable No. #1 to #33 #100 to #149 #500 to #531 #100 to #199 #500 to #999 #1000 to #1015, #1032 #1100 to #1115, #1132, #1133 #2000 to #2200 #3000 #3001, #3002 #3003, #3004 #3005 #3011, #3012 Description Variables used in a macro locally Data cleared when power is turned off Data retained when power is turned off Data cleared when power is turned off Data retained when power is turned off Interface input signal (DI) Interface output signal (DO) Tool offset value Macro alarm Clock Automatic operation control Setting Clock information Number of machined parts, number of required parts Modal information Block end position Machine coordinates Workpiece coordinates Skip signal position Tool offset value Servo deviation Write are enabled. Write are enabled. Write are enabled. Remarks Write are enabled.

System variables (fixed uses) System variables (fixed uses)

#3901, #3902 #4001 to #4120 #5001, #5004 #5021, #5024 #5041 to #5044 #5061 to #5064 #5081 to #5083 #5101, #5104 #2500 to #2506 or #5201, #5221, #5241, #5261, #5281, #5301, #5321

Workpiece offset (X-axis)

156

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

3. DISPLAYING AND CHANGING PARAMETERS

Variable name

Variable No. #2600 to #2606 or #5202, #5222, #5242, #5262, #5282, #5302, #5322 #2700 to #2706 or #5203, #5223, #5243, #5263, #5283, #5303, #5323 #2800 to #2806 or #5204, #5224, #5244, #5264, #5284, #5304, #5324

Description

Remarks

Workpiece offset (Y-axis)

System variables (fixed uses)

Workpiece offset (Z-axis)

Workpiece offset (fourth axis)

This section explains how to display and set common variables on the screen. For details on programs that use custom macro variables and system variables, refer to Custom macro in the CNC Operators Manual.

3.5.2
Setting and Displaying Common Variables
(1) Displaying common variables (a) Press the key + . Press the ["] soft key then the

[MACRO] soft key to select the macro variable screen. (b) Enter variable number, then press the [NO. SRH] key.

(2) Setting common variables * Turn off the program protect key. (a) Move the cursor to the common variable to be set. (b) Use the numeric keys to enter data for the common variable, then press the
*

key.

To set <empty>, just press the [INPUT] soft key without data.
157

4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

To operate the ROBODRILL manually, first select the manual operation mode key on the operators panel, then the appropriate function keys (such as spindle, automatic door, and axis movement).

158

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

4.1
MANUAL OPERATION OF THE SPINDLE

Set the S command with MDI. A combination of rotates the spindle. The spindle speed can be adjusted using and

and

159

4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

4.2
AUTOMATIC DOOR

The door is automatically opened or closed by opened or closed each time is pressed.

and

. It is

160

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

4. MANUAL RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

4.3
AXIS MOVEMENT

(1) First select the manual operation mode using (2) Select the target axis using (3) Select the feedrate using (4) Rotate the handle to drive the tool along the axis.
Feedrate selection 200 100 10 1 0.2 0.1 0.01 0.001 Metric mm mm mm mm

. . .

Inches 0.02 0.01 0.001 0.0001 inch inch inch inch

161

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

Automatic running means to run the machine tool according to a program.

162

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

5.1
MDI RUNNING 5.1.1
MDI Running
A program of one block can be entered to run the machine in the MDI mode. NOTE A program for MDI running can be edited irrespective of the program protect key status.

Examples 1

To move the axis

Select the MDI mode.

Select the program screen.

The program (MDI) window appears.

[G] [;]

[X]

Enter data for each address. For the first key input, address data switches to address. For the second and subsequent key inputs, address data switches to numeric.

Letters are entered using soft keys. See Section I4.2.)

163

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Press the CYCLE START button.

164

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

Examples 2

To turn the spindle M03S500

Select the MDI mode.

Press the PRGRM button.

The program (MDI) window appears.

[M]

[S]

[;]

Press the CYCLE START button.

165

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Examples 3

To replace the tool M06T3

Select the MDI mode.

Press the PRGRM button.

The program (MDI) window appears.

[M]

[T]

[;]

Press the CYCLE START button.

166

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

5.2
MEMORY RUNNING (MEM) 5.2.1
Settings for Memory Running

Memory running means to run the machine tool according to a program stored in memory.

1. Machining program check Whether the part program coded by the programmer is correct must be checked. Whether jig settings and offset are correct must also be checked. This machine tool provides various operation support functions that can perform these checks efficiently and safely. An example of effectively checking the machining program is given here. These support functions are validated for the command to be executed immediately after each function button is turned on and for the subsequent commands.
Machine lock (1) When the machine lock is on, each axis of the machine tool does not move. (2) This button is used to check whether the M/S function and command formats, such as G code and axis address are correct. (3) ON/OFF switching operates on the quick screen. 31: SEQ. SELECTION Z axis lock (1) This key is used to check the relative movement of the spindle and table with the Z axis movement fixed. (2) ON/OFF switching operates on the quick screen. 31: SEQ. SELECTION Single block key (1) Stops the machine each time one block of a program is executed. The operator can check a program by executing it on a blockbyblock basis and pressing the cycle start button. (1) When dry run is on, the F function (that is, feedrate) specified by the program is ignored and the machine tool is set to the jog feed speed. (2) Before pressing this key, check that no mechanical interference occurs during running. Rapid traverse override (1) The feedrate specified by the move command for the machine tool can be reduced according to the percentage which corresponds to a key by pressing one of the rapid traverse override keys: TRVRS LOW, TRVRS 25%, TRVRS 100%

Dry run

NOTE 1 For these operation support functions, be sure to read Section III9 Trial Run once to assure safe operation. 2 Even if the machine lock or the Z axis lock is on, the spindle turns and coolant ON/OFF is executed. The tool change command is not executed.

167

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

2. Actual machining Be sure to turn off the following function keys when doing the actual machining.
Machine lock button When machine lock has been turned on and a program containing axis move commands has been suspended, the power must be turned off then back on. When Zaxis lock has been turned on and a program containing axis move commands has been suspended, the power must be turned off then back on. When machining is started with the dry run on, feedrate is not appropriate, causing danger.

Z axis lock button

Dry run button

5.2.2
Memory Running Operation

1. Starting memory running (1) Press the mode selection key.

(2) Press the

function key to display the

PROGRAM screen and enter the number (O****) of the program to run. Then use the program has been searched. (3) Press the mode selection key. is pressed, memory cursor key to check that the part

(4) When the CYCLE START button

running starts and the CYCLE START lamp lights. (5) The PROGRAM CHECK screen can also be displayed in step (1). NOTE The CYCLE START button is ignored in the following cases: (a) When the FEED HOLD button is being pressed (b) When the EMERGENCY STOP button is being pressed (c) When the RESET key is being pressed (d) When the mode is invalid (e) When a sequence number is being searched (f) When an alarm is on (g) When automatic running is in progress (h) When the NC is not ready (i) When the external workpiece number search signal and the external program number search signal are on

168

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

2. Stopping memory running (1) Press the FEED HOLD button.

When the FEED HOLD button is pressed, the FEED HOLD LED lights and the CYCLE START LED goes off. (i) When the axis is moving, the feed stops after deceleration. (ii) When it is being executed, the dwell is halted. (iii) Automatic running stops after M jj and S jj operations are executed. (1) When the SPINDLE STOP button is pressed, all operations stop. (2) When an M00 code is entered, the block that includes the M00 code is executed, then the operation automatically stops. (3) When an M01 code is entered with the M01 STOP button on, the operation automatically stops and the FEED HOLD LED lights.

169

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

5.3
REMOTE RUNNING (REMOT)

Machine running by a program stored in external memory is enabled by connecting FANUC input/output units or a host computer to the reader/punch interface of this machine tool. This section explains how to connect the Handy File FANUC I/O unit for remote operation of the machine, as an example. NOTE If a product other than FANUC products is connected to the reader/punch interface as an input/output unit, a problem may occur that the control unit of this machine tool cannot start operation of the product. The following explanation is applicable only to remote running enabled when FANUC input/output units are connected to the reader/punch interface.

5.3.1
Settings for Remote Running

To enable remote running, connect the communication cables of the input/output units to the reader/punch interface and set the parameters related to the interface. CNC Parameters Manual.

5.3.2
Remote Running Operation

1. Starting remote running (1) Connect the input/output device to the reader/punch interface of the machine operators panel. (2) Check the program format (ISO/EIA) of the input/output device. (3) Check the settings of the parameters related to the reader/punch interface, and other settings. (4) Set REMOTE MODE to ON on the QUICK screen.

(5) Cause the program screen to appear. (6) Select the mode selection key .

170

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

(7) Press the soft key [ " ], and the soft key [SL. SDL] appears provided that the I/O devices are connected correctly. (8) Press the soft key [FL. SDL], DIRECTORYscreen appears. and the FILE

(9) Press the soft key [SELECT], and the message SELECT FILE NUMBER = appears at the lower left section of the screen. (10)Enter the target file number and press .

(11)Press the soft key [EXEC], and the message CURRENT SELECTED: **** appears at the top of the screen. (12)Press the CYCLE START button , and the remote

operation starts and the corresponding lamp lights. 2. Stopping remote running Remote running is stopped in the same way memory running is stopped For details, see the next page. 3. When remote running is interrupted by MDI running or manual running Remote running can be interrupted by MDI running and manual running. See Section 5.2.2 in IV, Settings and Operations of Automatic Running. 4. Automatic running using a program in memory cannot be executed with REMOTE ON on the QUICK screen. Turn REMOTE to OFF if the remote operation is not to be done further.

171

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

5.4
SETTINGS AND OPERATIONS OF AUTOMATIC RUNNING 5.4.1
Single Block (SINGL BLOCK)
Single block is the function that executes one block of the program each time the CYCLE START button is pressed. (1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key to set the single block.

One block of the program is executed and the machine tool stops. When the CYCLE START button is pressed, the next block is executed and the machine tool stops. To release the single block mode press the SINGL BLOCK key again. NOTE 1 For G28 and G29, after the single block is executed, the machine tool stops even during machining. 2 The single block stop point in a canned cycle is any of the end point 1, 2, or 6 in the figure shown below.
1

5 Rapid traverse Cutting feed 4

3 For a tool change sequence, the machine tool stops at the specified point and the FEED HOLD lamp lights.

172

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

5.4.2
Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold or Stop

(1) Return to the feed hold mode. (2) Press the CYCLE START button.

The FEED HOLD lamp goes off when it is lit.

5.4.3
Manual Running Execution During Automatic Running

(1) Press the FEED HOLD button or the SINGL BLOCK button during automatic running to stop or halt the machine tool.

or

(2) Look at the position indicator and record the coordinates of the stop position. (3) Execute manual running (see 4. in IV). (4) Return the axis to the recorded coordinates (start point of manual running) while looking at the position indicator. (5) To restart automatic running, switch the mode to the original mode. (6) Press the CYCLE START button.

5.4.4
MDI Command Execution During Automatic Running

(1) Turn on the SINGL BLOCK key. The machine tool stops after one block of the program has been executed. (2) Set the MDI mode.

(3) Operate the MDI (see Section 5.1 in IV). (4) To restart automatic running, press the MEM mode selection button and then the CYCLE START button.

173

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE 1 Old modal data remains. If new modal data is needed, it must be registered. (Example: G code, travel during a canned cycle) 2 The modal data specified from the MDI after MDI operation affects the subsequent automatic running. 3 The MDI cannot be used to specify cutter compensation. 4 The MDI command cannot be executed when automatic running is being stopped by the feed hold.

5.4.5
Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE)

The Ffunction can be used to override feedrate for each 10% step between 0% and 200%.

5.4.6
M01 Stop (OPT STOP)

When the block that includes M01 is encountered, the instruction of that block is executed. After the block has been executed, the axes and spindle stop, and the coolant power supply is turned off, and the FEED HOLD LED lights. To validate M01, the M01 STOP key must be on. To restart the operation, press the CYCLE START button.

This LED lights when an optional stop occurs.)

When M00 is executed, the FEED HOLD LED lights (optional stop status) regardless of whether the M01 STOP key is on or off.

174

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

5. AUTOMATIC RUNNING [CNC OPERATION]

5.4.7
Optional Block Skip

This function is intended to skip program blocks that contain a slash (/). It is enabled/disabled by setting OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP on the QUICK SCREEN 31:SEQ.SELECTION to ON/OFF.

NOTE 1 The information of the block skipped by this function cannot be stored in the buffer register. When one block is skipped entirely, the next block is stored in the buffer register. 2 A slash must be placed at the beginning of the block to be skipped. If the block to be skipped does not begin with the slash, the portion between the slash and EOB is ignored.

5.4.8
Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW, TRVRS 25%, TRVRS 100%)
The rapid traverse rate override can be set to 100%, 25%, or LOW. If an override of 25% is applied when the rapid traverse rate is 48 m/min, the rapid traverse rate becomes about 12 m/min. When the rapid traverse override is set to LOW, the rapid traverse rate is 400 mm/minute. This override is applicable to the following rapid traverses: (1) Rapid traverse by G00 (2) Rapid traverse during a canned cycle (3) Rapid traverse at G27, G28, or G29 (4) Manual rapid traverse (5) Rapid traverse for manual return to the reference position (6) Rapid traverse in tool change sequence
175

6. TOOL CHANGE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

TOOL CHANGE

176

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

6. TOOL CHANGE

6.1 TOOL CHANGE PRECAUTIONS

(1) Never try to install the tool directly on the spindle since it is dangerous. Be sure to install it on the tool cartridge. (2) Never try to use tool arbors other than those specified. (See Item I.3, TOOLS for the tool arbors that can be used.) (3) When installing the tool to the tool cartridge, be sure to insert it in all the way to the end until the grip key is fully engaged in the keyway of the tool. Upon completion of the tool installation, confirm that the tool has been firmly secured without any play.

Tooling Grip

(4) Never try to install the tool on the tool cartridge which is located below the spindle.)

(5) During changing of tools, the single block mode is disabled. If tools are changed when the single block mode is set (for example, pressing the TOOL CHANGE key in the MDI mode), the machine cannot be stopped until the tool change operation is completed. (6) When the operation is stopped by pressing the FEED HOLD button, never try to move the Zaxis in the manual running mode. The unit will lose track of the coordinate and failure will occur.

177

6. TOOL CHANGE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

6.2
COMMANDS WITH M CODES

When specifying the tool change using the program or MDI, the following command needs to be given using the M06 code: After T, specify the tool to be indexed using a two digit number. M06 T VV ( VV : Tool No.) or M06 T VVV ( VVV : Tool group number) With this command, the tool having the specified number is selected in the shorter path.) In addition to the above, the following command may be used: (n: The nth tool from the current tool in the clockwise direction) The tool cartridge always rotates clockwise.) M06 Pn

NOTE 1 PS alarm (ATC alarm) is displayed when a tool number other than 01 to 14(*) are specified. 2 When a tool number other than 1 to 14(*) are specified for the n following P, the number minus multiple of 14(*) will be effective. For example, n will be 2 when n = 58 is specified. 3 Alarm 252 (ATC alarm) will be displayed when the tool change command is executed during the cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or canned cycle. To execute the tool change command, be sure to cancel the cutter compensation, tool length compensation, or canned cycle. (Commands G49 and G80 may be specified within the block for M06.) 4 When X and Y axes movement and a tool change are commanded within the same block (Example) G00 X500.0 M06 T02 In this case, the tool change operation is executed first. Then, at the same time the Z axis moves to the top, the turret begins to rotate, and the X (Y) axis begins to move. If the X (Y) axis is still moving even after the turret rotation is completed, the tool change operation is temporarily interrupted until the movement of the X (Y) axis is completed. Upon completion of the X (Y) axis movement, the tool change operation resumes. 5 If a specified tool has the same tool number as the currently selected tool, spindle orientation and return to the Zaxis reference position are performed, but tool change is not. * For the T21iCe series, up to 21.

178

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

6. TOOL CHANGE

6.3
TOOL CHANGE KEY

A tool change can be executed by pressing the tool change button in the MDI mode. When TOOL CHANGE key is pressed, the tool cartridge rotates clockwise to select the tool next to the current one.

179

6. TOOL CHANGE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

6.4
MEASURES WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS DURING TOOL CHANGE

The ROBODRILL series has a function for checking whether an arbor is mounted on the spindle. This function is designed to stop the machine for safety in an emergency situation, for example, when the pull stud of the arbor is broken during machining. If the reset button is pressed while the tools are being changed, tool change stops, and an alarm is issued. The following table lists how to recover from an incorrect tool change operation.
Description An incorrect When a tool is already tool number assigned to the specified tool was number. specified. When no tool is assigned to the specified tool number. The specified tool number has no tool assigned to it. The tool was changed with the tool of a unspecified tool number. The operator stopped the machine while the tool was being changed. When the machine was stopped with the EMERGENCY STOP button or <RESET> key. Perform automatic recovery. Perform automatic recovery. Action Correct the program.

Correct the program.

When the machine was Restart the machine. stopped with the STOP button. When the machine was stopped by opening the door. Close the door, then restart the machine.

The ROBODRILL is provided with an automatic tool change recovery program (described later) so a tool change alarm can be released easily. Most tool change alarms can be released using this program. For detailed information, see Section V4.

180

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

7. SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS

SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS

181

7. SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

7.1
ROTATION OF THE SPINDLE

The rotating direction of the spindle is defined when viewing the tip of the spindle from the spindle motor side. Spindle rotation key is lit depending on the direction of the spindle rotation. The spindle speed can be specified for each rotation using the address S and a number from two to four (five) digits. The unit of the number is min1. Rotation of the spindle can be controlled by either of the following two methods:

7.1.1
Method Using the M Code

In the AUTO or MDI mode, the spindle rotation can be controlled by the following M codes: M03: Rotates the spindle clockwise. M04: Rotates the spindle counterclockwise. M05: Stops the spindle motion after completing all the commands within a given block. N01 M03 S1500: Rotates the spindle clockwise at the speed of 1,500 min1. N02 S4000: Sets the spindle speed to 4,000 min1. N03 M04: Rotates the spindle counterclockwise. N04 M05: Stops the spindle.

Examples

7.1.2
Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Operators Panel

(1) Specify the spindle speed in the MDI mode. (2) Select one of the MANUAL modes. (3) When the spindle operation key is pressed, the LED goes on, and the spindle rotates. (The spindle rotates in the same direction as the direction in which the spindle rotated previously. When the spindle rotates for the first time after poweron, it rotates clockwise.) (4) When the spindle operation key is pressed again, the LED goes off, and spindle rotation stops.

NOTE 1 The spindle rotation can be stopped in any mode. Pressing this button during automatic operation stops the machine by effecting feed hold. 2 The lamp blinks during the rigid tapping mode. 3 If a spindle speed is not specified, pressing the key cannot cause the spindle to rotate. (When the safety door is closed)

182

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

7. SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS

7.1.3
Spindle Rotation When the Safety Door is Open

Even if the safety door is open, pressing the SPINDLE key causes the spindle to rotate under the following conditions. D The spindle rotates at a specified constant speed (with S commands ignored). The rotation speed is specified at FUNCTIONS on the QUICK screen 31 : SEQ. SELECTION. D Spindle overriding is ignored.

183

7. SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

7.2
SPINDLE OVERRIDE

The spindle speed may be overridden in all the running modes. Pressing the SPINDLE OVERRIDE [DOWN] or [UP] key can specify an override speed from 30% to 200% in 10% units to control the spindle speed. When 100% key is pressed, the spindle speed becomes that of S command.

Examples

With 80% override at S3000 3,000 80/100 = 2,400 (The spindle speed is 2,400 min1.) When the overridden spindle speed exceeds the spindles maximum speed, the spindle rotates at its maximum speed.

Examples

When an override of 120% is set at S7500 with a maximum spindle speed of 8,000 min1, the spindle speed is 8,000 min1 rather than 7,500 120/100 = 9,000 min1. (In case of standard specification.) NOTE The override setting for the spindle is not valid in the tapping cycle (G74 and G84).

184

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

7. SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS

7.3
SPINDLE LOAD METER

The load meter is displayed on the spindle monitor screen. Select this screen according to the following procedure. 1) Press the + key to cause the system screen to appear.

2) Press the soft key [ ] to turn over the soft key pages. 3) Press the soft key [SP. parameter]. 4) Press the soft key [SP. monitor].
50 Load meter reading (%) 100 150 200

The T14/21iCe standard spindle controls the spindle motor in a unique way. The continuous rating varies with the speed. Set the load meter according to the list below.
Speed (min1) Continuous rating (%) 10-minute rating (%), 25%ED 1500 or less 53 1750 62 2000 71 148 2250 80 2500 89 2800 or greater 100

* 25%ED means that the motor is turned on for 2.5 minutes and off for

7.5 minutes on a cycle time of 10 minutes.

185

7. SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

7.4
SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19)

Spindle orientation means to stop the spindle at a position specified with a parameter. This is done using the M19 command. The machine is factoryset so that the spindle stops with the spindle key parallel to the Yaxis. Do not change this angle. (Changing this angle disables automatic tool change recovery operation.) NOTE 1 This command remains effective until the spindle rotation command (M00 or M01), spindle stop command (M05), or program end auxiliary function (M00 or M01) is issued. 2 Issuing this command during rigid tapping generates an EX alarm (No. 1007). (M19 cannot be specified during tapping) 3 Do not issue this command during a canned cycle. Fine boring (G76) and back boring (G87) cause automatic spindle orientation.

186

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

7. SPINDLESPEED FUNCTIONS

7.5
SPINDLE MOTOR CHARACTERISTIC

Output characteristics
6 5.5 5 Output kW 4 3.7 3 2 1 0 0 1500 2000 2800 4000 6000 8000 0 0 10 min. rating (40% ED) 40 39.4 Torque Nm Continuous rating 30 20 12.5 10 Continuous rating 10 min. rating

Torque characteristics

1500 2000 2800

4000

6000

8000

Spindle speed (min1) Note) The graphs shown above are obtained when the efficiency is 1.

Spindle speed (min1)

Fig.7.5 (a) Spindle Motor Diagram (standard)

Output characteristics
4 3.7 3 10 min. rating (40%ED) 30 25 23.5 20 15 10 Continuous rating 5 4.8 0 0 1500 3000 6000 9000 12000 15000 0 1500 3000

Torque characteristics

10 min. rating (40%ED)

2 1.5 1 0

Continuous rating

6000

9000

12000

15000

Spindle speed (min1) Note) The graphs shown above are obtained when the efficiency is 1.

Spindle speed (min1)

Fig.7.5 (b) Spindle Motor Diagram (15000min1)

187

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

188

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

8.1
CNC SCREEN 8.1.1
Alarm Message
If an alarm occurs, [ALARM MESSAGE] is automatically displayed. (When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0)

NOTE 1 If an alarm occurs during edit operation using background editing, the alarm is displayed on PROGRAM without screen switching. While you are using background editing, do not press the RESET key. Otherwise, automatic machine operation would stop. To release an alarm which occurs during background editing, press any key.

189

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[Displaying ALARM MESSAGE] (1) Press the key, then the or key.

(2) Press soft key [ALARM].

8.1.2
Operator Message

When an operator message is issued, [OPERATOR MESSAGE] is automatically displayed. (When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0)

[Displaying OPERATOR MESSAGE] (1) Press the key, then the or key.

(2) Press soft key [MSG].

190

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

8.2
QUICK SCREEN 8.2.1
Common to Screens
When an alarm or operator message is issued, it is displayed at the top of the screen. (When bit 7 of NC parameter No. 3111 is set to 0) One message is displayed at a time. An alarm message is displayed in red and an operator message is displayed in magenta.

8.2.2
Diagnose/Alarm Screen

On [33:DIAGNOSE/ALARM], you can check the displayed alarm, operator, and diagnostic messages. (See the figure above.) [ALARM] Window displays all alarms being displayed. (The [ALARM P.PAGE] and [ALARM N.PAGE] soft keys can be used.) [DIAGNOSTIC] Window displays all operator and diagnostic messages being displayed. (The [DGN P.PAGE] and [DGN N.PAGE] soft keys can be used.) Diagnostic messages are numbered 0 to 999. Operator messages are numbered starting with 2000.

191

8. DISPLAYING ALARM, OPERATOR, AND DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

8.3
COMMON TO CNC SCREEN AND QUICK SCREEN

Pressing the

key on the operators panel displays [MESSAGE]

Window in the center of the screen.

Pressing the

key again closes [MESSAGE] WINDOW.

For details of each message, see the alarm list and operator and diagnostic message list in Appendix.

When a particular window (such as the OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window) of the manual guide screen is displayed, close it. Such a window cannot be displayed simultaneously.

192

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

9. RELEASING OVERTRAVEL

9
Examples

RELEASING OVERTRAVEL

The term overtravel refers to a fact that the tool goes beyond a range specified for each axis. If an overtravel occurs, an alarm is generated. To reset the overtravel, it is necessary to return the tool to within a specified range. Overtravel An alarm from No. 500 to 507 is displayed on the screen. 500: Overtravel +X How to release An overtravel is released according to the following procedure. 1 Put the machine in the manual operation mode. 2 The axes on which an overtravel occurred are displayed on the screen. Select one using the axis selection key. 3 Rotate the manual pulse generator in the direction opposite to the direction indicated on the screen to place the tool within a range of stroke. 4 Pressing the <RESET> key clears the alarm indication and reset the alarm.

193

10. RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

10

RELEASING THE TOOL TRAPPING STATE

If the cutter bites into the workpiece and the machine stops, follow the procedure below to release the state. (1) Press Reset key on the operators panel to release the alarm. .

(2) Press Manual operation mode key (3) Press Z axis key .

(4) Turn the manual pulse generator clockwise and pull out the cutter from the workpiece.

NOTE 1 When a Tslot cutter is trapped, it cannot be pull out upward. Remove the cutter from the arm bar. 2 When a tap is trapped, the rigid tapping return function is available. See Subsection IV 1.3.10.

194

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES

11

INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES

195

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES

B85014EN/01

11.1
OVERVIEW

To use an external device other than the Handy File for input/output using the RS232C interface, change parameters to suit the device. (For normal input/output using the Handy File, the factoryset defaults need not be changed.) (1) Ordinary input/output To use an ordinary input/output unit, change the following parameters according to the device you are going to use. No. 0100: Output format No. 0101: Stop bit, etc. No. 0102: Input/output unit specification number No. 0103: Baud rate Make sure that parameter No. 0020 (I/O channel) is set to 0. (2) Memory card Set 4 to No. 0020 (I/O channel) (3) Remote buffer (option) To use a remote buffer, set parameter No. 0020 (I/O channel) to 3. Change the following parameters according to the device you are going to use. No. 0100: Output format No. 0131: Stop bit, etc. No. 0132: Input/output unit specification number No. 0133: Baud rate No. 0134: Protocol selection No. 0135: RS422/RS232C selection, etc. (4) When the data server (option) is used Set No. 0020 (I/O channel) to 5. NOTE 1 Remote buffer connection Connect the remote buffer to the DSUB 25 connector in the cabinet (when RS232C is being used). When using RS422, remove the JD28A connector from the FS16i option board in the rear of the display device and connect it to JD6A. 2 To use a remote buffer, the customers should prepare cables to connect it to external equipment by themselves. The RS232C connector on the machine operators panel may be used for this purpose. In this case, remove connector JD36A from the FS16i main PC board in the back side of display and connect it to JD5C on the optional board. 3 For detailed descriptions about the remote buffer, refer to the Descriptions: Additional Information on the FANUC Series 15i/150iMODEL A (Supplement for Remote Buffer) from this manual. 4 For details of the data server, refer to FAST Ethernet Board FAST/DATA SERVER OPERATORS MANUAL.

196

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES

11.2
DETAILS OF THE RELATED PARAMETERS

ROBODRILL has three channels of input/output device interfaces as the reader/puncher interface. The input/output device to be used is specified by setting the channel connected to that device in setting parameter I/O CHANNEL. The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in parameters for that channel in advance. For channel 1, two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output device data are provided. The following shows the interrelation between the input/output device interface parameters for the channels. Channel 2 cannot be used. Channel 3 (remote buffer) is optional. Channel 5 (data server) is optional.

Input/output channel number (parameter No. 0020)

0101 0020 I/O CHANNEL I/O CHANNEL=0 (channel 1) 0103 0111 I/O CHANNEL=1 (channel 1) 0113 0121 I/O CHANNEL=2 (channel 2) 0123 0131 0132 I/O CHANNEL=3 (channel 3) 0134 0135 0133 0122 0112 0102

Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Stop bit and other data Number specified for the input/output device Baud rate Selection of protocol Selection of RS-422 or RS-232C, and other data

Specify a channel for an input/output device. I/O CHANNEL =0: Channel 1 =1: Channel 1 =2: Channel 2 (Not used) =3: Channel 3 =4: Memory card =5: Data server

0020

I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device

Setting entry is acceptable. [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 5 [I/O CHANNEL] An input/output device used is selected. 0 : The device on channel 1 is selected. (Input/output device connected to JD36A on the mother board)
197

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES

B85014EN/01

1 : The device on channel 1 is selected. (Input/output device connected to JD36A on the mother board) 2 : The device on channel 2 is selected. (Input/output device connected to JD36B on the mother board) 3 : The device on channel 3 is selected. (Input/output device connected to the serial communication board) 4 : Memory card 5 : Data server NOTE 1 The input/output device used can be selected also on the setting screen. Using the setting screen is a more common method for selecting the device. 2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific channel must be set in parameters for that channel in advance. I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to channel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, the number of stop bits, and other data are provided separately. 3 JD36A, JD36B, JD28A, and JD6A are numbers of connectors on the printed circuit boards.

Series 16 MAIN CPU BOARD OPTION-1 BOARD

Channel 1 JD36A RS232C

Channel 2 JD36B RS232C

Channel 3 JD28A RS232C JD6A RS422

Reader/ puncher I/O CHANNEL=0 or I/O CHANNEL=1

Reader/ puncher I/O CHANNEL=2

Host computer I/O CHANNEL=3

Host computer I/O CHANNEL=3

198

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES

(1) Parameters common to all channels

#7 ENS #6 #5 #4 #3 NCR #2 #1 CTV #0

0100

[Data type] [CTV]

[NCR]

[ENS]

Setting entry is acceptable. Bit Character counting for TV check on controlling (in the comment section). 0 : Not performed 1 : Performed Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code 0 : LF, CR, CR are output. 1 : Only LF is output. Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code 0 : The NULL code is ignored. 1 : An alarm is generated. (2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)

0101

#7 NFD

#6

#5

#4

#3 ASI

#2

#1

#0 SB2

[Data type] Bit [SB2] The number of stop bits 0: 1 1: 2 [ASI] Code used at data input 0 : EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished) 1 : ASCII code [NFD] Feed before and after the data at data output 0 : Output 1 : Not output NOTE When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.

0102

Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

[Data type] Bit Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table 11.2 (a).

199

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES

B85014EN/01

Table 11.2 (a) Set Value and Input/Output Device Set value 0 1 2 3 Input/output device RS-232-C (Set the parameters to 0 other than those listed below.) FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2) FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1) FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adapter FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H, FANUC Handy File Not used Portable tape reader FANUC PPR FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H

4 5 6

0103

Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

[Data type] Byte Set the specification number of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0, with a set value in Table 11.2 (b).
Table 11.2 (b) Baud Rate Settings Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 Baud rate 50 100 110 150 200 300 Set value 7 8 9 10 11 12 Baud rate 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

(3) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)

#7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2

0111

[Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)

[Data type] Bit Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table 11.2 (a).

200

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES

0113

Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)

[Data type] Bit Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1, with a value in Table 11.2 (b). (4) Parameters for channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2)
#7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2

0121

[Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)

[Data type] Bit Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 11.2 (a).
0123 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)

[Data type] Bit Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 11.2 (b). (5) Parameters for channel 3 (I/O CHANNEL=3)
#7 NFD #6 #5 #4 #3 ASI #2 #1 #0 SB2

0131

[Data type] Bit These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3. The meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101. NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.

0132

Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 3)

[Data type] Bit Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3, with a number in Table 11.2 (a).
0133 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3)

[Data type] Bit Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 3 according to the Table 11.2 (c).
201

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR DETAILED OPERATIONS EXTERNAL DEVICES

B85014EN/01

NOTE Valid data range: 1 to 15 (up to a baud rate of 86400 bps) for the RS422 interface or 1 to 12 (up to a baud rate of 19200 bps) for the RS232C interface.
Table 11.2 (c) Baud Rate Settings Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Baud rate 50 100 110 150 200 300 600 1200 Set value 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Baud rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 76800 86400

NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.

#7 0134

#6

#5 CLK

#4 NCD

#3

#2 SYN

#1 PRY

#0

[Data type] Bit [PRY] Parity bit 0 : Not used 1 : Used [SYN] NC reset/alarm in protocol B 0: Not reported to the host 1: Reported to the host with SYN and NAK codes [NCD] CD (signal quality detection) of the RS232C interface 0 : Checked 1 : Not checked [CLK] Baud rate clock when the RS422 interface is used 0 : Internal clock 1 : External clock

202

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

11. INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS FOR EXTERNAL DEVICES

0135

#7 RMS

#6

#5

#4

#3 R42

#2 PRA

#1 ETX

#0 ASC

[Data type] Bit [ASC] Communication code except NC data 0 : ISO code 1 : ASCII code [ETX] End code for protocol A or extended protocol A 0 : CR code in ASCII/ISO 1 : ETX code in ASCII/ISO NOTE Use of ASCII/ISO is specified by ASC. [PRA] Communication protocol 0 : Protocol B 1 : Protocol A [R42] Interface 0 : RS232C interface 1 : RS422 interface [RMS] State of remote/tape operation when protocol A is used 0: Always 0 is returned. 1: Contents of the change request of the remote/tape operation in the SET command from the host is returned. NOTE When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before operation is continued.

203

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

12

QUICK EDITOR

204

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

12.1
OVERVIEW

QUICK EDITOR is a fullscreen editor which is the exclusive one to ROBODRILL and provides various functions to edit a CNC program on the QUICK SCREEN.

205

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

12.2
FEATURES AND NOTES OF QUICK EDITOR 12.2.1
Features of QUICK EDITOR
(1) QUICK EDITOR provides an editing area of 1000 lines. Each line can consist of up to 46 characters. (2) Each editing operation can be performed at an arbitrary position in the editing area by using page key, cursor key, or cursor jump function (see Subsec. 12.5.5). (3) It is unnecessary to enter EOB (end of block). QUICK EDITOR interprets one line in the editing area as one block in principle, and add EOB to each line when a program is registered in the CNC. But some lines in the editing area can be treated as one block by using continuous line function (see Subsec. 12.5.9). (4) It is possible to edit the machining program in the operation. Consequently the machining program can be modified while the machining processes are checked. But the program is not applied immediately because the program cannot be registered in the CNC in the operation (see Subsec. 12.5.3). (5) G and M codes can be specified very easily. Consequently the number of use of alphabet is reduced and the fact that no address key exists on the operators panel does not cause inconvenience. Furthermore addresses which follow G or M code are displayed automatically. This is very useful to a CNC programmer.

12.2.2
Notes
(1) The program with lines more than 1000 cannot be edited (created). (2) During background editing, a program cannot be edited, cannot be registered, and cannot be deleted by QUICK EDITOR. (3) If the alphabet keyboard type operators panel is provided, some functions cannot be used. (4) Before registering or deleting the program currently being executed, note the contents of the notes appended to each description. Similarly, before performing other operations, note the contents of the relevant notes.

206

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

12.3
QUICK EDITOR SCREEN 12.3.1
Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen

This chapter describes how to display the QUICK EDITOR screen and how to select each editing function.

QUICK EDITOR screen is in the QUICK SCREEN (screen number: 23).Procedures for displaying QUICK EDITOR screen are as follows. (1) The way by using softkeys Press the softkey [OPERATON] for screen change.

The menu of OPERATION group is displayed on the softkey for screen change. Then press [QUICK EDITOR].

(2) The way by inputting screen number and page key Press 2, 3, and page key on the operators panel because QUICK EDITOR screen number is 23.
P.PAGE

2
PROG

3
SET

or

N.PAGE

QUICK EDITOR screen (next page) is displayed by the above way (1) or (2).

Current mode

207

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE The last program will be read and displayed on the editing area automatically after QUICK EDITOR screen is selected. But if QUICK EDITOR screen is displayed for the first time after power on, the program whose number is selected in the CNC screen is displayed.

12.3.2
Browse Mode and Edit Mode

For [QUICK EDITOR], there are two modes: browse mode and edit mode. (1) Browse mode You can only reference or delete existing programs. You cannot create a new program or edit any program. (2) Edit mode You can create a new program and edit a program using various edit functions described later. [QUICK EDITOR] is in the browse mode immediately after selected. In this mode, you can reference a program, but cannot create a new program or edit any program. Pressing soft key [EDIT] displays the cursor and puts the screen in the edit mode. You can create and edit a program. The current mode is displayed at the upper right of the edit area.

12.3.3
Selecting an Edit Function

Pressing soft key [EDIT] on [QUICK SCREEN] shown on the previous page changes the displayed soft keys as shown below. You can create and edit a program. (Edit mode) In this mode, the screen cannot be changed because the leftside soft keys are also assigned edit functions. To switch to another screen, press END.

Pressing the rightmost soft key changes the edit functions assigned to the rightside soft keys as follows:

For details of each edit function, see Section 12.5, Quick Editor Edit Functions.

208

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

12.4
INPUT FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR 12.4.1
Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols
Pressing the key on the operators panel displays alphabetic

characters and symbols in the soft key area. You can press a desired soft key to enter the corresponding character or symbol. For entering alphabetic characters and symbols, there are two modes: HALF mode and FULL mode. (1) HALF mode (frequently used alphabetic characters and symbols)
PAGE

MODE

Switching to the FULL mode

(2) FULL mode (all alphabetic characters and symbols)

Switching to the HALF mode

Pressing the soft key area.

key again displays the names of edit functions in the

NOTE An operators panel having a full keyboard does not have this function.

209

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

12.4.2
Simple Input of G and M Codes

When G or M code is entered, addresses possible to follow the G code or the M code are displayed in the window. Enter numerical values if necessary. In the window for G code, some G codes can also be entered. Only words specified in the window are entered in the editing area by pressing the softkey [OK] or <INSERT> key on the operators panel. If the softkey [CANCEL] is pressed, no word is entered in the editing area. When no numerical value is entered in the window, [CANCEL], [OK], and <INSERT> key are the same function. A numerical value entered in the window once is canceled by pressing <INPUT> key after moving the cursor. NOTE The G code and the M code must be specified with 2 digits long.

210

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

12.4.3
Simple Input of Words by Input Key

Addresses which are frequently used independently of G or M code are displayed in the window by pressing <INPUT> key on the operators panel. Words can be entered in the editing area similarly to 12.4.2 Simple input of G and M code without using alphabet. See the previous page for details of the use of the operators panel (such as the functions of the [OK], [CANCEL], and <INSERT> keys). The above function, which is performed using the <INPUT> key, is useful for repeating a canned cycle.

12.4.4
Other Operations
(1) To enter a space, use the [INSERT] key on the operators panel. (2) To delete the character to the left of the cursor, use the [CANCEL] key. (3) To delete the character at the cursor, use the [DELETE] key.

211

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

12.5
EDITING FUNCTION OF QUICK EDITOR 12.5.1
Selecting the Program

The above window is displayed by pressing the softkey [PROG. SELECT] . There are two means to select the program. (1) Select a desired program number from the program list moving the cursor in the window, and press the softkey [SELECT] . (2) Enter a desired program number by using numeric key on the operators panel, (the <INPUT> key need not be pressed) and press the softkey [SELECT] . When a desired program is selected by using the above means (1) or (2), if the program is already registered, the corresponding program is displayed on the editing area. If the program number is for an unregistered program, the only program number is displayed and program creation begins. NOTE 1 In the browse mode, you can select only an existing program. 2 In the edit mode, you cannot select any protected program. 3 The protected program cannot be selected. 4 The program with lines more than 999 cannot be edited and created.

212

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

12.5.2
Deleting the Program

The above window is displayed by pressing the softkey [PROG. DELETE]. To delete a program, deletion of multiple programs (with specifying a range) either of the following can be selected: the deletion of one program or the deletion of all programs. (1) Deleting one program Select a desired program number from the program list moving the cursor in the window, or enter a desired program number by using numeric key on the operators panel (the <INPUT> key need not be pressed). Then press the softkey [DELETE]. When pressing [DELETE], the following message and softkey are displayed. The program with the specified program number is deleted by pressing [EXEC].

(2) Deletion of multiple programs Pressing soft key PLURAL displays the following window. Enter the numbers of the first and last programs to be deleted to specify a deletion range.

After specifying the deletion range, press soft key EXEC. (3) Deleting all programs The following message and softkey are displayed by pressing the softkey [ALL PROGS.]. All programs registered in the CNC are deleted by pressing [EXEC].
213

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE 1 When the machine is in the operation, the executing program cannot be deleted. 2 The main program cannot be deleted during execution of a subprogram. 3 While a subprogram is being executed, it is possible to delete another subprogram called by the same main program. But if a subprogram with the deleted subprogram number is not registered before the subprogram is called, alarm (No. 078) occurs. 4 A protected program cannot be deleted. 5 When the machine is in the operation, all programs cannot be deleted. 6 When the deletion of all programs is executed, all programs other than those which have been protected (those having a program number between 9000 and 9999) will be cleared.

214

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

12.5.3
Registering the Program

The following message and softkey are displayed by pressing the softkey [REGISTER]. Then the program can be registered in the CNC by pressing [EXEC]. (1) When a new program is registered

(2) When a program with the same number has already been registered

NOTE 1 When the machine is in the operation, the executing program cannot be registered until the operation is finished. But it is possible to edit it. 2 After the executing program is edited, if screen change or program selection is performed, a message which asks whether to register the program is displayed. (See section 12.5.14. ) As described in Note 1, however, [YES] cannot be selected. If [NO] is selected, the change will not be reflected in the program. In this case, screen change or program selection can be executed by the following procedure. (1)Change the program number into an unregistered number, and register it. (2)Perform screen change or program selection. (3)After the operation is finished, return the program number (1) to the former one, and register it. (4)The program registered in step (1) is no longer required (because it was reregistered in step (3)). Delete it. 3 While a subprogram is being executed, it is possible to edit and register another subprogram called by the same main program. But if the subprogram is called in the midst of the registration, alarm (No. 078) occurs. 4 If an inappropriate format for the CNC exists in a program, the registration might end in failure. In this case, register the program again after modification on the inappropriate format. 5 If the power is turned off without registering a edited program, the modification become null. 6 Always enter a fourdigit program number following O in the first line.

215

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

12.5.4
Copy and Move (by Line)
The above softkey is displayed by pressing the softkey [COPY/MOVE]. But [EXEC] is not displayed when this function is selected for the first time after displaying QUICK EDITOR screen. [EXEC] is used to insert the range specified previously or to insert the range in another program.

Procedure for copying (1) The following softkey is displayed by pressing the softkey [COPY].

(2) Move the cursor to the start of the range to be copied and press the softkey [START]. Then the following softkey is displayed.

(3) Specify the range to be copied by moving the cursor. Then the range is displayed reversely. The range is specified by pressing the softkey [END] and then the display is returned to a normal one.

(4) Executing (a) Copying the specified range in the same program Move the cursor to the line at which the range is to be inserted and press the softkey [EXEC] . If you want to copy the same range successively, press [COPY/MOVE] and [EXEC] . (b) Copying the specified range in another program Press the softkey [CANCEL] first. (The specified range is not lost by pressing [CANCEL].) Press the softkey [PROG. SELECT] and select a program in which the range is to be inserted. After the program is displayed, move the cursor to the line at which the range is to be inserted and press the softkey [COPY/MOVE] and [EXEC] . Procedure for moving Moving is the same as copying, except that the specified range is deleted.

216

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

NOTE 1 If the program will exceed 1000 lines by copying, copying cannot be executed. 2 The range to be copied or moved cannot be specified by the character. 3 The range to be copied or moved can be specified up to 100 lines.

12.5.5
Cursor Jump
The above window and softkey are displayed by pressing the softkey [CURSOR JUMP] . Select from the softkey.

[TOP] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cursor is moved to the top of the program. [GO TO LINE] . . . . . . . When the line number of the destination of jump is entered according to the message, the cursor is positioned to the specified line. [BOTTOM] . . . . . . . . . The cursor is moved to the bottom of the program.

12.5.6
Search for the Specified Word

The above window is displayed by pressing the softkey [SEARCH]. The [EXEC ] soft key is used to perform downward search, and the [EXEC ] soft key is used to perform upward search. Upon entering a word for which a search is to be made, it is displayed in reverse video at the bottom of the window. Press the [EXEC ] or [EXEC ] soft key after entering the word. The window is closed and the cursor is positioned to the point at which the specified word was first found.
217

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

If the specified word is not found, the message THE WORD IS NOT FOUND. is displayed. That word for which a search was made most recently remains stored in the system. Therefore, to subsequently search for the same word again, it is only necessary to press [SEARCH] then [EXEC][EXEC ]. The word itself does not have to be entered again. Pressing [SEARCH] causes the word for which a search was last made, if any, to appear at the bottom of the window. NOTE The word to be searched for can be specified up to 10 letters.

12.5.7
Entering a Macro Statement

You can simply enter words frequently used for creating custom macros. Pressing soft key [ENTERING A MACRO STATEMENT] displays the following window:

To input a character displayed in the window in the edit area, move the cursor to the character to be input and press INPUT. NOTE When the window is displayed, the cursor in the window is moved. Before using this function, move the cursor to the position in which a character is to be input.

218

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

12.5.8
Entering a Comment

Pressing soft key [COMMENT SECTION] displays the following [COMMENT SECTION] Window:

When you enter a character string, it is temporarily displayed at the bottom of the window. After entry, press soft key [EXEC]. The window is closed and the input comment enclosed by parentheses is inserted or overwritten in the cursor position. NOTE A comment input using this function cannot extend over multiple lines. You can check the positions of the parentheses at the bottom of the window to see the allowable length for inputting a comment in the current position.

12.5.9
Setting and Cancel of Continuous Line

(a)

Move the cursor to the desired line and press the softkey [CONT. LINE]. Then the mark of + is displayed at the right side of the line. (See the above (a).) The mark of + means that a line which has the mark is followed by the next line. And those lines are treated as one block. If you want to cancel this function, move the cursor to the disired line and press the softkey [CONT.LINE] again. Then the mark of + disappears and the treatment as one block is canceled.
219

12. QUICK EDITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE This function cannot be used at the bottom of the editing area.

12.5.10
Inserting a Line

A line is inserted by pressing the softkey [INSERT 1 LINE] and then the cursor is moved to the head of the line. NOTE If the bottom line (line 999) of the editing area is not empty, this function cannot be executed.

12.5.11
Deleting a Line

The current line is deleted by pressing the softkey [DELETE 1 LINE].

12.5.12
Setting of Inserting or Overwriting Mode

Pressing the [ALTER] key on the operators panel switches back and forth between the insert mode and writeover mode. The currently selected mode is displayed at the upper right of the edit area.

12.5.13
Selecting the Function

Pressing soft key [FUNCTION SELECTION] displays the following window. You can sets the function of the up and down arrow keys to [ONLY UP AND DOWN] or [GO TO LEFT AFTER THAT]. Then, select a function of the selected item by pressing the [SELECT] or [SELECT] soft key. Pressing the [END] soft key closes the window and sets the selected function.

220

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

12. QUICK EDITOR

12.5.14
Screen Change and Program Selection after Editing

After editing a program, if screen change or program selection is performed without registering the program, the following message and softkey are displayed. Then select from the softkey in accordance with the message. When changes are made to a read program, UPDATED is displayed at the upper left of the screen.

[YES] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen change or program selection is performed after the current program is registered. [NO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen change or program selection is performed without registering the current program. [CANCEL] . . . . . . . . . . Screen change or program selection is not performed.

221

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13

QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING (SUPER C.A.P iM)

222

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.1
OVERVIEW (SUPER C.A.P iM)

(1) This section uses some abbreviated names as follows: (a) Conversational programming using SUPER C.A.P iM is referred to as the conversational function. (b) A part program created and edited by conversational programming using SUPER C.A.P iM is referred to as a conversational program. (c) A part program created and edited in the NC format is referred to as an NC statement. (2) This section briefly describes the conversational function. For details including the operation, setting data, notes and cautions, and so forth of each function, refer to FANUC SUPER C.A.P iM OPERATORS MANUAL.

223

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.2
CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 13.2.1
Operation
(1) Creating and editing a conversational program (a) Study the settings of jigs and tools while viewing the machining drawings. Keep a record of the study together with the machining drawings. 1 Which program number is to be assigned? (If plural programs already exist, a unique number must be assigned. ) 2 Where is the reference point in a workpiece coordinate syetem? (In general, the center of an air chuck or a corner of the mouth piece of a machine vise is selected. ) In addition, determine whether to machine multiple workpiece. 3 Which tools are used? Which turret numbers are assigned to the tools? 4 Which surface is used as the reference surface for tool length compensation setting ? (For example, the Z axis coordinate where the tool tip contacts the workpiece surface is used.) (b) Upon completion of these studies, proceed to the creation and editing of a conversational program. 1 Create a cutting condition file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.1. 2 Create a tool file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.2. 3 Create a pre tool file. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.3. 4 Set a workpiece coordinate system. A detailed explanation is provided in subsec. 13.3.5. 5 Create and edit a conversational program. A detailed explanation is provided in sections 13.4. , and 13.5. (2) Conversational program checking and execution 1 Mount a tool on the turret, then measure and set tool length compensation and cutter compensation data. 2 In multiple workpiece machining, set multiple workpiece setting as required. 3 Use the drawing functions (tool path drawing, animated simulation) to check a created machining program. See Section 13.6. 4 Select the conversational program subject to execution. 5 Perform test machining in the same way as for memory operation. If there is a problem, correct the program.
224

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.2.2
Notes

Note the restrictions on the conversational function as described below. (1) Cutting condition file/automatic cutting condition determination function (a) Even if the cutting condition file data is set again, no spindle speed and feedrate already edited in the conversational program change after a conversational program is created and edited. (b) With the conversational function, the automatic cutting condition determination function determines a spindle speed and feedrate at the time of program creation. Note that the above function uses only data set in the cutting condition file and the number of teeth on the tool in the tool file for its computation. However, actual machining requires some changes after initial setting. For example, peck drilling requires the setting of a slower feedrate to match the hole depth. End milling requires different feedrates for side cutting and grooving. In these cases, change a spindle speed and feedrate determined during conversational program creation. (2) Tool file/pretool file/automatic pretool selection function (a) Even if the tool file or pre tool file is set again, the tools and related conditions set in the conversational program already edited does not change after conversational program creation and editing. Tool name is allotted to each tool ID number beforehand. (3) Functions for random and pattern machining in multiple quantities (a) For multiple workpiece machining, a range of functions are available. These are the allcopy (random) function, allcopy (pattern) function, group copy (random) function, group copy (pattern) function, and group copy (rotation) function. Use the allcopy (random and pattern) functions in the process immediately following initialization. Use the group copy (random, pattern, and rotation) functions immediately after initialization, or in the process immediately after an allcopy operation if selected. Note that the allcopy (random) function and the allcopy (pattern) function cannot be used together in the same program. (b) The allcopy (random) function can machine up to six workpieces, placed in arbitrary positions according, to the same machining program. The allcopy (random) function uses workpiece coordinate systems 1 through 6 (G54 through G59) for workpiece positioning. When the allcopy (random) function is used, machining is performed by changing the settings of workpiece coordinate systems 1 through 6 (G54 through G59).

225

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

If a program is created without first setting the workpiece positions on the data setting screen of the allcopy (random) function, the program is executed using the workpiece coordinate system settings available when the program is started. If workpiece positions are set on the data setting screen of the allcopy (random) function, the settings of the workpiece coordinate systems before the program is started will differ from those after the program is terminated. (c) The allcopy (pattern) function can perform multiple workpiece machining based on a displacement in the X and Y directions, according to the same program. No limit is imposed on the number of workpieces to be machined. The allcopy (pattern) function uses workpiece coordinate system 6 (G56) for workpiece positioning. When the allcopy (pattern) function is used, machining is performed by changing the setting of workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59) for each workpiece position. The setting of workpiece coordinate system 6 (G59) before the program is started differs from that after the program is terminated. (d) The group copy (random) function or group copy (pattern) function is used for multiple workpiece machining at arbitrary positions, or at intervals on the XY plane, according to the machining pattern of a program. The group copy (rotation) function is used to rotate and copy a machining pattern of a program on the XY plane. (e) In multiple workpiece machining, the workpiece coordinate system of each machining data setting screen is ignored; only the workpiece coordinate system specified on the multiple workpiece machining screen is valid. (f) For details of the multiple workpiece machining function, refer to the FANUC Super CAP iM Operators Manual.

(4) Tool compensation (a) The following shows the tool length compensation command in the conversational function:

G 90 G 00 G 43 Z ** H ** ; Tool compensation number Input data at common safety Z point

Accordingly, as the amount of tool length compensation, set the relative Z axis coordinate where the tool tip contacts the workpiece (or jig) reference plane on the table. See 13.3.4 Tool Geometry Compensation for how to specify it. The above instructions do not include G17 (plane specification) . So if G18 or G19 remains as modal before the conversational program is executed, the tool may move along the X or Y axis when the instruction above is executed.
226

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

(b) Cutter compensation C is used for cutter compensation when the conversational function is used. So, as the amount of cutter compensation, set the radius of a tool. See 13.3.4 Tool Geometry Compensation for how to specify it. (5) Setting a coordinate system for a workpiece (a) With the conversational function, select a number from 1 to 5 for COORDINATE on each conversational data input screen. Never use work piece coordinate system 6. (b) When a conversational program operation creates a local coordinate system as in machining multiple workpieces, a local coordinate system available until then is cancelled. (6) Other conversational program editing operations (a) A conversational program can insert no comments in parentheses. (b) If the machine tool is running at the time of conversational program creation and editing, background editing is selected automatically. Except for this case, the current mode is switched to the edit mode automatically at the time of conversational program creation and editing. (c) When using the conversational function for background editing, if an alarm occurs in the conversational mode, do not press the <RESET> key. Otherwise, the program being executed in the foreground will stop. Once the foreground program stops, it cannot be restarted. To reset this alarm, press the <CAN> key. (7) Restrictions on program execution (a) Be sure to execute a conversational program from the beginning of a program. (b) No conversational program can be executed, with the mirror image set on. (c) Conversational program cannot be called by G66. (Program initialization specifies the cancellation of modal calling. ) (8) External I/O (a) No offset value for multiple workpiece machining can input/output to an external memory through the reader/puncher interface.

227

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.3
SETTING SEVERAL DATA

The following data must be specified before a conversational program can be created. (a) Cutting condition file : This file contains data from which cutting conditions are derived for automatic setting according to the workpiece and tool materials. The file initially contains cutting conditions for seven types of workpiece materials. Select [CUTTING CONDITION FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data. (b) Tool file : This file contains the specified tool materials and dimensions. A tool name, tool length, and cutter compensation number are assigned to each tool ID number beforehand, such that the tool ID numbers cannot be changed. Select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data. : This file specifies the tools used in preparatory cutting. The tools may include a drill used before the final cutting, such as tapping, in multitoolmachining, as typified in the case of prepared holes. Select [PRETOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data.

(c) Pre tool file

(d) Tool geometry compensation : For cutter compensation, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data for end mills, face milling cutters, and chamfering tools. For tool length compensation, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data for all tools. Alternatively, select [MAGAZINE DATA] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN]. Tool compensation number (Hcode, Dcode) is allotted to each tool ID number beforehand. Therefore specified data is set to the corresponding tool compensation number automatically. (e) Workpiece coordinate system : Positional data used as a reference in mounting a workpiece is specified. Use [COORDINATES/OFFSET SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN] to set data.
228

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

The above data can be specified in the QUICK SCREEN. A detailed explanations are provided in the following sections.

13.3.1
Cutting Condition File

For each of two types of tool materials, cutting conditions (cutting speeds, feedrates) for up to eight types of workpiece materials can be registered. (Cutting conditions for up to seven workpiece materials are already registered. ) A cutting condition is not set for a special workpiece material. This material should be specified by the user as required. To set cutting condition data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN]. First, display [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for setting cutting condition data appears.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

229

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Item 1 CUTTING SPEED

Contents For CARBIDE and HIGHSPEED STEEL of tool materials, the cutting speed for each of workpiece materials can be registered. @ CARBIDE : including coated carbide

@ HIGHSPEED STEEL : including powdersinter/ coating highspeed steel 2 FEED FOR EACH CUTTING BLADE The feed for each cutting blade can be specified except TAP. The feed is common to all tool materials. It is unnecessary to specify a feedrate for TAP because it is automatically determined by the pitch. The feedrate is adjusted with a compensation factor that corresponds to the nominal diameter of the tool. This data is common to all tool materials. It is unnecessary to specify this data for TAP. Specify a range of nominal diameter for feed coefficient (4). This data applies to all tools except TAP. It is unnecessary to specify this data for TAP. A tool can be selected to register cutting conditions. A WINDOW is displayed by pressing [TOOL SELECT] of SOFTKEY. Then operate in accordance with instructions in the WINDOW.

FEED COEFFICIENT

NOMINAL DIAMETER

TOOL SELECTION

230

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.3.2
Tool File

For each tool, tool materials and dimensions are specified. With a conversational program, cutting conditions such as S and F can be automatically determined just by programming the tool ID numbers of registered tools. To set tool data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P.SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN]. First, display [QUICK C.A.P.SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [TOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for setting tool data appears.

(1)

(2)

231

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(1) Tool data

Item 1 TOOL No. Contents TOOL No. is the ID number which is allotted to each tool beforehand. This is used to create a conversational program. The numbers are allotted as follows.
TOOL NAME CENTER DRILL DRILL TAP REAMER BORE TOOL No. 110 1150 5170 7175 7680 TOOL NAME BACK BORE END MILL FACE MILL CHAMFER TOOL No. 81 85 86105 106110 111115

NOMINAL DIA.

Specify the outside diameter of the tool. Data on the TOOL No. (the following data) are canceled by setting 0 to nominal diameter. Select a material of the tool from the following SOFTKEYS. Specify the tool radius compensation value. A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID number as listed in the following table:
TOOL NAME END MILL FACE MILL CHAMFER TOOL No. 86105 106110 111115 DCODE 166185 186190 191195

3 4

MATERIAL RADI. COMP. (ONLY FOR END MILL, FACE MILL, AND CHAMFER)

LENG. COMP.

Specify the tool length compensation value. A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID number as listed in the following table:
TOOL NAME CENTER DRILL DRILL TAP REAMER BORE BACK BORE END MILL FACE MILL CHAMFER TOOL No. 1 10 11 50 51 70 71 75 76 80 80 85 86105 106110 111115 HCODE 41 50 51 90 101120 121125 126130 131135 136155 156160 161165

6 7

PITCH (ONLY FOR TAP) SDIA. (ONLY FOR CHAMFER)

For TAP, specify the pitch of the tapping screw thread. For CHAMFER, specify the diameter of the smaller tool end.

SMALLER DIAMETER

No. TOOTH (ONLY FOR END MILL, FACE MILL, AND CHAMFER) EDGE ANGLE (ONLY FOR CHAMFER)

Specify the number of teeth.

For CHAMFER, specify the angle of the tip of the cutting tool. (typically 90)

232

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

Item 10 LENGTH OF CUT 11 HOLEBOTTOM COMPENSATION

Contents Specify the length of the blade of the cutting tool. Specify the distance between the measurement point (tool tip) for tool length compensation and a point to determine the effective depth (corresponding to the nominal diameter). When machining holes, this is the holebottom compensation value by which the hole is cut beyond the specified effective depth. In chamfering, this is the clearance between the blade tip and the smallerdiameter end.

Clearance (ONLY FOR CHAMFER) Holebottom compensation value

12 CORNERR (ONLY FOR END MILL, AND FACE MILL) 13 TOOL SELECT

Specify the radius of the corner on the tip of the end milling or face milling tool blade.

Select a target tool for setting tool data. Pressing this soft key displays a window. Enter the number of a desired tool according to the instructions. Various types of data items related to the selected tool are displayed on the screen.

233

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.3.3
PreTool File
Example :

Program creation and editing for multi step cutting (such as tapping) can be simplified by creating a pre tool file. When it is necessary to drill a center hole and prepare it for tapping, the drills used in these steps are specified as pretools for taps. Up to eight pretools can be specified for a single final tool. Pretools can be specified for up to 80 final tools. To set pretool data, select [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN] of [QUICK SCREEN]. First, display [QUICK C.A.P SCREEN].

Move the cursor to [PRETOOL FILE] and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for setting pretool data appears.

(1)

(2)

234

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

Item 1 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8

Contents Pretools can be specified for up to 80 final tools (27 pages). Next page or back page is displayed by pressing PAGE KEY. Specify only TOOL No., which is used to display the tool name and nominal diameter from the tool file automatically. (a) FIN TOOL : Specify TOOL No. of the tool to be used in the final machining step. (b) PRETOOL1 TO 8 : Specify TOOL No. for machining steps before the final step. Use lower numbers for steps closer to the final step, starting with pretool number 1 for the step nearest the final step, without skipping a number. (c) AUX TOOL : Specify the TOOL No. for the chamfering step that followed a drilling step. (NOTE1) A machining sequence using pretools is as follows. PRETOOL8PRETOOL7 PRETOOL6PRETOOL5 PRETOOL4PRETOOL3 PRETOOL2PRETOOL1 FINAL TOOLAUXILIARY TOOL (NOTE2) Set 0 for unnecessary steps. (NOTE3) For an auxiliary tool, specify the TOOL No. for a tool used after the final tool. Chamfering tap holes must, however, be performed before the final or tapping step. Specify PRETOOL1 for the chamfering step.

TOOL LIST

TOOL LIST (TOOL No., tool name, and nominal diameter) is displayed by pressing SOFTKEY. Only for DRILL, there are 2 pages and they are displayed by pressing [DRILL 1/2] or [DRILL 2/2] of SOFTKEY alternately. All other tool data is displayed on a single page. The tool list is useful for setting the management number of an auxiliary tool, final tool, and pretools 1 to 8.

235

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.3.4
Tool Geometry Compensation

Cutter compensation (tool radius compensation) data is specified only for end mill, face mill, and chamfer in the TOOL FILE SCREEN in the QUICK C.A.P SCREEN. A detailed explanation is provided in 13.3.2 Tool file. Tool length compensation data is specified for all tools in the TOOL FILE SCREEN or the MAGAZINE DATA SCREEN in the QUICK C.A.P SCREEN. A detailed explanation is provided in 13.3.2 Tool file or this section (in the case of use of the MAGAZINE DATA SCREEN) . First, display [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN], move the cursor to [MAGAZINE DATA], and press soft key [SELECT]. The screen for setting cartridge data appears.

(1)

(2) (3)

Item 1 TOOL No.

Contents Set the ID number of a tool to be mounted for each tool number (T code). When the ID number is input, the name and nominal diameter of the tool are automatically displayed. (NOTE) You cannot enter the ID number of a tool that has already been set for another tool number.

TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION

Set tool length compensation. Tool length compensation can also be set by selecting [TOOL FILE] on [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN]. Pressing soft key [AUTO SET] can also set the current Z machine coordinate as tool length compensation. A compensation number is assigned to each tool ID number as listed in the following table:
TOOL NAME CENTER DRILL DRILL TAP REAMER BORE BACK BORE END MILL FACE MILL CHAMFER TOOL No. 1 10 11 50 51 70 71 75 76 80 80 85 86105 106110 111115 HCODE 41 50 51 90 101120 121125 126130 131135 136155 156160 161165

236

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

Item 3 TOOL LIST

Contents The contents of the tool file (ID numbers, tool names, and nominal diameters) are listed. It is useful to reference this [TOOL LIST] when setting an ID number.

13.3.5
Workpiece Coordinate System

Positional data used as a reference in mounting a workpiece is specified in the COORDINATES/OFFSET in the QUICK SCREEN.

(1)

(2)

(3) Item 1 2 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM Contents The present position of tool and the origin of workpiece coordinate system are displayed graphically. Input the workpiece coordinate system number. Then specify the origin of the workpiece coordinage system.

237

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Item 3 AUTOMATIC SETTING

Contents It is possible to set the present machine position to workpiece coordinates. At this time, you can also set the value obtained by adding a desired adjustment value to each machine coordinate.

When the window is displayed, press soft key [X EXEC] or [YEXEC]. The value obtained by adding the adjustment value to the current machine coordinate for each axis is automatically set as the workpiece coordinate origin. Supplement) When adding the Zaxis to the automatic workpiece coordinate system setting, set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K0 bit 2 = 1

238

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.4
CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM

A machining program is created by the following procedure:

Start

QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN Position the cursor on [PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT].

SELECT +

Program creation screen Automatic Title input

> INPUT PROGRAM NO.

EXEC SEARCH

Enter a program name.

Initial setting

Enter the initial data (workpiece material, coolant, reference coordinate system) required for machining. Select a desired machining menu.
HOLE FACING SIDE POCKET NC CUTING /GROOV LANGUAGE

Selection of a machining menu

2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXCVX CCV ILIARY

PROGRM END

Specification of the machining data

In response to messages displayed on the screen, (1) Specify a machining method. Position on the Zaxis, tool (preparation menu) (2) Specify the figure data. Positions on the X and Yaxes (figure menu) (3) Specify the process end. Repeat these steps until all machining data is specified.

(*1) (*2)

Program end

Select [PROGRM END]. End

2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXCVX CCV ILIARY PROGRM END

239

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

First, the operator selects a machining menu, then enters the type of machining, figure of product, and other data in response to inquiries on the screen. The operator repeats this process to generate a machining program. *1 The machining data is specified in the following procedures. The menu of (1) below is automatically displayed only once immediately after the machining menu is selected.
(1) Preparation menu (2) Figure menu Hole position This step can be repeated. (3) Process end Process end

Drilling

Facing start menu

Corresponding facing menu This step can be repeated.

Process end

. Side cutting start menu

Corresponding side cutting menu This step can be repeated.

Process end

. Contouring start menu

Corresponding contouring menu

Contour end

. Pocketing start menu

Corresponding pocket cutting menu This step can be repeated.

Process end

Contour pocket / grooving start menu

Corresponding contouring menu

Contour end

NC language

2 +1/2 start

Corresponding 2 +1/2 menu This step can be repeated.

Process end

Auxiliary

240

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

A single machining process has the machining data of the [START MENU], [FIGURE MENU], and [PROCES END]. The system checks whether the machining data consists of the above three elements and prevents the operator from creating a machining program which cannot be executed. *2 The screen on which the machining data is specified is basically configured as shown below. The A, B, and C windows show different data.

Ten soft keys Return key Next key

A : Program screen that is always displayed. The data in the B and C windows depend on the data input. The A window always lists the existing programs. B : Guide screen that displays the data of the C window with a drawing or tool file. The cursor is placed on the corresponding parameter in the C window. C : Data input screen. Basically, the data is displayed and specified in this window. The data which cannot be displayed in this window (data to be determined automatically,cuting conditions, etc.) is displayed and specified in the B window.

Return key : Displays the previous screen. When the return key can be used, [<] is indicated here. Next key : Displays the next part of the currently displayed soft keys. When the next key can be used, [+] is indicated here.

241

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Examples are given below: (In the following example, the number of the program to be created is assumed to be 3000.) 1. Display [QUICK C.A.P. SCREEN] or [QUICK SCREEN].

2. Position the cursor on [PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT] and press soft key [SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears.

3. Enter program number 3000 and press the [PROG. SELECT] key. (When the program is present, the editing screen is displayed. The explanation of edit operation is omitted here.) After entering a program number, you can also press the INPUT key on the operators panel to create the program. When a new program is to be created, the name input screen is automatically displayed in the bottom window. On this screen, specify a desired program name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, entered using the MDI keys. Then, press the [INPUT TITLE] key. The program name is registered in part program storage. You can also press the INPUT key on the operators panel to register the program. To abandon the registration, press the [CANCEL] key.
242

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

4. When the [INPUT TITLE] key is pressed, the initial setting screen is automatically displayed in the lower window, as shown below: When the cursor is positioned to an entry in window C, a message relating to the entry is displayed above the soft keys. The operator usually enters necessary data, as instructed by the message. On the guidance in window B, the second cursor blinks at the position corresponding to the current entry. Being able to see both cursors enables the easy input of data.

243

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

The displayed soft keys differ depending on the cursor position as follows. When the cursor is on [Q: MATERIAL]

When the cursor is on [M: COOLANT]

NOTE [COOLNT M7] means cutting air blow (option).

When the cursor is on [W: COORDINATES]

5. After entering all desired data, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The system automatically checks the input data. If the system finds an invalid value among the input data, the cursor is placed on that data and an alarm message is displayed. If all the input data is correct, the program creation screen is displayed again. The process of initial setting is incorporated into the following screen:

WARNING After completing input of the initial setting data, ensure that all required data is set correctly. If any data is not set correctly, machining will be performed under abnormal cutting conditions, such that the workpiece may be damaged or the tool may collide with the machine and/or workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.

244

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

6. Select a desired machining menu. When the soft key [HOLE] is selected, for example, the following screen is displayed:

7. Select a required detail menu from among hole machining types. As an example, [06:TAOOING] is selected. The following screen appears:

245

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

8. Enter desired data, responding to messages and checking the guidance. When the system asks about the tool ID number, enter the ID number of the last tool (the tool to be used last in that machining, excluding chamfering tools). If required, press the soft key [TOOL INFORM]. The system displays the following screen, on which the required tool ID number can be easily checked and specified.

9. On the screen, other information (pretool list, tool file, tool list) can be referenced and specified. For example, press the soft key [PRETOOL]. [LIST PRETOOL] is displayed on the window as shown below. To change the data of the pretool list or add data to it, press the soft key [WINDOW CHANGE]. The cursor moves to the pretool list screen. Place the cursor at a desired position, then enter the desired data.

NOTE NOTE Never attempt to modify the tool ID numbers, tool names, T codes, cutter compensation D codes, and tool length compensation H codes in the tool file.

246

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

10.Enter a desired value for [TOOL ID NO]. Automatic tool selection and automatic cutting condition selection are executed and automatically determined cutting condition data is displayed on the window. To change the cutting condition data determined by automatic tool selection and automatic cutting condition selection, press [WINDOW CHANGE] to move the cursor to [CUTTING DATA]. Move the cursor to a desired value and change the value. When a tool ID number is changed at this time, pressing [F.S. AUTO] executes automatic cutting condition selection for the tool ID number again and displays cutting condition data. To return the cursor to [C WINDOWS], press [WINDOW CHANGE].

11.After checking that all data is correctly entered, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The system automatically checks all the input data. When all the input data is correct, the drilling process is incorporated into the program, and the hole position menu is automatically displayed on the screen.

247

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

12.Press the soft key [PARALLEL OGRM], for example. The following screen is displayed. Enter the desired data. (The data of the point to be omitted can also be specified.)

13.After entering all the desired data, press the soft key [CHECK]. According to the input data, the hole position is drawn in the right window. The input data can be easily checked in the window.

248

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

14.Check that all data is correctly input, then press [INPUT END]. The [HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM] process is inserted into the program. The previous [HOLE PATERN] screen appears again.

15.To select another hole position menu, follow the same steps as when the parallel diagram menu is selected. To terminate drilling, press the soft key [PROCESS END]. The original program screen is displayed again.

Repeat these steps to select another machining menu and enter desired data until a desired machining program is created.

249

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

16.To terminate a program, press [PROGRAMEND] in the following soft key display:

As End X Coordinate and End Y Coordinate, specify the position in the machine coordinate system (G53).

After entering the necessary data, press the [INPUT END] key. This completes the creation of a new machining program. The screen is automatically cleared and the basic menu screen appears. WARNING No check is made to determine whether the machining sequence is satisfactory. For example, even if you program tapping without first preparing a hole, or perform finishing without first roughing, the machine will nevertheless attempt to execute the programmed machining sequence. For this reason, therefore, when using a conversational function to create a machining program, always confirm that the machining is performed in a logical sequence. If the machining sequence is logically incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.

250

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.5
MACHINING PROGRAM OPTIMIZATION

A machining program created using the conversational automatic programming function can be edited to create a new machining program by automatically changing the machining sequence as described below. (This function is referred to as the optimal process editing function.) (1) Optimizing the number of tool change operations Processes that use the same tool can be performed in succession to minimize the number of tool change operations, thus reducing the machining time. For this purpose, the optimal process editing function includes a function that allows processes to be alternated automatically. This concept is shown below.

Process (1) 5 center drilling 10 drilling

Optimized program Automatic process alteration 5 center drilling of 5 center drilling of 5 center drilling of 10 drilling of 6.8 drilling of M8 tapping of 7 drilling of process (1) process (2) process (3) process (1) process (2) process (2) process (3)

Process (2) 5 center drilling 6.8 drilling M8 tapping Process (3) 5 center drilling 7 drilling

[EXEC]

251

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(2) Optimizing the machining sequence The machining sequence of processes automatically determined by the conversational automatic programming function can be changed so that finishing is performed at the end, thus preventing machining precision degradation due to heat distortion. For this purpose, the optimal process editing function includes a function that allows processes to be alternated manually. This concept is shown below.
Process (1) 5 center drilling 10 drilling Sequence specification 1. 4.

Optimized program 5 center drilling of 5 center drilling of 5 center drilling of 10 drilling of 7 drilling of 6.8 drilling of M8 tapping of process (1) process (2) process (3) process (1) process (3) process (2) process (2)

Process (2) 5 center drilling 6.8 drilling M8 tapping Process (3) 5 center drilling 7 drilling 3. 5. 2. 6. 7.

Manual process alteration

[EXEC]

Below is a detailed description using an example. WARNING Even when the optimal process editing function is used, no check is made to determine whether the machining sequence is satisfactory. For example, even if you program tapping without first preparing a hole, or perform finishing without first roughing, the machine will nevertheless attempt to execute the programmed machining sequence. For this reason, therefore, when using a conversational function to create a machining program, always confirm that the machining is performed in a logical sequence. If the machining sequence is logical incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.

252

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.5.1
Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration)

Then, the following screen for setting termination appears: 1. Display [QUICK C.A.P.] screen of [QUICK] screen. 2. Position the cursor on [OPTIMUM PROGRAM] and press soft key [SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears. 3. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears:

4. Press soft key [AUTO]. Then, the screen for entering a program number appears.

253

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

5. Enter the number of the program to create using the optimal process editing function (3101 in this case), then press [EXEC]. The screen changes as follows:

You can specify a target range for the optimum process edit function (range specification). Selecting [ALL SELECT] specifies the entire program as the range. NOTE 1 Only one range can be specified for each partial range setting operation. For multiple ranges, perform separate setting operations for each range. 2 An editing range cannot extend from the main program to a subprogram. If a subprogram is called in a specified range, the subprogram is not subject to sequence alteration. 6. As an example, the entire program is optimized. Press soft key [ALL SELECT]. The screen does not change and the displayed soft keys change as follows:

254

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

7. Press [EXEC]. The selected range of machining processes (only the drilling processes in this example) is rearranged automatically by the system algorithm to change the machining sequence.

13.5.2
Optimal Process Editing Algorithm
Drilling Drill 1 Drill 2 Hole position A Process end

Optimal process editing is shown as follows:

Drilling Drill 1 Hole position A Process end

Rules

Drilling Drill 1 Hole position A Process end Drilling Drill 1 Hole position B Process end Drilling Drill 2 Hole position A Process end

Drilling Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end Step I

Drilling Drill 2 Hole position A Process end Drilling Drill 1 Hole position B Process end

Step II

Drilling Drill 3 Hole position B Process end

Drilling Drill 3 Hole position B Process end

When [EXEC] is pressed, a new program is created by the following internal processing steps: Step I : Internally creates a program where all tools in the editing range are resolved on a processbyprocess basis. (This step is also used in manual alteration described in the next section.) Step II: Rearranges the processes of such a resolved program according to the rules shown below to create a new program.
255

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(1) The execution sequence of the processes in the same machining menu must not be changed. Rules (2) Processes should be chosen in the order of machining menu creation where possible. (3) Processes that use the same tool should be chosen in succession where possible.

Rule (1) must always be satisfied. Rule (2) has higher priority than rule (3); rules (2) and (3) may be ignored when these rules cannot be satisfied. NOTE 1 The optimal process editing function changes the sequence of processes by referencing only the tools used in the program. Therefore, when using the optimal process editing function for a program, be especially careful when the program includes a process or NC statement that reverses the sequential relationship. When the optimal process editing function is used, the following commands must not be included in the editing range: Rotation around the B axis Plane selection Coordinate system rotation Absolute/incremental command Workpiece coordinate system setting Scaling Inch/metric conversion When optimal process editing is applied to a program including any of these processes and NC statements, the partial range setting capability of the optimal process editing function must be used. After checking for any processes whose execution timing must not be changed, the user who creates the program can then apply optimal process editing to processes whose sequences may be rearranged. Similarly, be careful not to change the sequence of machining menus that cannot be reversed.

256

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

Drilling Drill 1 Drill 2 Hole position A Process end Set a partial range for this section. Drilling Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end Rotation around the B axis

Drilling Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end

Set another partial range for this section.

NOTE 2 The complete range setting can be used on programs for which the sequence of machining menus can be reversed. 3 When the system determines that optimization is impossible (for example, when a process for rotation about the B axis is included in a partial setting range), the system does not perform optimal process editing, but instead outputs the alarm message NOT SUITABLE COMBINE PROGRAM.

257

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.5.3
Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration)

1. Display [QUICK C.A.P.]screen of [QUICK]screen. 2. Position the cursor on [OPTIMUM PROGRAM] and press soft key [SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears. 3. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears:

4. Press soft key [ALL SELECT]. Then, the screen for entering a program number appears.

258

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

5. Enter the number of the program to be created using the optimal process editing function (3102 in this case), then press [EXEC]. The program is renumbered, and the following screen appears.

NOTE No number is assigned to processes for the initial setting, figure menu, NC language menu, and other items that need not be rearranged.

6. Move the cursor to the number of the item to change, then enter a new sequence number. After entering the number, press [NUMBER]. The entered number appears by the number item. At the same time, the other numbers are changed. (When a number is changed to a unique number, other numbers are changed automatically.) As an example, numbers 3 and 6 for center drills are changed to 2 and 3.

259

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE The system performs a check to prevent the execution sequence of processes in the same machining menu from being changed. If an invalid sequence number is entered, the system does not perform the renumbering operation, but instead outputs the alarm message UNJUST NUMBER. 7. Upon completion of sequence number input, press [SET END]. The screen remains unchanged, but the following soft keys appear:

8. Press [MOVE]. A machining program is created according to the entered sequence number.

260

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.6
MACHINING PROGRAM CHECK

This function is used to check a created machining program by drawing it. Two functions are available. (1) Tool path drawing (wireframe): The tool path, machining profile, tool figure, etc. are drawn with lines in three dimensions. The machining program can be checked closely using this drawing. (2) Animated simulation (solid): A threedimensional profile subject to machining is drawn using surfaces. The machining program can be easily understood by viewing this simulation.

13.6.1
Tool Path Drawing

1. PATH GRAPHIC(EXECUTION) Display [QUICK C.A.P.]screen of [QUICK]screen, position the cursor on [PROGRAM CHECK], and press soft key [SELECT]. [PROGRAM DIR] appears. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears. The first screen after poweron displays a tool path drawing. After that, the previously displayed screen appears.

NOTE 1 Set the operation mode to MEM before starting drawing. 2 Press [SOLID GRAPH] to display the animated simulation screen (solid). A soft key can be used to switch between tool path drawing and animated simulation.

261

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

WARNING Even after tool path drawing has been used to ensure that the programmed tool path is satisfactory, if the actually entered data such as the tool offset is not as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine (including the jig), possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. For this reason, before starting actual machining, ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine, for example, by executing the machining program at an extremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in the machine. The meanings of each soft key are indicated below.
Soft key SOLID GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SCALE TOOL POS. ERASE SCALING ON/OFF SINGLE ON/OFF DRAW START Meaning Switches to the animated simulation screen (solid). Press to change drawing parameters. Enlarges or reduces a part of the drawn figure. Displays the current tool center position with a mark. Erases all figures drawn up until this soft key is pressed. Indicates whether to use scaling before drawing. Press this soft key to toggle the display of [SCALING ON] and [SCALING OFF]. Sets and cancels single block mode. Pressing this key indicates [SINGLE ON] and [SINGLE OFF] alternately. Starts drawing after erase and head search operation. If scale value setting is incomplete, automatic scaling is performed before drawing is started.

NOTE The soft keys [SCALING ON/OFF] and [SINGLE BLOCK] indicate drawing execution conditions. Pressing these soft keys does not start operation. f Additional information about [SCALING ON/OFF] Each time this soft key is pressed, the display of [SCALING ON] switches to [SCALING OFF], or vice versa. Usually, the [SCALING OFF] mode is set. If [DRAW START] is pressed when [SCALING OFF] is displayed, drawing is startedusing the current scale value data. If [DRAW START] is pressed when [SCALING ON] is displayed, automatic scaling is peformed before drawing is started. Scaling is performed according to the table below.
262

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

When the machining profile diplay is provided by the drawing parameter setting Program created in the conversational mode Scaling is performed based on the machining profile. Scaling time is shorter(*1).

When the machining profile diplay is not provided by the drawing parameter setting Scaling is performed based on the tool path. Scaling time is longer. Scaling is performed based on the tool path. Scaling time is longer.

Ordinary NC pro- Scaling is performed based gram on the tool path. Scaling time is longer.

*1 When biplane drawing is selected, scaling is performed based on the machining profile and the tool path. After the results of scaling are set in the maximum value and minimum value drawing parameters, drawing is started. The tool path drawing is then displayed in the proper scale on the screen.
#7 9106 #6 PSCL #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

PSCL When the previous program number differs from the current program number on the graphic screen: 0 : The [SCALING OFF] soft key is displayed. 1 : The [SCALING ON] soft key is displayed. After drawing is performed in the [SCALING ON] mode, the mode is automatically switched to the [SCALING OFF] mode. If scaling takes too long, drawing can be started earlier as described below. 1. Stop scaling by using soft key [STOP]. The maximum and minimum values obtained by this time are set. 2. Press [DRAW START]. A slightly inaccurate scale value is used, but drawing can be performed by reducing the time for scaling. f Additional information about [SINGLE ON/OFF] Each time this soft key is pressed, the display of [SINGLE ON] switches to [SINGLE OFF], or vice versa. The display of [SINGLE ON] represents the single block mode. When [SINGLE OFF] is displayed, continuous drawing is performed.

263

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

2. Start of tool path drawing Press [DRAW START] to start drawing.

Soft key SINGLE ON/OFF

Meaning Sets the single block mode when the characters of this soft key are displayed in reverse video. When this soft key is pressed in this state, the characters are displayed normally; the single block mode is released. Terminates drawing forcibly. Performs drawing blockbyblock in the single block mode.

STOP 1 BLOCK EXEC.

When the [SINGLE ON] state is set during drawing, the single block mode is set. By pressing [1 BLOCK EXEC.] in this state, blockbyblock drawing can be performed. When the [SINGLE OFF] state is set, operation switches to continuous drawing. Drawing terminates when an end of program (M02 or M30) is encountered. Pressing the leftmost soft key displays QUICK. C.A.P again.

264

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

3. Drawing parameters Press [GRAPH PARAM] to change the tool path drawing parameters. The following drawing parameter screen appears:

After setting required parameters, press [SET END]. The screen display returns to the original execution screen.

265

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

The meanings of each parameter are described below (1) Drawing screens Seven types of drawing screens are available for selection.
XY plane Y Z YZ plane Y ZY plane

X XZ plane Z

Y Isometric projection drawing (XYZ) Z

Z Isometric projection drawing (ZXY) Y

X Biplane (XY, XZ) Y

X Z X

(2) Horizontal rotation angle This parameter specifies an angle of rotation (180 to +180 ) around the vertical axis in degrees.

266

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

(3) Vertical rotation angle This parameter specifies a tilt angle (180 to +180 ) with respect to the vertical axis.

(4) Scale factor A value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When 1.0 is set, an actualsize drawing is generated. When 0 is set, a scale factor is automatically determined. (Usually, a scale factor is automatically determined so that this parameter need not be set.) (5) Maximum value (center)/minimum value The coordinates (X,Y,Z) of a drawing center, or maximum drawing coordinates (X,Y,Z)/minimum drawing coordinates (I,J,K) are set. These settings depend on the value of the drawing scale factor as indicated below.
Drawing scale factor value Setting Addresses X, Y, and Z Addresses I, J, and K

Value other than 0 Drawing center coordinates Ignored on the X, Y, and Z axes 0 Maximum drawing coordinates on the X, Y, and Z axes Minimum drawing coordinates on the X, Y, and Z axes

(Usually, the scale factor parameter and maximum value (center)/minimum value parameter are automatically determined so that these parameters need not be set.) (6) Start sequence number This parameter is used only when an NC program is to be checked. This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing start block with a fourdigit number. When 0 is set, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. Specify an end sequence number. To check a program created in conversational mode, specify 0. (7) End sequence number This parameter is used only when an NC program is to be checked. This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing end block with a fourdigit number. When 0 is set, drawing is performed until the end of the program is reached. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. To check a program created in conversational mode, specify 0. (8) TOOL RADIUS COMP Specifies whether to draw a tool path with cutter compensation enabled or disabled.
267

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(9) PART FIGURE DISP A machining profile drawing program must be registered. For this reason, set this item to [OFF] because no machining profile can be drawn for a machining program which is not created in the conversational mode. (10)TOOL FIGURE DISP Draws the tool figure with a cylinder (the height is 0 as the FANUC standard) at the start point of each block during a drawing check of the tool path of a machining program created in the conversational mode. The tool figure cannot be drawn for a machining program which is not created in the conversational mode. (11)Color specification Seven colors (white, red, green, yellow, blue, purple, and light blue) are available for selection. Path : Specify the color for drawing the tool path. Tool position : Specify the color of the mark used to indicate the current tool position. Automatic change : Specify this item when the color of the tool path is to be automatically changed by a T command. Yes : Changes the color of a tool path automatically. No : Does not change the color of a tool path automatically. When Yes is specified, the color of the tool path changes in the order described above each time a T code is specified; when light blue is used, the next color is white. TOOL FIG: : Specify the color for drawing a tool. (This item is valid only when tool figure display is provided.) TOOL POS: : Specifies the color of the mark indicating the current tool position.

268

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.6.2
Animated Simulation

1. Animated simulation execution screen Press [SOLID GRAPH]. The following screen appears:

NOTE 1 Set the operation mode to MEM before starting drawing. 2 To switch to tool path drawing (wireframe), press [PATH GRAPH]. A soft key can be used to switch between tool path drawing and animated simulation. 3 To draw a blank, specify the drawing parameters for blank dimensions, color, and so forth appropriately. 4 The current machine coordinates are used for drawing. (Commands associated with the workpiece coordinate systems are ignored.)

The meanings of each soft key are indicated below.

Soft key PATH GRAPH GRAPH PARAM ROTATION 3PLAN PLANE FIGURE SECT. PLANE DRAW START Meaning Switches to the tool path drawing screen (wireframe). Press to change drawing parameters. Rotates a generated drawing. Generates a triplane drawing from a drawn machining profile. Displays a top view of the drawn machining profile. Displays a sectional view of the drawn machining profile. Starts drawing after drawing a blank and performing the head search operation.

269

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

WARNING Even after animated simulation has been used to ensure that the programmed machining operation is satisfactory, if the actually entered data such as the tool offset is not as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine (including the jig), possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. For this reason, before starting actual machining, ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine, for example, by executing the machining program at an extremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in the machine. 2. Execution of drawing Press [DRAW START] to execute animated simulation. During execution, only soft key [STOP] can be used.

Soft key STOP

Meaning Terminates drawing forcibly.

When drawing is terminated forcibly using this soft key, it may take a short time before drawing terminates completely. Drawing terminates when an end of program (M02 or M30) is encountered. Pressing the leftmost soft key displays QUICK. C.A.P again.

270

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

3. Animated simulation drawing parameters Press [GRAPH PARAM] to change the animated simulation drawing parameters.The following drawing parameter screen appears:

After setting required parameters, press [SET END]. The screen display returns to the original execution screen. Each parameter has the meaning described below. (1) Blank figures Up to two types of blank figures can be set: Rectangular parallelepiped Column/cylinder (parallel to the Z axis) (2) Blank origin (X,Y,Z) This parameter sets the coordinates (X,Y,Z) of the reference position of a blank in the workpiece coordinate system. When the blank is a rectangular parallelepiped, its reference position is the corner facing the negative direction along each axis. When the blank is a column or cylinder, its reference position is the center of the base.

271

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(3) Blank dimensions (I,J,K) This parameter sets the dimensions of a blank.
Rectangular parallelepiped Z Y J K (X,Y,Z) X I

Column/cylinder (parallel to the Z axis) Z

I Y

X (X,Y,Z)

(4) Tool radius This parameter sets the tool radius. Usually, this parameter is determined automatically and need not be set for a machining program created in the conversational mode. Note that this parameter applies only when the tool figure is a cylinder. (5) Tool tip distance This parameter sets the distance (usually 0) between the programmed point and the tool tip. Usually, this parameter is determined automatically and need not be set for a machining program created in the conversational mode.

Programmed point K Tool tip

272

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

(6) Start sequence number This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing start block. When 0 is set, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. (7) End sequence number This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing end block. When 0 is set, drawing is performed until the end of the program is reached. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. (8) Animated simulation speed This parameter sets the interval (0 to 255) used in animated simulation drawing. A new drawing is displayed each time the machining of a specified number of blocks has been completed. When 0 is specified, a drawing is generated for each block. (9) Color specification Seven colors are available for drawing.
Color White Red Green Yellow Blue Purple Light blue

273

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.7
NC STATEMENT OUTPUT FUNCTION 13.7.1
NC Statement Output Function
A machining program created in the conversational mode can be directly executed without modification. Such a program can also be converted to an NC statement program for execution or modification. An NC statement program created by such conversion can be stored in an NC part program storage area or can be punched out on an external storage unit via the reader/punch interface. This function is optional. NOTE While this type of conversion is in progress, other operations such as background editing, manual movement, and data setting using the MDI cannot be performed. 1. Display QUICK. C.A.P of QUICK screen. 2. Position the cursor on CONVERT NC FORMAT and press soft key SELECT. PROGRAM DIR. appears. 3. Select a program from the list. The following screen appears:

4. Specify the destination to which NC statements after conversion are to be output. [PUNCH] : Outputs the program created by conversion to an external storage unit via the reader/punch interface. [MEMORY] : Stores the program created by conversion in an NC part program storage area. In this case, memory protection must be released. Press one of the soft keys. Here, [MEMORY] is pressed as an example. Then, the displayed soft keys change as follows:

274

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

5. Change the operation mode to the MEM mode and enter a new program number after conversion, then press SELECT. Then, the following [GRAPHIC SCREEN] appears:

Pressing [CONV. START] on this screen executes NC statement output and tool path drawing. (Always after scaling is executed, the tool path is drawn.) The moment tool path drawing starts, the selected machining program is converted to the NC format program in block units as an NC operation command is executed. The converted program is stored in the part program storage area or output to an external storage device. NOTE If an alarm occurs during conversion, the NC format program converted until that time has already been stored in the part program storage area or external storage device. To perform conversion again, correct the invalid part in the machining program, delete the partially converted NC format program, then perform the conversion start operation from the beginning.

275

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.8
DATA I/O

Various types of conversational data can be input and output using an external storage device (such as a Handy File and memory card). Before using this function, connect an external storage device and set necessary parameters including a parameter for device selection. (For setting, use the screen of [3:DATA I/O].) On DATA I/O of QUICK screen, position the cursor on C.A.P. DATA and press soft key SELECT. The following screen appears:

To input or output conversational data, press soft key [DATA I/O]. Then, the following screen appears:

(1) To output conversational data to an external device Press soft key [PUNCH]. The displayed soft keys change as follows:

Press the soft key corresponding to data to be output. As an example, [ALL DATA] is pressed. (Selecting [ALL DATA] can output all conversational data at a time.)
276

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

Press [PUNCH EXEC]. The specified data is output. (2) To read conversational data from an external device Press soft key [READ]. The displayed soft keys change as follows:

Press the soft key corresponding to data to be read. As an example, [ALL DATA] is pressed. (Pressing [ALL DATA] can input all conversational data at a time.) Then, enter the number of a file on a data medium (such as a floppy disk).

Press [READ EXEC]. The specified data is read. NOTE When the input/output device setting (parameter 102, 112, 122, or 132) is RS232C, you need not enter a file number. Press [READ EXEC] with entering no data. Conversational data output with the old type ROBODRILL cannot be read. Also, output conversational data cannot be read with the old type ROBODRILL.

277

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.9
STANDARD DATA 13.9.1
Cutting Condition File

The tables below contain factoryset values.

(1) CENTER DRILL

WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 0 20 0 15 0 25 0 30 0 8 0 20 0 15 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.60 0.75 0.80 1.00 0.50 0.60 0.75 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 31 75 100 140

(2) DRILL
WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 35 20 30 15 40 25 100 50 0 10 35 20 30 15 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.50 0.35 0.75 0.75 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 31 75 100 140

(3) TAP
WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 30 15 25 13 20 15 50 40 0 8 30 15 25 13 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm]

(4) REAMER
WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 12 10 10 8 12 11 25 20 0 0 12 10 10 8 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.65 0.65 0.75 1.00 0.00 0.65 0.65 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 30 60 100 107

(5) BORE
WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 50 27 43 26 36 20 10 85 30 17 50 27 43 26 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.25 0.75 0.75 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 100 100 100 100

(6) BACK BORE

WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 50 27 43 26 36 20 10 85 30 17 50 27 43 26 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.25 0.75 0.75 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 100 100 100 100

278

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

(7) END MILL

WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 40 35 30 25 40 40 130 130 0 18 40 35 30 25 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.20 0.18 0.21 0.35 0.05 0.20 0.18 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 60 75 90 100

(8) FACE MILL

WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 120 100 120 100 100 170 192 192 60 40 120 100 120 100 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.40 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 60 100 100 100

(9) CHAMFER
WORKPIECE MATERIALS CARBON STEEL ALLOY STEEL GRAY CAST ALMINUM CAST STAINLESS ST LOLED STEEL DIE STEEL SPECIAL CUTTING SPEED CARBIDE HIGHSPD [m/min] [m/min] 35 20 30 15 40 25 100 30 14 0 35 20 30 15 0 0 FEED PER CUTTER [mm] 0.75 0.75 0.90 1.00 0.50 0.75 0.75 0.00 NOMINAL DIA. [mm] 0 3 6 10 X X X X 3 6 10 FEED COEFFIC [%] 31 75 100 140

13.9.2
Tool File

(1) CENTER DRILL

TOOL No. NOMDIA MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 1 1.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 1.500 1.500 2 1.600 HIGHSPD 0.000 2.400 2.400 3 2.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 3.000 3.000 4 2.500 HIGHSPD 0.000 3.800 3.800 5 3.150 HIGHSPD 0.000 4.800 4.800

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

6 4.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 6.000 6.000

7 6.300 HIGHSPD 0.000 9.200 9.200

8 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

9 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

10 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(2) DRILL
TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 11 1.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 12.000 0.300 12 2.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 29.000 0.600 13 3.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 42.000 0.900 14 3.800 HIGHSPD 0.000 54.000 1.200 15 4.800 HIGHSPD 0.000 62.000 1.500

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

16 6.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 70.000 1.800

17 7.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 73.000 2.100

18 8.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 81.000 2.400

19 9.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 89.000 2.700

20 10.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 95.000 3.000

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

21 11.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 103.000 3.300

22 12.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 111.000 3.600

23 13.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 114.000 3.900

24 14.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 122.000 4.200

25 15.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 125.000 4.500

279

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

26 16.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 130.000 4.800

27 17.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 135.000 5.100

28 18.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 140.000 5.400

29 19.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 145.000 5.700

30 20.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 150.000 6.000

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

31 0.750 HIGHSPD 0.000 9.000 0.240

32 0.950 HIGHSPD 0.000 11.000 0.290

33 1.250 HIGHSPD 0.000 16.000 0.380

34 1.600 HIGHSPD 0.000 20.000 0.480

35 2.100 HIGHSPD 0.000 29.000 0.630

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

36 2.500 HIGHSPD 0.000 35.000 0.750

37 3.300 HIGHSPD 0.000 45.000 0.990

38 4.200 HIGHSPD 0.000 54.000 1.260

39 5.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 62.000 1.500

40 6.800 HIGHSPD 0.000 73.000 2.040

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

41 8.500 HIGHSPD 0.000 87.000 2.550

42 10.300 HIGHSPD 0.000 98.000 3.090

43 14.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 122.000 4.210

44 17.500 HIGHSPD 0.000 140.000 5.260

45 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(3) TAP
TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. PITCH LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 51 1.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.250 5.500 1.250 52 1.200 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.250 5.500 1.250 53 1.600 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.350 8.000 1.750 54 2.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.400 8.000 2.000 55 2.500 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.450 9.500 2.250

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. PITCH LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

56 3.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.500 11.000 1.500

57 4.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.700 13.000 2.100

58 5.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.800 16.000 2.400

59 6.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 1.000 19.000 3.000

60 8.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 1.250 22.000 3.750

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. PITCH LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION

61 10.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 1.500 24.000 4.500

62 12.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 1.750 29.000 5.250

63 16.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 2.000 32.000 10.000

64 20.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 2.500 37.000 12.500

65 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(4) REAMER
TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 71 2.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 11.000 0.000 72 4.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 19.000 0.000 73 6.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 26.000 0.000 74 8.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 33.000 0.000 75 10.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 38.000 0.000

(5) BORE
TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 76 5.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 0.000 77 10.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 0.000 78 15.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 0.000 79 20.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 0.000 80 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(6) BACK BORE

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL LENGTH COMP. LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 81 5.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 2.500 82 10.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 5.000 83 15.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 7.500 84 20.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 10.000 85 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

280

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

(7) END MILL

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP. LENGTH COMP. No. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNERR 86 2.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 4.000 0.000 87 2.500 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 5.000 0.000 88 3.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 5.000 0.000 89 3.500 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 6.000 0.000 90 4.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 7.000 0.000

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP. LENGTH COMP. No. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNERR

91 5.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 8.000 0.000

92 6.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 8.000 0.000

93 7.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 10.000 0.000

94 8.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 11.000 0.000

95 9.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 11.000 0.000

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP. LENGTH COMP. No. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNERR

96 10.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 13.000 0.000

97 11.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 13.000 0.000

98 12.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 16.000 0.000

99 14.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 16.000 0.000

100 16.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 19.000 0.000

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP. LENGTH COMP. No. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNERR

101 18.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 19.000 0.000

102 20.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2 22.000 0.000

103 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

104 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

105 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

(8) FACE MILL

TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP. LENGTH COMP. No. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT CORNERR 106 50.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 5 9.000 0.800 107 63.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 6 12.000 0.800 108 80.000 CARBIDE 0.000 0.000 6 12.000 0.800 109 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000 110 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

(9) CHAMFER
TOOL No. NOMDIA. MATERIAL RADIUS COMP. LENGTH COMP. SDIA. EDGE ANGLE No. OF TOOTH LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION 111 7.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 1.500 90.000 1 0.000 0.750 112 15.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 2.000 90.000 1 0.000 1.000 113 25.000 HIGHSPD 0.000 0.000 6.000 90.000 1 0.000 3.000 114 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000 115 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0.000 0.000

281

13.QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

13.9.3
PreTool File
1 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8 No. 0 51 0 31 1 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL CDRILL NDIA. No. 0 1.000 52 0 0.750 32 1.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL CDRILL 2 NDIA. No. 0 1.200 53 0 0.950 33 1.000 1 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL CDRILL PAGE: 1/27 3 NDIA. 1.600 1.250 1.000

PAGE: 2/27

4 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8 No. 0 54 0 34 1 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL CDRILL NDIA. No. 0 2.000 55 0 1.600 35 1.000 2 0 0 0 0 0 NAME

5 NDIA. No. 0 2.500 56 0 2.100 36 1.600 3 0 0 0 0 0 NAME

6 NDIA. 3.000 2.500 2.000

TAP DRILL CDRILL

TAP DRILL CDRILL

PAGE: 3/27

7 AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8 No. 0 57 0 37 4 0 0 0 0 0 NAME TAP DRILL CDRILL NDIA. No. 0 4.000 58 0 3.300 38 2.500 5 0 0 0 0 0 NAME

8 NDIA. No. 0 5.000 59 0 4.200 39 3.150 6 0 0 0 0 0 NAME

9 NDIA. 6.000 5.000 4.000

TAP DRILL CDRILL

TAP DRILL CDRILL

PAGE: 4/27

AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8

No. 0 60 0 40 6 0 0 0 0 0

NAME

10 NDIA.

TAP DRILL CDRILL

No. 0 8.000 61 0 6.800 41 4.000 7 0 0 0 0 0

NAME

11 NDIA.

TAP DRILL CDRILL

No. 0 10.000 62 0 8.500 42 6.300 7 0 0 0 0 0

NAME

12 NDIA. 12.000 10.300 6.300

TAP DRILL CDRILL

PAGE: 5/27

AUX TOOL FIN TOOL PRETOOL1 PRETOOL2 PRETOOL3 PRETOOL4 PRETOOL5 PRETOOL6 PRETOOL7 PRETOOL8

No. 0 63 0 43 7 0 0 0 0 0

NAME

13 NDIA.

TAP DRILL CDRILL

No. 0 16.000 64 0 14.000 44 6.300 7 0 0 0 0 0

NAME

14 NDIA. 20.000 17.500 6.300

No.

NAME

15 NDIA.

TAP DRILL CDRILL

282

13. QUICK CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

(SUPER C.A.P iM)

13.9.4
Default File
DEFAULT FILE : 1 NO #6101 #6102 #6103 #6104 #6105 #6106 #6107 #6108 #6109 #6110 #6111 #6112 #6113 #6114 #6115 #6116 DATA 2.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 2.000 2.000 3.000 0.000 1.000 1.000 90.000 4.000 5.000 5.000 1.000 NO. #6117 #6118 #6119 #6120 #6121 #6122 #6123 #6124 #6125 #6126 #6127 #6128 #6129 #6130 #6131 #6132 DATA 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 1.000 2.000 8.000 6.000 1.000 70.000 NO. #6133 #6134 #6135 #6136 #6137 #6138 #6139 #6140 #6141 #6142 #6143 #6144 #6145 #6146 #6147 #6148 DATA NO. #6149 #6150 #6151 #6152 #6153 #6154 #6155 #6156 #6157 #6158 #6159 #6160 #6161 #6162 #6163 #6164 DATA 3.000 2.000 3.000 7.000 2.000 2.000 5.000 3.000 7.000 2.000 100.000

2.000 0.000 2.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 4.000 2.000 6.000 6.000

DEFAULT FILE : 2 NO #6165 #6166 #6167 #6168 #6169 #6170 #6171 #6172 #6173 #6174 #6175 #6176 #6177 #6178 #6179 #6180 DATA NO. #6181 #6182 #6183 #6184 #6185 #6186 #6187 #6188 #6189 #6190 #6191 #6192 #6193 #6194 #6195 #6196 DATA NO. #6197 #6198 #6199 #6200 DATA 99998.000 99999.000

NOTE To display DEFAULT FILE SETTING screen, position the cursor on C.A.P DATA and press soft key SELECT on 12: DATA I/O of QUICK screen, then press soft key DEFAULT FILE.

283

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

14

AI TOOL MONITOR

284

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

14.1
OVERVIEW

The AI TOOL MONITOR function monitors the load on a spindle during hole machining, issues alarms on any abnormal drilling load, and detects breakage. If an alarm condition is detected, the AI TOOL MONITOR function decelerates the tool, enables tool exchange, and stops the machine. If breakage is detected, it stops the machine. The AI TOOL MONITOR function is enabled when the following conditions are satisfied. (1) The spindle is rotating. (2) The Zaxis is lowering. (3) Tapping has not be specified. (4) The current mode is cutting feed mode. The execution flow of the AI TOOL MONITOR is shown below:
[TOOL FILE] screen Specify tool to be used

[TOOL LIFE/SPINDLE LOAD] screen Set nominal diameter for file number to be used

Tool data is created by trial machining

Detect spindle load torque from trial machining Automatic computation Direct setting

Calculate warning and breakage levels

Register warning and breakage levels

[TOOL LIFE] screen Specify operation to be performed if specified warning or breakage level is detected

[TOOL LIFE/TOOL GROUP] screen Production machining is started. Specify tool if tool exchange is to be performed when abnormal condition is detected

285

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

14.2
TOOL LIFE SCREEN

To use the AI tool monitor function, some data items must be set. To set these data items, use [13:TOOL LIFE]Screen of [QUICK]Screen. This section outlines [TOOL LIFE].
(5)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(6) Item 1 AI TOOL MONITOR

(7)

(8)

(9)

Contents Specify whether to use the AI tool monitor function. OFF : The AI tool monitor function is disabled. ON : The AI tool monitor function is enabled according to the setting of 2 through 5.

2 FILE No. SETTING

Set a reference load data file number for each tool. Pressing the FILE key causes a file number to be displayed on the screen. Select the machine operation to be performed when spindle load w warninglevel load. OFF : Machining is continued as is. FEED DOWN : Tool movement is decelerated to reduce the load on the tool. Machining is continued. TOOL CHNG : Machining is continued; when the next tool change command is specified, the tool is changed to a reserved tool registered in the same group.

OPERATION WHEN WARNING LOAD IS REACHED

DOWN+CHNG : Tool movement is decelerated; when the next tool change command is specified, the tool is changed to a reserved tool registered in the same group. MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped, and the tool is moved along the Zaxis to the machine zero point. Moreover, spindle rotation and coolant output are stopped, and an alarm is displayed.

286

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

Item 4 OPERATION WHEN BREAKAGE LOAD IS REACHED (AI tool monitor function)

Contents Select a machine operation to be performed when spindle load w breakagelevel load. OFF : Machining is continued as is. MCHN STOP : Machining is stopped, and the tool is moved along the Zaxis to the machine zero point. Moreover, spindle rotation and coolant output are stopped, and an alarm is displayed. Displays monitor information such as load information related to the currently used tool and tool group information or directory of spindle load level files. When the [SPNDL LOAD] soft key is pressed, the following windows are displayed:

Monitor display or directory display of spindle load level files REFERENCE LOAD CALCULATION AND REGISTRATION INTO FILE

Use the page and cursor keys to move the cursor to an item for the target file number and press soft key [CALC.]. The warning level and damage level are calculated using the detected value and nominal diameter set for the file number. To set the calculated values in the file, press soft key [ENTRY]. You can also directly enter a value for the item at the cursor. 7 REFERENCE LOAD CALCULATION AND REGISTRATION INTO FILE Switching between the directory display of spindle load level files or monitor information display This soft key switches the display in the righthand part of the screen ((5)) between the directory display of spindle load level files or monitor information. When monitor information is displayed, pressing soft key [FILE] switches the display to the directory of spindle load level files. When the directory of spindle load level files is displayed, pressing soft key [MONITER] switches the display to monitor information. When monitor information is displayed, pressing the page key changes the displayed tool group. When the directory of spindle load level files is displayed, pressing the page key changes the displayed file numbers. 8 CLEAR TOOL INFORMATION TOOL GROUP SETTING Information (such as use status and lifetime), currently being displayed about the tools in a tool group, is cleared. When the [TOOL GROUP] soft key is pressed, the window shown below is displayed.

287

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15) Item 10 GROUP No. 11 LIFE TOOL LIFE LIMIT (BY CYCLE QUANTITY OR TIME) TO TRIGGER AN EXPIRATION ADVANCE NOTICE 12 USED COUNT or TIME

(16)

Contents GROUP No. is changed from 1 to 16 by pressing PAGE KEY. Specify the value of tool life of each group. Also set the output start timing of the tool life notice signal. When the use count (or time) of the last tool is greater than or equal to the value obtained by life count (or lifetime) lifenoticecount (or lifenoticetime), the tool life notice signal is output.

The present USED COUNT or TIME is displayed graphically. You can also press soft key [USED COUNT] [USED TIME] to change the use count (or time).

13 TOOL INFORMATION

The state of the tool is displayed in TOOL INFORMATION as USING, LIFE, or WARNING. (Note) USING LIFE : tool which is on use in the group. : tool which arrived at the life.

WARNING : tool whose spindle load value detected by tool monitor function was beyond the warning value. 14 TCODE HCODE DCODE Set the number (T code) of each tool that belongs to the group, and the tool length compensation number (H code) and cutter compensation number (D code) of the tool as required. Enter 0 for each item that is not to be used.

288

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

Item 15 CHANGE OF JUDGEMENT OF TOOL LIFE 16 CLEARANCE OF TOOL INFORMATION

Contents All data on TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT are cleared by selecting [COUNT] or [TIME] . It is possible to strike off TOOL INFORMATION in the group. Pressing this soft key deletes all registered tool group data.

289

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

14.3
SETTING DATA

(1) Mount a tool to be used on the cartridge. (2) Display [TOOL LIFE]Screen and assign the file number of a spindle load level file to each tool to be used. At this point, [TOOL MONITOR] should be set to OFF.

(3) Press soft key [SPNDL LOAD]. [SPINDLE LOAD FILE] appears.

(4) Set a tool nominal diameter for each file number set in step (2). (5) Perform test cutting according to the actual cutting conditions and check the load put by test cutting. For the detected spindle load value (%), the maximum torque (%) during test cutting is displayed at termination of hole machining. This detected value is used as the basic value for automatically calculating the warning level and damage level. (When the program performs continuous machining, perform single operation.) (6) Calculate the warning level and damage level. Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor on the file number set for the tool with which test cutting was performed, and press soft key [CALC.]. In the righthand part of the window, the automatically calculated warning level value and damage level value are displayed. NOTE Pressing [CALC.] without positioning the cursor on the file number used for test cutting does not calculate correct data.

290

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

(7) Register the warning level and damage level. Press soft key [ENTRY]. The automatically calculated values are registered. You can also change the setting for the item at the cursor manually. (8) After setting data for all file numbers to be used, press soft key [END]. [SPINDLE LOAD FILE] is closed. (9) For each tool to be used, set operation to be performed when the warning load is detected and that to be performed when the damage load is detected. On [TOOL FILE], move the cursor to [WARNING] or [BREAKAGE] and select operation by pressing the corresponding soft key. Operation to be performed when the warning load is detected OFF : Continues machining even when the warning level is exceeded. FEED DOWN : Reduces the feedrate to decrease the load on the tool and continues machining when the warning level is reached. (Reduces the feedrate to up to 60%.) TOOL CHNG : Continues machining when the warning level isreached, and replaces the tool with the next one registered to the same group when the next tool change command is issued. DOWN)CHANGE : Reduces the feedrate when the warning level is reached, and replaces the tool with the next one registered to the same group when the next tool change command is issued. MCHN STOP : Stops feeding the tool along the Zaxis when the warning level is detected. The Zaxis automatically returns to the reference position. After automatic return, performs spindle or coolant unit stop processing and displays an alarm. For details of operation to be performed for machine stop, see the following. Operation to be performed when the damage load is detected. OFF : Continues machining even when the damage level is exceeded. MCHN STOP : Stops feeding the tool along the Zaxis when the damage level is detected. The Zaxis automatically returns to the reference position. After automatic return, performs spindle or coolant unit stop processing and displays an alarm. Operation is performed for machine stop as follows: (1) Damage to a tool is detected. (2) Feeding the tool along the axis stops. (3) The Zaxis automatically returns to the reference position (25% of rapid traverse override) (4) The spindle or coolant unit stops.
291

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(5) An alarm is displayed. The following message is displayed during reference position return of the Zaxis: 2013 EXECUTING TOOL ESCAPE The following alarm is displayed when damage to a used tool is detected: 1010 TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED (10)Enable the AI tool monitor function (set it to ON). On [TOOL FILE] Screen, move the cursor to [TOOL MONITOR] and select [ON] by pressing the corresponding soft key.

292

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

14.4
TOOL GROUP CREATION AND AUTOMATIC TOOL EXCHANGE

If the spindle load reaches the warning level, a used tool can be replaced with a spare one when the next tool change command is issued. To replace the tool, a tool group must be set.

14.4.1
Setting a Tool Group
(1) On [TOOL FILE] Screen, press soft key [TOOL GROUP]. [TOOL GROUP SETTING] appears.

(2) Set a desired life value for the tool life item. When the tool use count or time exceeds this life value, the tool is replaced even when the spindle load does not exceed the warning level. When you want to use the AI tool monitor function only for replacing tools, set a sufficiently large value as the life value. (3) Set the number (T code) of each tool to be used. (Always set numbers in fields, sequentially from No. 1.) (4) Set tool length compensation codes (H codes). (5) Press soft key [END] to terminate tool group setting. NOTE You can also manage the life of each tool and replace the tool using the tool use count and time without using the AI tool monitor function. In this case, set the correct tool life time. For other items, set the same values as when each tool is replaced using the AI tool monitor function.

293

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

14.4.2
Program Creation

To use a tool group, change the Tcode and Hcode values as described below. (1) Specify the Tcode using a 3digit number (Tfff) corresponding to the tool group. Example) M06 T101
T101 T102 T103 Tool group 1 Tool group 2 Tool group 3

(2) Specify the Hcode using the H99 command. When a tool is exchanged, the H99 command performs compensation using a tool length compensation code in the tool group window. Example) M06 T101
Tool life management screen T101 : Group 1 Specify group 1 as follows: T1 T2 T3 (H62) (H63) (H64)

G43 Z30. H99

The following compensation values are used: H62 when T1 is used H63 when T2 is used H64 when T3 is used

14.4.3
Registering a Tool Length Compensation Value

Set a compensation value for each specified tool length compensation code.

294

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

14.5
CONFIRMING THE CURRENT STATUS AND CLEARING

(1) Confirming the current status Display [TOOL FILE] Screen. When monitor information is not displayed in the righthand part of the screen, press soft key [MONITOR]. Monitor information is displayed.
Tool group information Monitor information

For each tool in the tool group displayed in monitor information, [USING], [LIFE], or [WARNING] is displayed according to the use status of the tool. [USING] : The tool is used in the group. [LIFE] : The life count (or time) of the tool is reached. [WARNING] : The AI tool monitor function detected the spindle load for the tool exceeding the warning level. Pressing the page key changes the tool group number displayed in monitor information. (2) Examples of alarm displays Alarms are displayed under the following conditions. 1 When a tool breakage is detected If operation to be performed when the damage load is detected is set to [MCHN STOP], the machine is stopped on the spot and the following alarm is displayed: 1010 TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED. 2 When all tools in a group were used up When operation to be performed when the warning load is detected is set to [TOOL CHNG] or [DOWN)CHANGE] and the load exceeds the warning level for the last tool in a tool group, the following alarm is displayed at termination of the program. When operation to be performed when the damage load is detected is set to [MCHN STOP] and the load exceeds the damage level for the last tool, the following alarm is displayed immediately: 1011 ALL TOOLS IN SAME GROUP ARE USED.
295

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE Set TOOL CHNG or DOWN+CHNG for the last tool in a tool group. Otherwise, the alarm messages explained above will not be displayed. 3 When operation to be performed when the damage load is detected is set to [MCHN STOP] and damage to the last tool is detected, the above two alarms are displayed simultaneously. NOTE If M99 is specified at the end of a program, or if the program is large. Because the M99 is not assumed to be the last command of a program, no alarm message will be displayed. Specify M43 at any location separately from any other command. M43 is a tool status read command. It can read the status of tools and cause alarm messages to be displayed (if any). (3) Clearing When the load reaches the warning or damage level for all tools in a tool group or the life count or time for each of the tools is reached, the tools must be replaced with new ones and tool life management must be performed from the beginning. In this case, clear tool information. On [TOOL FILE] Screen, select a tool group for which information is to be cleared using the page key and press soft keys [CLR TLINFO.] and [EXEC]. The currently displayed tool group information is cleared.

296

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

14.6
SUPPLEMENT TO PROGRAM COMMANDS
Power ON

(1) Using program commands to specify whether to enable or disable the AI tool monitor function M40 : Disables AI TOOL MONITOR. M41 : Enables AI TOOL MONITOR.

When the power is switched on, the AI TOOL MONITOR function is enabled.

01200 ; G40G49G80G59 ; G91G28Z0 ; G28X0Y0 ; M06T101 ; G90G43G00Z30. H99 ; X40. Y20. ; M08 ; M03S600 ; G81Z20. F150K0 ; M40 ; X80 ; X85 ; M41 ; X90 ; X100 ; G80M09 ; G91G28Z0M05 ; G28X0Y0 ; G49M30 ; AI TOOL MONITOR is enabled.

When M40 (disable AI TOOL MONITOR) is executed, the AI TOOL MONITOR function is disabled and remains AI TOOL MONITOR so until M41 (enable AI TOOL MONITOR) is disabled. is executed. In this case, TOOLMN STP is M41 (Enable AI displayed in the lower section of the QUICK TOOL MONITOR) screen. If the setting for operations to be performed on warning and breakage levels has not been specified on the TOOL LIFE screen, these operations will not be per AI TOOL MONITOR formed even after M41 is specified. If the is enabled. setting for operations to be performed on warning or breakage level is turned off in M41 (enable AI TOOL MONITOR), TOOLMN STP will not be displayed.

NOTE This function is available when the AI tool monitor function is enabled ([TOOL MONITOR] is set to ON) on [TOOL FILE]Screen. If [TOOL MONITOR] is set to OFF, the AI tool monitor function does not operate even when M41 is issued.

297

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(2) Peck cycle

M32 M33 M34 Starts to detect a noload condition for the AI function. Judges on a noload condition for the AI function. Checks whether a noload error has occurred. Disables the noload detection function for a peck cycle. (Enables the standard noload detection function.)

The term peck cycle refers to a peck drilling cycle directed by G73 or G83. In this peck drilling cycle, a workpiece may not be machined in the first machining cycle depending on the position of the R point. To overcome this problem, the commands listed above are provided so as to perform control different from a G81 or G82 canned cycle. When using these M commands :

M32 G83 M33 M33

; X Y ; X Y X Y

; ; ; (Last hole position)

M33 G98 M34

X Y ;

Program as listed above, so that the program starts with M32, M33 is issued before the position of the hole, and M34 is issued at the end of the peck cycle. (3) Using a program command to set AI tool monitor data You can use a program command to set the spindle load level file number, operation to be performed when the warning load is detected, and that to be performed when the damage load is detected, for each tool number. For a tool number (T): : File number (U) 1 to 100 Operation to be performed when the warning load is detected (V) 0:Disabled 1:Deceleration 2:Tool change 3:Deceleration + tool change 4:Machine stop Operation to be performed when the damage level is detected (W) 0:Disabled 1:Machine stop
298

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

Command format M44 T

Ujj

Vf

Tool numbers where data is to be updated: 1 to 14 (1 to 21 for the T21iC series), 99 (Specifying 99 causes rewriting for the currently used tool.) Mcode for specifying to update data.

To update data in a program, it is necessary to execute O9029, using a custom macro function. For this reason, program number O9029 cannot be used for another purpose. NOTE If data updating in a program is specified incorrectly, an alarm will be issued. (Example) M44 T98 U41.5 V1 W2 ; (1) (2) (3)

(1) T98 is out of a valid range. (2) A decimal point cannot be used. (3) W2 is out of a valid range.

If any of the above errors occurs, the message 1013 AI TOOL MONITOR DATA ERROR will be displayed. Setting 0 at [U] (management number) disables the AI TOOL MONITOR function. When specifying 0 as a management number, specify 0 also at [V] (operation for warning load level) and [W] (operation for breakage load level), or specify OFF. Otherwise, an alarm will be issued. The NC unit does not recognize a Tcode (current tool number) immediately after the power is switched on. To have the Tcode recognized, exchange a tool. Once a tool is exchanged, the current tool number is recognized. If this operation is not performed, the NC unit becomes inoperable when T99 is issued for updating data in a program, and an alarm will be issued.

299

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

14.7
ALARM MESSAGES DISPLAYED BY THE AI TOOL MONITOR FUNCTION
(1) Alarms
Number 1010 1011 Message TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED. ALL TOOL IN SAME GROUP ARE USED. Description The tool in current use reached a breakage level. All tools in a specified tool group reached a warning or breakage level. Response Reset the system, then exchange the broken tool. Reset the system, then check the tool, or exchange the tool and clear data about use status. Reset the system, then check the specified command, and exchange the tool if T99 has been specified.

1013

AI TOOL MONITOR DATA Abnormal data related to the AI ERROR. function Program format error Data out of tolerance

(2) Messages
Number 2013 Message EXECUTING TOOL ESCAPE. Description A breakage level was detected and the machine stopped feeding. The machine is returning to the Zaxis reference position.

300

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

14. AI TOOL MONITOR

14.8
SIGNAL OUTPUT

When a warning or breakage level is detected, a signal can be output to an external device. This function can be used regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is abled. For setting and connection of signal output, see 15 external interface function.

301

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15

EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

302

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.1
OVERVIEW

The ROBODRILL is supplied with an external interface (16 output and 16 input signals(*)) as standard. You can change the nature of each input/output signal without restrictions to suit your machine.

Standard specifications OUTPUT 1 : M80 OUTPUT OUTPUT 2 : M81 OUTPUT OUTPUT 3 : M82 OUTPUT INPUT 1 : WORK NO. SEARCH 1 INPUT 2 : WORK NO. SEARCH 2 INPUT 3 : WORK NO. SEARCH 3 Can be customized as desired

Users requirements OUTPUT 1 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 : M CODE BCD OUTPUT 3 INPUT 1 : PROGRAM NO. SEARCH 1 INPUT 2 : PROGRAM NO. SEARCH 2 INPUT 3 : PROGRAM NO. SEARCH 3

NOTE 1 If the optional side automatic door is fitted, 14 input points and 16 output points can be used. 2 When the centerthrough coolant option is installed, additional eight input signals and eight output signals are used. 3 It can be increased max. input 32 points and max. output 32 points as optional.

303

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15.2
SETTING INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS AND FUNCTIONS

The input/output signals and functions are set on the EXT. INTERFACE screen (a QUICK screen). (1) Setting the input/output signals

I/O signal title I/O signal address Switching INPUT/OUTPUT

Status List of I/O signal

Position the cursor to a desired address, then enter a number listed in the SIGNAL LIST. To set 2 : M CODE OUTPUT BY BCD 2^0 at output address Y0002.0, for example, position the cursor to Y0002.0 and press the following keys :

304

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

(2) Setting functions 1. Setting machine status output Press the [STAT. OUTPUT] soft key.

Press

Position the cursor to the item corresponding to the desired output, then press the [ON] or [OFF] soft key. Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK). When multiple menu items (e.g., ALARM and OPERATOR MESSAGE) are selected for the same output (e.g., OUTPUT 1), the output types of the menu items are different (e.g., LIGHT UP for one, and BLINK for the other), and the conditions of the menu items simultaneously selected are satisfied (e.g., an alarm and operator message are issued), the output types of the menu items become LIGHT UP. After setting the output, press the [END] soft key. 2. Setting other functions Press the [FUNCTIONS] soft key.

Press

Position the cursor to the item corresponding to the desired function, then press the [SELECT] or [SELECT] soft key. After setting the function, press the [END] soft key.
305

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15.3
OUTPUT SIGNAL CHECK FUNCTION

This function can turn a signal on or off independently of the output signal setting. Use this function to check output signal wiring, for example. Press the [TEST] soft key.

Press

Position the cursor to the address of the output to be checked, then press the [ON] or [OFF] soft key. After checking the output, press the [END] soft key. When TEST mode terminates, the ON or OFF status set with this function is automatically cancelled. NOTE When testing an output signal for which 1. FOR CUSTOM PMC is set, disable the custom PMC function (by setting PMC keep relay K15 bit 7 to 0).

306

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.4
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS
No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Unused For custom PMC Signal name

The following input/output signals are supported.

(1) Output signals (ROBODRILL External equipment)

Function Does not output any signal. Output signal reserved for custom PMC. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (5) in Detailed description of input/output signals. Outputs the operation mode status of the -T14iA. (*1)

M code output BY BCD 2^0 M code output BY BCD 2^1 M code output BY BCD 2^2 M code output BY BCD 2^3 M code output BY BCD 2^0*10 M code output BY BCD 2^1*10 M code output BY BCD 2^2*10 M code output BY BCD 2^3*10 M code output BY BCD 2^0*100 M code output BY BCD 2^1*100 M code output BY BCD 2^2*100 M code output BY BCD 2^3*100 Request of M code data read Parity check of BCD data Distribution completion M80 output M81 output M82 output M83 output M84 output M85 output M86 output M87 output M88 output M89 output In the AUTO mode

307

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(2) Output signals (ROBODRILL External equipment)

No. 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Signal name Cycle start (In progress) Feed hold Emergency stop Reset Machine status output 1 Machine status output 2 Machine status output 3 Spindle is at hold Automatic door close state Automatic door open state Splash guard door close Production completed Search end of the program No. Read end of the program No. Warning level detection Breakage level detection Door open (M60) Door open (M61) Door open (M62) Door open (M63) Door open (M64) Door open (M65) BATTERY ALARM Tool life M100 output M101 output M102 output M103 output M104 output M105 output M106 output M107 output M108 output M109 output Function Remains on during programmed operation. Remains on in the feed hold state. Remains off in the emergency stop state. Remains on in the reset state. See (6) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (6) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (6) in Detailed description of input/output signals. Remains on in the spindle stop state. Goes on when the automatic door close limit is reached. Goes on when the automatic door open limit is reached. Goes on when the splash guard door is closed. Goes on when machining has been completed. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. Goes on when the spindle load exceeds the warning level. (*2) Goes on when the spindle load exceeds the breakage level. (*2) See (1) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (1) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (1) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (1) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (1) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (1) in Detailed description of input/output signals. Goes on when the battery voltage drops to a preset level. Goes on once all of the tools in the tool group have reached the end of their service life. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5.

308

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

No. 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79

Signal name M120 output M121 output M122 output M123 output M124 output M125 output M126 output M127 output M128 output M129 output 1st. REF. POINT (XAXIS) 1st. REF. POINT (YAXIS) 1st. REF. POINT (ZAXIS) 1st. REF. POINT (4THAXIS) 1st. REF. POINT (5THAXIS) Manual mode Position switch Notice of tool life

Function See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return. Goes on upon the completion of reference position return. Goes on when manual mode is selected. See Input/output signal details (5). Is set to ON when the number of times that the last tool in the tool group will be able to be used in the future is not greater than the tool life limit to trigger an expiration advance notice. See (9) in Details of input/output signals. On during remote operation. See the item describing the touch probe control function.

80 81 82

Alarm output 2 In the remote control Probe ON/OFF

309

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(3) Input signals (External equipment ROBODRILL)

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Unused For custom PMC Program number search 2^0 Program number search 2^1 Program number search 2^2 Program number search 2^3 Program number search 2^0*10 Program number search 2^1*10 Program number search 2^2*10 Program number search 2^3*10 Program number search 2^0*100 Program number search 2^1*100 Program number search 2^2*100 Program number search 2^3*100 Program number search 2^0*1000 Program number search 2^1*1000 Program number search 2^2*1000 Program number search 2^3*1000 Request of Prog. No. data read Work number search 2^0 Work number search 2^1 Work number search 2^2 Work number search 2^3 External start External hold External reset External emergency stop Completion (FIN) Reset & rewind Signal name Ignores the signal input. Input signal reserved for custom PMC. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (2) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (2) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (2) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (2) in Detailed description of input/output signals. See (3) in Detailed description of input/output signals. When turned off, stops the programmed operation. (*3) When turned on, resets the CNC. When turned on, places the machine in the emergency stop state. (*4) See (4) in Detailed description of input/output signals. When turned on, resets the CNC and calls the beginning of a program. Function

310

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

(4) Input signals (External equipment ROBODRILL)

No. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Signal name External door open control External door close control DNC operation Request of door close Single block on Dry run on M100 FIN M101 FIN M102 FIN M103 FIN M104 FIN M105 FIN M106 FIN M107 FIN M108 FIN M109 FIN Tool breakage Skip Interrupttype custom macro Auto. measurement of tool leng. Interlock (ALL AXES) Skip 2 Skip 3 Skip 4 Skip 5 Skip 6 Skip 7 Skip 8 Alarm output 2 release Probe status Probe battery low Probe error Function When turned on, opens the automatic door. (*5) When turned on, closes the automatic door. (*5) When turned on, places the machine in DNC operation mode. See (1) in Detailed description of input/output signals. When turned on, places the machine in single block operation mode. (*6) When turned on, places the machine in dry run operation mode. (*7) See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. See Details of I/O signals 5. The signal being on indicates that the tool is damaged. See Details of I/O signals 7. Another program is called while the current program is being executed.(*9) See Details of I/O signals 8.(*9) When off, movement on any servo axis is inhibited. (*8) See (7) in Details of I/O signals . See (7) in Details of I/O signals . See (7) in Details of I/O signals . See (7) in Details of I/O signals . See (7) in Details of I/O signals . See (7) in Details of I/O signals . See (7) in Details of I/O signals . See (9) in Details of I/O signals . See the item describing the touch probe control function. See the item describing the touch probe control function. See the item describing the touch probe control function.

311

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

*1 The output status can be selected by setting bit 7 of keep relay K6. *2 The output status can be selected by setting bit 6 of keep relay K8. *3 Set [ON] in the EXTERNAL FEED HOLD field of the FUNCTION SELECTION window. *4 Set [ON] in the EXTERNAL EMG STOP field of the FUNCTION SELECTION window. *5 Signal reception mode can be selected by setting bit 1 of keep relay K7. *6 Set bit 3 of keep relay K8 to 1. *7 Set bit 4 of keep relay K8 to 1. *8 At FUNCTION SELECTION, set INTERLOCK (ALL AXES) to ON. *9 Option Standard settings are as folllows:

312

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.4.1
Detailled Description of Input/Output Signals
M60 to M65 is specified

(1) Automatic door open/close (option)

When one of commands M60 to M65 is specified in automatic (MEM) or MDI mode, the automatic door opens. When a signal is input to the machine while the door is open, the door closes and operation is resumed.

The automatic door opens

The door open signal is output Note 1) The door close request signal (external equipment ROBO DRILL) is valid only while one of commands M60 to M65 is being executed. The signal is ignored upon a reset or while one of com mands M60 to M65 is not being executed. Note 2) While one of commands M60 to M65 is being executed, operator message 2001 THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD IS OPEN is not displayed, even if the door is open.

Is the door close request signal being input? YES The automatic door closes

NO

Operation is resumed

(2) External work number search function Some machining programs can be stored in program memory. A required program can thus be called by using the rotary switch or similar. After selecting the number of the program, press the CYCLE START button. The specified program is selected, and automatic operation starts. Program numbers O0001 to O0015 can be selected. When using the external work number search function, set EXT. WORK No. SEARCH for PROGRAM SELECTION.

313

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[Relationship between signal statuses and selected program numbers]

Work No. search 2^3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Work No. search 2^2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Work No. search 2^1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 Work No. search 2^0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 Selected program number Not selected O0001 O0002 O0003 O0004 O0005 O0006 O0007 O0008 O0009 O0010 O0011 O0012 O0013 O0014 O0015

NOTE 1 This function can be used only in automatic operation (MEM) mode, not during MDI operation. 2 The program number must be selected from O0001 to O0015. 3 Not all program numbers need be used to store programs in memory. 4 If the program corresponding to a specified number is not found in memory, an alarm is output at activation. (Alarm message 59 PROGRAM NUMBER IS NOT FOUND) 5 No program is selected if the function is started in the automatic operation stop state (single block stop, for example) or automatic operation halt state (feed hold stop). The currently selected program is resumed from the current stop point. 6 When resuming the execution of a part-completed program, search for a sequence number in automatic operation (MEM) mode, then restart the program. A program number is not selected, but execution of the currently selected program is resumed from the point at which execution was stopped. 7 When the function is started with all signals open, no program number is selected, but the currently selected program is executed. To enable automatic operation of a program other than O0001 to O0015, follow the steps shown below: Search for a program number (on the screen). Set all signals for program selection switches to OPEN. Press the operation start button. 8 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the external program number search function.

314

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

(3) External program number search function When a sequencer or other external equipment issues a program number to the ROBODRILL, this function retrieves the corresponding program from the memory of the ROBODRILL control unit. Program numbers O0001 to O9999 can be selected. Specify a desired program with a four-digit binary-coded decimal (BCD) number. To use the external program number search function, set [EXT.PRPG.No.SEARCH] for PRPGRAM SELECTION.

315

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[Interface]
(External equipment ROBODRILL)
Signal name Program number search 2^0 Program number search 2^1 Program number search 2^2 Program number search 2^3 Program number search 2^0*10 Program number search 2^1*10 Program number search 2^2*10 Program number search 2^3*10 Program number search 2^0*100 Program number search 2^1*100 Program number search 2^2*100 Program number search 2^3*100 Program number search 2^0*1000 Program number search 2^1*1000 Program number search 2^2*1000 Program number search 2^3*1000 Program number read request External start When the signal is input, the ROBODRILL reads the data corresponding to the program number specified by the program number data signal. When a signal is input after a program number has been selected (while the ROBODRILL is sending the selection end signal), automatic operation starts. Enter a pulse signal of 200 ms or longer. (Automatic operation starts at the falling edge of the pulse signal.) Function Specify a program with a binary-coded decimal (BCD) number. Wiring is not required for a bit that is always set to 0. Omit wiring according to the program numbers to be used.

(ROBODRILL External equipment)

Signal name Program number selection end Function Indicates that a program number has been selected and that automatic operation can be started. This signal is output after output of the data read end signal ends. After this signal is output, turn the data read request signal off. This signal goes off at the following timings: When operation is activated Upon a reset When a new program number is selected

316

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

[Timing of external program number search]

Program number data signal

Number specified

Data read request signal

ON

External start signal

ON

Data read end signal

ON

Selection end signal

ON

ROBODRILL operation

Number read

Selection

Automatic operation

NOTE 1 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the external work number search function. 2 No program is selected when the function is started in automatic operation stop state (single block stop, for example) or automatic operation halt state (feed hold stop). The currently selected program is started from the point at which execution stopped. 3 When the program corresponding to the specified number cannot be found in memory, an alarm is output at activation. (Alarm message 59 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND) 4 When program number 0 is specified, no program numbers are selected. The currently selected program is executed. 5 Programs O8000 to O8999 can be protected by setting an NC parameter (bit 0 of NC parameter No. 3202 (NE8)). Programs O9000 to O9999 are protected beforehand according to the setting of a parameter (bit 4 of NC parameter No. 3202 (NE9)).

317

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(4) External M code BCD output function This function outputs a specified M code number to a sequencer or other external equipment. When the external equipment operates according to the specified M code, it is interlocked with the ROBODRILL. The M code number is output as a three-digit binary-coded decimal (BCD) number. To use the external M code BCD output function, set [NEITHER USE] for M CODE OUTPUT BY BCD.

318

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

[Interface]
(ROBODRILL External equipment)
Signal name M code BCD output 2^0 M code BCD output 2^1 M code BCD output 2^2 M code BCD output 2^3 M code BCD output 2^0*10 M code BCD output 2^1*10 M code BCD output 2^2*10 M code BCD output 2^3*10 M code BCD output 2^0*100 M code BCD output 2^1*100 M code BCD output 2^2*100 M code BCD output 2^3*100 M code data read request Indicates that the M code number data signal is being output. Read the M code number while the signal is being output. Distribution end Indicates that an auxiliary function (M, S, or T code) is specified and that axial movement has been completed. (Usually, this feature is not used.) BCD data parity check Outputs the results of a parity check. Parity of specified M code Parity check Check signal 0 1 0 1 K4.5=0 Odd Even Even Odd K4.5=1 Even Odd Odd Even Function A specified M code is output as a binary-coded decimal (BCD) number. Not all data need be read. Omit wiring according to the M codes to be used.

Even parity check (K1.1=0) Odd parity check (K1.1=1)

(PMC parameter) K1.1 K4.5 : Switching between even parity check and odd parity check : Switching the output status of the results of parity check

(External equipment ROBODRILL)

Signal name Finish (FIN) Function The signal is input once operation of the external equipment ends. When the signal is input, the ROBODRILL terminates M code output and proceeds to the next block of the program.

319

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[Timing of external M code BCD output]

M code number data signal

ON

ON

Data read request signal :

ON

ON

Finish signal

ON

ON

ROBODRILL operation

M code specified

M code specified

NOTE 1 This function cannot be used simultaneously with the M code output function. 2 M0 to M99 must not be used. 3 Specify this function with the first M code if two or more M codes are to be specified.

320

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

(5) M code output function (M80 to M89, M100 to M129) This function outputs a signal corresponding to a specified M code.
M code M81 M82 M83 M83 output M84 M80 M85 M86 M87 M88 M89 M100 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 M106 M107 M108 M109 M110 M111 M112 M113 M114 M115 M116 M117 M118 M119 M120 M121 M122 M123 M124 M125 M126 M127 M128 M129 M120 output M121 output M122 output M123 output M124 output M125 output M126 output M127 output M128 output M129 output ON2 Turns off the M10X output and, at the same time, turns on the M12X output. This is used when ON2 is selected as the output type of M100 to M109. Each M code is used in combination with an M code having the same least significant digit. (Example: M100 <> M120) j: 0 to 9 M80 output M85 output M86 output M87 output M88 output M89 output M100 output M101 output M102 output M103 output M104 output M105 output M106 output M107 output M108 output M109 output ON1 Turns off the M10X and M12X output. This is used when ON1 or ON2 is selected as the output type of M100 to M109. Each M code is used in combination with an M code having the same least significant digit. (Example: M100 <> M110) j: 0 to 9 Selectable Selects an output type from pulse, FIN, ON1, and ON2. Pulse FIN :Used only by M10X : Used only by M10X. Individual M codes have a corresponding FIN signal. FIN ON1 Turns an output signal off. (M84) Turned on at the beginning of the specification of an M code. Turned off when the finish signal is input from the external equipment. Signal name M81 output M82 output Turns an output signal on. (M83) Output type Instantaneous Function Outputs a pulse signal of 100 ms duration.

ON/OFF1 : Used in combination with M11X ON/OFF2 : Used in combination with M11X and M12X. j: 0 to 9

321

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(pulse type) M code specification

(ON1 type) M code specification

M81

M83

M84

Signal output

ON

Signal output

ON

(FIN type) M code specification

(ON2 type) M code specification

M81

M100

M120

M100

M110

Signal output

ON

Signal output1 :

ON

ON

External equipment

Operation

Finish signal output

Signal output2 :

ON

When an M code of pulse ON1 or ON2 type is specified, the ROBODRILL automatically proceeds to the next program block after the signal has been output (or stopped). When an M code of FIN type is specified, the ROBODRILL waits until a finish signal is input from the external equipment. After this signal is input, the ROBODRILL proceeds to the next program block. To use the function to output M100 to M129, set [M100 M129] to [ON].

322

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

To set the output type of M100 to M109, use M code output type. Press soft key [MCODE OUTPUT].

Press

Item 1 2 M CODE OUTPUT TYPE AUXILIARY DATA

Contents A desired M code output type is selected by pressing the corresponding soft key. This is used when PULSE or FIN is selected as the M code output type. PULSE type : The ON duration of the pulse signal is set. FIN type : The duration for waiting for the FIN signal is set. If the completion signal is not input within the specified period, feed hold occurs and operator message 2003 TIME OUT (M100 M109) appears.

323

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

All of M80 to M89 can be changed to FIN type. To do this, set M80M89 to FIN TYPE. After FIN TYPE is set, M84 output can be used.

NOTE The ROBODRILL uses a high-speed M/S/T interface. This interface can be set to emulate a conventional M/S/T interface by setting the following parameters. (This change need not be made for an ordinary connection between the ROBODRILL and external equipment.) (NC parameter)
#7 MHI #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3001

MHI 1 : Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing. 0 : Does not use the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing. (PMC parameter)
#7 K00 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 P.MF

P.MF 1 : Does not use the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing. 0 : Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T code processing.

324

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

(6) Machine status output function This function outputs machine status signals. Signals are also output to a relay contact, hence can be used to light a status indicator, for example. Select the machine state in which this signal is output in the SET. OF MAC. STATUS OUT.

Press

ALARM OPE. MESSAGE PROGRAM EXEC.

PROGRAM END

: A signal is output if a CNC alarm occurs. : A signal is output while an operator message is displayed. : A signal is output during programmed operation.
: A signal is output upon the completion of programmed operation (execution of M00, M01, M02, or M30).

PRODUCT COMP.

: A signal is output upon the completion of machining (QUICK screen - production management function). : A signal is output while the stop buttons indicator on the operators panel is lit.
: Is

FEED HOLD

NOTICE OF TOOL LIFE

set to ON when the number of times that the last tool in the tool group will be able to be used in the future is not greater than the tool life limit to trigger an expiration advance notice.

325

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK). When multiple menu items (e.g., ALARM and OPERATOR MESSAGE) are selected for the same output (e.g., OUTPUT 1), the output types of the menu items are different (e.g., LIGHT UP for one, and BLINK for the other), and the conditions of the menu items simultaneously selected are satisfied (e.g., an alarm and operator message are issued), the output types of the menu items become LIGHT UP. [Signal connections]

[XT 3] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 13 12 15 14 17 16 19 18 20

)24E : 0V : Output 1 : Output 2 : Output 3 :

XT35 XT36 XT37,8 XT39,10 XT311,12

NOTE 1 If +24V is not output from 5 and 6 of XT3, check fuse 7 (FU7) (3.2 A). 2 Relay contact capacity: 30 VDC, 2 A 250 VAC, 2 A

(7) Skip function (option) When a signal is input from the external equipment while a G31 move command is being executed, this function instigates the following operation: D The current coordinates at the time of signal input are stored into the CNC. D The current block is terminated and execution of the next block is started. This function is used for the following: (a) Grinding and other machining for which the end point is notprogrammed, instead being given by a signal (b) Workpiece dimension calculation: Movement is made in G31 mode to determine the shape and dimensions of a workpiece or other object. The coordinates are calculated and stored in the CNC according to the signal received from a sensor. The dimensions of the workpiece are calculated by a custom macro instruction, based on the stored coordinates. For details, refer to the CNC Operators Manual.
326

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

NOTE 1 A block in G31 mode is unconditionally changed to G01 mode. The feedrate specified with an F code is selected. 2 When using this function for measurement, program a constant feedrate. If the feedrate is allowed to vary, the measurement error will increase. Provided the feedrate is constant, the measurement error can be calculated as follows: 1 4 ERRmax=Fm 60 1000 ERRmax : Maximum measurement error (mm or inch) Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) 3 The amount of overrun after a skip signal is input is calculated as follows: 1 20+Tc+Ts Qmax=Fm ( ) 1000 60 Qmax : Overrun (mm or inch) Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min) Tc : Cutting time constant (msec) Ts : Servo time constant (usually 33 msec) 4 The skip signal must have a width of at least 10 msec. 5 SKIP (46) X0004.7 SKIP2 (50) X0004.2 SKIP3 (51) X0004.3 SKIP4 (52) X0004.4 SKIP5 (53) X0004.5 SKIP6 (54) X0004.6 SKIP7 (55) X0004.0 SKIP8 (56) X0004.1 Set each item as above.

(8) Automatic tool length measurement function (option) When G37 is specified, the tool moves to a predetermined measurement position. If a signal (measurement position reach signal) is input from external equipment while the tool is moving to the measurement position, the tool stops immediately. This function adds the difference between the stop position and the predetermined measurement position to the current tool length compensation. For details, refer to the CNC Operators Manual.
327

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Feedrate Rapid traverse rate Rapid traverse Measurement speed Start point Predetermined measurement position

Deceleration position Measurement position reach signal

ON : Range in which the measurement position reach signal is valid

[Parameter settings] Set the following parameters: NC parameters No. 6241 : Measurement speed No. 6251 : Deceleration position No. 6254 : Range in which the measurement position reach signal is valid NOTE Set automatic tool length measurement (48) for address X0004.2. (9) Alarm output 2 This signal is mainly used for controlling the buzzer when an alarm occurs. D Turned on when an alarm occurs. D Turned off when the alarm is released. D Turned off when the alarm output 2 release signal (57) is input. D Turned off when the specified time (PMC parameter T06) has elapsed. (when bit 2 of PMC parameter K6 is set to 1) (10)Position switches This signal is turned on when five position switches are on. PMC parameter keep relay K2#5 K2#5 = 0: Uses position switches 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. K2#5 = 0: Uses position switches 1, 2, 3, 4, and 7. The data (axis, maximum value, and minimum value) of the position switches is to be set using NC parameters.

328

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.5
EXTERNAL INTERFACE CONNECTION
(NT 4) (Terminal size M3.5)
Name UDI01 UDI02 UDI03 UDI03 UDI05 UDI06 UDI07 UDI08 Address X 4.0 X 4.1 X 4.2 X 4.3 X 4.4 X 4.5 X 4.6 X 4.7 Signal User DI01 User DI02 User DI03 User DI04 User DI05 User DI06 User DI07 User DI08 Destination XT401 XT402 XT405 XT406 XT407 XT408 XT411 XT412 01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 UDI09 UDI10 UDI11 UDI12 UDI13 UDI14 UDI15 UDI16 X 5.0 X 5.1 X 5.2 X 5.3 X 5.4 X 5.5 X 5.6 X 5.7 User DI09 User DI10 User DI11 User DI12 User DI13 User DI14 User DI15 User DI16 XT413 XT414 XT417 XT418 XT419 XT420 XT423 XT424 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 UDO01 UDO02 UDO03 UDO04 UDO05 UDO06 UDO07 UDO08 Y 2.0 Y 2.1 Y 2.2 Y 2.3 Y 2.4 Y 2.5 Y 2.6 Y 2.7 User DO01 User DO02 User DO03 User DO04 User DO05 User DO06 User DO07 User DO08 XT425 XT426 XT429 XT430 XT431 XT432 XT435 XT436 39 41 43 45 47 49 X 4.0 )24B X 4.2 X 4.4 )24B X 4.6 X 5.0 )24B X 5.2 X 5.4 )24B X 5.6 Y 2.0 0V Y 2.2 Y 2.4 0V Y 2.6 Y 3.0 0V Y 3.2 Y 3.4 0V Y 3.6 0V 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 X4.1 )24B X 4.3 X 4.5 )24B X 4.7 X 5.1 )24B X 5.3 X 5.5 )24B X 5.7 Y 2.1 0V Y 2.3 Y 2.5 0V Y 2.7 Y 3.1 0V Y 3.3 Y 3.5 0V Y 3.7 )24B

UDO09 UDO10 UDO11 UDO12 UDO13 UDO14 UDO15 UDO16

Y 3.0 Y 3.1 Y 3.2 Y 3.3 Y 3.4 Y 3.5 Y 3.6 Y 3.7

User DO09 User DO10 User DO11 User DO12 User DO13 User DO14 User DO15 User DO16

XT437 XT438 XT441 XT442 XT443 XT444 XT447 XT448

329

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(XTC1) (Terminal size M3.5)

Name UDI17 UDI18 UDI19 UDI20 UDI21 UDI22 UDI23 UDI24 Address X 10.0 X 10.1 X 10.2 X 10.3 X 10.4 X 10.5 X 10.6 X 10.7 Signal User DI17 User DI18 User DI19 User DI20 User DI21 User DI22 User DI23 User DI24 Destination XTC101 XTC102 XTC105 XTC106 XTC107 XTC108 XTC111 XTC112 01 03 05 07 09 11 13 15 17 19 UDI25 UDI26 UDI27 UDI28 UDI29 UDI30 UDI31 UDI32 X 11.0 X 11.1 X 11.2 X 11.3 X 11.4 X 11.5 X 11.6 X 11.7 User DI25 User DI26 User DI27 User DI28 User DI29 User DI30 User DI31 User DI32 XTC113 XTC114 XTC117 XTC118 XTC119 XTC120 XTC123 XTC124 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 UDO17 UDO18 UDO19 UDO20 UDO21 UDO22 UDO23 UDO24 Y 10.0 Y 10.1 Y 10.2 Y 10.3 Y 10.4 Y 10.5 Y 10.6 Y 10.7 User DO17 User DO18 User DO19 User DO20 User DO21 User DO22 User DO23 User DO24 XTC125 XTC126 XTC129 XTC130 XTC131 XTC132 XTC135 XTC136 39 41 43 45 47 49 X 10.0 )24B X 10.2 X 10.4 )24B X 10.6 X 11.0 )24B X 11.2 X 11.4 )24B X 11.6 Y 10.0 0V Y 10.2 Y 10.4 0V Y 10.6 Y 11.0 0V Y 11.2 Y 11.4 0V Y 11.6 0V 02 04 06 08 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 X10.1 )24B X 10.3 X 10.5 )24B X 10.7 X 11.1 )24B X 11.3 X 11.5 )24B X 11.7 Y 10.1 0V Y 10.3 Y 10.5 0V Y 10.7 Y 11.1 0V Y 11.3 Y 11.5 0V Y 11.7 )24B

UDO25 UDO26 UDO27 UDO28 UDO29 UDO30 UDO31 UDO32

Y 11.0 Y 11.1 Y 11.2 Y 11.3 Y 11.4 Y 11.5 Y 11.6 Y 11.7

User DO25 User DO26 User DO27 User DO28 User DO29 User DO30 User DO31 User DO32

XTC137 XTC138 XTC141 XTC142 XTC143 XTC144 XTC147 XTC148

330

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

NOTE 1 Output signals Output signals are used for driving relays and lightemitting diodes for indicators. A transistor is used as the driver. (a) Output signal standard [0 V common] current flow type Output signal specifications: Maximum output current : 200 mA (including instantaneous values) Maximum voltage : 24 V +20% Saturation voltage : 1.0 V (Max.) Leakage current : 100 mA (Max.) (b) Output circuit

+24E

Relay

(c) When connecting an inductive load such as a relay, always insert a spark killer. Insert the spark killer near the load as much as possible (within 20 cm). When connecting a capacitive load, always insert a resistor for limiting the current in series so that the load can be used within the rated current and voltage including instantaneous cases. (d) When a lamp is lit directly by the transistor output, a surge current may flow, resulting in damage to the transistor. For this reason, insert a protection circuit so that the transistor can be used within the rated current and voltage including instantaneous cases.

+24E

331

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE 2 Input signals (a) Each contact must satisfy the following conditions: Contact capacity : 30 VDC, 16 mA or more Leakage current between contacts when opened : 1 mA or less (Voltage: 26.4 V) Voltage drop between contacts when closed : 2 V or less (Current: 8.5 mA) (including cable voltage drop) (b) The following shows the receiver circuit:

External circuit

ROBODRILL Direct current input signal Filter and level converter circuit Receiver output circuit Transistor OFF : logic 0 ON : logic 1 Receiver circuit +24V

332

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.6
EMERGENCY STOP
(1) Terminals for connecting the external emergency stop signal
Emergency stop switch
XTD1

+24B

Jumper
KA1 XTD3

KA2

D To connect the emergency stop signal of an external device to the machine, remove the XTD31/XTD32 jumper wire. (2) Contact which outputs the emergency stop state of the machine

XT33 (Up to 2A) XT34

D The emergency stop state of the machine can be output from XT33 and XT34.

333

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15.7
EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

The +24B terminal on the external interface terminal block is rated at up to 2 A. If +24B is not output, check fuse 5 (FU5) (3.2 A).

334

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.8
RELAY MODULE 15.8.1
Overview
The relay module outputs four independent relay contact signals (dry contacts) for an input signal (24 VDC). As a type of contact, a choice between contact a and contact b can be made.

15.8.2
Connection

15.8.2.1
Internal connection diagram

S With a coil surge absorption diode S With an operation indication LED

Input side: 24 VDC

B1 CNTB1 A1 LED1 R1 D1 KA1 + A2 LED2 R2 D2 KA2 B2 + A3 LED3 R3 D3 KA3 B3 + A4 LED4 R4 D4 KA4 B4 + A5 B5

XTB1

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10

Output side: Dry contact

335

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15.8.2.2
Pin allocation
Input side CNTB1 HIROSE: HIF3CD10PA2.54DSA A 01 02 03 04 05 TH01 TH02 TH03 TH04 B 0V 0V 0V 0V 2 4 6 8 10 TH01B TH02B TH03B TH04B Output side XTB1 YOSHIDA: PS710A (M3 screw) 1 3 5 7 9 TH01A TH02A TH03A TH04A

15.8.3
Specifications

15.8.3.1
Ordering information
(1) (2) Name Relay module Relay module Specification A20B10070720 A20B10070722 Contact configuration 4a 4b

NOTE 1 (1) and (2) differ in the internal relay specification. 2 Do not use different voltages for the relay contacts on one module.

336

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.8.3.2
Rating

Per relay

Item Rated conducting current Maximum switching capacity Contact AC250V DC30V Minimum applicable load Rated voltage Operating voltage Coil Return voltage Power consumption DC0.1V DC24V 5A AC250V DC30V

Rating

Remarks

5A 5A 1A 1A 0.1mA

a contact b contact

70% or less of the rated voltage 5% or more of the rated voltage 200mW 360mW a contact b contact

Screw size Terminal block Applicable wire Tightening torque

M3 1.25mm2 0.5 to 0.75NSm

15.8.3.3
Outside dimensions

Mounting method Mounting using a DIN35 rail

337

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15.9
USER TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE 15.9.1
Overview
The user terminal block module is designed to expand 16 input signals and 16 output signals on the terminal block. Four points are made available so that a threewire proximity switch of NPN type can be handled. In addition, the user terminal block module can be easily connected to a relay module by using a 10conductor ribbon cable. The user terminal block module can be expanded for connection with up to four relay modules.

338

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.9.2
Connection

2.1 Block diagram

10conductor ribbon cable Connector panel for T14iC 50conductor ribbon cable Relay module 4 relays

Additional I/O 24/16

Relay module Relay terminal block module DI/DO: 16/16 50pin screw terminal block XTC1 M3.5 Relay module

4 relays

4 relays

CNTC6 [AMP 3165175] A 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 CNTC2 [HIROSE HIF3CD10PA] A 01 02 03 04 05 CNTC4 [HIROSE HIF3CD10PA] A 01 02 03 04 05 Y10.0 Y10.1 Y10.2 Y10.3 B 0V 0V 0V 0V 01 02 03 04 05 Y10.0 Y10.1 Y10.2 Y10.3 B 0V 0V 0V 0V 01 02 03 04 05 CNTC5 [HIROSE HIF3CD10PA] A Y10.0 Y10.1 Y10.2 Y10.3 B 0V 0V 0V 0V CNTC3 [HIROSE HIF3CD10PA] A Y10.0 Y10.1 Y10.2 Y10.3 B 0V 0V 0V 0V X10.3 X10.2 X10.1 X10.0 B +24B. 0V +24B 0V +24B 0V +24B 0V

Relay module

4 relays

CNTC1 [HIROSE3CB50PA] A 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 X10.0 +24B X10.2 X10.4 +24B X10.6 X11.0 +24B X11.2 X11.4 +24B X11.6 Y10.0 0V Y10.2 Y10.4 0V Y10.6 Y11.0 0V Y11.2 Y11.4 0V Y11.6 0V B X10.1 +24B X10.3 X10.5 +24B X10.7 X11.1 +24B X11.3 X11.5 +24B X11.7 Y10.1 0V Y10.3 Y10.5 0V Y10.7 Y11.1 0V Y11.3 Y11.5 0V Y11.7 +24B

339

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15.9.3
Specifications

15.9.3.1
Ordering information
(1) Name User terminal block module Specification A20B10070720 Contact configuration

15.9.3.2
Outside dimensions
PNP/NPN switch Connector for threewire proximity switch Connector for relay module

90mm

228mm

Mounting method Mounting using a DIN35 rail 62mm

340

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.10
RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE 15.10.1
Overview
The relay terminal block module, connected via a connector I/O module and a cable, allows input/output signals (24 DI signals and 16 DO signals) of the machine to be relayed through a terminal block. Signals can be expanded to up to 96 DI signals and 64 DO signals.

15.10.2
Connection
CNC I/O LINK cable

I/O LINK JD1A +24V power

JD1B CB150 CA52 Basic module A03B0815C001 CA53 Flat cable (34P) CA52 Expansion module 1 A03B0815C003 CA53 CB150 CA52 Expansion module 2 A03B0815C003 CA53 CB150 CA52 Expansion module 3 A03B0815C003 Relay module XP150 Relay module XP150 Relay module DI/DO on machine side CB150 XP150 Relay module XP150

Cable connecting modules

341

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

When the signals of the basic module [A03B0815C001] are assigned to the relay terminal block XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 +24E +24E 0V Y79.1 Y78.1 0V Y79.3 Y78.3 0V Y79.5 Y78.5 X79.0 Y79.7 Y78.7 X79.2 X80.1 X78.1 X79.4 X80.3 X78.3 X79.6 X80.5 X78.5 X80.7 X78.7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 Y79.0 Y78.0 0V Y79.2 Y78.2 0V Y79.4 Y78.4 DICOM0 Y79.6 Y78.6 X79.1 X80.0 X78.0 X79.3 X80.2 X78.2 X79.5 X80.4 X78.4 X79.7 X80.6 X78.6 +24V +24V

Address Input signals : 24 signals X78.0 to X80.7 Output signals : 16 signals Y78.0 to Y79.7

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X78.2 20 X78.3 21 DICOM 22 X78.6 23 X78.7 24 +24E 25 X79.2 26 X79.3 27 +24E 28 X79.6 29 X79.7 30 +24E 31 X80.2 X80.3 32 X80.1 X80.0 15 16 +24E 14 X79.5 13 X79.4 12 +24E 11 X79.1 10 X79.0 9 +24E 8 X78.5 7 X78.4 6 DICOM 5 X78.1 4 17 18 19 +24E DICOM X78.0 3 1 2

XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24E X80.6 X80.7 20 0V 21 Y78.2 22 Y78.3 23 0V 24 Y78.6 25 Y78.7 26 0V 27 Y79.2 28 Y79.3 29 0V 30 Y79.6 31 Y79.7 0V 32 +24V Y79.5 Y79.4 0V Y79.1 Y79.0 0V Y78.5 Y78.4 0V Y78.1 Y78.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X80.4 X80.5

342

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

When the signals of the Expansion module 1 [A03B0815C003] are assigned to the relay terminal block XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 +24E +24E 0V Y81.1 Y80.1 0V Y81.3 Y80.3 0V Y81.5 Y80.5 X82.0 Y81.7 Y80.7 X82.2 X83.1 X81.1 X82.4 X83.3 X81.3 X82.6 X83.5 X81.5 X83.7 X81.7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 Y81.0 Y80.0 0V Y81.2 Y80.2 0V Y81.4 Y80.4 DICOM0 Y81.6 Y80.6 X82.1 X83.0 X81.0 X82.3 X83.2 X81.2 X82.5 X83.4 X81.4 X82.7 X83.6 X81.6 +24V +24V

Address Input signals : 24 signals X80.0 to X83.7 Output signals : 16 signals Y80.0 to Y81.7

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X81.2 20 X81.3 21 DICOM 22 X81.6 23 X81.7 24 +24E 25 X82.2 26 X82.3 27 +24E 28 X82.6 29 X82.7 30 +24E 31 X83.2 X83.3 32 X83.1 X83.0 15 16 +24E 14 X82.5 13 X82.4 12 +24E 11 X82.1 10 X82.0 9 +24E 8 X81.5 7 X81.4 6 DICOM 5 X81.1 4 17 18 19 +24E DICOM X81.0 3 1 2

XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24E X83.6 X83.7 20 0V 21 Y80.2 22 Y80.3 23 0V 24 Y80.6 25 Y80.7 26 0V 27 Y81.2 28 Y81.3 29 0V 30 Y81.6 31 Y81.7 0V 32 +24V Y81.5 Y81.4 0V Y81.1 Y81.0 0V Y80.5 Y80.4 0V Y80.1 Y80.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X83.4 X83.5

343

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

When the signals of the Expansion module 2 [A03B0815C003] are assigned to the relay terminal block XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 +24E +24E 0V Y83.1 Y82.1 0V Y83.3 Y82.3 0V Y83.5 Y82.5 X85.0 Y83.7 Y82.7 X84.2 X86.1 X84.1 X85.4 X86.3 X84.3 X85.6 X86.5 X84.5 X86.7 X84.7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 Y83.0 Y82.0 0V Y83.2 Y82.2 0V Y83.4 Y82.4 DICOM0 Y83.6 Y82.6 X85.1 X86.0 X84.0 X85.3 X86.2 X84.2 X85.5 X86.4 X84.4 X85.7 X86.6 X84.6 +24V +24V

Address Input signals : 24 signals X84.0 to X86.7 Output signals : 16 signals Y82.0 to Y83.7

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X84.2 20 X84.3 21 DICOM 22 X84.6 23 X84.7 24 +24E 25 X85.2 26 X85.3 27 +24E 28 X85.6 29 X85.7 30 +24E 31 X86.2 X86.3 32 X86.1 X86.0 15 16 +24E 14 X85.5 13 X85.4 12 +24E 11 X85.1 10 X85.0 9 +24E 8 X84.5 7 X84.4 6 DICOM 5 X84.1 4 17 18 19 +24E DICOM X84.0 3 1 2

XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24E X86.6 X86.7 20 0V 21 Y82.2 22 Y82.3 23 0V 24 Y82.6 25 Y82.7 26 0V 27 Y83.2 28 Y83.3 29 0V 30 Y83.6 31 Y83.7 0V 32 +24V Y83.5 Y83.4 0V Y83.1 Y83.0 0V Y82.5 Y82.4 0V Y82.1 Y82.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X86.4 X86.5

344

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

When the signals of the Expansion module 3 [A03B0815C003] are assigned to the relay terminal block XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 +24E +24E 0V Y85.1 Y84.1 0V Y85.3 Y84.3 0V Y85.5 Y84.5 X88.0 Y85.7 Y84.7 X88.2 X89.1 X87.1 X88.4 X89.3 X87.3 X88.6 X89.5 X87.5 X89.7 X87.7 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 Y85.0 Y84.0 0V Y85.2 Y84.2 0V Y85.4 Y84.4 DICOM0 Y85.6 Y84.6 X88.1 X89.0 X87.0 X88.3 X89.2 X87.2 X88.5 X89.4 X87.4 X88.7 X89.6 X87.6 +24V +24V

Address Input signals : 24 signals X87.0 to X89.7 Output signals : 16 signals Y84.0 to Y85.7

XT150A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X87.2 20 X87.3 21 DICOM 22 X87.6 23 X87.7 24 +24E 25 X88.2 26 X88.3 27 +24E 28 X88.6 29 X88.7 30 +24E 31 X89.2 X89.3 32 X89.1 X89.0 15 16 +24E 14 X88.5 13 X88.4 12 +24E 11 X88.1 10 X88.0 9 +24E 8 X87.5 7 X87.4 6 DICOM 5 X87.1 4 17 18 19 +24E DICOM X87.0 3 1 2

XT150B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24E X89.6 X89.7 20 0V 21 Y84.2 22 Y84.3 23 0V 24 Y84.6 25 Y84.7 26 0V 27 Y85.2 28 Y85.3 29 0V 30 Y85.6 31 Y85.7 0V 32 +24V Y85.5 Y85.4 0V Y85.1 Y85.0 0V Y84.5 Y84.4 0V Y84.1 Y84.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X89.4 X89.5

345

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15.10.3
Specifications

15.10.3.1
Ordering information
(1) Name Relay terminal block module Specification A03B0815C020 Remarks

15.10.3.2
Outside dimensions

The relay module can be mounted by using screws or mounted on a DIN rail.

Screw hole

(Unit: mm)

346

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

15.11
RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK MODULE B 15.11.1
Overview
The relay terminal block module B, connected via an operators panel I/O module and a cable, allows input/output signals (24 DI signals and 16 DO signals) of the machine to be relayed through a terminal block. Signals can be expanded to up to 96 DI signals and 64 DO signals.

15.11.2
Connection

I/O LINK JD1A

+24V power (DOCOM)

JA3 Relay module B#1

JD1B

CE56

CE57 +24V Power +24V Power CPD1(IN)

CPD1(OUT)

Suboperators panel I/O printed circuit board A20B20020521

JD1A CE70 CE70 Relay module B#2

DI=24 DO=16

DI=24 DO=16

347

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Pin layout in relay module B#1 [CE56toCE70 connection] CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 0V X90.0 X90.2 X90.4 X90.6 X91.0 X91.2 X91.4 X91.6 X92.0 X92.2 X92.4 X92.6 DICOM Y90.0 Y90.2 Y90.4 Y90.6 Y91.0 Y91.2 Y91.4 Y91.6 DOCOM DOCOM B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 +24V X90.1 X90.3 X90.5 X90.7 X91.1 X91.3 X91.5 X91.7 X92.1 X92.3 X92.5 X92.7 DICOM Y90.1 Y90.3 Y90.5 Y90.7 Y91.1 Y91.3 Y91.5 Y91.7 DOCOM DOCOM

XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X90.2 20 X90.3 21 DICOM 22 X90.6 23 X90.7 24 +24E 25 X91.2 26 X91.3 27 +24E 28 X91.6 29 X91.7 30 +24E 31 X92.2 X92.3 32 X92.1 X92.0 15 16 +24E 14 X91.5 13 X91.4 12 +24E 11 X91.1 10 X91.0 9 +24E 8 X90.5 7 X90.4 6 DICOM 5 X90.1 4 17 18 19 +0V DICOM X90.0 3 1 2

XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24E X92.6 X92.7 20 0V 21 Y90.2 22 Y90.3 23 0V 24 Y90.6 25 Y90.7 26 0V 27 Y91.2 28 Y91.3 29 0V 30 Y91.6 31 Y91.7 0V 32 +24V Y91.5 Y91.4 0V Y91.1 Y91.0 0V Y90.5 Y90.4 0V Y90.1 Y90.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X92.4 X92.5

348

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

Pin layout in relay module B#2 [CE57toCE70 connection] CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 0V X93.0 X93.2 X93.4 X93.6 X94.0 X94.2 X94.4 X94.6 X95.0 X95.2 X95.4 X95.6 DICOM Y92.0 Y92.2 Y92.4 Y92.6 Y93.0 Y93.2 Y93.4 Y93.6 DOCOM DOCOM B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 +24V X93.1 X93.3 X93.5 X93.7 X94.1 X94.3 X94.5 X94.7 X95.1 X95.3 X95.5 X95.7 DICOM Y92.1 Y92.3 Y92.5 Y92.7 Y93.1 Y93.3 Y93.5 Y93.7 DOCOM DOCOM

XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0V DICOM X93.2 20 X93.3 21 DICOM 22 X93.6 23 X93.7 24 +24E 25 X94.2 26 X94.3 27 +24E 28 X94.6 29 X94.7 30 +24E 31 X95.2 X95.3 32 X95.1 X95.0 15 16 +24E 14 X94.5 13 X94.4 12 +24E 11 X94.1 10 X94.0 9 +24E 8 X93.5 7 X93.4 6 DICOM 5 X93.1 4 17 18 19 +0V DICOM X93.0 3 1 2

XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

+24E X95.6 X95.7 20 0V 21 Y92.2 22 Y92.3 23 0V 24 Y92.6 25 Y92.7 26 0V 27 Y93.2 28 Y93.3 29 0V 30 Y93.6 31 Y93.7 0V 32 +24V Y93.5 Y93.4 0V Y93.1 Y93.0 0V Y92.5 Y92.4 0V Y92.1 Y92.0 0V 17 18 19 +24E X95.4 X95.5

349

15. EXTERNAL INTERFACE FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

15.11.3
Specifications

15.11.3.1
Ordering information
(1) Name Relay terminal block module B Specification A03B0815C022 Remarks

15.11.3.2
Outside dimensions
Screw hole .

The relay module B can be mounted by using screws or mounted on a DIN rail.

. . . .

. .

(Unit: mm)

350

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

16. ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

16

ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

351

16. ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

16.1
OVERVIEW

The Zaxis thermal displacement compensation function estimates the amount of the thermal displacement in the Zaxis direction that is generated by the motion of the machine and compensates the displacement with using no sensor. Generally, after the machine starts motion, the Zaxis is extending downward and it becomes stable after 2 or 3 hours. Conventionally, for machining requiring a high precision, dry run is performed before start of machining to cancel the extension and machining is started when the Zaxis becomes stable. You can use this function to start machining without dry run. NOTE The displacement may not be able to be precisely compensated depending on the use conditions and environment. Do not use this function when the displacement is small because the Zaxis becomes more unstable instead. Any displacement that is not generated by the motion of the machine, such as the displacement generated due to a worn tool cannot be compensated.

352

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

16. ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

16.2
ENABLING THE ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

Set keep relay K17#1 to 1 to enable the Zaxis thermal displacement compensation function. K17#1 = 0: Disables the Zaxis thermal displacement compensation function. = 1: Enables the function. After setting this parameter, always turn the power off, then on again.

353

16. ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

16.3
ADJUSTING THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION

If the thermal displacement compensated by this function (the estimated thermal displacement) differs from the actual thermal displacement, the thermal displacement compensation amount can be adjusted to decrease the compensation error. This function uses data tables. For the data tables used, see Tables 16.3 (a) and 16.3 (b).

16.3.1
History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Displacements

Keep a history of the amounts of estimated thermal displacements at the specified position on the Zaxis. (1) First, set the position (Z machine coordinate) at which a history of the amounts of estimated thermal displacements is to be kept in D5940 in the data table. (2) Turn the power off, then on again. (3) The amounts of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement and of the estimated spindle thermal displacement at the Zaxis position (called the compensation position below) specified for D5940 immediately after poweron are saved in D5948 and D5950, respectively. (4) After that, the amounts of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement and of the estimated spindle thermal displacement at the compensation position are saved at 10minute intervals to keep them as the history. When 180 minutes have elapsed, keeping the history stops. NOTE 1 To keep a history of the amounts of estimated thermal displacements at another Zaxis position, set a Zaxis machine position for D5940 again, then turn the power off once. By this operation, the data table for saving a history (D5948 to D6022) is cleared and keeping a new history starts. 2 Data is saved as a history at 10minute intervals until 180 minutes have elapsed.

354

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

16. ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

16.3.2
Adjustment Procedure

From the actual displacement obtained by measuring workpiece dimensions (a compensation error) and the thermal displacement estimated in the previous subsection, the coefficient is modified automatically. (1) The workpiece dimensions are measured, and the compensation error is set in data table D5942. (2) The thermal displacements of the Zaxis and spindle estimated when the workpiece is machined are set in D5944 and D5946, respectively. The thermal displacements (the Zaxis and spindle) estimated at the time of workpiece machining are based on the history data saved in the previous subsection. (3) Turn the power off, then on again. The coefficient for calculating an estimated thermal displacement is now changed and the amount of an estimated thermal displacement obtained by calculation becomes more precise. NOTE Only one position on the Zaxis can be specified. After adjustment, a compensation error may become larger at a position other than the specified position.

Table 16.3.2 (a) Data table set for adjusting thermal displacement compensation
Address D5940 D5942 Description Z machine coordinate of the compensation position Estimated thermal displacements at this position are saved as a history. Compensation error obtained by measuring workpiece dimensions. In case of insufficient compensation (when the compensation amount is to be increased further), a positive value is set. In case of excessive compensation (when the compensation amount is to be decreased), a negative value is set. Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at termination of machining the workpiece Estimated using data saved as the history. Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement at termination of machining the workpiece Estimated using data saved as the history. Increment system mm mm

D5944

mm

D5946

mm

355

16. ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Table 16.3.2 (b) Data table for saving estimated thermal displacements as a history (1/2)
Address D5948 D5950 D5952 D5954 D5956 D5958 D5960 D5962 D5964 D5966 D5968 D5970 D5972 D5974 D5976 D5978 D5980 D5982 D5984 D5986 Description Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (when keeping a history starts) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (when keeping a history starts) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (10 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (10 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (20 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (20 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (30 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (30 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (40 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (40 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (50 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (50 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (60 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (60 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (70 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (70 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (80 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (80 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (90 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (90 minutes after keeping a history started) Increment system mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

356

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

16. ZAXIS THERMAL DISPLACEMENT COMPENSATION FUNCTION

Table 16.3.2 (b) Data table for saving estimated thermal displacements as a history (2/2)
Address D5988 D5990 D5992 D5994 D5996 D5998 D6000 D6002 D6004 D6006 D6008 D6010 D6012 D6014 D6016 D6018 D6020 D6022 Description Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (100 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (100 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (110 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (110 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (120 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (120 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (130 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (130 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (140 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (140 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (150 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (150 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (160 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (160 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (170 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (170 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated Zaxis thermal displacement at the compensation position (180 minutes after keeping a history started) Amount of the estimated spindle thermal displacement (180 minutes after keeping a history started) Increment system mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

357

17. AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

17

AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF

This function automatically shuts off the power supply to the unit upon termination of a given program. (1) Select the AUTOMATIC POWER OFF.

(2) When M30 (end of program) is issued, the power is turned off after about 5 seconds. To set conditions related to automatic poweroff, use [FUNCTIONS].

POWER OFF BY ALARM : Specifies whether to operate the automatic poweroff function (ON) or not (OFF) when an alarm occurs. RELEASE AT TURN ON THE POWER : Specifies whether to release the automatic poweroff setting (ON) or not (OFF) at poweron. (Only for a standard operators panel)
358

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

17. AUTOMATIC POWER SUPPLY SHUTOFF

NOTE 1 This function cannot be activated using the program end code of M02. 2 When the automatic circuit breaker function (option) is provided, the circuit breaker of the controller is turned off. 3 This function does not operate for about 70 seconds after poweron.

359

18. COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

18

COOLANT (OPTION)

A coolant unit is provided as an option. The coolant unit supplies coolant to the machining surface. The reservoir capacity is approx. 100 or 200 liters. NOTE See II3.10 for installing the coolant unit.

360

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

18. COOLANT (OPTION)

18.1
COOLANT UNIT (OPTION)

To supply coolant to the machining surface, follow the procedure described below. (1) Confirm that the reservoir is filled with coolant. If not, replenish the reservoir with coolant. (2) Open the valve on the nozzle. (3) Press the CLNT key to rotate the pump. This causes coolant to come out of the nozzle tip. (The pump can be stopped by pressing the button again.)

When the coolant unit is operating

When the coolant unit is at a halt

(4) Adjust the nozzle position so that coolant is poured on the correct position. Do not place the nozzle too close to the tool since it may cause interference between the nozzle and the turret during a tool change. Never try to adjust the nozzle position while the unit is running since it is very dangerous.

Fig.18.1 (a) Nozzle

361

18. COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

The coolant unit can be turned on (supplying coolant) and off (stop supplying coolant) automatically using the M code command or manually using the coolant button mentioned in step (3) above. To turn on and off the coolant unit automatically, execute M08 (ON) or M09 (OFF) in either the AUTO (MEM) or MENU (MDI) mode. NOTE 1 Never try to operate the pump for a prolonged period of time when the coolant reservoir is empty. (Be sure to fill the reservoir with coolant before operating the pump by following step (1) above.) Never try to operate the pump with the valve closed. Failure to observe either one of these practices may result in pump failure. 2 The coolant unit will be turned on or off during automatic running in the M code as follows. M08: The coolant unit is immediately turned on when the block is read. M09: The coolant unit is turned off after the block has been executed. (PMC Parameter K0#7=0) 3 The coolant unit is turned off during the tool change. Turn the coolant unit on using the the coolant key or the M08 code as required. 4 Fig. 18.1 (b) shows the rotating direction of the pump.

Direction of rotation

Fig.18.1 (b) Pump

362

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

18. COOLANT (OPTION)

NOTE 5 To use the [COOLANT] key on the operators panel and M08 command for controlling the coolant unit, select [FUNCTIONS] on [31:SEQ.SELECTION]Screen of [QUICK]Screen and set FOR COOLANT for [M08 COMMAND] and [COOLANT BUTTON].

When using a machine cleaning coolant device, use the shower gun only within the splash guard. If the shower gun is pointed towards the outside of the splash guard, spilled coolant is likely to make the floor slippery.

363

18. COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

18.2
MACHINE CLEANING COOLANT CONTROL (OPTIONAL)

The ROBODRILL uses a 400W motor for machine cleaning coolant. The control unit is rated up to 200 V, 2.6 A. When using nonFANUC coolant, adjust the thermal setting of the control MCC according to the rating of the coolant motor. When using the machine cleaning coolant, set [MACHINE CLEANING COOLANT] to [ON] on quick screen STANDARD SELECTION.

NOTE 1 To stop the inside cleaning coolant unit in the emergency stop state, set bit 3 of PMC parameter K0 to 1. 2 When machining is not performed, the inside cleaning coolant unit can automatically be stopped. (Set bit 3 of PMC parameter K6 to 1.) When a fixed time (default: 1 minute (PMC parameter T02)) has elapsed after termination of programmed operation (including MDI operation), the inside cleaning coolant unit is turned off. When programmed operation starts, the inside cleaning coolant unit is turned on. Pressing the manual button on the operators panel turns on cleaning coolant in the machine.

364

B85014EN/01

APPENDIX

19. BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION)

19

BLOWER CONTROL FUNCTION (OPTION)

(1) Turning the blower on or off by specifying an M code

M50 : Blower turned on M09 : Blower turned off

You can also use M08 for turning air blow on. Select [FUNCTIONS] on [31:SEQ.SELECTION] of [QUICK]Screen and set FOR BLOWER for [M08 COMMAND]. (Normally, FOR COOLANT is selected.) (2) Turning the blower on or off from the machine operators panel.

Blower is turned on. [Press]

Blower is turned off. [Press]

Select [FUNCTIONS]on [31:SEQ.SELECTION] of [QUICK]Screen and set FOR BLOWER for [COOLANT BUTTON]. (Normally, FOR COOLANT is selected.)

Basic control is the same as for the coolant unit. Even when the safety door is open, air blow operation can be turned on.
365

20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

20
MANUAL mode

OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION)

The front door of splash guard, which has the automatic door function, can be automatically opened and closed by pressing the DOOR OPEN or DOOR CLOSE key. (1) Before opening or closing the door, confirm the absence of any foreign material at the door slides. (2) The door can be automatically opened or closed by pressing the DOOR OPEN/CLOSE key.

(3) When the door has been properly opened or closed, the DOOR OPEN/CLOSE key lamp lights to indicate that the motion has been completed.

or

The <Door Open/Close> key is enabled, regardless of the operation mode. This means that when the <Door Open/Close> key is pressed during automatic operation, a gradual stop occurs along each axis, and the automatic door opens. To enable the <Door Open/Close> key in the manual mode, set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K11 bit 2 = 1

AUTO and MENU modes

To set conditions for opening and closing the door in the automatic (MEM) mode and menu operation (MDI) mode, select [FUNCTIONS] on [31:SEQ.SELECTION]of [QUICK]Screen.

366

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION)

DOOR CLOSING BY START BUTTON : Automatically closes the door at the cycle start and starts programmed operation. DOOR OPENING BY M30 : Opens the automatic door when M30 is issued. DOOR OPENING BY M00, M01 : Opens the automatic door when M00 or M01 is issued. NOTE 1 Pay attention not to get your head or hand caught in the door when it is automatically moving. 2 If the time of door open (or close) operation exceeds 4 seconds due to a foreign matter, alarm 1008 AUTO DOOR TOTAL TIME OVER. is issued. Remove the foreign matter and press the [RESET] key to release the alarm, then press the DOOR key to complete door open or close operation. 3 The automatic door does not operate in the emergency stop state. 4 The door open/close time is 2 seconds or more (not longer than 2.5 seconds) [3 seconds or more (not longer than 3.5 seconds) for L type]. If door operation time is not within this range, adjust it with the speed control adjustment screws mounted on the air cylinder.

367

20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Inside of the machine

Front of the machine

Speed control adjustment screw for closing the door (The transparent air tude is connected here.)

Speed control adjustment screw for opening the door (The yellow air tubeis connected here.) (a) T14(21)iCe/iCLe

Inside of the machine

Front of the machine

Speed control adjustment screw for opening the door (The yellow air tubeis connected here.)

Speed control adjustment screw for closing the door (The transparent air tude is connected here.)

(b) T14/21iCSe

368

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

20. OPENING AND CLOSING THE AUTOMATIC DOOR (OPTION)

D Tightening the adjustment screw by one rotation slows the door open/close speed by approximately 0.1 to 0.2 second. D Do not set the opening/closing time to two seconds or shorter (for the T14 (21) iCe/iCSe). If the time is set to two seconds or shorter (three seconds or shorter for the T14/21iCLe), defects may occur. Related parameters PMC parameters (TIMER) T20 4000 [ms] Total time for door open and close operations

369

21. INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

21

INTERNAL LIGHT (OPTION)

The internal is turned on or off according to the setting of the Quick Screen, SEQ. SELECTION.

The internal light is automatically turned off if no key on the operators panel (*) is pressed within the specified period (standard setting: 10 minutes). Subsequently, pressing any key on the operators panel turns on the internal light automatically. In the following cases, however, the internal light is not automatically turned off even if no key on the operators panel is pressed within the specified period: D The door is open. D Dry run mode is selected. D Single block mode is selected. To change the period for automatically turning off the internal light, change the PRESET value (PMC parameter counter No. 4) (in units of minutes: up to 9999 minutes). To disable automatic turnoff, set this parameter to 0. NOTE * Sheet keys other than Numeric keypad, Alter, Insert Delete, Cancel, Input EDIT, Cursor, Page, Reset, QUICK/NC, Alphabet (ABC...Z), Alarm/status.

370

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

22. STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION)

22

STATUS LIGHTS (OPTION)

The stopped state of the machine is indicated with the red, yellow, and green lamps. The following states are indicated with these three lamps: (1) A program is being executed. (The green lamp is on.) (2) The machine is stopped by a program stop (M00), optional stop (M01), or program end (M02 or M30) coded in a program. (The yellow lamp blinks.) (3) The machine is stopped by an Alarm. (The red lamp blinks.) NOTE The setting of the status indicator can be changed using [MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT] of the [43: EXT. INTERFACE] quick screen.

Position the cursor to the output menu to be set, then press the [ON] or [OFF] soft key. Select an output type (LIGHT UP/BLINK). After making the desired changes, press the [END] soft key.

371

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

23

ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

One or two servo motors can be controlled as the fourth axis (additional axis). Controllable motors are as follows: 0.5/3000 (A06B0113B075) 1/3000 (A06B0371B075) 2/2000 (A06B0372B075) 2/3000 (A06B0373B075) 3/3000 (A06B0123B075) 6/2000 (A06B0127B075) 1/5000i (A06B0202B000) 2/5000i (A06B0205B000) M2/5000i (A06B0212B000) M3/5000i (A06B0215B000) 4/4000i (A06B0223B000) 8/3000i (A06B0227B000) Install an additional axis (option) on the table. Do not change the setting of the feedrate parameter. The additional axis (option) is mainly intended to be used with an index unit (based on a rotation axis) on the table. The additional axis shall always be installed on the table. If it is installed in any other place, the fixed cover or safety door cannot be used to protect the operator from the additional axis. This is a very dangerous situation. In the same way as for the X, Y, and Zaxes, the additional axis can be driven only by manual operation if the safety door is open. It can be fed by the manual handle or at 600 degrees/min or less, which is specified in a parameter. Do NOT change the setting of this parameter.

372

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

23.1
SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS

(1) Display [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/ SETTING], then [3:PARAMETER]. (2) Press soft key [RESTORATION]. The cursor is displayed in the [RESTORATION] menu. Move the cursor to ADD.AXIS PARAMETER and press soft key [SELECT].

(3) Select the motor model.

(4) The following window appears. Press soft key [EXEC].

373

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(5) After termination of parameter setting, the following window appears. Turn the power off, then on again, and change and set parameters as required.

374

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

23.2
OTHER RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTING)
Example
When the gear reduction ratio is 1:90: B : 4th axis A : 5th axis
PRM No. 1006B 76543210 160001 Bit 5 Bit 0 1020B 1820B 1821B 1850B 2021B 2022B 2084B 2085B Description Reference position return direction (0: +, 1: ) 0: Linear axis, 1: Rotation axis

66 Axis name (66: B, 65: A) (65) 20 Command multiply (CMR) 40000 Reference counter capacity 10000 Grid shift (When making a shift of 1_, set 10,000.) 192 Load inertia ratio 111 Direction of motor rotation (111: Clockwise, -111: Counterclockwise) 4 (N) 100 (M) Flexible feed gear ratio (DMR) (N/M) (For a gear reduction ratio of 1/90)

When you change the value of parameter 2084, set the same value for parameter 2078. When you change the value of parameter 2085, set the same value for parameter 2079. 2078 : Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (numerator) 2079 : Dual position feedback conversion coefficient (denominator)

375

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

23.3
CALCULATING THE FLEXIBLE FEED GEAR (DETECTION MULTIPLY DMR)
Example
Gear reduction ratio of the index table: 1:90 Servo motor used Detection unit Calculation Target number of pulses issued per table rotation: Number of pulses of the pulse coder per table rotation: Flexible feed gear N/M is calculated as follows: N M = 3600000 90,000,000 = 4 100 360 0.0001 = 3600000 pulses 90 = 90000000 pulses : 3 (with a serial pulse coder, 1000000 P/rev) : 0.0001_

1000000

. . . . . . (No. 2084B) . . . . . . (No. 2085B)

NOTE When changing the standard setting of the flexible feed gear ratio (N/M) to a nonstandard setting, also change the reference counter capacity (parameter No. 1821B). N (No. 2084B) Reference counter capacity (No. 1821B) = 1000000 M (No. 2085B) Example: Assuming N/M = 6/100, 6 Reference counter capacity = 100 1000000 = 60000 ( No. 1821B)

376

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

23.4
GRID SHIFT

Setting a grid shift amount in No. 1850B can shift the reference position (zero point).

NOTE 1 Once the parameter is reset, it is necessary to switch off the power. 2 The parameter can be set with a value from 0 to "99999999 in the least input increment units. To shift the table zero point by 1, set the parameter to 10000.

377

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

23.5
REMOVING AUXILIARY AXES

To remove an auxiliary axis, change the parameters listed below. (Otherwise, a servo alarm occurs and inhibits operation.)
NC parameter No.0012 bit. 7 No.1005 bit. 7 No.1815 bit. 5 Factory-set 0 1 1 Removing auxiliary axis 1 1 0

378

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

23.6
SERVO PARAMETERS (STANDARD)
(1) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR / series B: fourth axis
Motor NO. 0012B 1005B 1006B 1007B 1008B 1020B 1022B (NOTE)1023B 1220B 1221B 1222B 1223B 1224B 1225B 1226B 1240B 1241B 1242B 1243B 1244B 1250B 1251B 1260B 1310B 1320B 1321B 1322B 1323B 1324B 1325B 1326B 1327B 1420B 0.5/3000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 1/3000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 2/2000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 2/3000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 3/3000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 6/2000 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000

379

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Motor NO. 1421B 1423B 1424B 1425B 1427B 1428B 1430B 1432B 1434B 1610B 1620B 1621B 1622B 1623B 1624B 1625B 1722B 1762B 1763B 1783B 1785B 1815B 1816B 1817B 1819B 1820B 1821B 1825B 1826B 1827B 1828B 1829B 1832B 1838B 1850B 1851B 1852B 1860B 1861B

0.5/3000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * *

1/3000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * *

2/2000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * *

2/3000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * *

3/3000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * *

6/2000 76543210 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * *

380

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

Motor NO. 1904B (NOTE)1905B 1923 (NOTE)1924 1942B 1943B 1944B 2000B 2001B 2002B 2003B 2004B 2005B 2006B 2007B 2008B 2009B 2010B 2011B 2012B 2013B 2014B 2015B 2016B 2017B 2020B 2021B 2022B 2023B 2024B 2040B 2041B 2042B 2043B 2044B 2045B 2046B 2047B 2048B

0.5/3000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 13 128 111 8192 12500 176 864 2556 9 79 0 8235 4789 0

1/3000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 61 128 111 8192 12500 312 1685 2480 111 997 0 8235 3806 0

2/2000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 46 128 111 8192 12500 936 3662 2485 91 812 0 8235 4674 0

2/3000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 62 128 111 8192 12500 424 2645 2490 128 1146 0 8235 3311 0

3/3000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 15 128 111 8192 12500 946 4706 3052 87 781 0 8235 4858 0

6/2000 76543210 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011 01000010 01000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 16 128 111 8192 12500 1643 6710 3052 99 887 0 8235 4639 0

381

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Motor NO. 2049B 2050B 2051B 2052B 2053B 2054B 2055B 2056B 2057B 2058B 2059B 2060B 2061B 2062B 2063B 2064B 2065B 2066B 2067B 2068B 2069B 2070B 2071B 2074B 2076B 2077B 2078B 2079B 2082B 2083B 2084B 2085B 2086B 2087B 2088B 2089B 2092B 2095B 2098B

0.5/3000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 1200 2000 77 5 7282 120 32585 2288 4 6797 0 0 0 100 0 0 17384 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1918 0 0 0 9200 0 5160

1/3000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 2800 2330 57 5 7282 120 32623 1811 4 5377 0 0 0 100 0 0 1680 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1706 0 0 0 9200 0 50

2/2000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 2147 7690 1000 0 7282 120 32627 1766 4 5245 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1685 0 0 0 9200 0 0

2/3000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 2520 6156 1200 5 7282 120 32519 3112 4 9256 0 0 0 100 0 0 8194 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 2239 0 0 0 9200 0 0

3/3000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 2000 7690 800 5 7282 120 32713 690 4 2045 0 0 0 100 0 0 3000 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1052 0 0 0 9200 0 0

6/2000 76543210 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 3500 6415 1600 5 7282 120 32689 991 4 2940 0 0 0 100 0 0 8192 0 0 4 100 0 100 4 100 1052 0 0 0 9200 0 10265

382

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

Motor NO. 2099B 2102B 2103B 2104B 2105B 2107B 2109B 2110B 2111B 2115B 2119B 2127B 2128B 2129B 2133B 2134B 2143B 2144B 2145B 2156B 2162B 2163B 2164B 2165B 2178B 2200B 2201B 2202B 2203B 2207B 2208B 2209B 2210B 2211B 2212B 2213B 2334B 2335B 3115B

0.5/3000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 29 100 16 0 7790 0 20 400 0 0 0 0 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000

1/3000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 51 100 16 0 7715 0 20 785 0 0 7710 12830 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000

2/2000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 104 100 16 0 6194 12776 20 4800 2500 1806 0 0 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000

2/3000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 74 100 16 0 7780 0 20 2300 3000 3088 7710 12830 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000

3/3000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 251 100 16 32 6214 0 20 2047 1500 1812 0 0 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000

6/2000 76543210 400 15000 0 0 419 100 16 32 3960 0 20 2729 5000 1556 0 0 16 9900 100 0 0 0 0 0 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000

383

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Motor NO. 3620B 3621B 3622B 3623B 3624B 5401B 5421B 5440B 6131B 8410B 8470B 19510B

0.5/3000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

1/3000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

2/2000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

2/3000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

3/3000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

6/2000 76543210 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

(2) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR i series B: fourth axis

Motor NO. 0012B 1005B 1006B 1007B 1008B 1020B 1022B (NOTE)1023B 1220B 1221B 1222B 1223B 1224B 1225B 1226B 1240B 1241B 1242B 1243B 1244B 1250B 1251B 1260B 1/5000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 2/5000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 M2/5000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 M3/5000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 4/4000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000 8/3000i 76543210 00000000 10000001 00100001 00000000 00000100 66 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 360000

384

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

Motor NO. 1310B 1320B 1321B 1322B 1323B 1324B 1325B 1326B 1327B 1420B 1421B 1423B 1424B 1425B 1427B 1428B 1430B 1432B 1434B 1610B 1620B 1621B 1622B 1623B 1624B 1625B 1722B 1762B 1763B 1783B 1785B 1815B 1816B 1817B 1819B 1820B 1821B 1825B 1826B

1/5000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000

2/5000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000

M2/5000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000

M3/5000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000

4/4000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000

8/3000i 76543210 00000000 9999999 9999999 0 0 0 0 99999999 99999999 4000 400 400 0 400 600 0 4000 4000 600 00000000 152 64 50 0 24 0 0 0 0 300 120 00110000 00000000 00000000 00000001 20 40000 7000 5000

385

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Motor NO. 1827B 1828B 1829B 1832B 1838B 1850B 1851B 1852B 1860B 1861B 1904B (NOTE)1905B 1923 (NOTE)1924 1942B 1943B 1944B 2000B 2001B 2002B 2003B 2004B 2005B 2006B 2007B 2008B 2009B 2010B 2011B 2012B 2013B 2014B 2015B 2016B 2017B 2020B 2021B 2022B 2023B

1/5000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 252 128 111 8192

2/5000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 255 128 111 8192

M2/5000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 262 128 111 8192

M3/5000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 265 128 111 8192

4/4000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 273 128 111 8192

8/3000i 76543210 200 300000 5000 83330 15000 0 0 0 * * 00000000 00000001 4 0 700 99999999 99999999 00011010 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000011 01000010 00000000 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00100000 00000000 00000001 00000000 00000000 00001000 00100001 277 128 111 8192

386

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

Motor NO. 2024B 2040B 2041B 2042B 2043B 2044B 2045B 2046B 2047B 2048B 2049B 2050B 2051B 2052B 2053B 2054B 2055B 2056B 2057B 2058B 2059B 2060B 2061B 2062B 2063B 2064B 2065B 2066B 2067B 2068B 2069B 2070B 2071B 2074B 2076B 2077B 2078B 2079B 2082B

1/5000i 76543210 12500 620 3034 1256 66 594 0 8235 6384 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 0 0 0 7282 0 32613 1933 4 5739 0 0 0 100 0 0 20480 0 0 4 100 0

2/5000i 76543210 12500 760 3743 1283 76 680 0 8235 5578 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 12298 1275 0 7282 0 32497 3390 4 10085 0 0 0 100 0 0 12288 0 0 4 100 0

M2/5000i 76543210 12500 530 2543 1251 39 350 0 8235 10853 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 10250 2000 0 7282 0 32528 3005 4 8936 0 0 0 100 0 0 20480 0 0 4 100 0

M3/5000i 76543210 12500 420 1748 1276 64 574 0 8235 661 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 8974 3641 0 7282 0 32315 5660 4 16888 0 0 0 100 0 0 12288 0 0 4 100 0

4/4000i 76543210 12500 993 4260 1311 106 953 0 8235 3980 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 11789 180 0 8010 0 32446 4029 4 11998 0 0 0 100 0 0 8192 0 0 4 100 0

8/3000i 76543210 12500 787 4184 1325 113 1009 0 8235 3760 0 0 956 510 0 21 1894 319 0 6420 2000 0 8010 0 32383 4807 4 14327 0 0 0 100 0 0 8192 0 0 4 100 0

387

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Motor NO. 2083B 2084B 2085B 2086B 2087B 2088B 2089B 2092B 2095B 2098B 2099B 2102B 2103B 2104B 2105B 2107B 2109B 2110B 2111B 2115B 2119B 2127B 2128B 2129B 2133B 2134B 2143B 2144B 2145B 2156B 2162B 2163B 2164B 2165B 2178B 2200B 2201B 2202B 2203B

1/5000i 76543210 100 4 100 1234 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 0 0 0 72 100 16 32 10260 0 20 1188 1667 3858 7690 12840 16 9900 100 0 32767 13 2425 25 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100

2/5000i 76543210 100 4 100 1636 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 0 0 0 109 100 16 32 10280 0 20 1276 2000 3862 7693 12840 16 9900 100 0 32766 23 4261 25 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100

M2/5000i 76543210 100 4 100 1540 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 0 0 0 117 100 16 32 8995 0 20 1137 1000 3851 7690 12840 16 9900 100 0 32766 20 3776 25 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100

M3/5000i 76543210 100 4 100 2117 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 0 0 0 127 100 16 8 10295 0 20 646 1667 3847 7690 12840 16 9900 100 0 32765 40 7135 25 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100

4/4000i 76543210 100 4 100 1784 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 15000 0 0 201 100 16 32 5130 0 20 1443 2000 3338 6670 5140 16 9900 100 0 32766 27 5069 45 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100

8/3000i 76543210 100 4 100 1950 0 0 0 9200 0 0 400 15000 0 0 369 100 16 776 3870 0 20 2103 3500 1815 0 0 16 9900 100 0 32765 33 6053 45 5000 00100000 00000001 00000111 00000100

388

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

Motor NO. 2207B 2208B 2209B 2210B 2211B 2212B 2213B 2334B 2335B 3115B 3620B 3621B 3622B 3623B 3624B 5401B 5421B 5440B 6131B 8410B 8470B 19510B

1/5000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00001010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

2/5000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00001010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

M2/5000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00001010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

M3/5000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00001010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

4/4000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000010 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

8/3000i 76543210 00001000 00000000 00000100 00000000 00000000 01000000 01100000 150 100 00000000 0 0 0 0 0 00000000 0 0 00000000 120 120 120

389

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

23.7
INDEX TABLE FUNCTION (OPTION)

(1) Specifying a command D With the clamp/unclamp command

(Clamp or unclamp command for the fourth axis)
M72 B M71 : : : (Unclamp) (Index) (Clamp)) Note) When using the fourth axis as the Baxis

or
M11 B M10 : : : (Unclamp) (Index) (Clamp)) Note) When using the fourth axis as the Baxis

(When making a reference position return, specify the unclamp command before movement along the additional axis starts.) D Without the clamp/unclamp command
B : (Index) Note) When using the fourth axis as the Baxis)

D Entering a value for the move command for the additional axis Without a decimal point With a decimal point)
B1 B1 ! 0.001_ ! 1_

D Absolute/incremental command The absolute or incremental command can be specified with G90 or G91. D Number of axes to be subject to simultaneous control Among all axes, including the fourth axes, up to three axes can be controlled simultaneously. In MANUAL mode, however, only one axis can be controlled at a time. D Feedrate G00/G01 can be applied in the same way as for the X, Y, and Zaxes.

390

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

(2) Manual operation Handlemode operation can be executed in the same way as for the X, Y, and Zaxes.

(Selecting the fourth axis)

[Press]

(3) Return to the zero point (establishing the motor zero point) Display [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING], then [2:MOTOR ORIGIN]. [For return to the motor origin with a dog]

Pressing the [+] or [] soft key causes a return to the zero point on the fourth axis (establishing the motor zero point). (Pressing the [+] key instigates movement in the positive direction. Pressing the [] key instigates movement in the negative direction.) Keep the soft key held down until the completion of return to the zero point (establishing the motor zero point).

391

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[For return to the motor origin without a dog]

Perform motor origin return operation according to the guidance. (4) Reference position return (moving to the machine zero point) Specify this operation on the 2: MENU OPERATION screen (a QUICK screen).

Pressing the [B+] or [B] soft key instigates reference position return (movement to the machine zero point) on the fourth axis. (Pressing the [+] key instigates movement in the positive direction. Pressing the [] instigates movement in the negative direction.) Keep the soft key held down until the completion of reference position return. When motor reference position return is performed with the safety door open, alarm 90 REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE may be issued. In this case, close the safety door, then perform motor reference position return. (When the safety door is open, the move speed about the additional axis is limited to 600 deg/min.)

392

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

(5) Turning the servo motor off If the clamp or unclamp command is used for the fourth axis, the servo off function can be used to prevent the servo motor from being overloaded by the use of the fourth axis. When the servo off function is used, the servo motor is activated or deactivated according to the status of the clamp/unclamp check switch. (6) Disabling movement along axes (interlock) If the clamp/unclamp command is used for the fourth axis, operation is restricted as described below: In the clamp state : X, Y, and Zaxes ! Movement along the axes is not disabled. Fourth axes ! Movement along the axes is disabled. In the unclamp state : X, Y, and Zaxes ! Movement along the axes can be enabled and disabled as necessary. Fourth axes ! Movement along the axes is not disabled. (7) Clamp/unclamp command (Fourth axis)
Clamp command : M71 (or M10) Unclamp command : M72 (or M11)

When using the clamp/unclamp command for the fourth axis, specify M72 or M11 (unclamp command) before movement along the axis starts, and M71 or M10 (clamp command) after completion of the movement. NOTE When M10, or M71 is specified, an alarm may be issued due to a position shift or excessively large error. This is because the clamp signal is input in the inposition state. In such a case, add a dwell operation before the M10, or M71 command.

393

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[Clamp/unclamp timing]

Command

M72

Movement along the fourth axis

M71

Clamp state

ON

OFF

ON

Clamp

OFF

ON

OFF

Unclamp

OFF

ON

OFF

Clamp check

ON

OFF

ON

Unclamp check

OFF

ON

OFF

(8) Detach function When the power line, signal line, or similar, for the fourth axis is disconnected, the function automatically sets a detach (axis isolation) parameter so that an axis alarm will not be displayed. When the power line, signal line, or similar is subsequently reconnected, the detach (axis isolation) parameter is automatically reset so that the axis can be used. After a power line, signal line, or similar has been connected or disconnected, turn the power on. After a QUICK screen or NC screen is displayed, turn the power off then on again. (9) Overtravel function The range of motion along the fourth axis can be restricted by using a proximity switch. When the switch is tripped, the following alarms can be output: 506 OVERTRAVEL: +* (* corresponds to a displayed axis name.) 507 OVERTRAVEL: *

394

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

(10)Setting parameters (PMC parameters)

Keep relay K 2#1 Value 1 0 K 3#2 1 0 K 3#3 1 0 K 12#3 1 0 Function In the fourth-axis clamp state, the servo motor is deactivated. In the fourth-axis clamp state, the servo motor is not deactivated. The clamp/unclamp command is used for the fourth axis. The clamp/unclamp command is not used for the fourth axis. In the fourth-axis unclamp state, the X-, Y-, and Z-axes are interlocked. In the fourth-axis unclamp state, the X-, Y-, and Z-axes are not interlocked. The detach function and hardware overtravel function are not used for the fourth axes. The detach function and hardware overtravel function are used for the fourth axes.

(NC parameters)
Parameter 3004#5 (OTH) Value 1 0 Function The hardware overtravel function is not used for the fourth axes. The hardware overtravel function is used for the fourth axes.

395

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

23.8
ADDITIONAL AXIS CABLE FOR THE INDEX TABLE (JAPAN AND EXPORT STANDARD) 23.8.1
Connectors
Motor model Pulse coder Motor code 0.5/3000 A32B (ABS) A06B0113B075 A06B0371B075 1/3000 2/3000 A64 (ABS) A06B0373B075 A06B0123B075 3/3000

(1) Motors for additional axis

(2) Feedback cables

Servo amp. connection Control unit connection Receptacle Plug *1 *1 *2 FI402015S (Connector, Hirose Electric) FI20CV (Connector cover, Hirose Electric) H/MS3102A 2029PW (Hirose Electric) H/MS3106A 2029SW(11) H/MS3108B 2029SW(11) JA06A2029SWJ1EB (Straight plug, Hirose Electric) (Rightangle plug, Hirose Electric) (Plug, Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)

Motor unit connection

Plug

*2

1782896 (Housing) HDAB15S 11752172 (Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP) HDAW15CV A06B6050K120

(Connector, H/MS3106A 2029SW(11) Hirose Electric) H/MS3108B 2029SW(11) (Connector JA06A2029SWJ1EB cover, Hirose Electric) FANUC order number : A06B6050K115 H/MS3102A 2029PCW4(10)

Receptacle

*1

1789646 SDAB15P (Hirose Electric) (Tyco Electronics AMP)

(3) Power cable and input/output signal cable

Servo AMP Connector *1 1)Additional 1 axis 19178072 (Housing) H/MS3102A 2214P H/MS3106A 2214S H/MS3108B 2214S JA06A2214SJ1 31781296 (Housing) 11752172 (Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP) A06B6050K119 31795543 (Tyco Electronics AMP) 2)Additional 2 axis 19178072, 39178072 (Housing) (Hirose Electric) (Straight plug, Hirose Electric) (Rightangle plug, Hirose Electric) (Plug, Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) 1763468 (Tyco Electronics AMP) FANUC order number : A06B6050K121 1763392 (Tyco Electronics AMP) H/MS3106A 1810S(10) H/MS3108B 1810S(10) JA06A1810SJ1(A72) H/MS3102A 1810PD T(10) 3)31604D6 (Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP)

Control unit connection

Receptacle Plug

*1 *2

Motor unit connection

Plug

*2

Receptacle

*1

*1 Available from FANUC. *2 Available from the manufacturer of the index table. *3 All connectors to be used external to the machine shall be waterproof.
396

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

23.8.2
Connectors
Motor model Pulse coder Motor code A06B0202 B000 1/5000i

(1) Motors for additional axis

2/5000i

M2/5000i

M3/5000i

4/4000i

8/3000i

A1000i (ABS) A06B0205 B000 A06B0212 B000 A06B0215 B000 A06B0223 B000 A06B0227 B000

(2) Feedback cables

Servo amp. connection Control unit connection Receptacle Plug *1 *1 *2 FI402015S (Connector, Hirose Electric) FI20CV (Connector cover, Hirose Electric) H/MS3102A 2029PW (Hirose Electric) H/MS3106A 2029SW(11) H/MS3108B 2029SW(11) JA06A2029SWJ1EB Straight plug (Straight plug, Hirose Electric) (Rightangle plug, Hirose Electric) (Plug, Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)

Motor unit connection

Plug

*2

JN1DS10SL2, JN12222S: Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) A06B6114K200#S (FANUC number) JN1FS10SL2, JN12222S: Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) A06B6114K200#E (FANUC number)

*2

Rightangle plug

Receptacle

*1

JN1AS10UL1 (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry)

(3) Power cable and input/output signal cable

Servo AMP Connector *1 1)Additional 1 axis 19178072 (Housing) H/MS3102A 2214P H/MS3106A 2214S H/MS3108B 2214S JA06A2214SJ1 1i, 2i, M2i, M3i Straight Rightangle plug *2 4i, 8i Straight plug H/MS3106A1810S(10) (Hirose Electric) JA06A1810SJ1EB (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) MS3106A1810SBBSS (DDK Ltd.) H/MS3108B1810S(10) (Hirose Electric) JA08A1810SJ1EB (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) MS3108A1810SBBAS (DDK Ltd.) 14730632 (Tyco Electronics AMP) / A06B6114K220#S (FANUC number) 14733932 (Tyco Electronics AMP) / A06B6114K220#E (FANUC number) 2)Additional 2 axis 19178072, 39178072 (Housing) (Hirose Electric) (Straight plug, Hirose Electric) (Rightangle plug, Hirose Electric) (Plug, Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) 3)31604D6 (Contact) (Tyco Electronics AMP)

Control unit connection

Receptacle Plug

*1 *2

Motor unit connection

Plug

*2

Rightangle plug

H/MS3106A1810S(13) (Hirose Electric) JA06A1810SJ1(A72) (Japan Aviation Electronics Industry) MS3106A1810SB(D190) (DDK Ltd.) Receptacle *1 *1 1i, 2i, M2i, M3i 14730602 (Tyco Electronics AMP) 4i, 8i H/MS3102A1810PDT(10) (Hirose Electric)

*1 Available from FANUC. *2 Available from the manufacturer of the index table. *3 All connectors to be used external to the machine shall be waterproof.
397

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

23.8.3
Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (4th axis)
ROBODRILL Servo amp. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A2029PW XS40 A D F G
0.18mm2 0.18mm2

(1) AC SV 0.5/3000 (a) Connecting the feedback cable

INDEX TABLE Motor cover A32B Pulse coder 1789646

JF1 SD *SD REQ *REQ 1 2 5 6 7

A4 B4 A3 B3

SD *SD REQ *REQ

0.18mm2 0.18mm2

+6VA

0.18mm2 0.18mm2

A5

+6VA

+5V +5V

9 18 20

J K

0.5mm2 0.5mm2

A2 B2

+5V +5V

+5V 0V 12 14 N
0.5mm2

A1 B1

0V

0V

0.5mm2

0V

0V

16

S H Shield

0.5mm2

A6 B6

0V SHLD

Shield

Grounding plate

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

398

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

(b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals

ROBODRILL Servo amp. Control cabinet MS3102A2214P Motor cover INDEX TABLE

CZ2 B1

XS41 L 0.75mm2 or greater M

A4

Motor power 1782896 11752172

A1

K U

0.75mm2 or greater

A3

B2

J T

0.75mm2 or greater

A5

A2

N B

0.75mm2 or greater

A2

Tyco AMP D3100D 1783265

+24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.1) CLPSW4 (X8.0) *DEC4 (X9.3) *DTCH4 (X8.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) M10,M71 (Y1.5) M11 ,M72 (Y1.6) +OT4 (X8.6) OT4 (X8.7)

XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03

C D E F G P H R S A V

0.5mm2 or greater

Input common

0.5mm2 or greater

Unclamp check sewitch

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

Clamp check switch

Reference position return switch

0.5mm2 or greater
Output common

0.5mm2 or greater

Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater
4th-axis unclamp

0.5mm2 or greater
(+) Overtravel

0.5mm2 or greater

() Overtravel

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

399

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(2) AC SV 1/3000 or 2/3000 (a) Connecting the feedback cable

ROBODRILL Servo amp. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A2029PW INDEX TABLE Motor cover A64 Pulse coder DSUB 15P

JF1 SD *SD REQ *REQ +6VA 1 2 5 6 7

XS40 A D F G R
0.18mm2 0.18mm2

A4 B4 A3 B3 A5

SD *SD REQ *REQ +6VA

0.18mm2 0.18mm2

0.18mm2 0.18mm2

+5V +5V +5V 0V 0V

9 18 20 12 14

J K

0.5mm2 0.5mm2

A2 B2

+5V +5V

N T

0.5mm2

A1 B1

0V 0V

0.5mm2

0V

16

S H
Shield

0.5mm2

A6 B6

0V SHLD

Shield

Grounding plate

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

400

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

(b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals

ROBODRILL Servo amp. INDEX TABLE

CZ2 B1

Control cabinet MS3102A2214P

XS41
0.75mm2 or greater

Motor cover

L M
0.75mm2 or greater

A4

1, 2 Motor power HDAB15S HDAW15CV

A1

K U
0.75mm2 or greater

A3

B2

J T
0.75mm2 or greater

A5

A2

N B

A2

XS25
Tyco AMP D3100D 1783265
+24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.1) CLPSW4 (X8.0) *DEC4 (X9.3) *DTCH4 (X8.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) M10,M71 (Y1.5) M11 ,M72 (Y1.6) +OT4 (X8.6) OT4 (X8.7) 0.5mm2 or greater

A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03

C
0.5mm2 or greater
Input common

D
0.5mm2 or greater

Unclamp check sewitch

E
0.5mm2 or greater

Clamp check switch

F
Reference position return switch

G
0.5mm2 or greater

P
0.5mm2 or greater
Output common Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp

H
0.5mm2 or greater

R
0.5mm2 or greater

S
0.5mm2 or greater
4th-axis unclamp

A
0.5mm2 or greater
(+) Overtravel () Overtravel

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

401

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(3) AC SV 3/3000 (a) Connecting the feedback cable

ROBODRILL Servo amp. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A2029PW INDEX TABLE Motor cover A64 Pulse coder MS3102A20 29PW
0.18mm2 0.18mm2

JF1 1 2 5 6 7

XS40 A D F G R A4 B4 A3 B3 A5

SD *SD REQ *REQ +6VA

SD *SD REQ *REQ +6VA

0.18mm2 0.18mm2

0.18mm2 0.18mm2

+5V +5V +5V 0V 0V

9 18 20 12 14

J K

0.5mm2 0.5mm2

A2 B2

+5V +5V

N T

0.5mm2

A1 B1

0V 0V

0.5mm2

0V

16

S H
Shield

0.5mm2

A6 B6

0V SHLD

Shield

Grounding plate

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

402

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

(b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals

ROBODRILL Servo amp. Control cabinet MS3102A2029PW Motor cover INDEX TABLE

CZ2 B1

XS41 L 2.0mm2 or greater M

A4

3 Motor power MS3102A1810P

A1

K U

2.0mm2 or greater

A3

B2

J T

2.0mm2 or greater

A5

A2

N B

2.0mm2 or greater

A2

Tyco AMP D3100D 1783265

+24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.1) CLPSW4 (X8.0) *DEC4 (X9.3) *DTCH4 (X8.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) M10, M71 (Y1.5) M11, M72 (Y1.6) +OT4 (X8.6) OT4 (X8.7)

XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03

C D E F G P H R S A V

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

Input common

Unclamp check sewitch

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

Clamp check switch

Reference position return switch

0.5mm2 or greater
Output common

0.5mm2 or greater

Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

4th-axis unclamp

0.5mm2 or greater
(+) Overtravel

0.5mm2 or greater

() Overtravel

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

403

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(4) AC SV 1/5000i, 2/5000i, M2/5000i, M3/5000i (a) Connecting the feedback cable
ROBODRILL Servo amp. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A2029PW INDEX TABLE Motor cover A1000i Pulse coder JN1AS10UL1

JF1 SD *SD RD *RD +6V 1 2 5 6 7

XS40 A D F G R
0.18mm2 0.18mm2

6 5 4

RD *RD +6V

0.18mm2 0.18mm2

+5V +5V +5V 0V 0V

9 18 20 12 14

J K

0.5mm2 0.5mm2

8 9

+5V +5V

N T

0.5mm2

7 10

0V 0V

0.5mm2

0V

16

S H
Shield Shield

Grounding plate

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

404

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

(b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals

ROBODRILL Servo amp. Control cabinet MS3102A2214P Motor cover INDEX TABLE

CZ2L B1

XS41 L 0.75mm2 or greater M

1, 2, M2, M3, Motor power U 14730602

A1

K U

0.75mm2 or greater

B2

J T

0.75mm2 or greater

A2

N B

0.75mm2 or greater

Tyco AMP D3100D 1783265

+24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.1) CLPSW4 (X8.0) *DEC4 (X9.3) *DTCH4 (X8.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) M10, M71 (Y1.5) M11 , M72 (Y1.6) +OT4 (X8.6) OT4 (X8.7)

XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03

C D E F G P H R S A V

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

Input common

Unclamp check sewitch

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

Clamp check switch

Reference position return switch

0.5mm2 or greater
Output common

0.5mm2 or greater

Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

4th-axis unclamp

0.5mm2 or greater
(+) Overtravel

0.5mm2 or greater

() Overtravel

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

405

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(5) AC SV 4/4000i, 8/3000i (a) Connecting the feedback cable

ROBODRILL Servo amp. (4th axis JF1) Control cabinet MS3102A2029PW INDEX TABLE Motor cover A1000i Pulse coder JN1AS10UL1

JF1 SD *SD RD *RD +6V 1 2 5 6 7

XS40 A D F G R
0.18mm2 0.18mm2

6 5 4

RD *RD +6V

0.18mm2 0.18mm2

+5V +5V +5V 0V 0V

9 18 20 12 14

J K

0.5mm2 0.5mm2

8 9

+5V +5V

N T

0.5mm2

7 10

0V 0V

0.5mm2

0V

16

S H
Shield Shield

Grounding plate

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

406

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

(b) Connecting the motor power and index input/output signals

ROBODRILL Servo amp. Control cabinet MS3102A2214P Motor cover INDEX TABLE

CZ2L B1

XS41 L M

2.0mm2 or greater

4, 8 Motor power H/MS3102A18 U 10PDT(10)

A1

K U

2.0mm2 or greater

B2

J T

2.0mm2 or greater

A2

N B

2.0mm2 or greater

Tyco AMP D3100D 1783265

+24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.1) CLPSW4 (X8.0) *DEC4 (X9.3) *DTCH4 (X8.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) M10 , M71 (Y1.5) M11 , M72 (Y1.6) +OT4 (X8.6) OT4 (X8.7)

XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03

C D E F G P H R S A V

0.5mm2 or greater

Input common

0.5mm2 or greater

Unclamp check sewitch

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

Clamp check switch

Reference position return switch

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

Output common Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp

0.5mm2 or greater

0.5mm2 or greater

4th-axis unclamp

0.5mm2 or greater

(+) Overtravel () Overtravel

0.5mm2 or greater

Available from FANUC

Available from the manufacturer of the index table

407

23. ADDITIONAL AXIS CONTROL (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(6) Connecting the motor power and input/output signals

ROBODRILL Tyco AMP D3100D 1783265

+24V UNCLPSW4 (X8.1) CLPSW4 (X8.0) *DEC4 (X9.3) *DTCH4 (X8.5) 0V CLAMP4 (Y1.7) M10, M71 (Y1.5) M11 , M72 (Y1.6) +OT4 (X8.6) OT4 (X8.7)

INDEX TABLE

XS25 A01 A02 B01 A04 B02 B06 B05 B04 A05 A03 B03

C D E F G P H R S A V

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater NO 0.5mm2 or greater NO 0.5mm2 or greater NO

Input common

Unclamp check sewitch

Clamp check switch

Reference position return switch

0.5mm2 or greater
Output common

0.5mm2 or greater

Solenoid valve for brake 4th-axis clamp

0.5mm2 or greater 0.5mm2 or greater

4th-axis unclamp

0.5mm2 or greater
(+) Overtravel

0.5mm2 or greater

() Overtravel

NOTE The 4thaxis detachment signal is used to check the cable connection status. When the level of the *DTCH4 signal falls to 0, the servo motor is deactivated. (Before connecting or disconnecting a cable, first turn the machine off.) When the 4thaxis detachment signal is not used, the function can be PMC parameter No.K012, bit 3 = 0: Validates the 4thaxis detachment function. = 1: Invalidates the 4thaxis detachment funcion.

408

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

24

AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

Installing an automatic tool length measurement device (1) Mount a switch at a desired point on the table. (Position the switch so that it will not interfere with the jig.) NOTE The sealant is made of NBR. Avoid using a coolant that would cause the NBR to swell. (2) Connect the cable. D Usually, fasten the cable to the Xaxis motor cable duct, running down the right edge of the table, using cable ties. D Insert the cable by passing it through the lower sponge opening of the left cabinet. Be careful to connect the cable to the terminal block. Connect the + and lines of the switch cable correctly. Brown line : Positive, +24E XT510 on the terminal block Blue line : Negative, SKIP signal XT512 on the terminal block D After connecting the cable, turn the device on and operate the switch by hand. Check that the LED on the switch lights. Check also that PMCDGN on the screen can be used to turn the signal on and off. SKIP signal : X0004, bit 7 (The signal goes to 1 when the switch is set to the ON position.) (3) Store a macro program for tool length measurement (O9010) in program memory. D A program having a number between O9000 and O9999 is usually protected. When entering the program, release the protection by changing the parameter. After entering the program, restore the original setting. O9000s protection: NE9 bit (bit 4 of NC parameter 3202) When the NE9 bit is set to 1, the program is protected. When the NE9 bit is set to 0, the program is not protected (can be edited). (4) Measure the height of the switch. D Select a tool whose tip can reach the surface of the table. Measure the distance from the surface of the table to the switchon position. 1) Place a sheet of paper on the surface of the table. Lower the tool along the Zaxis until the tool tip touches the surface of the table. Record the Z coordinate. Note) Do not make any mark on the table. 2) Align the tool with the switch and slowly lower the tool along the Zaxis until the LED of the switch lights. Record the Z coordinate. 3) Obtain the difference between the Z coordinate of the table surface and the Z coordinate of the switchon position. Set the difference, as the switch height, in macro variable #900.
409

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(5) Measure the central position of the switch. D Move the tool along the Xaxis and Yaxis so that it is aligned with the center of the switch. Set the machine coordinates in macro variables #901 and #902. (6) While referring to the operators manual, set the following macro variables. D Standard settings without high column #900 = Switch height, (4) #901 = X coordinate of switch central position, (5) #902 = Y coordinate of switch central position, (5) #903 = 480.0 #904 = 0.5 Set desired values #905 = 5.0 according the use status. #906 = 450.0 (7) Mount a tool on the spindle and specify G910 S1. D G910 S1 H** B***.* S1 : The tool length is measured. H : Compensation number (The measurement result is input.) B : Provisional tool length (Distance between the spindle taper gauge line and the tool tip, as measured with a scale) D First, perform the measurement slowly with TRVS set to LOW and single block set to ON. 1) The tool temporarily stops 25 mm before the switch. During the temporary stop, determine the approximate distance. 2) During skip (G31) measurement, override is disabled. D Check that the measured data is set for compensation number (H) after the operation. (8) Using the same tool, specify G910 S2. D G910 S2 H** S2 : Tool failure is detected. The tool length is measured and compared with the previously specified compensation. If the length exceeds the value set in #904, an alarm is issued. H : Compensation number (compensation number for which the measured tool length was stored is step 7) D First, perform measurement slowly with TRVS set to LOW and single block set to ON. 1) The tool temporarily stops 5 mm before the switch. During the temporary stop, determine the approximate distance. 2) During skip (G31) measurement, override is disabled. D Mount a shorter tool and check that an alarm is issued.

410

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

24.1
COMMAND FORMAT
G910 Sj Hjj Bjjj Djjj M0 ; S1: Automatic tool length measurement S2: Automatic tool breakage detecting Tool offset No. Temporary tool length (from 30mm to 250mm) Tool radius (Shift value) Z axis stops before touching switch (25mm before switch ON)

FORMAT AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT G910S1H__B___. _ G910S1H__B___. _D__._ G910S1H__B___. _D__._M0 AUTOMATIC TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING G910S2H__

REMARKS Tool length is 250mm, if omit.

NOTE 1 The temporary tool length can be set within "#905 value from true length. if its difference is bigger than #905, the tool and detecting switch may be broken. 2 The tool length which can be measured is limited under the influence of the height of detecting switch. Be carefule about the tool length and the position of detecting switch. 3 The value set by automatic tool length measurement must not be changed by manual. 4 The automatic tool breakage detecting must be commanded after executing automatic tool length measurement.

411

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

24.2
COMPENSATION METHOD BY USING AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

The G43 of tool length measurement is used in following both cases.

a) In case that offset value is the distance between tool edge and table sureface. (when #903=0, offset is set by _ value.)

Reference point of program Height of switch (#900) Detecting switch Workpiece or jig Workpiece height [Work coordinate] [Z axis (+ value)]

Offset value ( VALUE)

b) In case that offset value is the tool length (the distance between spindle gage line and tool edge) (when #903=480, offset is set by + value.) [In case of high column 100mm #903=580] [In case of high column 200mm #903=680] [In case of high column 300mm #903=780]

Tool length offset (+ value) Work coordinate [Z axis ( value)] Reference point of program Height of switch (#900) Detecting switch Workpiece or jig Workpiece height

Distance between table sureface and spindle gage line

412

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

24.3
MEASURING LIMIT
a) Measuring limit of automatic tool length measurement

Temporary tool length (Commanded value by B) Tool Rapid traverse area 25mm before switch ON Switch active position Permissible overrun value from switch active position (#905) Measurement permission area (G31 cutting feedrate)

NOTE The permission overrun value is 5mm, if #905 is not set. b) Measuring limit of automatic tool breakage detect

Tool Rapid traverse area 10mm before switch ON Switch active position Permissible overrun value from switch active position (#905) Measurement permission area (G31 cutting feedrate)

NOTE The permission overrun value is 5mm, if #905 is no set.

413

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

24.4
PARAMETERS AND MACRO VARIABLES
a) NC parameters No.6050=910 : G code for calling custom macro with program number 09010. (09010 is called by G910 command.) b) MACRO VARIABLES #900 : Distance between table sureface and switch position (not omissible) The height of detecting switch must be heigher than 100mm (from the table sureface), and should be under the position that the tool of 250mm length can be measured. #901 : Distance between Xreference point and switch position (not omissible) (Xaxis machine coordinate value at switch position) #902 : Distance between Yreference point and switch position (not omissible) (Yaxis machine coordinate value at switch position) #903 : Selection of usage of tool length measurement (not omissible) Using G43, offset is set by _ value: #903=0 Using G44, offset is set by + value: #903=480.000 (standard) In case of high column 100mm, #903=580.000 In case of high column 200mm, #903=680.000 In case of high column 300mm, #903=780.000 #904 : Tool breakage detecting tolerance (0.5mm when set 0.) When the difference between the measuring value of automatic tool length measurement and the measuring value of tool breakage detect exceed the tolerance, the tool broken alarm occurs. #905 : Overrun value from switch ON position (5mm when set 0.) When the switch is not active until the Z axis going down to the overrun value by measuring with commanded temporary tool length, an alarm occurs. #906 : Distance between table surface and spindle gage line In case of standard: 480.000 In case of high column 100mm: 580.000 In case of high column 200mm: 680.000 In case of high column 300mm: 780.000

414

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

24.5
ALARM MESSAGES AND RELEASING METHOD
a) Releasing method Please check the alarm message number and contens. Alarms can be released by pressing the reset key [//] on the operators panel. After releasing alarm, please check and correct the program or setting value acoording to the contents of message. b) Alarm No.3110 DATA ERROR H NOT EXIST: The offset H number is not commanded in the program by G910 command. DATA ERROR S: The S value is out of range in the program by G910 command. (Please command S1 or S2.) DATA ERROR B: The B value of the temporary tool length is too small. (Please set it beigger than 30mm(30.000).) DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT: The switch signal is not active until the Z axis going down to the overrun value by automatic tool length measurement. D The B value of the temporary tool length is smaller than actual tool length. D The setting value of the macro variable #900 or #906 is wrong. D The switch or its wirring is defective. SETTING DATA ERROR #900: The value of the macro variable #900 is not set, or too small. (Height of switch) SETTING DATA ERROR #901: The value of the macro variable #901 is not set. (Switch position of X coordinate) SETTING DATA ERROR #902: The value of the macro variable #902 is not set. (Switch position of Y coordinate) SETTING DATA ERROR #903: The value of the macro variable #903 is not set. (Selection of usage of tool length measurement) SETTING DATA ERROR #906: The value of the macro variable #906 is not set. (Distance between table sureface and spindle gage line) c) Alarm No.3120 TOOL BROKEN: The tool breakage is detected. The difference between the measuring value of automatic tool length measurement and the measuring value of tool breakage detect exceed the tolerance (#904). D Please change the broken cutter and carry out automatic tool length measurement. NOTE 1 If the offset value is changed bigger than the tolerance after execution of tool length measurement, an alarm occurs. 2 Please carry out the tool length measurement again after changing cutter.

415

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

24.6
FLOWCHART
Macro program Subprogram: 09010

Input MODAL DATA to VARIABLE

Check setting value YES Check command value H YES Check setting value (#90500) YES

NO #900 to #903 OK?

ALARM SETTING DATA ERROR #900 to #903

#900: less than 100.0 #901: no setting #902: no setting #903: no setting

NO H value OK? ALARM DATA ERROR H NOT EXIST H: no setting (#11)

NO #905 OK? (#905=0, not set)

Overrun value=SETTING VALUE

Overrun value=0.5mm

Check setting value YES Z axis reference point return

NO ALARM SETTING DATA ERROR #906

#906: wrong setting

Reading PRESENT X/Y/Z POSITION

Move to XY SWITCH POSITION and SPINDLE ORIENTATION (M19)

416

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

Check command value S YES S=1 2

NO (01, 2) S OK?

ALARM DATA ERROR S

S: Except 1 or 2, or no setting (#19)

S=2 3 to TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING

to AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

[AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT]

Check command value B YES

NO B OK? ALARM DATA ERROR B B: less than 30mm (#2)

Temporary tool length=250mm

B: no setting

Check command value D without D

with D X axis shift value D ok?

D: Tool radius (#7)

Z axis goes down by rapid

25mm before switch position

417

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[contintinuance of AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT]

Check command value M without M

with M M OK? OPTIONAL STOP (M00) SPINDLE NO EXECUTE

RESTART

Start button ON

Z axis SKIP FEED (MEASUREMENT)

Z axis down distance: 25mm+Overrun value

Reed SKIP POSITION, calculate TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT VALUE

Check measurement value YES Z axis goes up by rapid

NO value OK? ALARM DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT MEASUREMENT VSLUE is equal with movement command end point (no switch detecting)

Switch position+5mm

Setting offset value

Z axis reference point return

Check command value D without D

with D Cancel SHIFT VALUE D OK? D: Tool radius (#7)

End of AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

418

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

[TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING]

Input OFFSET VALUE to VALIABLE

Z axis goes down by rapid

5mm before switch position

Z axis SKIP FEED (MEASUREMENT)

Z axis down distance: 5mm+Overrun value

Read SKIP POSITION

Z axis goes up by rapid

Switch position+5mm

Check setting value (#90400) YES

NO (#904=0, no setting) #904 OK?

TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING TOLERANCE=SETTING VALUE

TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTING TOLERANCE=0.5mm

Check measurement value YES

NO Setting value OK? ALARM TOOL BROKEN

DIfference between OFFSET VALUE and MEASUREMENT VALUE exceeds TOLERANCE

Z axis reference point return

End of TOOL BREKAGE DETECTING

419

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Reset MODAL DATA

Return to main program

M99

420

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

24.7
MACRO PROGRAM
09010 (AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET) ; (S.T X500.0 Y400.0 Z330.0+150+HC) ; (TOOL OFFSET MACRO PROGRAM VER3.0) ; (G110 S* H** B*** D*** M0) ; (CHANGE PARAMETER NO.6050 DATA 110) ; ; (START) ; #30 =#4001 ; #31 =#4003 ; IF[#900GE100.0] GOTO10 ; #3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #900) ; N10 ; IF[#901NE#0] GOTO20 ; #3000= 110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #901) ; N20 ; IF[#902NE#0] GOTO30 ; #3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #902) ; N30 ; IF[#903NE#0] GOTO40 ; #3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #903) ; N40 ; IF[#11NE#0] GOTO50 ; #3000 =110 (DATA ERROR H NOT EXIST) ; N50 ; ; IF[#905EQ0] GOTO60 ; IF[#905EQ#0] GOTO60 ; #24 =#905 ; GOTO70 ; N60 ; #24 =5.0 ; N70 ; ; IF[#906EQ480.0] GOTO80 ; IF[#906EQ580.0] GOTO80 ; IF[#906EQ680.0] GOTO80 ; IF[#906EQ780.0] GOTO80 ; #3000 =110 (SETTING DATA ERROR #906) ; N80; ;

421

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

G91 G28 G00 Z0 ; #22 =#5043 ; #20 =#5021 ; #21 =#5022 ; G00 X[#901#20] Y[#902#21] M19 ; IF[#19EQ1] GOTO1000 ; IF[#19EQ2] GOTO2000 ; #3000 =110 (DATA ERROR S) ; ; N1000 ; (AUTOMATIC TOOL MEASURING) ; IF[#2EQ#0] GOTO100 ; IF[#2GT30] GOTO110 ; #3000 =110 (DATA ERROR B) ; N100 ; #2 =250.0 ; N110 ; IF[#7EQ#0] GOTO120 ; G00 X#7 ; N120 ; ; G00 Z[#906#900#225.0] (*) ; IF[#13EQ#0] GOTO130 ; S50 M03 ; G04 X0.1 ; M05 ; M00 ; N130 ; G31 Z[25.0+#24] F100 (*) ; #25 =#5063 ; #26 =#903[ABS[#22#25]+#900] ; IF[[#906#900#2+#24]NE[ABS[#22#25]]] GOTO160 ; #3000 =110 (DATA ERROR B TOOL SHORT) ; N160 ; Z5.0 ; G90 G10 L1 P#11 R#26 ; G91 G28 Z0 ; IF[#7EQ#0] GOTO3000 ; G00 X#7 ; GOTO3000 ; ;

422

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

24. AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT

N2000 ; (AUTOMATIC TOOL BROKEN) ; #29 =#[2000+#11] ; #3 =#29+#900#903 ; G00 Z[ABS[#3]5.0] (*) ; G31 Z[5.0+#24] F200 (*) ; #25 =#5063 ; Z5.0 ; IF[#904EQ0] GOTO200 ; IF[#904EQ#0] GOTO200 ; #15 =#904 ; GOTO210 ; N200 ; #15 =0.5 ; N210 ; IF[ABS[ABS[#3]ABS[#25#22]]LT#15] GOTO 220 ; G91 G28 Z0 ; #3000 =120 (TOOL BROKEN) ; N220 ; G91 G28 Z0 ; ; N3000; G#30 G#31 M05 ; M99 ;

423

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

25

SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

424

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

25.1
OUTLINE OF THE FUNCTION

This peck drilling cycle uses an arbor with an overload torque detection feature. Upon reception of an overload torque detection signal (using the skip signal), this cycle returns the tool, changes the spindle speed and cutting feedrate, then resumes drilling. The drilling cycle is illustrated below: NOTE This function cannot be used when lookahead control is enabled. Disable lookahead control (G08P0) before attempting to start a smallhole peck drilling cycle. Enable lookahead control (G08P1) after the cycle is completed.

R point

Overload torque Overload torque Z point Dwell : The clearance when the tool is first returned to the R point. In the second and subsequent drilling operations, this is the clearance between the tool and bottom of the hole. Q: Depth of cut for one drilling operation indicates the path of rapid movement. indicates the path of movement at the rapid traverse rate () (advancing and return speeds) in the cycle set by a parameter. indicates the path of movement at a programmed cutting feedrate. (Operations that make up the cycle)
* * *

Positioning along the X- and Y-axes Positioning to the R point along the Z-axis Z-axis: Cutting(first operation, depth of cut Q, incremental) Return (hole bottom small clearance , incremental) Return ( Advancing(R point to the R point, absolute) to a point (hole bottom + clearance), absolute)

Repeated until the Z point is reached

* *

Cutting(second and subsequent operations, depth of cut Q + , incremental)

Dwell Return to R point (or the initial point) return along the Z-axis = end of the cycle

425

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

NOTE 1 Return and advance operations are subject to acceleration/deceleration control by accelerating or decelerating the cutting feed. When return to the R point takes place, a position check is performed. 2 When a skip signal is received, even midway through an advancing operation, return operation starts.

426

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

25.2
USAGE

Sample program:
N01 N02 N03 N04 M03 S___ ; Mjj ; G83 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ I_ K_ P_ ; X_ Y_ ; : : G80 ;

N10

Description of commands in each block

N01:Specifies forward spindle rotation and spindle speed. N02:M code specifying G83 as a small-hole peck drilling cycle. This M code is set in parameter No. 5163. (Standard setting: M28) N03:Specifies the small-hole peck drilling cycle. Drilling data (except data with addresses K and P) is stored, and drilling is performed.
Specification Hole position Drilling data Address X Y Z Q R F I Specifies the hole position in the incremental or absolute mode. The path and feedrate are the same as for positioning by G00. Specifies the distance between the R point and bottom of the hole in the incremental mode, or specifies the bottom of the hole in the absolute mode. Depth of cut per operation Specifies the distance from the initial level to the R point in the incremental mode, or specifies the position of the R point in the absolute mode. Cutting feedrate Feedrate for advancing and return operations (in the same format as F) (If the specification is omitted, the value set in the parameter is assumed as the default.) K P Iteration count (If the specification is omitted, K1 is assumed as the default.) Dwell time at the bottom of the hole (If the specification is omitted, P0 is assumed as the default.)

NOTE G83 is a continuous-state G code. This means that G83 remains unchanged unless another canned cycle is specified or a G code that cancels the current canned cycle is specified. When the same drilling operation is performed successively, drilling data need only be specified in the first drilling block and need not be specified separately for each block. N04:Changes the hole position, and performs the small-hole peck drilling cycle using the same drilling data as N03. N10:Cancels the small-hole peck drilling cycle. The M code specified in N02 is also canceled.
427

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

25.3
SETTING THE SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE MODE
Examples

In the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode, the drilling cycle can be performed by specifying G83. The mode is entered by specifying the M code set in parameter No. 5163. The mode is canceled by the reset operation or by specifying G80. The M code does not wait for FIN. So when specifying this M code with another M code in the same block, exercise special care. MVV M03; M03 MVV; ! Waits for FIN. ! Does not wait for FIN.

428

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

25.4
DETAILED SPECIFICATIONS

1) This peck drilling cycle is executed by specifying G83 in the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode. In this cycle, after a workpiece is positioned along axes other than the axis along which the tool moves, the small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal (F066, PECK2) is output during the period from when the tool is positioned to the R point to when the tool returns to the R point or initial level. 2) The skip signal (X0004.7) is used as the overload torque detection signal. Supply the tooling overload signal to XT512. The skip signal is valid (for activating a return) only when the tool is located between the R and Z points and advancing or cutting operation is being performed. 3) During one G83 cycle, the cutting conditions are changed for each pecking operation (advancing cutting return). The cutting conditions, however, can be kept unchanged by settings bits 1 and 2 of parameter No. 5160. D Changing the cutting feedrate The cutting feedrate programmed with an F word is changed for each of the second and subsequent cutting operations. Set two change rates in parameter Nos. 5166 and 5167: One change rate is used if the skip signal is received in the previous cutting operation, and the other is used if no skip signal is received. Cutting feedrate = F

(First operation ) = 1.0 (Second and subsequent operations) = B 100 where is the change rate for one operation. When skip is present during the previous cutting operation: = b1% (parameter No. 5166) When skip is not present during the previous cutting operation: = b2% (parameter No. 5167) If change rate a for the cutting feedrate is less than the rate set in parameter No. 5168, the cutting feedrate is not changed. The cutting feedrate can be increased to up to the maximum cutting feedrate.

429

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

D Changing the spindle speed The spindle speed programmed with an S word is changed for each of the second and subsequent advance operations. Set two change rates in parameter Nos. 5164 and 5165: One change rate is to be used if the skip signal is received in the previous cutting operation, and the other is used if no skip signal is received. Spindle speed = S

(First operation ) = 1.0 (Second and subsequent operations) = B 100 where is the change rate for one operation. When skip is present during the previous cutting operation: = d1% (parameter No. 5164) When skip is not present during the previous cutting operation: = d2% (parameter No. 5165) If the cutting feedrate is clamped to the lower limit, the spindle speed is not changed. The spindle speed can be changed to up to a value equivalent to the maximum value of the S analog data. 4) Advance and return operations are not treated as positioning in rapid traverse, but executed as interpolation operations with cutting feed. Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied. Note that, however, the tool life management function does not decrement the time used for advance and return operations from tool life. When the advance and return feedrate is specified an I word, the same format as for the F word is used as follows: G83 I1000; 1000 mm/min G83 I1000.; 1000 mm/min An I word specified in the G83 continuous state is in effect until G80 or reset is specified. 5) Others * The following are enabled in the canned cycle mode: S Specifying a hole position on the X-, Y-, and additional axes S Arithmetic and branch operations using custom macros S Calling subprograms (such as hole positioning) S Switching between absolute and incremental modes S Rotating the coordinate system S Scaling command (not valid for depth of cut Q or small clearance d1) * Dry run is enabled in every operation state during the canned cycle. * Feed hold is enabled in every operation state during the canned cycle. * By setting the single block mode to ON, the machine stops after every return operation. * Feedrate override is enabled for cutting, return, and advance operations during the cycle.
430

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

25.5
RELATED PARAMETERS (STANDARD SETTINGS)
PRM No. 5160 76543210 00000010 Description Bit 2: Specifies whether to change the feedrate and spindle speed when the overload torque signal is received. 0: Not changed, 1: Changed Bit 1: Specifies whether to change the feedrate and spindle speed when the depth of cut per operation is reached before reception of the overload torque signal. 0: Not changed, 1: Changed 5163 5164 28 90 M code specifying the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode (for M28) Percentage (%) of change made to the spindle speed when return operation is performed after reception of the overload torque signal S2 = S1 d1 B 100 S1: Spindle speed before change S2: Spindle speed after change d1: Percentage to be set 5165 100 Percentage (%) of change made to the spindle speed when return operation is performed without the overload torque signal S2 = S1 d2 B 100 d2: Percentage to be set 5166 90 Percentage of change made to the cutting feedrate when return operation is performed after reception of the overload torque signal F2 = F1 b1 B 100 F1: Cutting feedrate before change F2: Cutting feedrate after change b1: Percentage to be set 5167 100 Percentage of change made to the cutting feedrate when return operation is performed without the overload torque signal F2 = F1 b2 B 100 b2: Percentage to be set 5168 10 Percentage of the lower limit of the allowable cutting feedrate resulting from repeated changes to the specified cutting feedrate FL = F F: FL: BL: 5170 100 BL B 100 Specified cutting feedrate Lower limit of the allowable cutting feedrate Percentage to be set

Number of a common variable of a custom macro to which the total number of return operations during cutting is output. Note that the total number is not output to common variables #500 to #599. 0 or 100 to 149 (0: No output)

431

25. SMALLHOLE PECK DRILLING CYCLE (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

PRM No. 5171

76543210 101

Description Number of a custom macro common variable to which the total number of return operations initiated by the overload torque signal during cutting is output. The total number is not output to common variables #500 to #599. 0 or 100 to 149 (0: No output)

5172 5173 5174

1000 1000 500

Feedrate at which the tool returns to the R point without an I word specified. (mm/min). Feedrate at which the tool advances to the bottom of the hole machined immediately before without an I word specified. (mm/min) Clearance in the first return to the R point or clearance at the bottom of the hole in the second and subsequent cutting operations during the cycle (least input increment)

432

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

26

FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

433

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

26.1
OVERVIEW

This chapter explains various types of settings and basic operations required for connecting the ROBODRILL to a personal computer using FACTOLINK functions. For details of FACTOLINK functions, refer to FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operators Manual.

434

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

26.2
SETTINGS 26.2.1
Setting Up Ethernet

Before using FACTOLINK functions, you must set several items.

(a) When the ROBOMACHINE Ethernet (standard) board is mounted (1) Display Quick Screen 32: Maintenance/Setting Screen 6. Communication Setting.

(2) Press the [ETHERNET] soft key. The ETHERNET PARAMETER screen of the CNC screen is displayed. Press the [OPERATION] soft key to display the following screen:

Press the [EMBEDD] soft key. Press the [BOARD] soft key when a data server board (option) or Ethernet board (option) is installed.

435

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[Builtin Ethernet setting]

436

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

[Data server/Ethernet board setting]

Page 1/6

Setting item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK ROUTER ADDRESS

Details Set the IP address of the ROBODRILL. Set the mask address of the IP address of the network. Set a router IP address when a router exists on the network. Set the IP address of the FACTOLINK server (personal computer). Specify a port number to be used with the FACTOLINK function. Set 9000 usually.

2/6

IP ADDRESS PORT NUMBER

After setting all data, turn off the power then turn on the power again if Alarm 000 TURN OFF POWER is issued.

437

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

26.2.2
Setting Up FACTOLINK
(1) Display QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 6: COMMUNICATION. (2) Press soft key [FACTOLINK]. The cursor is displayed and you can set each item.

D INTERFACE Select an Ethernet connection port/FACTOLINK server (personal computer).

Setting ETHERNET0 ETHERNET2 ETHERNET3 ETHERNET4 Ethernet port Builtin Option board Option board Option board FACTOLINK server (personal computer) Personal computer specified with the IP address on page 2/6 of the builtin Ethernet parameter screen Personal computer specified with IP address 1 on page 2/6 of the Ethernet parameter screen Personal computer specified with IP address 2 on page 2/6 of the Ethernet parameter screen Personal computer specified with IP address 3 on page 2/6 of the Ethernet parameter screen

D MACHINE NAME Name the machine. Do not assign the name used for another machine. Alphanumeric characters and symbols (+, , =, #, &, @, [, ], (, and )) can be used. Position the cursor to the MACHINE NAME field and press the [ALPHABET] key on the operators panel to enter alphanumeric characters and symbols. D AUTOMATIC CONNECTION If it is set to ON, a FACTOLINK connection is automatically made when the power to the machine is turned on. D LOGGING INTERVAL Set an interval at which logging data is sent to the host computer. If a shorter logging interval is set, the load on the network and host computer can increase, or the response of the FACTOLINK screen can degrade. As a guideline, set an interval of 30 seconds or more.
438

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

(3) After setting is complete, press soft key [END]. NOTE When soft key [END] is pressed after setting is complete, the following message appears: TURN OFF POWER After the power is turned off, then on again, the settings take effect. If the power is turned off without pressing the [END] key, the settings are not changed.

26.2.3
Setting NC Parameters

Set the following NC parameters: For RS232C connection:

No. 801#0 Setting (1) Function Stop bits (0: 1 bit 1: 2 bits) Specify the same value as for the converter (Comm Assist). Communication channel (1: Channel 1) Baud rate (10: 4,800 bps 11: 9,600 bps 12: 19,200 bps) Specify the same value as for the converter (Comm Assist).

802 803

1 (12)

The setting enclosed by parentheses is a recommended value.

439

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

26.3
LOGGING DATA FUNCTION

Set data related to the logging data function in script file Main.Scr as follows. (You need not set the data when you do not want to use the logging data function.) (1) Add the following command: [Logging] Default = Y,1,200,0 (2) Use the default values for settings in [Logging Detail] other than RECORDCOUNT. The values are listed below: SEPARATOR (separator) , (comma) USERPATTERN (separator between logging data and user data) (Not used) EXPHEAD (header file extension) .HED EXPRING (ring file extension) .RNG EXPCURRENT (newest data file extension) .DAT

440

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

26.4
SWITCHING TO FACTOLINK SCREEN

(1) Display ALARM screen. (2) Press the rightmost soft key. (3) Press soft key [FALINK].

441

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

26.5
SELECT FUNCTION

(1) Controlling FACTOLINK screen using the program protection key When the program protection key is placed in the protected state, you can disable the function of displaying FACTOLINK screen. Set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K9#0 = 1 (2) COUNTER screen On 24: COUNTER screen of QUICK screen, you can set ORDER, LOT No., and ID CODE.

You can use the logging data function to collect information for the order, lot number, part number, scheduled production, production count, total count, and ID code using the host computer. Set the following parameter: PMC parameter keep relay K9#4 = 1

442

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

26. FACTOLINK FUNCTIONS

26.6
LOGGING DATA FORMAT
A) 00006, A) 1998/11/11 10:24:53, A) 1000001111000010, A) 00000200, A) 00000100, A) 00000001, A) 000100,999999,999999,999999,999999, B) D007 C) 01 C) 01 C) 64 C) 64 D) FFE0F505 00 0000 0000 C) 0E E) 4D30303030372020202020202020202020 B) E703 E) 574F524B30312020202020202020202020 D) FFE0F505 D) FFE0F505 D) FFE0F505 E) 54313449412D30372020 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Data serial number Current time Operation status Required number of parts Number of machined parts Program number Alarm Operator message number Program check mode ROBODRILL operation status Cutting feedrate override Spindle override Operating time (Reserved) (Reserved) (Reserved) Tool number Order Lot number Part number Scheduled production Production count Total production count ID code (Not used)

D For details of data A), refer to FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operators Manual. D Data B) to E) is hexadecimal. D Convert data B) as follows: (1) Changes the places of E8 and 03. (E803 03E8) (2) Convert the data to a hexadecimal number as required (03E8 1000) D Convert data D) as follows: (1) Rearrange the data. (FFE0F505 05F5E0FF) (2) Convert the data to a hexadecimal number as required (05F5E0FF 99999999) D Character string E) is represented in ASCII code (hexadecimal).
443

27. HIGHSPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

27

HIGHSPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION)

444

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

27. HIGHSPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) INTERFACE FUNCTION (OPTION)

27.1
OVERVIEW

This chapter gives notes on using the CNC screen display function and DNC operation function in a system in which the ROBODRILL is connected to a personal computer using the highspeed serial bus (HSSB) interface. To start or end the CNC screen display function, display CNC screen. When QUICK screen is displayed, the CNC screen display function cannot be started or ended.

27.2
STARTING AND ENDING THE CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION

27.3
DNC OPERATION USING THE DNC OPERATION MANAGEMENT PACKAGE

(To perform scheduled operation) D Set bit 6 of PMC parameter K6 to 1 (the DMMC signal is turned on during remote operation). D Put the operation mode in the remote operation mode. To switch to the remote operation mode, set REMOTE MODE to ON on SEQ SELECTION of QUICK screen and select AUTO on the operators panel. (When the operators panel has a full keyboard, select REMOTE on the operators panel.)

(To call a subprogram) D Set NC parameter No. 20 to 15 (input/output device selection) and bit 1 of NC parameter No. 8706 to 1 (use of new DNC functions).

445

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28

CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

446

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.1
SPECIFICATIONS 28.1.1
Spindle
Rotational speed Spindle motor 80 to 8000min1/150 to 15,000min1 AC SPINDLE MOTOR 3.7kw (continuous rating)/5.5kw (10minute rating) 25m/10m C8 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internal thread 30 male sheet)

Filtering precision of centerthrough coolant Centerthrough coolant connection pipe (receptacle for connection at the spindle side)

28.1.2
Coolant Unit
Dimensions (Xaxis direction Y axis direction Zaxis direction) Weight of coolant unit Capacity of coolant tank Configuration 1565 1300 140kg 240L (T14/21iCS:160L) Coolant tank Chip tray External oiling coolant (AC 0.40kW) Centerthrough pump unit Control box (for centerthrough) Option Coolant for cleaning inside of the machine (AC 0.25kW) With a shower gun 895 795mm (aT14iC/iCL) 1080 795mm (aT14iCS)

447

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.1.3
Centerthrough Pump Unit
Coolant pump motor Maximum delivery pressure Rated delivery pressure Maximum delivery Final filtering precision Filtering system AC 0.75kW (directly connected) 1.72 MPa (17.5kgf/cm2) 1.47 MPa (15kgf/cm2) 15L/min (50Hz)/18L/min (60Hz) 25m/10m #100 mesh tank partition plate (with pullup handle) #150 mesh suction filter (mounted on the pump) 25 m line filter (with clogging detection function based on the pressure differential) Coolant valve 3port solenoid valve mounted type Pilot air: 0.24 to 0.49Mpa (2.5 to 5kgf/ cm2)

448

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.2
NOTES 28.2.1
Selecting a Coolant

** Use the centerthrough coolant under the following conditions only.

(1) The ROBODRILLs components use polycarbonate, NBR, HNBR, Baiton (fluororubber), nylon, and acrylic resin. Use a coolant which will not harm these materials. Note that residual chlorine in the water used to dilute the coolant will also cause the same problem. (2) The viscosity of an available waterinsoluble coolant must be 16 cSt or less. (3) Use a watersoluble coolant diluted with water at a high rate of dilution (normally 5 to 15 times). It is advisable to clean the coolant tank and replace the coolant at least once every six months to prevent deterioration due to degraded coolant.

28.2.2
Coolant Unit
(1) The coolant unit cannot be used for centerthrough machining using dry air. If the unit is used for this type of machining, the rotary union may be damaged. (2) When the customer prepares the coolant unit, the following rules must be observed: 1. Prepare the following pipe fittings:
Coolant unit side Spindle side (already mounted on the machine) A29 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internal thread 30 male sheet) C8 (JIS B 8363 G3/8 internal thread 30 male sheet)

2. Also prepare a check valve unit and pipes for the machine according to the capacity of the unit. 3. As the pump capacity, set the maximum pressure to up to 2.5 MPa and the maximum flow rate to up to 20 l/min. 4. See Sections 28.3, Appearance and Configuration of the Coolant Unit, 28.9, Centerthrough Coolant Control (interface specifications), and 28.10, ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT CONTROL. Prepare the customers unit to conform to these sections as closely as possible. 5. Create an operators manual, maintenance manual, maintenance drawings, and other documents for the coolant unit and attach them to the drilling machine. (Note that FANUC cannot provide maintenance for coolant unit provided by the customer.)

449

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.3
APPEARANCE AND CONFIGURATION OF THE COOLANT UNIT 28.3.1
Appearance of the Coolant Unit

Fig.28.3.1 (a) Three faces of coolant (aT14(21)iCe/iCLe)

450

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

Fig.28.3.1 (b) Three faces of coolant (aT14/21iCSe)

451

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

DEFFERENTIAL SW.

CONNECTION PORT

PRESSURE SW. (HI).

PRESSURE SW. (LOW).

HIGHPRESSURE HOSE

PRESSURE VALVE FILTER HOUSING FINE FILTER

PILOT AIR

RELIEF VALVE #150 SUCTION FILTER COOLANT VALVE

DIRT INDICATAR

LAMP CONTROL UNIT

HIPRE PUMP

Fig.28.3.1 (c) Detail of centerthrough pump unit

452

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.3.2
Names and Functions of the Parts
(1) Coolant tank 1. The coolant tank has casters, a pullup hook, and level gage (for visual check). 2. This tank can contain up to 240 l of coolant. The upper limit of the level gage corresponds to 215 l of coolant. The lower limit of the level gage corresponds to 165 l (minimum required amount). (2) Control box 1. The control box contains only a circuit breaker, contacts for starting the pump and coolant valve, and the relay terminal for each detection switch. 2. The lamp on the front panel indicates whether power is being supplied to the control box. Accordingly, when the circuit breaker in the control box is closed, the lamp on the front panel lights. (3) Centerthrough pump
#150 suction filter

Air release plug Inlet pipe Clogging check gage

Fig.28.3.2 (a) Centerthrough Pump

1. The centerthrough pump is a Tocoloid pump for coolant which is compatible with watersoluble coolants. 2. The pump is directly connected to the drive motor via a coupling. 3. The pump contains a relief valve and a #150 mesh (equivalent to 100m) suction filter (with a clogging check gage and air release plug). 4. The temperature is monitored. 5. An open mesh strainer (#60 mesh = equivalent to 250 mm) is also mounted at the end of the inlet pipe. This strainer requires no maintenance.

453

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(4) #100 mesh partition plate (filtering precision of 150 mm or equivalent)

#100 mesh partition

Fig.28.3.2 (b) #100 mesh partition

1. The #100 mesh partition plate separates the chip tray (dirty tank side) from the centerthrough pump unit (clean tank side). 2. This plate is not fixed and can be pulled out of the tank simply by lifting the handle. 3. Periodically check the mesh and remove any chips that have adhered to the net with a brush. (5) Pressure switch (maximum pressure detection) [SP100] 1. The set pressure is 2.5 MPa. 2. This switch detects an abnormally high pump pressure caused by damage to the pump relief valve or some other abnormality. (6) Pressure switch (minimum pressure detection) [SP102] 1. The set pressure is 0.7 MPa. 2. This switch detects a low coolant discharge pressure caused by coolant leakage that may be caused by a loose coupling or an operation error. (7) Differential pressure switch (line filter clogging detection) [SP101] 1. This switch detects the pressure difference between the line filter inlet and discharge sides to determine whether the filter has reached the end of its service life. 2. The setting pressure is n0.18 MPa. 3. This switch has a color ring for visual confirmation. Periodically check the color ring to determine whether the filter has to be replaced. (8) Pressure gage (for checking the discharge pressure) 1. The normal range of coolant discharge pressure is between 1.0 to 2.0 MPa. (9) Coolant valve [YV140] 1. The coolant valve is a 3port valve which contains a solenoid valve (preumatic). This valve is used to control the direction of the coolant flow. 2. While power is not supplied, the coolant always returns to the tank. (10)Air tube (pilot air)
454

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

1. The air tube supplies air to the coolant valve. (11)Filter housing 1. An air release plug is mounted on the housing head and a drain plug for draining the coolant is mounted on the bottom of the shell (housing body). 2. The housing head and shell are connected with a long bolt and nut so that the filter can be replaced easily. The housing is sealed with an O ring. Filter replacement requires only one adjustable wrench. (12)Line filter 1. Always use a genuine FANUC filter. 2. The nominal filtering precision of the standard filter is 25m. (The filter is factorymounted.) 3. A filter with a nominal filtering precision of 10m is also available. 4. The user should order a line filter. For the manufacturers contact details, see Section 28.7.1, Line filter. (13)Highpressure hose 1. This hose is capable of withstanding high pressures and is compatible with both watersoluble and waterinsoluble coolant. 2. Instead of PT screws, highpressure pipe fittings are used at both ends. No seal tape is used. Note this point when replacing or removing a hose for repair or machine relocation. (14)Swivel joint

Swivel joint

Adapter Highpressure hose

Fig.28.3.2 (c) Swivel Joint

1. A rotary joint supports the swivel joint so that the coolant hose is not twisted by movement along the Zaxis.
455

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(15)Check valve assembly

Check valve assembly

Fig.28.3.2 (d) Check valve assembly

1. This unit switches between the spindle taper air blow (air) and centerthrough coolant (liquid). Two pairs of check valves are opposed and used in combination.

Check valve assembly

Swivel joint

Drain tube

Fig.28.3.2 (e) Centerthrough Piping (Machine Side)

456

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.4
INSTALLATION 28.4.1
Notes on Installation
(1) Completely drain the coolant, then move the coolant tank carefully, so as not to damage its casters. (2) Completely drain the coolant, then lift the coolant tank up so that the tank is not distorted. (3) Before starting disassembly or connection for installation, always check that the circuit breakers of the main drilling unit and coolant unit control box are off and that power is not supplied. Because power to the centerthrough coolant pump is supplied from the secondary Power Panel unit in the machine body, there is a danger of the pump starting when the power to the machine is turned on.

28.4.2
Installation Area

(1) As shown in the floor plan, leave at least 280 mm clearance between the coolant unit and back of the machine (such as a wall). If this clearance is not provided, the coolant tank cannot be replaced because it fouls the unit on the coolant tank.

28.4.3
Piping

(1) Connect the highpressure hose to the inlet on the centercoolant unit. No seal tape is used. (Check that there is no foreign matter around the thread and taper section.)

Swivel joint

Adapter Highpressure hose

Fig.28.4.3 Swivel Joint

457

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(2) Connect the other end of the hose to the adapter on the swivel joint. (3) Connect the air pipe of the coolant valve for the centerthrough coolant. Connect a 6mm tube to the secondary cheese of the air blow regulator.

28.4.4
Wiring
(1) Connect each signal line. The connection terminals are provided on terminal board XT5 of the main drilling unit. (2) Connect the power line of the center through coolant pump. The connection terminal is terminal block XT1 on the main ROBODRILL unit.
Signal line connection position : XT4

Power line connection point: XT1

Fig.28.4.4 (a) Wiring

Connect the air tube of the coolant valve of the centerthrough coolant to the air blow valve joint.

Fig.28.4.4 (b) Pilot Air Piping

458

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.4.5
Checking Operation After Installation
(1) Clamp a centerthrough tool on the spindle. (2) Perform centerthrough air purge (using the M23 command) in MDI mode and check that air issues from the tool tip. Open the side door of the splash guard and check that air is issued. (3) A large amount of air should not be discharged from the transparent nylon tube protruding from the cover on the head of the spindle. (If a large amount of air is discharged from the tube, coolant leakage may occur.) (4) To stop the centerthrough air purge (M23), specify M9, which is also used to stop the coolant.

459

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.5
OPERATION 28.5.1
Command M Codes
Use the following M codes:
M code M20 M21 M22 M23 M09 M24 Function Stops the centerthrough coolant pump. Starts the centerthrough coolant pump. Turns the centerthrough coolant on (outputs the coolant). Turns air purge on. Turns the centerthrough coolant off (stops outputting the coolant). Turns air purge off. Use either of M24 or M09. Select M24 or M09 using a parameter. Remarks

28.5.2
Manual Operation

Specify the above M codes in MDI mode. The coolant button on the ROBODRILL operators panel cannot be used. (These buttons are dedicated to external coolant.)

28.5.3
Commands in a Program
00060 G80G40G49 G00G91G28Z0. M6T6 M21 M22 M3S1000 G90G55Z150. G01Z200.F500 G00Z100. M09 M02 Turns the centerthrough coolant off (stops providing coolant to the tool). Starts the centerthrough coolant pump. Turns the centerthrough coolant on (provides coolant to the tool).

460

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.6
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 28.6.1
Daily Inspection
(1) Inspection before operation 1. If the coolant level is low, top it up. 2. Check whether any pipes or cables are damaged. 3. Draw out the #100 mesh partition plate from the coolant tank and check whether the net is clogged. If the net is clogged with chips, clean it with a brush.

28.6.2
Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter
1. While the centerthrough coolant unit is operating, the #150 suction filter in the pump cannot be cleaned or replaced. Check the clogging check gage to determine whether the filter is clogged during pump operation. (Note that while the pump is stopped, the gage is in the green zone (unless damaged) because no coolant flows. Thus, clogging cannot be checked.) It may be difficult to check for clogging if the pump is started and stopped with a short cycle time during actual machining. In such a case, keep the centerthrough coolant running continuously to check for clogging of the suction filter. 2. The following photo **** shows the clogging check gage for the #150 suction filter. When this gage indicates 0.05 MPa or more (the needle is to the left of the 12 oclock position) during coolant pump operation, clean or replace the filter.

Fig.28.6.2 (a) Replacing the filter case

3. For safety, turn the centerthrough circuit breaker in the control box off. 4. Before replacing the suction filter, manually turn the air release plug on this side to release any residual pressure inside the filter. 5. The suction filter is simple to remove. First, turn the width across flat at the top of the aluminum filter case (with the yellow label) using a wrench and remove the filter case.
461

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

#150 filter element

Fig.28.6.2 (b) #150 filter element

6. In the filter case you will find the #150 suction filter. (The suction filter can easily be removed manually.) 7. When remounting the cleaned filter, be careful not to mount the filter upside down. (The bottom of the filter has an O ring.) 8. Remember to tighten the air release plug. 9. Remember to turn the circuit breaker in the control box back on.

462

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.6.3
Replacing the Line Filter
(1) First, for safety, turn the centerthrough circuit breaker in the control box off. 1. Before replacing the line filter, turn the drain plug on the lower portion of the filter housing using a wrench first to remove the residual pressure inside the filter.

Drain

Fig.28.6.3 (a) Discharge the coolant of filter housing

2. The line filter is simple to remove. Turn the box nut on the upper portion of the filter housing using a wrench and remove it. Firmly hold the filter housing to prevent it from falling.

Ioosen the box nut

Fig.28.6.3 (b) Take filter housing to piece (1)

463

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Fig.28.6.3 (c) Take filter housing to piece (2)

3. Take the filter out of the housing and replace it. (No orientation is specified for the filter.)

Fig.28.6.3 (d) Replace the line filter

4. When tightening the screw on the filter housing, be careful not to damage the O ring or another part. 5. Remember to tighten the screw of the drain plug on the lower portion of the filter housing. 6. Remember to turn the circuit breaker in the control box back on.

28.6.4
Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter
(1) The centerthrough coolant may have the following problems immediately after the line filter is replaced. This is caused by the filter housing and peripheral pipes containing air: 1. Noise is produced as air escapes. 2. When machining starts using a narrow tool (such as a long drill 3 mm in diameter) without first testing the system, the tool may be broken due to insufficient coolant pressure or flow rate. Or, the coolant may leak from the rotary union drain. (2) To avoid such problems, perform a dry run as follows immediately after replacing the filter:
464

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

1. Mount a centerthrough tool (tool with a through hole as large as possible, such as a drill at least 6.5 mm in diameter with a through hole) on the spindle. 2. Execute M23 (spindle air purge) for several minutes to remove foreign matter and coolant from within the pipes and clean them to enable the rotary union to move smoothly. 3. Perform a dry run with the centerthrough coolant flowing to remove any air from the filter housing and centerthrough pump.

28.6.5
Adjusting the Relief Valve
(1) If the performance of the pump is lowered after prolonged use, adjust the pressure, referring to the figure below. Be sure to set the pressure while checking the pressure gage so that the setting pressure does not exceed 2.0 MPa. 1. To increase the pressure, rotate (screw down) the pressure adjustment bolt CW to contract the spring. 2. To decrease the pressure. rotate the pressure adjustment bolt CCW to elongate the spring. 3. Upon completion of pressure adjustment, firmly tighten the hexagonal nut of the pressure adjustment bolt.
Internal structure (VB type)
Spring holding plate O ring (Spring Hexagon nut Valve body support nut) Pressure adjusting bolt

Spring Valve

Cap (Applying pressure to oil (To the pump inlet side) from the pump delivery side) O ring Packing

Fig.28.6.5 Structure of the Relief Valve

28.6.6
Other Maintenance
(1) Perform the following work before relocating the machine or before a long vacation: 1. Mount a centerthrough tool (tool with a through hole as large as possible) on the spindle and execute M23 (spindle air purge) for several minutes to remove the coolant from within the spindle and clean it. 2. Execute M23 to remove the coolant within the through hole, replacing the tool used for machining. Also, clean away any sludge from the surface, as well as the finegrain chips which accumulate in the gap around the collet. 3. Clean away any chips sticking to the machine cover and mechanical unit.

465

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.7
MAINTENANCE PARTS 28.7.1
Line Filter
1. One 25m line filter is supplied with the main unit as a spare part. Users in Japan must directly contact the following vendor for further supplies of this filter. Filters are available in packs of ten. 2. A line filter with a filtering precision of 10m is also available. The service life of this filter is shorter, however. Contact the following vendor directly. The specifications are listed below. 3. Overseas users should contact their FANUC agent. 4. Contact: Tokyo CUNO SALES CO., LTD Tel: 0334253351/Fax.: 0334255633
Product name Manufacturer specification G78C81N G78F81N FANUC order specification Remarks Set of 10 Set of 10

Filtering precision

10m 25m

CUNO FILTER CARTRIDGE CUNO FILTER CARTRIDGE

A9800050145#G78C810 A9800050145#G78F810

28.7.2
Other Maintenance Parts
1. The parts listed in the following table incur friction that degrades their performance over the long term. ROBODRILL has a function which tracks the total operating time and outputs an operator message once these parts have reached the end of their service life. When this message is output, replace each part. (The actual operating time in the table indicates the cumulative time for the centerthrough coolant operation cycles.)
Required quantity 1 Life Remarks

Part name

Specification

Rotary union

A97L02010861#320327

Actual operating time 10000h

Mounted on the upper portion of the spindle motor For replacement, contact the FANUC Service Division. Centerthrough coolant pump (singlemotor). Mounted on the coolant tank. For replacement, contact the FANUC Service Representative. The relief pressure has been adjusted.

CT pump

A97L02010859#CTPUMP

Actual operating time 10000h

466

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

2. The specifications of other maintenance units related to centerthrough are listed below.
Part name Specification Required quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting and adjustment Not required Not required Not required Adjusted Not required Not required Not required Adjusted Adjusted Adjusted Pressure switch (high) Differential pressure switch Pressure switch (low) Remarks

Suction filter #100 partition Coolant valve Pressure gate Highpressure hose Check valve Swivel joint SP100 SP101 SP102

A97L02010859#150SCF A97L02010859#100PTI A97L02010859#CLTVAL A97L02010859#PRGAUGE A97L02010859#HPHOSE A2906078V893#STD A2906079V894#STD A97L02010859#SP100 A97L02010859#SP101 A97L02010859#SP102

#150 suction filter of the pump #100 mesh partition plate YV140

467

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.8
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER THROUGH COOLANT AND COMPRESSED AIR

468

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.8.1
Coolant Circuit Diagram of Centerthrough Coolant Unit

400W

Fig.28.8.1 Coolant circuit diagram Detail A (for piping) Coolant unit side adapter Spindle side adapter G 3/8 Outer thread with 30_ Female taper sheet G 3/8 Inner thread with 30_ Male taper sheet

469

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.8.2
Compressed Air Circuit Diagram
Additional control for centerthrough coolant

0.49MPa

0.29MPa

Air seal for the rotating union

Pilot air for coolant valve

Spindle taper hole air blow

Fig.28.8.2 Compressed Air Circuit Diagram

470

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.9
CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT CONTROL 28.9.1
Overview
The following functions are provided: D Clears the coolant from the oil hole at the tip of the tool. D Air purges the remaining coolant from within tool. (Air is output from the oil hole at the tip of the tool.)

28.9.2
M codes
M code M20 M21 M22 M23 M09 M24

Use the following M codes.

Function Stops the centerthrough coolant pump. Starts the centerthrough coolant pump. Turns the centerthrough coolant on (outputs the coolant). Turns the air purge on. Turns the centerthrough coolant off (stops output of the coolant). Turns air purge off.

Remarks

Use either M24 or M09. Select M24 or M09 using a parameter.

28.9.3
Manual Operation

Specify each M code listed above in MDI mode. The coolant buttons on the ROBODRILL operators panel cannot be used. (The buttons are dedicated to external coolant.)

28.9.4
Commands in a Program
00060 G80G40G49 G00G91G28Z0. M6T6 M21 M22 M3S1000 G90G55Z150. G01Z200.F500 G00Z100. M09 M02 Turns the centerthrough coolant off (stops output of the coolant). Starts the centerthrough coolant pump. centerthrough coolant on (outputs the coolant).

471

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.9.5
Control

(1) [Centerthrough coolant pump] (a) The centerthrough coolant pump is started by the M21 command and stopped by the M20 command. When keep relay K3#4=1 is specified, however, the pump is kept on regardless of whether the above M code commands are specified. In this case, M21 or M20 need not be specified in the program. (b) In the following cases, the pump starts automatically. (Only when keep relay K3#5=0 is specified) When the mode is changed to automatic, MDI, or remote mode When menu operation is determined When the start button is pressed (c) In the following case, the pump stops automatically. (Only when keep relay K3#5=0 is specified) When one minute elapses after the centerthrough coolant is turned off (d) When an alarm related to the centerthrough coolant (alarm number: 1031, 1032, 1033, or 1035) occurs, the pump stops. (2) [Centerthrough coolant] (a) The centerthrough coolant is turned on by the M22 command and turned off by the M09 command. (b) When the M22 command is specified, the centerthrough coolant pump may stop. In this case, alarm 1034 Centerthrough coolant pump not started is issued. Start the pump, then specify the command. (c) If the door is opened during automatic operation, the centerthrough coolant is turned off. Upon restart, the centerthrough coolant is automatically turned on. (d) When stop by a feed hold is specified during automatic operation, the centerthrough coolant does not stop. (The CE making specification stops.) (e) When an alarm related to the centerthrough coolant (alarm number: 1031, 1032, 1033, or 1035) occurs, the centerthrough coolant is turned off. (f) When the reset key on the ROBODRILL operators panel is pressed, the centerthrough coolant is turned off. (Only when keep relay K1#7=1 is specified) (g) When air purge is specified, the centerthrough coolant is turned off. (3) [Air purge] (a) The air purge is turned on by the M23 command and turned off by the M09 command. (b) When the air purge is specified, the air is pulseoutput. When the tool moves up in the Zaxis direction during ATC operation, air continues to be output regardless of whether the M23 command is specified. (c) If the door is opened during automatic operation, air purge is turned off. Upon restart, air purge is automatically turned on. (d) When stop by a feed hold is specified during automatic operation, air purge does not stop. (e) The CE making specification stops. (f) When the reset key on the ROBODRILL operators panel is pressed, air purge is turned off. (Only when keep relay K1#7=1 is specified) (g) When centerthrough coolant, spindle rotation, or rigid tapping is specified, air purge is turned off.
472

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.9.6
Alarm Operator Messages
Number 1031 1032 Message Abnormal centerthrough coolant pressure (upper limit) Abnormal centerthrough coolant pressure (lower limit) Clogging of the centerthrough coolant filter Centerthrough coolant pump not started Overloading of the centerthrough coolant motor Lower limit of the coolant Lower limit of the coolant Clogging of the centerthrough coolant tank filter End of the service life of the rotary union End of the service life of the centerthrough coolant pump Adjust the centercoolant pressure. SUCTION FILTER LOADING Cause The viscosity of the coolant is too high. The coolant pump is improperly adjusted. The coolant level is low. The coolant leaks due to a piping error or damaged pipe. The line filter has been clogged for more than 100 hours. M22 is specified when the centerthrough coolant is not started. The centerthrough coolant motor is overloaded. The coolant level is low. The coolant level is low. The line filter is clogged. The operating time of the rotary union has exceeded 9999 hours. The operating time of the centerthrough coolant pump has exceeded 9999 hours. The operating time of the centerthrough coolant pump has exceeded 3000, 6000, or 9000 hours. The suction filter is clogged.

1033 1034 1035 1036 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022

473

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.9.7
Parameters (PMC Parameters)
Number K3#4 K3#5 K3#6 K4#1 K4#2 K4#3 Default Function 0 0: Controls on and off of the centerthrough coolant pump. 1: The centerthrough coolant pump is always turned on. 0 0: Enables automatic on and off of the centerthrough coolant pump. 1: Disables automatic on and off of the centerthrough coolant pump. 0 0: Disables the detection of the coolant lower limit. 1: Enables detection of the lower limit of the coolant. 0 0: Disables the detection of a clogged suction filter. 1: Enables the detection of a clogged suction filter. 0 0: Disables manual button control for center through coolant. 1: Enables manual button control for center through coolant. 1 0: Displays only operator messages when the coolant is at the lower limit. 1: Displays the operator messages and alarm when the level of the coolant is at the lower limit. 1 0: Turns the centerthrough coolant off according to the M09 command. 1: Turns the centerthrough coolant off according to the M24 command. 1 0: Disables centerthrough coolant control. 1: Enables centerthrough coolant control. 60000 Waiting time until the pump stops after the centerthrough coolant is turned off 300 Pulse output on time for the air purge 300 Pulse output off time for the air purge 10000 Waiting time until the air seal valve is turned off after the centerthrough coolant is turned off 2000 Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit) 1000 Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (lower limit) 100 Filter clogging monitoring time 9999 Monitoring time for service life of the rotary union 9999 Monitoring time for service life of the centerthrough coolant pump 3000 Monitoring interval for operating time of the centerthrough coolant pump

K4#4 K5#4 T00 T38 T40 T42 T44 T46 C16 C20 C24 D82

474

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.9.8
DI/DO
Signal name Address Connection terminal XT437 XT438 XT441 XT413 XT414 XT417 XT418 XT419 XT420 XTC120 XTC123 XTC124 Remarks

Centerthrough coolant pump control Centerthrough coolant valve control Air seal valve control Coolant lower limit detection Abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit) detection Filter clogging detection Abnormal coolant pressure (lower limit) detection Overheating centerthrough coolant pump Suction Filter clogging detection Centerthrough coolant pump on/off button Centerthrough coolant on/off button Air purge on/off button

Y3.0 Y3.1 Y3.2 X5.0 X5.1 X5.2 X5.3 X5.4 X5.5 X11.5 X11.6 X11.7

When this signal is on, the pump operates. When this signal is on, coolant is output. When this signal is on, air is output. This signal is turned off if the lower limit is detected. This signal is turned off if an abnormal pressure is detected. This signal is turned off if the filter is clogged. This signal is turned off if an abnormal pressure is detected. This signal is turned on if the center through coolant pump overheats. This signal is turned off if the filter is clogged. This signal is accepted when a pulse 100 ms or longer is input. This signal is accepted when a pulse 100 ms or longer is input. This signal is accepted when a pulse of 100 ms or longer is input. Valid only in manual mode

28.9.9
Restriction
D When centerthrough coolant control is enabled (K5#4=1), external interfaces Y3.0 to Y3.7 and X5.0 to X5.7 are unavailable. (These interfaces are dedicated to the centerthrough coolant.) When the manual button for the center through coolant is disabled (bit 4 of parameter K5 is equal to 1 and bit 2 of parameter K4 is equal to 1), X11.5 to X11.7 cannot be used.

475

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.10
ELECTRIC CONTROL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF CENTER THROUGH COOLANT 28.10.1
Power Supply
CTC PUMP=Center though coolant pump

476

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

28.10.2
Input/Output Output
C.T.C CONTROL UNIT=Center though coolant control unit

477

28. CENTERTHROUGH COOLANT (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

28.10.3
Input/OutputInput

478

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

29. AI HIGHPRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/MODELER CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION)

29

AI HIGHPRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/ MODELER CONTROL II FUNCTION (OPTION)

For these functions, refer to the relevant CNC operators manuals. Modeler control II function = AI nano contour control function When using the AI highprecision contour control function/modeler control II function, note the following: 1) When specifying a tool change, be sure to turn off the AI highprecision contour control function/modeler control II function. To turn off the AI highprecision contour control function: G05 P0 To turn off the modeler control II function: G05.1 Q0

479

30. HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

30

HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

480

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

30. HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

30.1
OVERVIEW

A skip function that uses a highspeed skip signal (to be connected directly to the CNC not via the PMC) instead of the ordinary skip signal (X4.7) is available. When the highspeed skip signal is used, up to 8 signals can be input. In ordinary skip signal input, the detection delay and variation are from 0 to 2 msec (on the CNC side only). In highspeed skip signal input, however, the detection delay and variation do not exceed 0.1 msec to allow highprecision measurement.

481

30. HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

30.2
ACCELERATION AND SERVO DELAY COMPENSATION (TYPE A/B)

With the skip function, the current position in the NC is stored using the skip signal. However, the current position in the NC includes a servo system delay, so that the current position is shifted by a servo system delay from the position where the skip signal is actually input. This shift amount can be found from the positional deviation held by the servo system and the accumulated pulses due to acceleration/deceleration for feed in the NC. When this shift amount is considered, the need to include a servo system delay in a measurement error is eliminated. This shift amount can be compensated for by one of two types of methods with bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 or bit 1 of NC parameter No. 6201. 1) Type A: A value found from a cutting time constant and servo time constant (loop gain) is used as a shift amount. 2) Type B: A positional deviation and accumulated pulses due to acceleration/deceleration when the skip signal is turned on are used as a shift amount.
Tool move direction

Highspeed skip signal Pnc Q P

Actual tool stop position

Position where the skip signal is input

Coordinate system origin

Pnc: Position where the skip signal is input and the tool is actually stopped [mm/inch] P: Q: Distance to be measured [mm/inch] Servo system delay [mm/inch]

In the above, P = Pnc Q is calculated in the NC with bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 or bit 1 of NC parameter No. 6201. A shift amount calculation of type A (bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 = 1) is made as follows: Q = Fm 1/60 (a Tc/1000 + Ts/1000) Fm: Feedrate [mm/min or inch/min] Tc: Cutting time constant [msec] NC parameter No. 1622: For exponential acceleration/deceleration NC parameter No. 1628: For linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation Tc = 0 when bit 7 of NC parameter No. 6200 = 0 Servo time constant [msec] Let G be a loop gain (NC parameter No. 1825) (Unit: 1/sec). Then, Ts = 1000/G = 1 for exponential acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
482

Ts:

a:

= 1/2 for linear

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

30. HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

NOTE When using type A (bit 0 of NC parameter No. 6201 = 1), turn on the skip signal in constantspeed state.

30.3
COMMAND

(Example) G31 Z200.F10 G31 is valid only in the specified block.

30.4
ADDRESS
F122 #7 HDI7 #6 HDI6 #5 HDI5 #4 HDI4 #3 HDI3 #2 HDI2 #1 HDI1 #0 HDI0

483

30. HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

30.5
PARAMETERS
#7 6200 #6 SRE #5 #4 HSS #3 #2 #1 #0

HSS With the skip function, a highspeed skip signal is: 0 : Not used. 1 : Used. SRE When a highspeed skip signal is used: 0 : The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (0 1). 1 : The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (1 0).
#7 6201 #6 #5 IGX #4 #3 #2 #1 SEB #0 SEA

SEA When the skip function is used and a highspeed skip signal is turned on, acceleration/deceleration and a servo delay are: 0 : Not considered. 1 : Considered and compensated for (type B). SEB When the skip function is used and a highspeed skip signal is turned on, acceleration/deceleration and a servo delay are: 0 : Not considered. 1 : Considered and compensated for (type B). IGX When the highspeed skip function is used, X4.7 is: 0 : Enabled as a skip signal. 1 : Disabled as a skip signal.
#7 1S8 #6 1S7 #5 1S6 #4 1S5 #3 1S4 #2 1S3 #1 1S2 #0 1S1

6202

1S1 to 1S8 Specify which highspeed skip signal to enable for a G31 skip command. The correspondence between the bits and signals is indicated below. The setting of each bit has the following meaning: 0 : Disables the highspeed skip signal corresponding to each bit. 1 : Enables the highspeed skip signal corresponding to each bit. 1S1 1S2 1S3 1S4 1S5 1S6 1S7 1S8 HDI0 HDI1 HDI2 HDI3 HDI4 HDI5 HDI6 HDI7

NOTE HDI0 to HDI7 are the highspeed skip signals.

484

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

30. HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

30.6
CONNECTION
XTA1
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 HDI0 0V HDI2 0V 0V HDI4 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 0V HDI1 0V HDI3 0V 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 HDI5 0V HDI6 0V HDI7 0V

485

30. HIGHSPEED SKIP FUNCTION (OPTION)

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

30.7
INPUT SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS

[Circuit configuration]
External device Driver CNC LiH/IiL Filter VH/VL Shield Receiver

[Absolute maximum rating] [Input characteristics]

Item Highlevel input voltage Lowlevel input voltage Highlevel input current

Input voltage range Vin: 3.6 to +13.6 V

Symbol VH VL IiH

Specification 3.6 to 11.6 0 to 1.0 0.5max 9.3max

Unit V V mA mA mA ms

Remarks

Vin = 5V Vin = 10V Vin = 0V

Lowlevel input current Input signal pulse width

IiL

8.0max 20min

NOTE 1 The + sign of IiH/IiL indicates the direction of flow into the receiver, and the sign of IiH/IiL indicates the direction of flow from the receiver. 2 A highspeed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when the input voltage is low. A highspeed skip signal is assumed to be 0 when the input voltage is high.

486

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31

HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

487

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

31.1
OVERVIEW

To reduce noncutting time for machining multiple holes in succession, the drilling cycles provide a coasting distance above point R. A reduced operation time is achieved by rapid traverse overlapping and threeaxis (X/Y/Zaxis) positioning. The commands used are the same as the conventional commands G73 and G81 through G83. A coasting distance is specified using parameter No. 5150. A rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio used in a canned cycle is common to all axes, and is to be specified in parameter No. 5151. When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, coasting operation is performed in either the initial point return mode or the R point return mode.

488

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31.2
CANNED CYCLES
G73 (G98)

Highspeed peckdrilling canned cycle (G73)

Coasting end point

G73 (G99)

Coasting distance Point I Passing point I Coasting distance Point R q Point R q Coasting end point

Passing point R

Point Z

(Command format)
G73 X_Y_Z_R_Q_F_K_
X_Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ : : : : : : Hole position data Distance from point R to hole bottom Distance from initial point to point R Depth of each cut Cutting feedrate Number of repeats

489

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Drilling/spot drilling canned cycle (G81)

G81 (G98) Coasting distance Coasting end point Passing point I G81 (G99)

Point I

Point I Coasting end point Coasting distance

Point R

Point R Passing point R

Point Z

Point Z

(Command format)
G81 X_Y_Z_R_F_K_
X_Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ : : : : : Hole position data Distance from point R to hole bottom Distance from initial point to point R Cutting feedrate Number of repeats

490

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

Drilling/counter boring canned cycle (G82)

G82 (G98) G82 (G99)

Coasting distance Point I Coasting end point Passing point I Coasting end point Coasting distance Point R Point R Passing point I Point I

Point Z

Point Z

(Command format)
G82 X_Y_Z_R_P_F_K_
X_Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ : : : : : : Hole position data Distance from point R to hole bottom Distance from initial point to point R Dwell time at hole bottom Cutting feedrate Number of repeats

491

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Peck drilling canned cycle (G83)

G83 (G98) Coasting distance Coasting end point G83 (G99)

Point I

Point I

Coasting end point Coasting distance

Passing point I

Point R

Point R Passing point I

Point Z

Point Z

(Command format)
G83 X_Y_Z_R_Q_F_K_
X_Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ : : : : : : Hole position data Distance from point R to hole bottom Distance from initial point to point R Depth of each cut Cutting feedrate Number of repeats

The operations below are performed: 1) 2) 3) 4) Rapid traverse to XYspecified position Rapid traverse to point R Cutting feed from point R to point Z Rapid traverse from point Z to coasting end point

31.2.1
Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 through G83 Codes

When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, these codes operate as the highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycles. When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 0, these codes operate as the conventional canned cycles, G73 and G81 to G83.

492

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31.2.2
Retreat Operation

The tool moves in rapid traverse to a coasting end point, which is determined by adding a coasting distance to initial point/point R.

31.2.3
Positioning Operation

Positioning (X/Yaxis) to the next hole position in the cycle is started by rapid traverse overlapping during retreat operation. At this time, positioning to point R along the Zaxis is also started.

31.2.4
SingleBlock Stop

Singleblock stop operation is performed at the following points: 1) Position where positioning to the first hole position is completed 2) Point R before drilling the first hole 3) Position (coasting end point) where retreat operation from the bottom of the first hole is completed 4) Point R before drilling the second hole 5) Position (coasting end point) where retreat operation from the bottom of the second hole is completed If a singleblock stop operation is performed at 3) or 5), rapid traverse overlapping is not actuated, but the tool moves up to a coasting end point.

31.2.5
Return to Initial Point/Point R

In either the initial point return mode (G98) or the R point return mode (G99), coasting operation is performed.

31.2.6
Cancellation

When G80 or a G code of group 01 (G00 to G03, G60 (when bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No. 5431) is set to 1) is specified, a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle is cancelled. At the time of cancellation, the tool is positioned at a coasting end point along the Zaxis.

31.2.7
Rapid Traverse Overlapping

If rapid traverse blocks are specified in succession in a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is applied. Parameter No. 5151 is used to specify a rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio. To disable rapid traverse overlapping, set 0 in parameter No. 5151. In a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is enabled even when the move direction is reversed. Set the parameter, taking influences such as a shock to the machine into consideration.

493

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

31.3
ADDITIONAL PARAMETERS
5104 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RBDCY

[Data type] Bit RBDCY The highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycles are: 0 : Enabled. 1 : Disabled.
5150

In a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle, set a coasting distance. [Data type] 2word [Unit of data]
Increment system
Millimeter input

ISA
0.01 0.001

ISB
0.001 0.0001

ISC
0.0001 0.00001

Unit
mm inch

Inch input

[Valid data range] 0 to 99999999

5151

Set a rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio to be used between rapid traverse blocks in a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle. During the cycle, this setting is applied to all axes. [Data type] Byte [Unit of data] % [Valid data range] 0 to 100 NOTE In a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is applied even when bit 4 (RT0) of parameter No. 1601 is set to 0. To disable rapid traverse overlapping, set 0 in this parameter.

494

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

31.4
NOTES

1 The highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycles are enabled when the drilling axis is the Zaxis. (Bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 = 0) 2 Drilling operation is not performed in a block that specifies none of the Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis, Raxis, and addition axes. 3 Specify a R command in a block that performs drilling operation. A R command, when specified in a block that does not perform drilling operation, is not stored as modal data. (However, a R command specified in a block that specifies K0 is stored as modal data.) 4 Do not specify a G code of group 01 (G00 to G03, G60 (when bit 0 (MDL) of parameter No. 5431) is set to 1) in a block that specifies G81. Otherwise, G81 is cancelled. 5 In the canned cycle mode, tool offset data is ignored. 6 When bit 0 (RBDCY) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, the highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycles are enabled either in the initial point return mode (G98) or in the R point return mode (G99). 7 During a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is enabled even when bit 4 (RT0) of parameter No. 1601 is set to 0. A rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio is to be set in parameter No. 5151. 8 Before specifying a rapid traverse overlapping deceleration ratio for a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle in the parameter, conduct a test run sufficiently to ensure that a slant retreat operation is not performed. Rapid traverse overlapping is applied even when the move direction is reversed. So, consider influences such as a shock to the machine when setting a value in the parameter. To disable rapid traverse overlapping during a cycle, set 0 in parameter No. 5151. 9 The highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycles are enabled in the cycles of G73 and G81 to G83.

495

31. HIGHSPEED POSITIONING AND DRILLING CANNED CYCLE FUNCTIONS

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

31.5
EXAMPLE OF CYCLE OPERATION

From point R to point Z of the first hole, cutting feed is executed at a specified feedrate value of F. From the hole bottom of the first hole, retreat operation is performed to a coasting end point along the Raxis, which is determined by adding a parameterset value to point I or point R. During retreat operation, the tool moves along the Xaxis, Yaxis, and Zaxis by rapid traverse overlapping. At this time, rapid traverse of interpolation type is performed, and the tool is positioned at the second hole along a straight path. Then, the cutting feed for the second hole is executed at a specified feedrate value of F. During a highspeed positioning and drilling canned cycle, rapid traverse overlapping is enabled even when the move direction is reversed.
F Rapid traverse overlapping Coasting end point Coasting distance

Point I G98

Coasting end point Coasting distance

Point R Workpiece surface G99

Point Z

Point Z

496

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

32

TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

497

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

32.1
OVERVIEW

If the table is not placed at a particular position, tool change operation is prohibited. This function is used, for example, when the tool interferes with a workpiece or jig at the time turret turning in tool change operation.

498

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

32.2
SPECIFICATION
(0,0) X (500,0)

Table move stroke Y

Tool change prohibition area (0,380) (500,380)

The maximum stroke along the Xaxis is 700 mm for T14/21iCL. The maximum stroke along the Xaxis is 300 mm for T14/21iCS.

If the table is placed in the tool change prohibition area (X and Y machine coordinates) in the figure above, tool change operation is prohibited. D An alarm is issued when the TOOL CHANGE button on the operators panel is pressed in MDI operation. D An alarm is issued when M06 is specified in automatic operation/MDI operation. D One tool change prohibition area can be specified by specifying an arbitrary table position (X and Y machine coordinates). NOTE If tool change operation and table movement are specified at the same time (Example: G54 X100.Y100.M6 T1), and the table is placed in the tool change prohibition area during turret turning (during tool change operation), tool change operation and table movement gradually stop and an alarm is issued. Create a machining program so that the table is not placed in the tool change prohibition area at tool change time. If the machine stops in the state above, perform turret recovery operation. Turret recovery operation is performed even when the table is placed in the tool change prohibition area. So, ensure that the tool does not interfere with a workpiece and jig.

499

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

32.3
ALARM

Message: 1015 TABLE IS PLACED PROHIBITION AREA.

IN

TOOL

CHANGE

This alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operators panel.

500

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

32. TOOL CHANGE PROHIBITION FUNCTION

32.4
PARAMETERS

[NC parameters]
No. 6914 6915 6934 6935 6954 6955 Setting 1 2 Details Axis along which a tool change prohibition area is specified (1: Xaxis) Axis along which a tool change prohibition area is specified (2: Yaxis) Maximum Xaxis value for tool change prohibition area Maximum Yaxis value for tool change prohibition area Minimum Xaxis value for tool change prohibition area Minimum Yaxis value for tool change prohibition area

[PMC parameter keep relay]

No. K2#7 K2#6 Setting 1 1 Details The tool change prohibition function is enabled. Specified area or tool change prohibition area

(Example) To set a tool change prohibition area of 0 to 250 mm along the Xaxis and 0 to 190 mm along the Yaxis
6934 6935 6954 6955 250000 99999999(*) 99999999(*) 1900000

NOTE For safety, the area outside the operation area is also specified as a tool change prohibition area.

501

33. MACRO CALL USING G CODE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

33

MACRO CALL USING G CODE

For these functions, refer to the relevant CNC operators manuals. When using the Macro Call Using G Code, note the following : It is not possible to use G code from 100 to 899. These are special G code for conversational automatic programming function (Manual Guide). In case of SUPER C.A.P iM installation, G code for Macro call has no abovelimit.

502

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

34

SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

503

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

34.1
OVERVIEW

This function extends the spindle air blow time when tools are changed. This function is useful for removing chips adhered to the taper shank of the tooling.

504

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

34.2
SEQUENCE
Tool change sequence: 1. In the same manner as the ordinary tool change sequence, the tool rises along the Zaxis, the turret turns, then the tool lowers along the Zaxis until Z = about 98 mm. 2. The spindle air blow starts. The tool lowers along the Zaxis at rapid traverse LOW speed.

3. When the tool has lowered along the Zaxis to a specified position, the tool change sequence stops. The stop takes place with the spindle air blow kept output. If the specified time has elapsed before the tool lowers along the Zaxis to the specified position, operation 4. takes place.

4. Operation returns to the ordinary tool change sequence.

505

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

34.3
PARAMETERS

[NC parameters]
No. 6919 3

This parameter specifies the axis of which operation is to be stopped at the time of spindle air blow. Always set 3 (the Zaxis).
No. 6939 65000 (Standard value)

This parameter specifies the Zaxis stop position at the time of spindle air blow. (Standard value: Z = 65 mm) Data type : 2 bytes Unit of data : 0.001 mm Valid data range : 0 to 100000
No. 6959 350000

Data related to the Zaxis stop position at the time of spindle air blow. Always set 350000 (350 mm).

506

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

[PMC parameters (data table)]

No. D 850 D 851 D 852 D 853 D 854 D 855 D 856 D 857 D 858 D 859 D 860 D 861 D 862 D 863 D 864 D 865 D 865 D 865 D 865 D 865 D 865 Spindle air blow extension time for tool number T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 T17 T18 T19 T20 T21

These parameters set the extension time for spindle air blow. (Setting on a toolbytool basis) Specifying 0 does not extend the spindle air blow time. (Ordinary tool change sequence) Data type : 1 byte Unit of data : 48 ms Valid data range : 128 to 127 When setting is 1 to 127: Setting 48 ms When setting is 1 to 128: (256 + setting) 48 ms Example 1 : When 100 is set: 100 48 ms = 4800 ms (4.8 s) Example 2 : When 56 is set: (256 56) 48 ms = 9600 ms (9.6 s)

507

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(Additional information) The data table display type is factoryset to the word type (displaying D850, D852, D854, and so on). To change the display type to the byte type (displaying D850, D851, D852, and so on), set TYPE on the PMC data group setting screen of the PMC screen to 0.

508

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

34. SPINDLE AIR BLOW TIME EXTENSION FUNCTION

34.4
NOTE
1. When Zaxis operation stops at the position specified in NC parameter No. 6939, the actually stopped position may vary within 1 mm of the parameterspecified position.

509

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

35

TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

510

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

35.1
OVERVIEW

This control function is provided for the touch probe MP11 manufactured by Renishaw plc.

511

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

35.2
FUNCTION

M17 : Turns on the power to the touch probe. M18 : Turns off the power to the touch probe. (Sample program) G00 G90 G54 X4. 186 Y20. 659 Z148. 560 M17 G184 Z7. R15. F50 W2 M18 Move to measurement start point Move to measurement start point Turn on touch probe Measurement Turn off touch probe

NOTE When specifying M17 (or M18) then M18 (or M17), provide an interval of at least 10 seconds between these commands.

512

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

35.3
CONNECTION
(XT4) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Pin No. XT407 XT408 XT411 XT412 XT409 XT428 XT425 XT427 XT421 XT427 PE

Address X4.4 X4.5 X4.6 X4.7 (+24B) (0V) Y2.0 (0V) (+24B) (0V)

Signal Probe status Probe battery Probe error Skip Input common Input common Probe ON/OFF Output common Power supply Power supply Ground line

Line color Light blue Purple Green Yellow Pink, orange Blue, gray White Brown Red Black Shield

Wire mark XT407 XT408 XT411 XT412 XT409/+24B XT428/0V XT425 XT427/0V XT421/+24B XT427/0V PE

513

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

35.4
EXTERNAL INTERFACE SIGNAL ASSIGNMENT
Address X4.4 X4.5 X4.6 X4.7 Y2.0 Signal name 58 : Probe status 59 : Low probe battery 60 : Probe error 46 : Skip 82 : Probe ON/OFF

514

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

35.5
PARAMETERS
[PMC parameter keep relay]
No. K17 1

Bit 2 of K17 = 1: Enables control of the touch probe MP11. [PMC parameter (data table)]
No. D100 Touch probe tool number

This parameter sets the number of the magazine to which the touch probe is attached. When 0 is set, an ordinary tool is assumed. Data type : One word Unit of data : None Valid data range : 0 to 21

515

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

35.6
ALARMS

No. 1040

Message PROBE SYSTEM ERROR PROBE ON/OFF ERROR

Description A probe system failure. Check the wire connections, cabling, and external interface settings. The probe or receiving sensor may be defective. There is no response to a probe ON/OFF command. Check the probe and receiving sensor orientations, and check whether the probe and receiving sensor window are dirty. This error may be due to a probe switching problem, dead battery, or receiving sensor failure. An error signal was output from the probe. Check the wire connections, cabling, and external interface settings. The probe battery may be dead. The voltage of the probe battery has lowered. A spindle rotation was specified with the probe attached to the spindle. While the probe is attached to the spindle, spindle rotation is not permitted. The number of the magazine to which the probe is attached is set in PMC parameter data table D100.

1041

1042

PROBE SIGNAL ERROR PROBE BATTERY LOW SPINDLE ROTATION IS PROHIBITED

1043 1053

516

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

35.7
SPINDLE ROTATION DISABLE FUNCTION

When the touch probe is attached to the spindle, spindle rotation can be disabled to prevent the touch probe from being damaged. Set the number of the magazine to which the touch probe is attached in data table D100. (See Section 35.5.) When the currently used magazine number is set in D100 (the touch probe is attached to the spindle), the ROBODRILL operates as follows: D When spindle rotation is specified (by pressing the spindle rotation button on the operators panel or specifying M3 or M4), alarm 1053 is indicated, and the spindle does not rotate. D You can specify tool change. D You can specify spindle orientation. Additional information : This function can be used also when the touch probe control function is not used (bit 1 of K17 = 0).

517

35. TOUCH PROBE CONTROL FUNCTION

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

35.8
AUTOMATIC TURNOFF OPERATION OF THE TOUCH PROBE

When the power to the ROBODRILL is turned on/off, the touch probe is turned off automatically to save the battery of the touch probe. When the power to the ROBODRILL is turned off less than 10 seconds after M17 (or M18) is specified, the touch probe is not turned off automatically.

518

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

36

MANUAL GUIDE

519

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

36.1
OVERVIEW

This chapter provides an overview of the manual guide. For operation and setting for each function, notes, and other detailed information, refer to FANUC Manual Guide Operators Guide for Milling.

520

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

36.2
NOTES
1. Guidance machining (option) of the manual guide function is unavailable. 2. To use the manual guide function, set the following parameter: Bit 2 of parameter No. 5001 = 0: The address used for specifying the compensation number of cutter compensation C is D. 3. When the detail input window or OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window is displayed, the alarm/diagnosis window cannot be displayed. When the alarm/diagnosis window is displayed, the detail input window and OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window cannot be displayed.

521

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

36.3
OPERATION OF THE MANUAL GUIDE 36.3.1
Explanation of Sample Program
Y+
Work Size Work Origin : Cube 120(W) 80(D) 25(H) : The top and center of work

80mm X+

120mm Z+

25mm

Process:
Order 1 2 3 Process Facing Hole Machining Pocketing Tool Face mill Drill End mill T.Radius D60 D8 D10 T code 1 2 3 H code 1 2 3 D code 11 12 13

522

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Process order of Contour Pocket :

NC Program : 1. Tool Change to T1 2. Modal Command 3. Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point 4. Facing 5. Tool Change to T2 6. Modal Command 7. Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point 8. Hole Machining 9. Tool Change to T3 10. Modal Command 11. Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point 12. Pocketing 13. Process End The Name which is marked [ ] : Softkey The Name which is marked < > : Hardkey on ROBODRILL Operators panel

523

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

36.3.2
Switching Over to Manual Guide Screen
Display QUICK screen.

Hit [C.A.P] softkey.

MANUAL GUIDE screen is displayed. Operation mode is switched to EDIT mode automatically, if screen is changed to MANUAL GUIDE screen. But in program operation, operation mode is no switched to EDIT mode.

524

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Status Window

Graphic Window Program Window

Key in Buffer

Softkey

Status Window

: Current position (Absolute), Current speed, Operating NC Program and Modal data is displayed. Graphic Window : Tool Path or Anime Graphic is displayed. Program Window : Editing or operating NC program is displayed. Key in Buffer : Comment of Data, Inputted data is displayed. Softkey : Information is changed according to operation mode, edit menu, operation menu.

525

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

36.3.3
Data Setting

Set Work Coordinates and Offset data.

Hit [WRK CD] softkey.

WORK COORDINATES window is displayed. Set the data. (G54 X=150.000 Y=150.000) After set data, hit [RETURN] softkey. Hit [OFFSET] softkey.

OFFSET window is displayed. Set the data. (001=100.000 002=110.000 003=120.000 011=30.000 012=4.000 013=5.000) After set data, hit [RETURN] softkey. Normally, D code is no use on hole machining. But in this case,Tool Radius data of Drill is set to D code. This data is used for hole size data on Anime Graphic. If you dont use the Anime Graphic, it is not possible to set this data for hole machining tools.

526

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

36.3.4
Selection of NC Program

Select NC program.

Hit [LIST] softkey.

Program Directory is displayed. Key in Program No. (2000) Hit [SELECT] softkey. It is not necessary to input character O, when you input the NC program number. Hit [RETURN] softkey, if you cancel to select NC program. Specified Program No. is stored to memory.

When new program is created, created date and time is stamped. Lets modify comment. Hit <RIGHT CURSOR> Key.
527

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Cursor selects word. When <RIGHT CURSOR> Key is hit again, cursor moves to comment part. And when <ABC...Z> key is hit, softkey function is switched to alphabet mode. Input new comment. ((TEST PROGRAM)) (The characters ( and ) for comment needs.)

After set data, hit <ALTER> key. Comment is changed. When <ABC...Z> key is hit again, softkey function is switched to normal mode. When <LEFT CURSOR> Key is hit twice, cursor selects one line.

528

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

36.3.5
Creation of NC Program

Create NC program.

Hit [EDIT] softkey. Hit the left side softkey, if above softkey does not is displayed. If the left side softkey is hit in state of above softkey displaying MANUAL GUIDE function finishes and QUICK screen is displayed. (1) Tool Change to T1

529

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Edit Menu is displayed on softkey. Hit [TOOL] softkey.

TOOL SET window is displayed. Set data. (TOOL NO. T=1 CUTTER OFFSET NO. D=11 LENGTH OFFSET NO. H=1) After set data, hit <INSERT> key. Edited data is stored to memory.

G301 command includes G80 (Cancel of canned cycle), G40 (Cancel of cutter compensation), G49 (Cancel of tool length compensation), M05 (Spindle stop) and M09 (Coolant stop).

When [DETAIL]softkey is hit, setting item of Next Tool No. is displayed. But this item does not use on ROBODRILL.

530

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

After set data, hit <INPUT> key. If <INPUT key> does not be hit, this data does not decide and not stored to memory. If [RETURN] softkey is hit instead of <INSERT> key after data inputted, edited data does not be stored to memory. Put on cursor to on line then hit <ALTER> key, If you want to modify the data. Data input Window is displayed. If cursor is on to one line and <DELETE> key is hit, one line is deleted. (2) Modal Command Hit [INIT] softkey.

INITIAL SET window is displayed. Set data. (WORK COORD. W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT)

531

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Hit [DETAIL] softkey. Set data. (ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNIT M=NO OUT)

Hit [RETURN] softkey, then DETAIL SET window is closed. Hit <INSERT> key.

Hit [MSF] softkey.

532

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

MSF CODE window is displayed. Set data. (M CODE M=8) Hit <INSERT> key.

Next, you have to command spindle rotation (M03 S3000). Using MSF code window, you can input data. The another way, it is possible to store command to memory directly. This operation is as follows, Put on cursor to one line, then hit <ABC...Z> key. Softkey function is switched to alphabet mode. Input (M3 S3000;), then hit <INSERT> key.

533

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Inputted NC command is stored to memory.

(3) Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point Hit [COMP] softkey.

COMPENSATION window is displayed. Set data. (LENGTH COMP. G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINT X X=0.000 END POINT Y Y=0.000 END POINT Z Z=5.000)

534

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Hit <INSERT> key.

CUTTER COMP. and CUTTER OFFSET NO. is no set. Because next process (Hole machining, Facing, Side Cutting, Pocketing) does not use Cutter compensation function. But Dcode (Tool Radius data) needs for tool path calculation and anime graphic. Dcode does not command on this window, because already Dcode is commanded on Tool Set window. And you dont have to command Hcode too. Hit <CANCEL> > <INPUT> key, if you want to cancel (empty) the inputted data on data input window. (4) Facing Hit [CYCLE] softkey.

Cycle Menu is displayed on softkey. Hit [FACE] softkey.

535

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Facing Menu is displayed on softkey. Hit [SQUARE] softkey.

SQUARE FACE window is displayed. Set data.

(MACH. PROCESS P=ROUGH END POINT Z=5.000 REMOVAL DEPTH B=5.000 REMOVAL STEP J=5.000 FINISHING ALW. H=0.000 CUTTING WIDTH(%) C=70.000 FEED RATE F=500 CENTER POINT X=0.000 CENTER POINT Y Y=0.000 ULENGTH U=120.000 VLENGTH V=80.000)

536

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Hit <INSERT> key.

(5) Tool Change to T2 Set data in the same way 1). TOOL SET window : (TOOL NO. T=2 CUTTER OFFSET NO. D=12 LENGTH OFFSET NO. H=2) (6) Modal Command Set data in the same way 2). INITIAL SET window : (WORK COORD. W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT) INITIAL SET (DETAIL) window : (ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNIT M=NO OUT) MSF CODE window : (M CODE M=8) MSF CODE window : (M CODE M=3 SPINDLE SPEED S=5000) (7) Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point Set data in the same way 3). (LENGTH COMP. G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINT X X=0.000 END POINT Y Y=0.000 END POINT Z Z=5.000) (8) Hole Machining Hit [CYCLE] softkey.

Cycle Menu is displayed on softkey. Hit [HOLE] softkey.

537

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Drilling menu is displayed on softkey. Hit [DRILL] softkey.

DRILLING CYCLE window is displayed. Set data. (MACHINE PATTERN G=NO DWL Z POINT Z=25.000 R POINT R=2.000 FEED RATE F=500) Hit <INSERT> key.

Hole Pattern Menu is displayed on softkey.

538

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Hit [SQUARE] softkey.

SQUARE window is displayed. Set data. (START POINT X X=55.000 START POINT Y Y=35.000 ULENGTH U=110.000 VLENGTH V=70.000 UNUMBER I=3 VNUMBER J=3 PATTERN CONT. Q=END) Hit <INSERT> key.

539

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

It is possible to input expression and calculate (+,,*,/, sin, cos, tan, square root and etc) on data input window.

Input expression, then hit <INPUT>key.

Calculated data is displayed. Hit <INPUT>key again.

Calculated data is set.

540

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

(9) Tool Change to T3 Set data in the same way 1). TOOL SET window : (TOOL NO. T=3 CUTTER OFFSET NO. D=13 LENGTH OFFSET NO. H=3) You have to set Dcode for anime graphic in case of Hole Machining yet. (10)Modal Command Set data in the same way 2). INITIAL SET window : (WORK COORD. W=G54 WORK SHAPE P=NO OUT) INITIAL SET (DETAIL) window : (ABS/INC A=G90 PLANE SELECTION S=XYPLN INPUT UNIT M=NO OUT) MSF CODE window : (M CODE M=8) MSF CODE window : (M CODE M=3 SPINDLE SPEED S=1200) (11)Rapid traverse to Common Safety Z Point Set data in the same way 3). (LENGTH COMP. G=G43 RAPID/CUT G=RAPID END POINT X X=0.000 END POINT Y Y=0.000 END POINT Z Z=5.000) (12)Pocketing Hit [CYCLE] softkey.

Cycle Menu is displayed on softkey. Hit [POCKET] softkey.

Pocket Menu is displayed on softkey. Hit [CONTR] softkey.

541

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

CONTOUR POCKET window is displayed. Set data. (MACH. PROCESS P=ROUGH END POINT Z Z=15.000 REMOVAL DEPTH B=10.000 REMOVAL STEP J=5.000 Z FINISH AMOUNT H=0.000 SIDE FINISH AMOUNT D=0.000 CUTTING WIDTH(%) C=70.000 FEED RATE F=250 ZCUT FEED RATE E=100) Hit <INSERT> key.

542

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

1. Instructing the start point Display of softkey is changed to contour menu. Hit [START] softkey.

START POINT window is displayed. Set data. (START POINT X X=0.000 START POINT Y Y=30.000 START POINT TYPE E=START) Hit <INSERT> key.

Created contour figure is displayed on Graphic window.

543

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

2. Instructing the clockwise arc figure Hit [CW] softkey.

ARC CW window is displayed. Set data. (RADIUS E=30.000 CENTER POINT X V=0.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

544

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

3. Instructing the tangent line figure This line is tangent to above clockwise arc. In this case, hit [TANGNT] softkey, then hit [LINE] softkey.

LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=LUP) Hit <INSERT> key. Cross point is calculated and set automatically, when TANGENT is commanded.

545

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

4. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure Hit [TANGNT]softkey, then hit [CW]softkey. ARC CW window is displayed. Set data. (RADIUS E=15.000 CENTER POINT X V=35.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

Contour figure is displayed by full line on Graphic window, when end point of figure block is decided. 5. Instructing the tangent line figure Hit [TANGNT] softkey, then hit [LINE]softkey. LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=RUP) Hit <INSERT> key.

546

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

6. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure Hit [TANGNT] softkey, then hit [CW] softkey. ARC CW window is displayed. Set data. (RADIUS E=30.000 CENTER POINT X V=0.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

7. Instructing the tangent line figure Hit [TANGNT] softkey, then hit [LINE]softkey. LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=RDOWN) Hit <INSERT> key.

547

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

8. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure Hit [TANGNT] softkey, then hit [CW] softkey. ARC CW window is displayed. Set Data. (RADIUS E=15.000 CENTER POINT X V=35.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

9. Instructing the tangent line figure Hit [TANGNT] softkey, then hit [LINE] softkey. LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=LDOWN) Hit <INSERT> key.

548

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

10. Instructing the tangent clockwise arc figure Hit [TANGNT] softkey, then hit [CW] softkey. ARC CW window is displayed. Set data. (RADIUS E=30.000 CENTER POINT X V=0.000 CENTER POINT Y W=0.000 END POINT X M=0.000 END POINT Y N=30.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

11. Instructing the end of figure and instructing the island figure Hit [END] softkey.

END window is displayed. Select CONT, because Island figure will instruct on next process. (CONTINUE P=CONT)
549

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Hit <INSERT> key.

12. Instructing the start point of island figure Hit [START] softkey.

START POINT window is displayed. Set data. (START POINT X X=0.000 START POINT Y Y=10.000 START POINT TYPE E=ISLAND ISLAND Z COORD. Z=5.000)

550

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Hit <INSERT> key. 13. Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE] softkey.

LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=LEFT END POINT X M=15.000 END POINT Y N=10.000)

551

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Hit <INSERT> key.

14. Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE] softkey. LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=UP END POINT X M=15.000 END POINT Y N=10.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

552

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

15. Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE] softkey. LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=RIGHT END POINT X M=15.000 END POINT Y N=10.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

16. Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE] softkey. LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=DOWN END POINT X M=15.000 END POINT Y N=10.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

553

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

17. Instructing the line figure Hit [LINE]softkey. LINE window is displayed. Set data. (DIRECTION B=LEFT END POINT X M=0.000 END POINT Y N=10.000) Hit <INSERT> key.

18. Instructing the end of figure Hit [END] softkey.

554

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

END window is displayed. Set data. (CONTINUE P=END) Hit <INSERT> key.

(13)Process End Hit [MSF] softkey.

MSF CODE window is displayed. Set data. (M CODE M=30)

555

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Hit <INSERT>key.

556

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

36.3.6 Program Check (Graphic)

Hit <AUTO> key. Menu of softkey is changed.

Hit [CHECK] softkey. (PATH GRAPHIC)

Menu of Tool path graphic is displayed on softkey. Hit [PARAM] softkey.

PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER window is displayed. Set data. (AXES = XYZ) After set data, hit [END] softkey. Hit [EXEC] softkey. Tool path is drawn.

557

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Graphic window is displayed by fullsize, if [FUL ON] softkey is hit. It is possible to see the big size of tool path figure.

If alarm occurs in drawing, hit <ALARM/STATUS> key and check alarm message. (ANIME GRAPHIC)

Hit [ANIME] softkey.

558

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Menu for anime graphic is displayed on softkey. softkey.

Hit [PARAM]

ANIME GRAPHIC PARAMETER window is displayed. Set data. (BLANK FORM = CUBE BLANK POSITION X=60.000 Y=40.000 Z=25.000 BLANK DIMENSION I=120.000 J=80.000 K=25.000) After set data, hit [END] softkey. Hit [EXEC]softkey. Anime graphic is operated.

(In case of Full Size OFF)

559

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(In case of Full Size ON)

Hit [RETURN] softkey. Graphic function is finished.

36.3.7 Convert to NC Format

Hit <AUTO> key. Menu of softkey is changed.

Hit the right side softkey.

Hit [LIST] softkey.

560

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

PROGRAM DIRECTORY window is displayed. softkey.

Hit [CNV NC]

Input converted NC program No. (2001) Hit [SELECT] softkey.

561

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Hit [EXEC] softkey. Covert to NC format and Tool path graphic is started. After converted, hit [RETURN] softkey.

OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window is displayed, if [ON/OFF] softkey is hit

Close the Alarm / Diagnose window (The window which is displayed by <ALARM/STATUS> key), when you want to display OUTPUT NC STATEMENTS window.

562

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

36.3.8 Editing Function

(Move or Copy of part program) Hit <EDIT> key. Hit the right side softkey. Menu of softkey is changed. Put on cursor to start point of move or copy by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.

Hit [MOVE] or [COPY] softkey.

Select move or copy area by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. After selected, hit[DECIDE] softkey.

563

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Move the cursor to insert position by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.

After moved cursor, hit [EXEC] softkey. Move or copy area is inserted to the next line which is put on cursor.

Move or Copy is completed. (Delete of part program)

564

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Hit <EDIT> key. Hit the right side softkey. Menu of softkey is changed. Put on cursor to start point of delete by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.

Hit [DELETE] softkey.

Select the delete area by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. After selected, hit [DECIDE] softkey.]

565

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Check the area which is deleted, then hit [EXEC] softkey.

Selected area is deleted.

566

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

(Alteration of part program) Hit <EDIT> key. Hit the right side softkey. Menu of softkey is changed. Put on cursor to part program which you want to alter by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key.

Hit [ALTER] softkey.

Data Input Window is displayed. After changed data, hit <INSERT> key. Alternation is completed. It is possible to use <ALTER> key instead of [ALTER] softkey.

567

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

36.3.9 Copy and Deleting of NC Program

Hit <EDIT> or AUTO> key. Hit the right side softkey. Menu of softkey is changed. Hit [LIST] softkey. (COPY)

Put on cursor to Program number which you want to copy by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. Hit [COPY] softkey.

568

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Input new NC program No. (3000) Hit [EXEC] softkey.

Copy of NC program is completed. (DELETE) Put on cursor to Program number which you want to delete by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key. Hit [DELETE] softkey.

569

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Check the NC program No. which is deleted. Hit [EXEC] softkey.

Selected NC program is deleted. At Edit mode, current program number is changed after NC program was deleted. Take care. At Auto mode, current program number is no changed.

570

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

36.3.10 Auto and MDI Operation

(AUTO OPERATION) Hit <AUTO> key.

Input NC program number (2000) then hit [O SRH] softkey, if you know the NC program number.

Specified NC program is selected.

571

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Hit the right side softkey then hit [LIST] softkey, if you want to search Program number.

Put on cursor to Program number by <UP CURSOR> key and <DOWN CURSOR> key, then hit [SELECT] softkey.

Specified NC program is selected. Hit <START> button. Cursor moves to the top of NC program, if [REWIND] softkey is hit.

572

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

(MDI OPERATION) Hit <MENU> key.

Input command (G91 G28 ZO ;) then hit <INSERT> key.

MDI command is stored to memory. Hit <START> button. MDI operation is started. After MDI operation finished, MDI command is cleared.

573

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

36.3.11
Back Ground Editing

It is possible to edit NC Program in operation.

Hit [BGEDIT] softkey.

NC Program directory window is displayed.

574

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Put on cursor to Program number or key in Program number (3000), then hit [SELECT] softkey.

Program is selected. It is possible to edit NC program like normal mode. After edited, hit [RETURN] softkey.

575

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

36.3.12
Measurement Cycle Function (Option)

36.3.12.1
Preparation

Set the following NC parameters: Bit 0 of parameter No. 9110 = 1 : Enables user window display on the edit screen. Bit 1 of parameter No. 9110 = 1 : Enables user window display on the operation screen. Display the manual guide screen. Select the [EDIT] soft key.

Select the [USRWIN] soft key.

The CALIBRATION CYCLE DATA SET window appears. Set each data item.

PROBE LENGTH: Length from the gage surface of the spindle taper to the end of the stylus STYLUS BALL DIAMETER FOR X/Y AXIS: Diameter of the ball at the end of the stylus STYLUS BALL OFFSET FOR X/Y AXIS: Amount of compensation for the difference between the stylus center position and the spindle center position MEASURING FEEDRATE OF 1ST (f): Feedrate at which the stylus moves to touch the measurement surface at the first measurement
576

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

APPROACH DISTANCE OF 1SWT (): Distance in mm between the stylus and measurement surface after the stylus approaches at the first measurement ESCAPING DISTANCE OF 1ST (): Distance in mm the stylus retracts after the first measurement (= approach distance at the second measurement) MEASURING OVERLAP DISTANCE (): Distance in mm the stylus moves from the measurement surface APPROACH FEEDRATE TO START PT (fa): Feedrate at which movement is made to the measurement start point ESCAPE DISTANCE OF 2ND (): Distance in mm the stylus retracts after the second measurement
First measurement MeasurementMeasurement surface start point Second measurement Measurement Measurement surface start point

fa

F: Feedrate specified in each measurement menu item

The values set in PROBE LENGTH, STYLUS BALL DIAMETER FOR X/Y AXIS, and STYLUS BALL OFFSET FOR X/Y AXIS can also be measured using a calibration cycle. To do this, prepare a ring gage. For details, refer to Manual Guide Operators Guide for Milling.

36.3.12.2
Creating a Program

Before specifying a measurement cycle G code, you need to specify the following three commands: D Command for turning on the probe D Command for moving the probe to the measurement start position D Command for disabling advanced preview control (The skip function G31 must be specified with advanced preview control disabled.) After the measurement cycle ends, you need to specify the following two commands: D Command for enabling advanced preview control D Command for turning off the probe (to save the battery in the probe)

577

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

(Sample program) 00002 (MEASUREMENT TEST) G301 T14 ; Mount probe (tool change) M17 ; Turn on probe G300 W1. P3. A1. S1. M3 ; Specify modal information G60 G0 X0 Y0 Z100. ; Move probe to measurement start position G08 P0 ; Disable advanced preview control G180 A1. VO D10. F100. W1. ; Measurement cycle G08 P1 ; Enable advanced preview control M18 ; Turn off probe M02 ; End M codes used for turning the probe on and off may vary from the M codes shown in the above program, so check the M codes before using them. The above M codes are used for the touch probe control function provided as a standard function of the ROBODRILL. Generate commands for turning on the probe, moving the probe to the measurement start position, and disabling advanced preview control. Then, select the [CYCLE] soft key.

Select the [MEASUR] soft key.

578

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

The soft key display field shows a measurement menu. Select the soft key of the menu item to be used. Selecting the rightmost soft key [+] displays the next menu page.

For example, lets select [FACE].

Select the workpiece end face (the X, Y, or Zaxis) to be measured. WORK COORD. VALUE (V): Set the workpiece coordinate value of the measurement position. DISTANCE FOR MOVE (D): Distance of movement from the measurement start position to the end face to be measured FEEDRATE FOR MOVE (F): Feedrate of movement at measurement (second) WORK COORD. SYSTEM (W): The measurement position is set in a specified workpiece coordinate system. (Can be omitted)

MEASURE POSITION (A):

579

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Enter data, then press the <insert> key.

Add the command for enabling advanced preview control and the command for turning off the probe to complete the program.

580

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

The measurement cycle for X/Y/Z end face measurement operates as follows: <1> The probe approaches the workpiece from the measurement start point over the distance [DISTANCE FOR MOVE (D) + MEASURING OVERLAP DISTANCE () stylus radius] at MEASURING FEEDRATE OF 1ST (f).
Measurement surface

Measurement start point

f D
Measurement surface Rapid traverse

<2>

When the probe has touched the workpiece, it retracts over the distance ESCAPING DISTANCE OF 1ST () at the rapid traverse rate.

<3> The probe again approaches the workpiece over the distance [ESCAPING DISTANCE OF 1ST () + MEASURING OVERLAP DISTANCE ()] at FEEDRATE FOR MOVE (F).
Measurement surface Rapid traverse

<4> When the probe has touched the workpiece, the probe retracts over the distance ESCAPE DISTANCE OF 2ND () at the rapid traverse rate.
Measurement surface

Rapid traverse

The operation varies depending on the measurement menu item selected. For details, refer to Manual Guide Operators Guide for Milling.

581

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

The measurement cycle menu items shown below are provided. For details, refer to Manual Guide Operators Guide for Milling. [MEASUREMENT OF X/Y/Z SINGLE SURFACE] Measurement result Measurement value of the end face (machine coordinate system) Measurement value of the end face (workpiece coordinate system)

[MEASUREMENT OF WEB WIDTH] Measurement results Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Xaxis (machine coordinate system) Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Yaxis (machine coordinate system) Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Xaxis (workpiece coordinate system) Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Yaxis (workpiece coordinate system) Protrusion width [MEASUREMENT OF GROOVE WIDTH] Measurement results Center coordinate value of the groove along the Xaxis (machine coordinate system) Center coordinate value of the groove along the Yaxis (machine coordinate system) Center coordinate value of the groove along the Xaxis (workpiece coordinate system) Center coordinate value of the groove along the Yaxis (workpiece coordinate system) Groove width

582

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

[MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE CIRCLE] Measurement results X coordinate value of the circle center (machine coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the circle center (machine coordinate system) X coordinate value of the circle center (workpiece coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the circle center (workpiece coordinate system) Radius of the circle [MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE CIRCLE] Measurement results X coordinate value of the circle center (machine coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the circle center (machine coordinate system) X coordinate value of the circle center (workpiece coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the circle center (workpiece coordinate system) Radius of the circle [MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE RECTANGULAR] Measurement results X coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (machine coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (machine coordinate system) X coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (workpiece coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (workpiece coordinate system) Xaxis length of the rectangle Yaxis length of the rectangle

583

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

[MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE RECTANGULAR] Measurement results X coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (machine coordinate system Y coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (machine coordinate system) X coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (workpiece coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the center of the rectangle (workpiece coordinate system) Xaxis length of the rectangle Yaxis length of the rectangle [MEASUREMENT OF OUTSIDE CORNER] Measurement results X coordinate value of the corner (machine coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the corner (machine coordinate system) X coordinate value of the corner (workpiece coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the corner (workpiece coordinate system) [MEASUREMENT OF INSIDE CORNER] Measurement results X coordinate value of the corner (machine coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the corner (machine coordinate system) X coordinate value of the corner (workpiece coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the corner (workpiece coordinate system)

584

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

[MEASUREMENT OF BOLTHOLE CIRCLE] Measurement results X coordinate value of the center of the bolthole circle (machine coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the center of the bolthole circle (machine coordinate system) X coordinate value of the center of the bolthole circle (workpiece coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the center of the bolthole circle (workpiece coordinate system) Radius of the bolthole circle [MEASUREMENT OF 4 HOLES CENTER] Measurement results X coordinate value of the center of the four holes (machine coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the center of the four holes (machine coordinate system) X coordinate value of the center of the four holes (workpiece coordinate system) Y coordinate value of the center of the four holes (workpiece coordinate system) [MEASUREMENT OF WORK PIECE ANGLE] Measurement result Angle between the workpiece and Xaxis

[MEASUREMENT OF 2 HOLES ANGLE] Measurement result Angle between the Xaxis and the straight line passing through the two holes

585

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

36.3.12.3
Measurement Cycle Operation

In the same way that you execute a machining program, change the operation mode to the automatic (memory) operation mode and press the start button on the operators panel. Measurement results can be checked on the measurement result window of the measurement cycle. Select the [USRWIN] soft key, then select the [RESULT] soft key.

36.3.12.4
Drawing Function and NC Statement Conversion Function
Measurement cycles (G180 to G192) cannot be used with the drawing function and NC statement conversion function. These G codes are ignored.

36.3.12.5
Output of Measurement Results to Custom Macro Variables

Data measured by each measurement cycle can be output to custom macro variables. Set the following NC parameter: Parameter No. 9200 : Starting number of the custom macro variables to which the measurement results of measurement cycles are to be output Six consecutive custom macro variables starting with the variable having the specified number are used as the custom macro variables dedicated to measurement result output. When setting a number, make sure that six consecutive custom macro variables can be acquired by that number. (Example: When a measurement of protrusion width (MEASUREMENT OF WEB WIDTH) (G181) is made with parameter No. 9200 set to 500) Custom macro variable #500 : Center coordinate protrusion along the coordinate system) : Center coordinate protrusion along the coordinate system) value of the Xaxis (machine value of the Yaxis (machine

Custom macro variable #501

Custom macro variable #502

Custom macro variable #503

: Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Xaxis (workpiece coordinate system) : Center coordinate value of the protrusion along the Yaxis (workpiece coordinate system)

Custom macro variable #504 : Protrusion width When a measurement cycle is executed following the above measurement, the previously output measurement results are overwritten. When using more than one measurement cycle within the same program, copy measurement results to other custom macro variables after a measurement cycle is executed.
586

B85014EN/01

DETAILED OPERATIONS

36. MANUAL GUIDE

Example: : G180****** ; Measurement of X/Y/Z end face #600 = #500 ; Copy end face measurement value (machine coordinate system) to #600 #601 = #501 ; Copy end face measurement value (workpiece coordinate system) to #601 G181****** ; Measurement of protrusion width #602 = #500 ; Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along Xaxis (machine coordinate system) to #602 #603 = #501 ; Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along Yaxis (machine coordinate system) to #603 #604 = #502 ; Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along Xaxis (workpiece coordinate system) to #604 #605 = #503 ; Copy center coordinate value of protrusion along Yaxis (workpiece coordinate system) to #605 #605 = #504 ; Copy protrusion width to #606 : : (Example: Measurement menu items and measurement results when parameter No. 9200 is set to 500)
Menu X/Y/Z end face (G180) Protrusion width (G181) #500 End face coordinate value (M) Center coordinate value of protrusion along Xaxis (M) Center coordinate value of groove along Xaxis (M) X coordinate value of circle center (M) X coordinate value of circle center (M) X coordinate value of center of rectangle (M) X coordinate value of center of rectangle (M) #501 End face coordinate value (W) Center coordinate value of protrusion along Yaxis (M) Center coordinate value of groove along Yaxis (M) Y coordinate value of circle center (M) Y coordinate value of circle center (M) Y coordinate value of center of rectangle (M) Y coordinate value of center of rectangle (M) Center coordinate value of protrusion along Xaxis (W) Center coordinate value of groove along Xaxis (W) X coordinate value of circle center (W) X coordinate value of circle center (W) X coordinate value of center of rectangle (W) X coordinate value of center of rectangle (W) Center coordinate value of protrusion along Yaxis (W) Center coordinate value of groove along Yaxis (W) Y coordinate value of circle center (W) Y coordinate value of circle center (W) Y coordinate value of center of rectangle (W) Y coordinate value of center of rectangle (W) Protrusion width #502 #503 #504 #505

Groove width (G182)

Groove width

Outside circle (G183)

Radius of circle

Inside circle (G184)

Radius of circle

Outside rectangle (G185) Inside rectangle (G186)

Xaxis length of rectangle

Yaxis length of rectangle

Xaxis length of rectangle

Yaxis length of rectangle

587

36. MANUAL GUIDE

DETAILED OPERATIONS

B85014EN/01

Menu Outside corner (G187) Inside corner (G188)

#500 X coordinate value of corner (M) X coordinate value of corner (M)

#501 Y coordinate value of corner (M) Y coordinate value of corner (M) Y coordinate value of center of bolthole circle (M) Y coordinate value of center of four holes (M)

#502 X coordinate value of corner (W) X coordinate value of corner (W) X coordinate value of center of bolthole circle (W) X coordinate value of center of four holes (W)

#503 Y coordinate value of corner (W) Y coordinate value of corner (W) Y coordinate value of center of bolthole circle (W) Y coordinate value of center of four holes (W)

#504

#505

Bolthole circle X coordinate (G189) value of center of bolthole circle (M) 4 holes (G190) X coordinate value of center of four holes (M) Angle between workpiece and Xaxis Angle between Xaxis and straight line passing through two holes

Radius of bolt hole circle

Workpiece angle (G191) 2hole angle (G192)

(M) : Machine coordinates

(W) : Workpiece coordinates

588

V. MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE

DAILY MAINTENANCE

591

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

1.1
DAILY CHECKUP 1.1.1
Cleaning
Before turning on the power to the machine, clean the machine as follows. D Remove cut scraps from the area surrounding the spindle, in particular, the keys and gear. D Wipe the tapered portions of the tool arbors installed in the turret clean. Remove cut scraps from the grips. D Spray oil (CRC556 or equivalent) on the top of the table and the telescopic covers. D Wipe the entire operators panel with a soft cloth. If possible, soak the cloth with neutral detergent.

1.1.2
Replenishing the Tank with Coolant

The coolant gradually decreases if it is used. If the coolant is water soluble, a considerable amount decreases each day because the water in the coolant evaporates. When starting work, be sure to check the amount of the coolant in the tank. If the tank is short of the coolant, replenish the tank with new coolant or supply water to the tank. An indicator for checking the amount of the coolant is located on the side of the machine next to the pump on the tank. Replenish the tank with the coolant so that the value indicated by the indicator does not exceed H. Use the cut scrap receiver when pouring additional coolant or water in the tank.

Fig.1.1.2 Daily Maintenance (1)

592

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE

1.1.3
Inspecting Cutters

Check whether the tools set in the turret correspond correctly to the tool numbers marked on the turret, whether the tools are broken, and whether the tools are entwined with cut scraps. Respecify the offset amount and replace the tool that is worn out with a new one as required.

1.1.4
Inspecting Each Section

Before turning on the power, check again whether something is wrong with the machine according to the following check items: D D D D D D Are the telescopic covers damaged? Is there any foreign matter on the table or telescopic covers? Are the tools firmly mounted on the turret? Is the jig firmly secured to the table? Have cut scraps collected inside the machine? Does the coolant tank contain enough coolant?

593

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

1.2
WORK AT CLOSING TIME 1.2.1
Removing Cut Scraps
If cut scraps are left in the machine, the mechanical section will be damaged because the cut scraps gather in the mechanical section. To prevent this, be sure to remove the cut scraps in the machine everyday at closing time according to the following procedure. Before removing them, however, turn off the power to the machine for safety. (1) Sweep away the cut scraps off the turret and the area surrounding the spindle. NOTE Remove metal chips and other extraneous materials from the cooling air vents (both intake and exhaust) of the spindle motor to secure air flow, using a brush.

Fig.1.2.1 (a) Daily Maintenance (2)

594

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE

(2) Remove the cut scraps from the Zaxis cover and the surrounding area.

Fig.1.2.1 (b) Daily Maintenance (3)

(3) Brush the chips off the turret cum (groove). (Right side of the head of the spindle. See (10), Section 2.1, IV.) (4) Sweep away the other cut scraps. (5) Sweep away the cut scraps on the table. (6) Sweep away the cut scraps on the Xaxis telescopic cover. (7) Sweep away the cut scraps on the Yaxis telescopic cover to the right and left. (8) Remove the cut scraps that have collected under the Yaxis telescopic cover (at the front).

Fig.1.2.1 (c) Daily Maintenance (4)

(9) Sweep away the cut scraps along the slope of the head groove. (10)If the machine is equipped with the coolant unit, sweep away the cut scraps into the cut scrap receiver.
595

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

NOTE If the turret cum is left with chips on it, the turret mechanical unit may be damaged.

1.2.2
Cleaning

After turning off the power, clean the machine in the same way as for starting work.

1.2.3
Inspecting Each Section

Inspect each section of the machine in the same way as for starting work.

596

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE

1.2.4
Spindle Runin (for 15000min1 Specification)

Immediately after a machine is installed, when the spindle has not been rotated for about one week or longer, or when a spindle unit component (such as the shaft and motor) has been replaced, the spindle must be run in. % O1001(SP RUNNING) #100=0 N1M3S7500 G4X30. M5 G4X90. #100=#100+1 G4X0.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO1 #100=0 N2M3S15000 G4X15. M5 G4X105. #100=#100+1 G4X0.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO2 #100=0 N3M3S15000 G4X30. M5 G4X90. #100=#100+1 G4X0.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO3 #100=0 N4M3S15000 G4X45. M5 G4X75. #100=#100+1 G4X0.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO4 #100=0 N5M3S15000 G4X60. M5 G4X60. #100=#100+1 G4X0.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO5

597

1. DAILY MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

#100=0 N6M3S15000 G4X75. M5 G4X45. #100=#100+1 G4X0.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO6 #100=0 N7M3S15000 G4X90. M5 G4X30. #100=#100+1 G4X0.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO7 #100=0 N8M3S15000 G4X105. M5 G4X15. #100=#100+1 G4X0.1 IF[#100 LE 5]GOTO8 N10M3S15000 G4X3600. M5 M02 % The calculated life under the use of the highspeed spindle (15,000 min1) is 12,600 hours in continuous 15,000 min1 operation. However, the life varies with the usage condition. If an unusual sound, vibration, or a too high temperature is detected, contact the nearest FANUC technical center.

598

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

Only the maintenance engineer is allowed to carry out periodic maintenance.

The term maintenance engineer here refers to a person who has sufficient knowledge about machinery and electricity to carry out maintenance, and an appropriate certification from the organization to which he or she belongs or from an applicable qualified organization. The periodic maintenance of the machine involves removing a fixed cover using a tool, and working with controller doors open. This job is dangerous to ordinary operators. Any operator is not allowed to carry out periodic maintenance.
Keep the power to the machine shut off during maintenance.

Keep the power to the machine shut off during maintenance. When you are finished with maintenance, make sure that all removed parts (including every screw) are attached to the locations where they were. Before starting to work with any Controller cabinet door open, shut off the power at the main circuit breaker.
Before opening an Controller cabinet door, for example, for exchanging a fuse or battery, be sure to shut off the power at the main circuit breaker.

There may remain voltages at components in the Controller cabinet even after the power is shut off at the main circuit breaker. Such voltages are still dangerous. Be careful not to touch any metal part recklessly.
When a cable is disconnected, do not switch on the power to the machine.

To avoid shock hazards, do not switch on the power with a cable disconnected.
For work at a high elevation, use a secure scaffold.

When working with that part of the machine which is higher than your eye level, be sure to use a step. If you clamber up the machine or get on an object not intended for use as a step (such as chair or desk), you may lose balance, resulting in an accident.
Cautions for maintenance parts replacement

599

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

Maintenance parts replacement shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the applicable maintenance manual. If a part is attached incorrectly, it may damage the machine. After parts replacement, make sure that all components (including every screw) removed for maintenance purposes are attached to the locations where they were.
Be sure to carry out periodic maintenance to maintain safe operation.)

To maintain the normal state of the machine, carry out the following periodic maintenance: D Apply grease to the gear at the end of the spindle, and the turret gear every 200 hours of operation. D Apply grease to the LM guide block every 1,000 hours of operation. D Apply grease to the ball screw every 1,000 hours of operation. D Lubricate grease to the turret LM guide every 2000 hours of operation. D Replace the disk springs every 1,000,000 times of tool exchange. D Replenish the centralized lubrication unit (option) with oil, when the remaining oil in the pump is low.

600

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

2.1
LUBRICATING EACH SECTION
NOTE Use a grease gun with a straighttype greasing rod (10 to 13 in dia.). The chuck type cannot be used.

Straighttype

Chucktype

Hosetype

2.1.1
Greasing

(1) X axis ball screw Lubricate grease to the X axis ball screw as described below. Move the table to the + or stroke end of the X axis and remove the cover on the side of the table. 1) Remove the X axis telescopic covers.

2) Move the X axis full stroke in the or + direction. Thinly apply the grease to the ball screw, and wipe off an excess of grease. (Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) )

601

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

3) At this time, clean the inside of the saddle. NOTE If shavings inside the saddle are left as they are, they may be a cause of failure. (2) Y axis ball screw Lubricate grease to the Y axis ball screw as described below. 1) Remove the Y axis telescopic cover.

2) Move the Y axis full stroke in the direction. thinly apply a grease to the ball screw, and wipe off a excess of grease. (Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) )

3) At this time, clean the inside of the bed. NOTE If shavings inside the bed are left as they are, they may be a cause of failure.

602

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

(3) Z axis Lubricate grease to the Z axis ball screw as described below. 1) Remove Zaxis roll cover.

2) Thinly apply a grease to the ball screw, and wipe off an excess of grease.

3) At this time, clean the inside of the slide cover. NOTE If shavings inside the Zaxis roll cover are left as they are, they may be a cause of failure.

603

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

(4) X axis LM guides Lubricate grease to the X axis LM guides as described below. 1) Remove the covers at the front and back of the table.
Table

Cover (front)

Cover (back)

2) Grease the four LM blocks for the Xaxis. Wipe off any excess grease.
Table

Lubricate by grease gun

(5) Y axis LM guides Grease the four LM blocks for the Yaxis under the saddle. Wipe off any excess grease.

Saddle

Lubricate by grease gun

Fig.(a) ROBODRILL -T14/21iCe

604

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

(b) ROBODRILL -T14/21iCLe

(c) ROBODRILL -T14/21iCSe

605

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

(6) Z axis LM guide Lubricate grease to the Z axis guide as described below. 1) Remove the cover from the turret support and the cover from the bottom of the spindle head.

2) Move the Z axis to the stroke end, lubricate grease to the LM guide by a grease gun, and wipe off an excess of grease. (Not necessary when concentrated lubrication unit (option) )

606

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

(7) Turret LM guide 1) Remove the TS cover. 2) Lubricate grease to the LM guide with a grease gun every 2000 hours of operation (Alvania No.2 is recommended). Wipe off the extra grease, if any.

(8) Greasing turret and spindle gears According to the following procedure, apply grease to the turret and spindle gear. 1) Apply grease to the spindle gear.

2) Remove the cover at the back of turret and apply grease to the turret gear.

607

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

3) Apply grease to the turret cam.

4) Upon completion of the application of grease, change tools to rotate the turret at least one round or more for complete lubrication.

608

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

2.1.2
Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling System

If the optional concentrated lubrication with intermittent oiling system is specified for the machine, the ball screws and LM guides of each axis are lubricated automatically and periodically. Greasing in 2.1.1 is therefore not required for these screws and guides. (However, the turret and spindle gears in (7) in V2.1.1 must be greased.) In concentrated lubrication, as soon as the power is turned on, the oil pump supplies lubricant to the ball screws and LM guides of each axis. Before the amount of lubricant in the oil tank reaches a low level, replenish the oil tank with a lubricant shown in the following table: NOTE Fine metal chips and other materials may accumulate on the saddle and bed. Remove the telescopic cover and clean them periodically.
Table 2.1.2 Recommended Brands of Lubrican Product Mulpus 68 Super Mulpus 68 UNIWAY 68 Mobil Vactra Oil No. 2 Tonna Oil T68 FEBIS K68 Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi Nippon Oil Co., Ltd. Nippon Oil Co., Ltd. Mobil Sekiyu K.K. Showa Shell Sekiyu K.K. Esso Sekiyu K.K.

NOTE 1 The tank has a 1.8 capacity. The feeding amount of the tank has been adjusted to 1.0 cc/15 minutes. 2 Before the machine is shipped, approx. 0.9 of lublicant (Mulpus 68) (only a little) has already been supplied to the tank for future leakage and feeding tests.

609

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

Earth terminal (M3)

Discharge port

Datum level

1.0 cc

0.8 cc

0.6 cc

Oiling port Manual handle Terminal unit (with cover) Label Packing

MAINTENANCE

Motor

Mounting hole 3M6 Label

Fig.2.1.2 (a) External Diagram and Adjustment of Oil Supply Amount, etc. Earth mark
0.4 cc 0.2 cc

610

B85014EN/01

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

Fig.2.1.2 (b) ROBODRILL aT14/21iCe

Fig.2.1.2 (c) ROBODRILL aT14/21iCLe

611

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

Fig.2.1.2 (d) ROBODRILL aT14/21iCSe

Fig.2.1.2 (e) Zaxis

612

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

2.1.3
Greasing and Oiling Interval

Replenish grease and oil at the intervals indicated on the plate on the machine. (Standard greasing)

613

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

(With concentrated piping for lubrication)

614

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

(With concentrated oiling system)

615

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

2.2
SPECIFIED BRANDS OF LUBRICANT 2.2.1
Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil)
FANUC recommends the lubricants listed below.
Brand ALVANIA GREASE NO. 1 ALVANIA GREASE NO. 2 MULTEMP LRL NO. 3 MOLY HD GREASE Sumiplex PS NO. 1 LGSP1 KYODO YUSHI SUMICO SUMICO SKF Manufacturer SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. K. Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL TURRET GEAR SPINDLE NOSE GEAR BALL SCREW (X, Y, Z) SPINDLE DISK SPRINGS TURRET MECHANISM INSIDE SPINDLE BEARING When exchanging Disk springs When overhauling Turret mechanism When exchanging Spindle bearings Timing of application At the time of maintenance

FANUC recommends the following grease if the machine is provided with the centralized greasing pipe (option).
Brand ALVANIA GREASE NO. 1 LUBER FS2 Manufacturer SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K. K. LUBER Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL (X, Y, Z) BALL SCREW (X, Y, Z) Timing of application At the time of maintenance

FANUC recommends the following oil for the centralized lubrication pipe (option).
Brand Super MULPUS 68 TETOLA OIL 68 Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi SHOWA SHELL SEKIYU K.K. Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL (X, Y, Z) BALL SCREW (X, Y, Z) Timing of application Replenish when the leavings in the pump becomes scarce.

FANUC recommends the rust inhibitors listed below.

Brand ANTIRUST P- 1000 ANTIRUST P- 3600 Manufacturer Nisseki Mitsubishi Component to be lubricated GUIDE RAIL (X, Y, Z) TAPERED PORTION OF THE SPINDLE TABLE SURFACE Timing of application At the time of packing, transportation, and storage.

616

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

2.3
MAINTENANCE OF AC SPINDLE MOTOR 2.3.1
Periodical Maintenance
The table below gives a summary of periodical maintenance.
Semiannuary maintenance (at least once a year) (1) Cleaning (Fan, air intake openings, and fan protection net) (2) Noise and vibration check

The maintenance period described above is applied to regular operation, and should be adjusted to meet actual operation conditions. (1) Cleaning Dirt on the fan, air intake opening, or fan protection net may cause the spindle motor to overheat. Periodically clean them to prevent the motor from overheating. Follow the procedure below to clean the spindle motor section: 1. Lower the Zaxis to a position around machine coordinate 250 mm in the manual mode with taking care not to make the tool interfere with any item such as the jig mounted on the table, then turn the power off. 2. Use the LOCK/UNLOCK key to open the front door. 3. Use an air gun to remove dirt from the fan, air intake openings, and fan protection net as much as possible. Then, wipe off dirt with rags and brushes.
Air gun Protection net Rags

Spindle motor

Spindle head Air gun Air intake openings

During cleaning, wear items to protect you from dirt and dust such as mask, protection goggles, and cap. (2) Noise and vibration check If there is an abnormality in a spindle motor bearing, abnormal noise or vibration may be produced. Check the noise and vibration when the spindle motor is running.

617

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

2.4
REPLACING EXPENDABLE PARTS

2.4.1
Battery Replacement Method

(1) Replacing the CNC memory backup battery (2) Replacing the absolute pulse coder battery Refer to Section 2.9 of the FS16i/18i/160i/180iMODEL A Maintenance Manual.

2.4.2
Fuse

If the small window of the fuse unit is white, the fuse has blown. Disconnect the fuse unit and replace the fuse unit with a new one.

2.4.3
Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit
Front door

The inside light unit is located on the back of the front door as shown in the figure below. Fluorescent lamp: FANUC specification A49L00010070#A
Cabinet lamp assembly

(1) Turn the power off. (2) Release the door lock and open the front door. (See Section 5.4 in III, Opening and Closing Doors when the Power Is Off.) (3) Remove the screws from the two holders, then remove the inside light unit from the holders. (4) Slide the cover, then take out the contents of the inside light unit from the glass tube. (5) Use a tool having a thin tip to disengage the part for fixing the fluorescent lamp as shown in the view from B. (6) Turn and pull out the old fluorescent lamp as shown in the view from C with the red button held down. (7) Push in and mount a new fluorescent lamp as shown in the view from D with the red button held down.
618

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

(8) Put the contents of the inside light unit back in the glass tube and mount the cover. (9) Mount the inside light unit on the two holders. NOTE Carefully replace the fluorescent lamp not to cut yourself with any metal sheet in the inside light unit. The life of a fluorescent lamp is about 10,000 hours. When the fluorescent lamp is burned out or begins blinking, replace it immediately.

619

2. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

Cabinet: A49L00010070#SLCE124

Cover

Glass tube

Fluorescent tube A49L00010070#A Terminal block

Holder

Screw Lamp unit

Button (color : red)

Tool with a thin tip

Flurescent tube

ARROW B

ARROW C

Fluorescent tube

ARROW D

Pay attention to this edge

620

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION

SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION

When the pulse coder connector of the servo motor is reconnected after disconnection, for example, the position of the origin will be lost, causing an alarm to be issued to request servo motor origin return. In such a case, servo motor origin return must be performed. (Here, manual origin return operation is generally referred to as origin restoration.) Origin restoration is based on the marks provided on the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis. (See the figure below.)

Zaxis

Xaxis

Yaxis

621

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

Follow the procedure below. (1) First, select handle mode. Next, turn the handle through one or more turns along a desired restoration axis (12 mm or more along the each axis). Then, turn the machine power off, then back on again. (2) Display QUICK screen, then MAINTENANCE/SETTING.

(3) Select MOTOR ORGN. Press 2, then the INPUT key. The following screen appears.

(4) Position the cursor to EXEC for the desired restoration axis by using cursor key or . The message SET HANDLE MODE, THEN TURN HANDLE ONE OR MORE TURNS ALONG RESTORATION AXIS ... is displayed. This operation can be skipped if it was performed as part of step (1).

622

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION

(5) Press the [EXEC] soft key. The following screen appears.

(6) Separate the diamond mark from the notch mark by at least 30 mm, according to guidance 1. This operation is not required if the two marks are already separated by 30 mm or more.

Z 30 mm
(7) Turn the handle in the negative () direction in handle mode until the diamond mark is aligned with the notch mark, then press the [EXEC] soft key, according to guidance 2.

Carefully move the tool along the X and Yaxes so that the rhombus mark is always between the two circles.

623

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

(8) On the displayed screen, press the [MODE CHANGE] soft key according to guidance 3. The message ORGN REST. MODE ON appears.

624

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

3. SERVO MOTOR ORIGIN RESTORATION

(9) Press the [ORIGIN REST.] soft key, according to guidance 4. This operation causes a very slight movement along the axis to establish the origin. Check that the two diamond marks are precisely aligned with each other after this operation. If the marks are not so aligned, the position of the origin may be displaced. In such a case, contact your local FANUC service center.
Correct origin position The rhombus mark is aligned with the right circle. Incorrect origin position The rhombus mark is not aligned with the right circle.

Xaxis

The rhombus mark is aligned with the left circle.

The rhombus mark is not aligned with the left circle.

Yaxis

The rhombus mark is aligned with the upper circle.

The rhombus mark is not aligned with the upper circle.

Zaxis

(10)Display the alarm screen by pressing the RESET button, then check that the origin return request alarm for the origin restoration axis has been cleared. To perform origin restoration for another axis, repeat the above procedure.

625

4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION

The ROBODRILL features a turret restoration function, which enables the automatic restoration of the normal state if a tool change operation should be interrupted or upon the issue of an alarm during or after tool change. If a problem related to tool replacement occurs, you can use this function to restore the system to the normal status in most cases. You can also perform operations according to the instructions displayed on the screen to complete restoration easily. Follow the procedure below. (1) Display QUICK screen, then MAINTENANCE/SETTING.

(2) Select TURRET REST. Press 1, then the INPUT keys in this order. The following screen appears.

626

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION

(3) Press the [MODE CHANGE] soft key, according to guidance 1. The following screen appears. To help ensure successful restoration, the mode is fixed after this point, thus disabling any unnecessary operations. (The only way to stop restoration is to turn off the power.)

(4) Clear any alarm by pressing the emergency stop button, according to guidance 2. (The alarm is released.) (5) After checking that the program number displayed at the top of the screen is O9040, press the cycle start button, according to guidance 3. Then, restoration starts. If any unusual sound is heard, stop the operation immediately. Upon the completion of restoration, the following screen appears.

627

4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

(6) Check and enter the selected tool number. When the tool number located at the bottom of the turret is 3, press 3, then the INPUT key. When a tool number is entered, the following screen appears.

(7) Turn the power off, then back on again, according to the message. If, however, the lowest side of the turret is not level, as shown below, when restoration is completed, a mechanical problem is involved. In such a case, contact your local FANUC service center.

Not level

Correct turret indexing

Incorrect turret indexing

628

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

4. AUTOMATIC TURRET RESTORATION

NOTE If the pull stud is broken, the broken pull stud will be left inside the spindle. This prevents an arbor from being clamped to the spindle. To enable restoration from the state where the pull stud is broken, first perform turret restoration without attaching an arbor. Next, check that the broken pull stud has dropped out of the spindle taper hole. Then, attach a tool to the turret and perform another turret restoration operation.

629

5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS

Factoryset data for various types of parameters is saved in nonvolatile memory. If parameter data is erased due to a problem such as the exhausted CNC battery, you can use the saved data to simply restore factoryset data. This is called the parameter reset function. You can also compare the saved parameter data with the parameter data currently set for the ROBODRILL and list the results. This is called the parameter check function. After changing parameter data, you can save it in nonvolatile memory. This is called the parameter registration function.

630

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS

5.1
BASIC OPERATION

(1) Display QUICK screen, then MAINTENANCE/SETTING.

(2) Select PARAMETER. Key in [3] and [INPUT]. The following screen appears. Press soft key [RESTORETION], [INSPECTION], or [STORE].

631

5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

5.2
RESETTING PARAMETERS

(1) Press the EMG STOP button. Position the cursor on data to be reset and press soft key [SELECT]. (CONVERSATIONAL DATA is displayed only when the quick conversational programming function incorporates SUPER C.A.P iM.)

(2) If you have registered your data, the following window appears. Position the cursor on FACTORYSET DATA to set factoryset data or on STORED PARAMETER to set the registered data, then press soft key [SELECT].

If you have not registered your data, this window does not appear. (The factoryset data is set.) (3) The following window appears. Press soft key [EXEC].

(4) When the following window appears, reset operation is complete. Turn the power off, then on again.

(5) Check that the parameter settings are the same as the values listed in the data sheet (parameters) supplied with the machine. Perform motor reference position return.

632

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS

5.3
CHECKING PARAMETERS

(1) Position the cursor on data to be checked and press soft key [SELECT].

(2) If you have registered your data, the following window appears. Position the cursor on the FACTORYSET DATA to compare the current data with the factoryset data or on the STORED PARAMETER to compare it with the registered data, then press soft key [SELECT].

If you have not registered your data, this window does not appear. (The current data is compared with the factoryset data.) (3) The following window appears. Press soft key [EXEC].

(4) When the check is complete with different data found, a window as shown below appears:

633

5. PARAMETER RESET, CHECK, AND REGISTRATION FUNCTIONS

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

5.4
REGISTERING PARAMETERS

(1) The following window appears. Press soft key [EXEC].

(2) When the following window appears, registration is complete.

When registration is complete, the screen changes as follows:

NOTE 1 Never turn the power off during data registration. The nonvolatile memory is damaged. 2 NC parameter, PMC parameter, and pitch error data can be registered. Setup data such as offset data and machining programs are not registered. 3 If the nonvolatile memory becomes faulty or is damaged, the registered data is erased. Backing up data such as parameter data using the Handy File or memory card is recommended to prepare for the worst. After changing parameters, write the changes in the data sheet supplied with the machine.

634

B85014EN/01

MAINTENANCE

6. RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION

RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION

If a tap bites into the workpiece and the machine stops due to an abnormality such as an operator error or power failure, the tap can be pulled out up to a position near point R. (1) Display QUICK SCREEN, then MAINTENANCE/SETTING.

(2) Select 4.RIGID TAPPING. Key in [4] and [INPUT]. The following screen appears. (The operation mode automatically changes to the MDI mode.)

Press the Z AXIS button on the operators panel. Rigid tapping return operation is executed.
635

6. RIGID TAPPING RETURN FUNCTION

MAINTENANCE

B85014EN/01

NOTE 1 When the Z AXIS button is released during return operation, the operation stops. To restart the operation, press the Z AXIS button again. 2 If rigid tapping stops at emergency stop or due to a power failure, the position of the spindle is lost. For this reason, after return operation, the relationship between the spindle and Zaxis positions is not guaranteed. 3 By rigid tapping return operation which stops at emergency stop or due to a power failure, then restarts, the tap may not completely be pulled out from the workpiece. In this case, set the amount of return (a) (NC parameter No. 5382). By this operation, the tap is returned by the amount (a). 4 The CNC internally executes a return program to perform tapping return operation. For this reason, when tapping return operation is performed, modal information may partly be changed.

636

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

A. SPECIFICATIONS

A
Travel Table

SPECIFICATIONS

Mechanical section ( : Unavailable)

ITEM
X- axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) Y- axis (Cross movement of saddle) Z- axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) Distance from table surface to spindle edge surface Distance from the front surface of the column to the center line of the spindle Area Load capacity Type Spindle Feedrate Turret Spindle speed range Type of spindle taper hole Rapid traverse feedrate cutting feedrate Tool change system Type of tool shank Type of retension knob Tool storage capacity Maximum tool diameter 630 330mm 150kg (unifom load)

SPECIFICATIONS T14iCSe
300mm 300 + 100mm 330mm 150 to 480mm 400mm 650mm 400mm 850mm 410mm

T14iCe
500mm 400mm

T14iCLe
700mm

250kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load) 80 to 8000min- 1 7/24 taper No. 30 (X, Y, Z) 48,000mm/min 1 to 15000mm/min

314mm slots with a space of 125mm

Turret type (spindle independent from turret) MAS BT30 MAS P30T- 1 (45 ) 14 Distance from taper gage line /max. diameter: 0 to 28mm /50mm 34 to 120mm /80mm 120 to 250mm /40mm] (80mm : in case 3kg tool mass) 200mm 250mm (Its depended on spec.) Random shortest path Max. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 15kg) or Max. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 22kg) Approx. 1.8 sec. or Approx. 2.4 sec. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR 5. 5 kW (10 min rating)/ 3. 7 kW (continuous rating) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL 3/M8i X, Y, Z : M8i (2.0 kw) 200V AC + 10% to 15%, 3phase, 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220V AC +10% to 15%, 3phase, 60Hz 1Hz, "10kVA 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure) 0.15m3/min (150 /min) (at atmospheric pressure) 2236 10mm 995mm 2207mm Approx. 1950kg 1565mm 2027mm Approx. 2000kg 0.010mm/300mm 0.002mm 2115mm 2027mm Approx. 2100kg

Maximum tool length Method of tool selection Maximum tool mass

Tool changing time (cut to cut) Motor Spindle drive motor

Feed motors Power sources Electrical power supply

Compressed air supply Machine size Machine height Floor space Mass of machine with the control section Accuracy (measured in compliance with JIS B 6201) Positioning accuracy Repeatability

639

A. SPECIFICATIONS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

ITEM
Safety and maintenance Control system Controlled axes controlled axes Simultaneously controllable axes Splash guard

SPECIFICATIONS T14iCSe T14iCe T14iCLe

Totally enclosed type (Door is open/closed manually.) Interlock input function FANUC Series 18i- MB 3 axes: X, Y, Z 3 axes: XYZ and 2 axes: XY, YZ, ZX

ITEM
Travel X- axis travel (Longitudinal movement of table) Y- axis (Cross movement of saddle) Z- axis travel (Vertical movement of spindle head) Distance from table surface to spindle edge surface Distance from the front surface of the column to the center line of the spindle Table Area Load capacity Type Spindle Feedrate Turret Spindle speed range Type of spindle taper hole Rapid traverse feedrate cutting feedrate Tool change system Type of tool shank Type of retension knob Tool storage capacity Maximum tool diameter

SPECIFICATIONS T21iCSe
300mm 300 + 100mm 330mm 150 to 480mm 400mm 630 330mm 150kg (unifom load) 650mm 400mm 850mm 410mm

T21iCe
500mm 400mm

T21iCLe
700mm

250kg (uniform load) 250kg (uniform load) 80 to 8000min- 1 7/24 taper No. 30 (X, Y, Z) 48,000mm/min 1 to 15000mm/min

314mm slots with a space of 125mm

Turret type (spindle independent from turret) MAS BT30 MAS P30T- 1 (45 ) 14 Distance from taper gage line /max. diameter: 0 to 28mm /50mm 34 to 120mm /80mm 120 to 250mm /40mm] (80mm : in case 3kg tool mass) 200mm 250mm (Its depended on spec.) Random shortest path Max. 2 kg/tool (total mass : 23kg) or Max. 3 kg/tool (total mass : 33kg) Approx. 1.8 sec. or Approx. 2.4 sec. FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR 5. 5 kW (10 min rating)/ 3. 7 kW (continuous rating) FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL 3/M8i X, Y, Z : M8i (2.0 kw) 200V AC + 10% to 15%, 3phase, 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220V AC +10% to 15%, 3phase, 60Hz 1Hz, "10kVA 490kPa (5kgf/cm2) (gage pressure) 0.15m3/min (150 /min) (at atmospheric pressure) 2236 10mm 995mm 2207mm Approx. 1950kg 1565mm 2027mm Approx. 2000kg 2115mm 2027mm Approx. 2100kg

Maximum tool length Method of tool selection Maximum tool mass

Tool changing time (cut to cut) Motor Spindle drive motor

Feed motors Power sources Electrical power supply

Compressed air supply Machine size Machine height Floor space Mass of machine with the control section

640

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

A. SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM
Accuracy (measured in compliance with JIS B 6201) Safety and maintenance Control system Controlled axes controlled axes Simultaneously controllable axes Positioning accuracy Repeatability Splash guard

SPECIFICATIONS T21iCSe T21iCe

0.010mm/300mm 0.002mm Totally enclosed type (Door is open/closed manually.) Interlock input function FANUC Series 18i- MB 3 axes: X, Y, Z 3 axes: XYZ and 2 axes: XY, YZ, ZX

T21iCLe

Control section
ITEM
Programming methods Least input increment Least command increment Max. programmable dimension Absolute/incrementalprogramming Decimal point programming Inch/millimeterselection Play back Programming resolution multiplied by 10 Tape code Interpolation Positioning Linearinterpolation Circular interpolation Buffer register Feed Cutting feedrate Dwell Rapid tapping Handwheel feed Automaticacceleration/deceleration Rapid traverse override Cutting feed override Part program storage and edit Part program storage Part program edit Program number search Sequence number search Address search No. of programs registered Background editing Expanded tape editing Operation and display Conversationalprogramming Operators panel Display function MDI function Dynamic graphic display Display section Operation section

SPECIFICATIONS
0.001mm/0.0001in 0. 001mm 99999.999mm/9999.9999in G90/G91 Provided G20/G21 Provided Provided Automatic recognition of EIA RS244B/ISO 840 code G00 G01 G02/G03 (multiquadrant command is possible) Provided Programming with character F and 4 digits in mm/min, or F and 5 digits in inch/min G04 M29 (Max.5000 min1 6000min1) Manual pulse generator 0.001/0.01/0.1/0.2mm x 0.02mm/0.0001/0.001/0.01/0.02 in per graduation Provided F0/25/100% 0 200% in 10% increment Punch tape of 320m Delete, insert, alter Provided Provided Provided 200 Another program can be edited during machining Provided Copies, moves, and links programs. MANUAL GUIDE or SUPER C. A. PiM 10. 4 color LCD Keyboard with membrane switches Current positions, specified values, compensation data, parameters, etc. Provided Solid drawings with shade are displayed.

641

A. SPECIFICATIONS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

ITEM
I/O function and devices I/O interface Quick output Auxiliary output Onoff output Response waiting output

SPECIFICATIONS
Reader/punch interface (For FANUC I/O equipment) M81, M82 M83/M84 : ON/OFF M80, M85 to M89 Provided Ordinary miscellaneous outputs are not generated. Two digits of a miscellaneous function (M code) are output in BCD, instead. To use this function, the customers should prepare necessary external devices and cables by themselves. Provided Up to 15 machining programs can be selected for activation according to input signals. To use this function, the customers should prepare necessary switches, controls, and cables by themselves. Provided All machining programs in memory can be selected for activation according to input signals. To use this function, the customers should prepare necessary switches, controls, and cables by themselves. Provided S4- digit programming with character S and 4 digits 30 to 200% in 10% increment Programming with character T and 2 digits. Programming with character M and 3 digits. G43, G44/G49 G41, G42/G40 200 Provided Attaches the current tool position to the offset data at a touch of a button. Provided Performs tool life management (tool damage and wear detection) according to programmed commands. Use of this function does not require the customers to prepare external devices and cables by themselves. Provided G28 G27 G29 Provided G92 Provided G54 to G59 Provided G68/G69 Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided

M code BCD output

External work number search

External program number search

Directory display of the Floppy Cassette Functions Spindle speed function Spindle speed override Tool function Miscellaneous function Tool compensation Tool length offset Cutter compensation Number of tool offsets Tool length measurement Tool life management Al tool monitor

Coordinate system

Manual return to reference position Automatic return to reference position Reference position return check Return from reference position Automatic coordinate system setting Coordinate system setting Workpiece coordinate system selection Coordinate system rotation

Operation support function

Label skip Single block Optional stop Optional block skip Dry run Machine lock

642

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

A. SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM
Operation support function Mirror image Z- axis feed cancel Program stop Program end Feed hold Circuit interpolation radius programming Canned cycle Subprogram Macro program Exact stop check Exact stop check mode Programmable data input Automatic corner override Mechanical error compensation Machine control subport function Automation support function Backlash compensation Pitch error compensation Integrated PMC Skip function Automatic power off Safety and maintenance Emergency stop Overtravel Stored stroke check Expanded stored stroke check 2 Self diagnosis Enclosure and installation Enclosure Power supply Room temperature Environmental conditions Servo system Temperature change Relative humidity Vibration Servo motors Servo unit Position detectors

SPECIFICATIONS
X, Y axes Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided G73, G74, G76, G81G89/G80 M98/M99 Custom macro B G90 G61/G64 G10 Provided G62/G64 Automatic deceleration at the corner Provided Provided Provided G31 Provided Power is turned off when machining is completed or an alarm occurs. Provided Provided Provided Provided Alarm display, I/O signal diagnosis, etc. Sealed dustproof type 200 VAC +10% to 15%, 3phase, 50/60Hz "1Hz or 220 VAC +10% to 15%, 3phase, 60Hz "1Hz, 10kVA 0 to 45_C (No freezing) 1.1_C/min max 75% or less (normal), 95% max. (temporary) 5m/S2 (0.5g) or less FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL X, Y, Z : MODEL M6 Digital AC servo Fully electronic absolute position detector (series pulse coder)

643

A. SPECIFICATIONS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Mechanical section option

ITEM
DIN tooling High column Coolant DIN (For Europa) 100/200/300mm (S type 100/200mm) Cutting agent motor : 0.25 kW AC Cutting agent tank capacity : 100 liters/200 liters Rear placement : Fullclose splash guard is required. Cutting agent motor : 0.25 kW/0.4 kW AC Cutting agent tank capacity : 100 liters/200 liters With cleaning oil gun Front double door (A double door is included as standard for the S type) Automatic rightside door Pneumatic pressure source: Flow rate at an atmospheric pressure

SPECIFICATIONS

Flood coolant

Double splash guard door Automatic splash guard side door Splash guard door automatic opening/ closing

Automatic front door

Compressed air supply : +0.12 m3/min (+120 liters/min) measured under atmospheric pressure Front door only. It is opened or closed according to a programmed command or by pressing a button. Simple cover/full cover Lubricator motor : 3 W AC Lubricant oil tank capacity : 1.8 liters Automatic intermittent lubrication for ball screws and LM guides

Top cover Centralized intermittent lubrication unit

Centralized greasing piping Status indicator lamp

Piping for greasing ball screws and LM guide

Threestage (green, yellow, and red) (green, yellow, and blue) (For general use in Japan and foreign countries) (For CE marks) Indicates machining in progress, program end, and alarm. Fluorescent lamp in the splash guard Voltage : 24 VAC Wattage : 24 W For dry cutting The color of the splash guard can be changed as specified by the customer. Length of the primary power cable connected to the breaker in the NC cabinet : 5m Needed for transportation. Maximum speed Motor : 15000min1/rigid tapping, 6000min1 : 3.7kW (10minute rating)/1.5 kW (continuous rating) : 240 (aT14iCS 200 ) : AC, 0.75 kW : 15 kgf/cm2

Courtesy lamp

Chip air blower Color specification Power cord Transportationmaterial Highspeed spindle

Centerthrough coolant specification

Coolant tank capacity Centerthrough motor Rated discharge pressure

Specification of the twoside restrained spindle (NC5)

Maximum speed: 8000min1

644

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

A. SPECIFICATIONS

Control section option

ITEM
Control on one additional axis Control on two additional axes

SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum number of concurrently controlled axes: 4 Power capacity: +2 KVA Servo motor: FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR MODEL b0.5/3000, a1/3000, a2/2000, a2/3000, a3/3000, a1/5000i, a2/5000i, aM2/5000i, aM3/5000i, a4/4000i, a8/3000i NC statement of conventional type Amount equivalent to 1280m of tape (total) Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Provided Can be selected as required. Provided Provided

Operators panel with alphabet key Program storage capacity expansion Remote buffer AI High precision contour control Data server (160MB/100BASET) Ethernet (100BASET) HSSB interface FANUC Handy File Additional I/O FANUC RENSCAN400 Power Failure Backup

Software options
ITEM
48 workpiece coordinate systems 300 workpiece coordinate systems Helical interpolation Tool offset Interruption type custom macro Scaling Polar coordinate command Smalldiameter peck drilling cycle Unidirectionalpositioning Automatic tool length measurement Highspeed remote buffer B 400 registerable programs Modeler control II (AI namo contour control) NURBS interpolation Cylindricalinterpolation Onedigit F code feed Multistage skip function Figure copy Threedimensional coordinate conversion Inverse time feed Tool offset memory C Basic FACTOLINK package ROBODRILL Program Manager FAPT LADDERIII Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided. Provided.

SPECIFICATIONS

645

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

646

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

B.1
SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

Fig.B.1 (a) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (T14/21iCe)

647

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Fig.B.1 (b) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (T14/21iCLe)

648

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

Fig.B.1 (c) Shape and Dimensions of the Machine (T14/21iCSe)

649

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

B.2
DIMENSIONS OF THE TABLE SURFACE AND T GROOVE (NOMINAL WIDTH: 14)

Fig.B.2 (a) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (T14/21iCe)

650

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

Table

4M12 depth24

TSLOT

Fig.B.2 (b) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (T14/21iCLe)

651

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Table

4M12 depth24

TSLOT

Fig.B.2 (c) Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14) (T14/21iCSe)

652

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

B.3
DIMENSIONS OF THE INSIDE OF THE SPLASH GUARD

Max. tool length reaching area (T21iC) Max. tool length reaching area (T14iC)

Turret body (T21iC) Turret body (T14iC)

Fig.B.3 (a) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (T14/21iCe)

653

Door opening width 550

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Max. tool length reaching area (T21iCL) Max. tool length reaching area (T14iCL)

Turret body (T21iCL)

Turret body (T14iCL)

Fig.B.3 (b) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (T14/21iCLe)

654

Door opening width 825

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

Max. tool length reaching area (T21iCS) Max. tool length reaching area (T14iCS)

Turret body (T21iCS) Turret body (T14iCS)

Door opening width 525

Fig.B.3 (c) Internal Dimensions of Splash Guard (T14/21iCSe)

655

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

B.4
DIMENSIONS OF THE SYSTEM AROUND THE COOLANT OUTLETS

Fig.B.4 (a) Dimensions of the System Around the Coolant Outlets (T14 (21) iCe/iCLe)

Fig.B.4 (b) Dimensions of the System Around the Coolant Outlets (T14/21iCSe)

656

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

B.5
DIMENSIONS OF THE END OF THE SPINDLE

Fig.B.5 Dimensions of the End of the Spindle

657

B. DIMENSIONS OF THE MACHINE

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

B.6
MIST COLLECTOR MOUNTING HOLE DIMENSIONS

cut cut
8burringM6 (convex on back) NBR rubber section 88 dia.

Note) Adhere NBR rubber 70_ t2 to the portion indicated by shading after coating. Dimensions of mist collector duct mounting sheet metal

Sheet metal mounting hole dimensions

Fig.B.6 (A) T14 (21) iCe/CLe

cut cut
8burringM6 (convex on back) NBR rubber section 88 dia.

Note) Adhere NBR rubber 70_ t2 to the portion indicated by shading after coating. Dimensions of mist collector duct mounting sheet metal

Sheet metal mounting hole dimensions

Fig.B.6 (B) T14 (21) iCse

658

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

C. G CODES

G CODES

The following G codes are offered.

G code
*G00 *G01 01 G02 G03 G04 G05.1 00 G05.4 G05 G06.2 G07.1 G08 00 G09 G10 *G15 17 G16 *G17 *G18 *G19 G20 06 G21 *G22 04 G23 G27 G28 G29 G31 G37 00 Stored stroke check OFF (Note 7) Reference point return check Return to reference point Return from reference point Skip function Automatic tool length measurement (Note 7) Input in mm Stored stroke check ON (Note 7) 02 Polar coordinate command (Note 7) XY plane selection ZX plane selection YZ plane selection Input in inch Exact stop Setting of data Polar coordinate command cancel (Note 7) 01 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW (Note 7) Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW (Note 7) Dwell, exact stop Modeler control (AI contour control) (G05.1 Q1) (Note 7) Modeler control (AI namo contour control) (G05.1 Q1) Highspeed HRV function AI High precision contouring control (G05P10000) (Note 7) NURBS interpolation (Note 7) Cylindricalinter polation (Note 7) Precession control (G08 P1)

Group
Positioning Linearinterpolation

Function

659

C. G CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

G code
*G40 G41 G42 G43

Group

Function
Cutter compensation cancel

07

Cutter compensation left Cutter compensation right Tool length compensation + direction

08 G44 G45 00 G46 G47 00 G48 *G49 *G50 11 G51 G52 00 G53 *G54 G54.1 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 G60 G61 G62 *G64 G65 G66 12 *G67 G68 16 *G69 Canceling coordinate system rotation/Canceling 3dimensional coordinate system conversion (Note 7) 00 Figure copying (Note 7) Cancel of custom macro modal call Coordinate system rotation/3dimensional coordinate system conversion (Note 7) 00 15 00 14 Machine coordinate system selection Work coordinate system 1 setting Additional workpiece coordinate system selection (Note 7) Work coordinate system 2 setting Work coordinate system 3 setting Work coordinate system 4 setting Work coordinate system 5 setting Work coordinate system 6 setting One direction positioning (Note 7) Exact stop mode Automatic corner Cutting mode Macro call Custom macro modal call Scaling (Note 7) Local coordinate system setting 08 Tool position offset 1/2 reduction (Note 7) Tool length compensation cancel Scaling cancel (Note 7) Tool position offset reduction (Note 7) Tool position offset two-hold extension (Note 7) Tool length compensation direction Tool position offset extension (Note 7)

G72.1

660

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

C. G CODES

G code
G73 G74 G76 *G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G88

Group
Peck drilling cycle Counter tapping cycle Fine boring cycle Canned cycle cancel Drilling cycle, spot boring 09

Function

Drilling cycle, counter boring Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle Back boring cycle Boring cycle

09 G89 *G90 03 *G91 G92 G93 05 *G94 *G98 10 G99 Return to R point in canned cycle Feed per minute Return to initial point in canned cycle 00 Incremental command Programming of absolute zero point Inverse time feed (Note 7) Boring cycle Absolute command

661

C. G CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

NOTE 1 G codes marked * are initial G codes in turning power on. For G20 and G21, the G code before turning power off remains. 2 G codes of group 00 are not modal. There are only effective in the block in which they are specified. 3 If a G code not listed in the table of G codes is inputted, or G code for an option not specified in the NC is commanded, an alarm (No. 010) is displayed. 4 A number of G codes can be specified in the same block. When more than one G code of the same group is specified, the G code specified later is effective. 5 If any G code in group 01 is specified in a canned cycle mode, the canned cycle is automatically cancelled and the G80 condition is entered. However G codes in group 01 is not affected by any of the canned cycle G codes. 6 G code is displayed by each group number. 7 Option. (For G02 and G03, only clockwise and counterclockwise helical interpolation are optional. For G68 and G69, only threedimensional coordinate conversion and threedimensional coordinate conversion cancel are optional.)

662

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

D. OPERATION

D
Classification Clear Reset

OPERATION

Function Memory all clear Parameters and offset value Clearing stored program Run time Number of parts OT alarm

Program protect key

Setting PWE-1

Mode Power ON Power ON Power ON _ _ Power ON

Function button _ _ _
Current position

Operation [RESET] + [DELETE] [RESET] [2] and [5] (manipulated on the IPL screen) select [3]. [(OPRT)] [TIME:0] [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [PART:0] [EXEC] [2] and [5] (manipulated on the IPL screen) select [5]. Parameter No. [NO.SRH] DATA [INPUT] PWE=0 [RESET] Offset No. [NO.SRH] Offset Data [INPUT] Setting No. [NO.SRH] Data [INPUT] [PMCPRM] [COUNTER] or [DATA] Data [INPUT] [PMCPRM] [TIMER] or [KEEPRL] Data [INPUT] [POS] (Displaying relative coordinates)[Z][CAN] [OFFSET] Place a tool to the specified position. Offset No. [NO.SRH] [EOB] and [Z] [INPUT] [(OPRT)] [ " ] [READ] [EXEC]

POS _ SYSTEM (Parameter)

Offset

Data input from MDI

Parameter

MDI or emergency stop _ MDI

Offset value Setting data Inputting PMC parameters (for the counter and data table) Inputting PMC parameters (for the timer and keep relay) Tool length measurement

f f f

Setting

MDI mode or emergency stop MDI mode or emergency stop MANUAL

SYSTEM (PMC) SYSTEM (PMC)

Current position Offset

Data input from External I/O

Parameter

EDIT or emergency stop Emergency stop

SYSTEM (PARAM) SYSTEM (PMC)

PMC parameter

[I/O](CHANNEL) 1 [INPUT] (DEVICE) [FDCAS] (FUNCTION) [READ] (DATA KIND) [PARAM] (FILE NO.) file number [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [ " ] [READ] [EXEC]

Data input from External I/O

Offset value Program input

f f

EDIT EDIT PROG

[(OPRT)] [ " ] [READ] [EXEC]

663

D. OPERATION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Classification Output to External I/O

Function Parameter Offset value All program One program

Program protect key

Setting PWE-1

Mode EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT MEMORY or EDIT AUTO EDIT EDIT _ _

Function button SYSTEM (PARAM) OFFSET PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG OFFSET SYSTEM (Diagno sis) SYSTEM (PARAM) PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG

Operation [(OPRT)] [ " ] [PUNCH] [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [ " ] [PUNCH] [EXEC] [O] 9999 [ " ] [PUNCH] [EXEC] [O] Program No. [ " ] [PUNCH] [EXEC] [O] Program No. [O.SRH] Program No. Search N Sequence No. [ N.SRH] Searching DATA[ SRH ] or [ SRH ] Searching Address [ SRH ] or [ SRH ] Offset No. [NO.SRH] Diagnosis No. [NO.SRH]

Search

Program No. search Sequence No. search Address word search Address search Offset No. Diagnosis

Parameter No. Program editing Displaying the capacity of memory used Deletion of all programs Deletion of a program Deletion of several blocks Deletion of a block Deletion of a word Alteration of a word f f f f f f

_ EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT

Parameter No. [NO.SRH] [LIBRARY] [O] 9999 [DELET] [O] Program No. [DELET] [N] Sequence No. [DELET] EOB [DELET] Search the word to be Deleted [DELET] Search the word to be Altered Address Data [ALTER] Search the word before the place in the program Address Data [INSRT] [(OPRT)] [ " ] [READ] [EXEC]

Insertion of a word

EDIT

PROG

Collation

Collation in memory with tape

EDIT

PROG

664

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

D. OPERATION

Classification
Input from or output to the Handy File

Function Program input All programs output One program output File search Deletion of file Collation of program

Program protect key f

Setting PWE-1

Mode EDIT EDIT EDIT EDIT

Function button PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG PROG

Operation [N] File No. [ " ] [READ]] [EXEC] [O] 9999 [ " ] [READ] [EXEC] [O] Program No. [ " ] [READ] [EXEC] [N] File No. [ " ] [F SRH] [EXEC] [N] File No. [ " ] [F DELETE] [EXEC] Searching a file for its beginning [O] Program No. [(OPRT)] [ " ] [READ] [EXEC]
Display QUICK screen, then 31: SEQ SELECTION. Select TEACHING IN using [] or []. Select [ON].

EDIT EDIT

Play back

NC data input

EDIT, MANUAL

PROG

Start the machine. [X] [Y] or [Z] [INSERT] (NC data) [INSERT] [EOB] [INSERT] Tool change Coolant Flood coolant Changing tools Applying coolant Applying flood coolant MDI Power ON Power ON _ _ _ [TOOL CHANG] [CLNT]
Display QUICK screen, then 31: SEQ SELECTIOM. Select Flood coolant using [] or []. Select [ON]. Display QUICK screen, then 31: SEQ SELECTIOM. Select INTERNAL LIGHT using [] or []. Select [ON].

INTERNAL LIGHT

Turning on the light in the machine

Power ON

665

E. STATUS LIST

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

E
Setting data Other data

STATUS LIST

: :
Item Offset value Data set by the MDI setting operation Parameter Programs in memory Contents in the buffer storage Display of sequence number One shot G code Modal G code

The status is not changed or the movement is continued. The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.
When turning power on f f f f Initial G codes. (For G20 and G21, the one effective before cutting off the power is effective.) Zero Zero When reset f f f f f: MDI mode : Other mode f f

F S, T, M Repetition specification (K) Coordinate Action in operation Work coordinate value Movement Dwell Issuance of M, S and T codes Tool length

f f f f : MDI mode Other modes depend on parameter RS43. f: MDI mode : Other mode (Note)

Cutter compensation

Storing called subprogram number

666

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

E. STATUS LIST

Item Output signals for indication of LEDs ALM NOT READY BUF REFERENCE POINT RETURN COMPLETION LED S and T codes M code M, S and T strobe strobe signals Spindle revolution signal (S analogue signal) NC ready signal (MA, MB) Servo ready signal

When turning power on Extinguishes if there is no cause for the alarm Extinguishes f ON

When reset Extinguishes if there is no cause for the alarm (Lights in emergency stop) f: MDI mode : Other mode f ( : Emergency stop) f f f ON (When other than servo alarm)

ON (When other than servo alarm)

CYCLE TART LED FEED HOLD LED

NOTE When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram, execution returns to the head of the program. Execution cannot be started from the middle of the subprogram.

667

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

ERROR CODES

668

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

F.1
ERROR CODE DISPLAYED ON LCD
Message Number Contents 000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER Parameter which requires the power supply to be disconnected once was set. 001 TH PARITY ALARM Character with incorrect parity was input. 002 TV PARITY ALARM The number of characters in a block is odd. 003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum number of digits was input. 004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign was input without an address at the beginning of the block. 005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by data but was followed by the next address or EOB code. 006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN The sign was input with an address which cannot use the sign . Or, two or more signs were input. (Sign input error) 007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT The decimal point . was input with an address which cannot use the decimal point .. Or, two or more decimal points . were input. (Decimal point . input error) 009 For example, if G00P100 is commanded, this alarm occurs. Unusable address was input in significant in- (In this case, the unusable address is P.) formation area. Modify the program. Alternatively, an address that is not related to the specified G code was entered in the block in which the G code is specified. ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT IMPROPER GCODE An invalid G code was specified. Correct the program. Alternatively, a G code corresponding to an unavailable option was specified. Confirm which options are available.
Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program or tape. Correct the program or tape.

(1) P/S Alarm

Remedy Remarks

Confirm the contents of the set parameter. Turn off the power, then turn it on.

Valid when system NC parameter (No. 0000#0) is 1.

Ex. X 10.5 Data Address

010

669

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded during cutting feed. Or, feedrate command was inappropriate. 014 CAN NOT COMMAND G95
A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading/synchronousfeed. Correct the program. Correct the program.

Remedy

Remarks

015

TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED Attempt was made to shift a number of axis which exceeded the number of simultaneously controlled axis.

Correct the program.

020

OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), the difference of the distance between the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No. 3410.

Correct the program. Adjust the setting for NC parameter No. 3410.

021

ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS COMMANDED An axis not included in the plane specification (G17, G18, G19) was commanded in circular interpolation.

Correct the program.

XY, XZ, or YZ plane

022

NO CIRCLE RADIUS For circular interpolation, R (arc radius), or I, J, and K (distance from a start point to the center) are not specified.

Correct the program.

025

CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN G02/G03 (M series) F0 (rapid traverse) was specified for onedigit F code feed in circular interpolation.

Correct the program.

027

Specify the G43 or G44 code with an axis for which the tool length has been compensated. Specify the G49 code to canIn tool length compensation C, an axis was not cel the G43 or G44 code when an axis to specified in the block in which G43 or G44 was be compensated is changed. specified. Alternatively, an attempt was made to compensate the other axis without canceling the offset in tool length compensation C. NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 (M series) ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT Two or more axes which are parallel one another were specified in the plane selection. For plane selection, specify two axes XY, XZ, or YZ plane which are not parallel.

028

029

ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset value selected by H code is too large.

Select a correct offset number. Or, modify the offset amount.

670

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by D/H code for the cutter compensation or the tool length offset is too large. Otherwise, the number specified by a P code for the additional workpiece coordinate system is too large. 031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 In the offset amount program input (G10), the value of P to specify the offset number is too large. Or, P was not commanded. 032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 The offset value set by programmable data input (G10) or written by a system variable is too large. 033 NO SOLUTION AT CRC The coordinates of an intersection cannot be calculated in cutter compensation C. 034 Cutter compensation C cannot be specified in a block immediately before or after a block in which circular cutting (G02 or Startup or cancel was going to be performed in G03) is specified. Add a linear cutting G02 or G03 mode in cutter compensation C. command (G01). NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP /EXT BLK CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 (M series) Skip turning (G31) is specified in the cutter compensation C mode. 037 The plane must be changed in the offset cancel mode (G40 enabled). Correct the A compensation plane (G17, G18, G19) was program. switched in cutter compensation C. CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN CRC INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting may occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start point or end point coincide with the arc center. 041 INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C. Two or more blocks are consecutively specified in which functions such as the auxiliary function and dwell functions are performed without movement in the cutter compensation mode. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Starting or canceling cutter compensation C can be specified together with linear movement. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Specify a correct offset number. Correct the program. Remedy Remarks

036

038

671

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 042 The tool offset command cannot be issued in the cutter compensation mode. Specify the tool offset command after The tool offset command was issued in the cut- canceling the offset. ter compensation mode. G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC (M series) G27G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED CYC (M series) One of G27G29 was commanded in caned cycle mode. 045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND (G73/G83) (M series) In G73 or G83 for specifying a canned cycle, Q (depth of cut for each cutting feed) is not specified or Q0 is specified. 046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN COMMAND A code other than P2, P3, or P4 is specified for the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position return command. 047 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT At the startup of threedimensional tool compensation or threedimensional coordinate conversion, two or more axes are specified in the same direction (basic and parallel axes). 048 BASIC 3 AXIS NOT FOUND At the startup of threedimensional tool compensation or threedimensional coordinate conversion, the three basic axes used when Xp, Yp, and Zp are omitted are not specified in parameter No. 1022. 049 ILLEGAL OPERATION (G68/G69) (M series) The commands for threedimensional coordinate conversion (G68, G69) and tool length compensation (G43, G44, G45) are not nested. Modify the program. 050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD BLK (M series) Optionalangle chamfering or corner rounding is specified in a threading block. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Remedy Remarks

044

672

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 051 The value specified for chamfering or rounding a corner was larger than the value specified for movement. Improper movement or the move distance was Alternatively, the specified direction of specified in the block next to the optional movement was incorrect. Correct the program. chamfering or corner R block. MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR (M series) CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER CHF/CNR (M series) The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01,G02 or G03. 053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS (M series) For optionalangle chamfering or corner rounding, a value other than R or C was specified following a comma (,). 055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN CHF/CNR (M series) In an optionalangle chamfering or corner rounding block, the specified travel distance is less than the amount of chamfering or corner rounding. 058 END POINT NOT FOUND (M series) In an optionalangle chamfering or corner rounding block, an axis which was not in the selected plane was specified. 059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND The program was not found in the external program number selection. Otherwise, the number of a program being edited in background processing was searched for. 060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Sequence number to be searched was not found. 070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient. 071 DATA NOT FOUND The address data to be searched was not found. Or, the program with the specified number was not found in the program number search. Rearrange memory or delete any unnecessary programs, then perform registration again. Check the address data or the program number and correctly input them. Check the sequence number. If it is incorrect, enter a correct number. Check the program number and modify it. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Remedy Remarks

052

673

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of registered programs exceeded 200 or 400 (option). 073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN USE Attempt was made to register a same program number as an already registered program number. 074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 19999. 075 Change the program number. Alternatively, set bit 0 or 4 of NC parameter No. An attempt was made to register a program 3202 to 0. whose number was protected. PROTECT ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED P was not specified in the block with M98, G65 or G66. 077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in five times. 078 NUMBER NOT FOUND The program number or the sequence number specified by address P in the block with M98, M99, or G66 was not found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not found. Otherwise, the number of a program being edited in background processing was called. 079 Check both the contents of memory and those of the program read from the exterIn memory or program collation, a program nal I/O device. stored in memory does not agree with that read from an external I/O device. PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ASSERTED (M series) In the automatic tool length measurement function (G37), the measurement position reach signal is not turned on within the area specified for parameter 6254 (value e). Otherwise, automatic tool length measurement was specified for the X or Yaxis. 081 OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN G37 Automatic tool length measurement (G37) was specified with specifying no H code for the automatic tool length measurement function. Check the position of the switch for mea- Parameter No. 6254, suring the tool length and position speci- signal ZAE, bit 2 of fied by the program. Then, correct the X1004 program. Check that the switch is connected correctly. Automatic toollength measurement can be used for the Zaxis only in the ROBODRILL T14iB. Correct the program. Check the program number or sequence number and modify it. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Change the program number or delete the registered program. Delete unnecessary registered programs. Remedy Remarks

076

080

674

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 082 HCODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 H code and automatic tool length measurement (G37) were specified in the same block for the automatic tool length measurement function. 083 Specify automatic toollength measure- If measurement is ment for the Zaxis with the absolute pro- specified for the X An axis other than the Zaxis was specified in gramming method. or Yaxis, alarm No. automatic toollength measurement. Alterna080 is issued. tively, incremental programming was used. (Automatic toollength measurement function) ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 Check parameter. Check the tape reader and the tape. Check that the values in the When entering data in the memory by using parameters match the settings of the tape Reader / Puncher interface, an overrun, parity reader. or framing error was generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is incorrect. COMMUNICATION ERROR Relativeparameters When channel is common, No. 0000, No. 0001, No. 0020, No. 0100 When parameter I/O is 0, No. 0101, No. 0102, No. 0103 Check whether the power to the I/O de- When parameter I/O DR SIGNAL OFF vice is on. The cable may not be con- is 1, No. 0111, No. When inputting/outputting/via/reader/puncher nected or the printed circuit board may be 0112, No. 0113 interface, the ready signal (DR) of the input/ faulty. output devices is off. Check whether the parameter values agree with the settings for the external I/O When reading via reader/puncher interface, device. Also check how the external I/O although the read terminate command is spe- device is controlled according to each NC cified, input was not stopped even after 10 I/O control signal. The I/O device or printed circuit board may be faulty. characters were read. BUFFER OVERFLOW REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE Motor reference position return was performed without rotating the motor of each axis through one or more turns. (X, Y, and Z axes, and additional axes without dogs) The start point of motor reference position return is too close to the reference position or the speed is too slow. (Additional axes with dogs) After moving the target axis for motor reference position return by about 12 mm in the handle mode, turn the power off, then on again, and perform motor reference position return. (X, Y, and Zaxes, and additional axes without dogs)Separate the start point far enough from the reference position, then perform motor reference position return. Alternatively, increase the rapid traverse rate for motor reference position return. (Additional axes with dogs) Correct the program. Remedy Remarks

085

086

087

090

091

Press the RESET on the operators panel, then perform manual reference posiIn the automatic operation halt state, manual tion return. reference position return cannot be performed. REFERENCE RETURN INCOMPLETE AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE POINT The reference point return check (G27) found that the specified axis did not return to the reference point. Correct the program.

092

675

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE Write enable parameter was set to 1 (1=valid). 101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power supply was turned off while rewriting the contents of the memory in program edit. The memory area must be cleared. 1. Display the CNC screen, then press an alphanumeric character key on the machine operators panel. 2. Press a soft key to display the following (FULL mode):
HALF ALTER DELETE ;

Remedy

Remarks

Set PWE to 1, then press the RESET key.

When the operators panel has a full keyboard, press <PROG> and <RESET> simultaneously.

3. While holding down the soft key between [HALF] and [ALTER], press the <RESET> key on the machine operators panel. 109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was specified for P following G08 or no value was specified. 110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of the fixed decimal point display data exceeded the allowable range. 111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The allowable range is 1047 1047. Check the program for the equation and The calculation result of the macro instruction result. exceeded the allowable range. DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (Including tan 90) 113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro was commanded. 114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Incorrect format outside of <equation> 115 Check the variable number and modify it. Or, define the variable number in adA number not defined as a variable number vance. was specified. ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE A variable for which a value cannot be substituted was specified at the left side of the equation. Check the common variable and change to an assignable variable number. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Modify the program such that the absolute value becomes less than 8 digits. Correct the program.

112

116

676

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The multiplicity of parentheses exceeded five times. 119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT A negative value was specified for the SQRT (square root) or BCD (binarycoded decimal) argument, or a value other than 0 to 9 was specified as a digit of the BIN argument. 122 FOUR FOLD MACRO MODALCALL The macro modal call was doubly specified. 123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND IN DNC Correct the program. A macro control command is used during DNC operation. 124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO and END statements are not paired correctly. 125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO Incorrect format outside of <equation>. 126 The nesting level of the DO loop must be three or less. A value from one to three was specified in n of Correct the program. the DO n instruction. ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME BLOCK Specify the macro command uniquely. NC commands and macro commands are mixed in the same block. 128 Check the jump destination number specified in the custom macro instruction. The sequence number of the branch destina- Correct the program. tion in the branch command was not 0 9999. Or, the sequence number was not found. ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE NUMBER ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS An address which is not allowed in <Argument Specification> is used. 131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGES Five or more external alarms were issued. 132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND There was no corresponding alarm number when the issued alarm was to be cleared. PMC sequence error. Contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. A software error occurred. Contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. Correct the addresses used in the custom macro instructions. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Correct the program. Remedy Remarks

127

129

677

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM MSG Subclass data was erroneous in the external alarm message and external operator message. 141 G51 cannot be commanded. Specify scaling on (G51) first, then speciG51 (Scaling ON) was commanded in the cut- fy cutter compensation. ter compensation mode. CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC ILLEGAL SCALE RATE (M series) The scaling multiple was specified as a value other than 1 999999. 143 SCALED MOTION DATA OVERFLOW Move distance, coordinate value and circular radius exceeded the maximum command value when scaling was scaling executed. 144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane differs from arc or tool offset C plane. 145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR COORDI- 1) G12.1 or G13.1 is specified in mode other than G40. NATE INTERPOLATION The conditions for starting or canceling polar coordinate interpolation are incorrect. 2) Plane selection is incorrect. (Setting error in parameter No. 5460 or 5461) Correct the program or parameter setting. 146 IMPROPER G CODE An illegal G code was specified in the polar coordinate interpolation mode. 148 Reset the parameters such that the range Related parameters: becomes: Nos. 1710, 1711, 1712, 1713, 1714 Deceleration (MDR) and the judgement angle 1% x MDR (1% step ) x 100% ( p) of auto corner override are out of range. 2x p x 178. ILLEGAL SETTING DATA FORMAT ERROR IN GIOL3 A code other than Q1, Q2, P1 or P2 was specified as the life count type in the extended tool life management. 150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER The specified tool group number exceeded the maximum number. 151 Display QUICK screen, TOOL FIFE, then TOOL GROUP SETTING, and set the The tool group specified in the machining pro- tool group. gram was not set in tool life management. TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT FOUND The tool group number (P) must be 128 or P=1128 less. Correct the program. Modify the program. Modify the program. The respective planes should be same. Modify the program. Scaling cannot be performed by this multiple. Reduce the scaling multiple. Modify the scaling multiple. A scaling factor is obtained by multiplying the specified integer by 1/1000. PMC sequence error. Contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. Remedy Remarks

142

149

678

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 152 Check the specified number of tools in Related parameter: each group. Correct it, if necessary. The No. 6800 The specified number of tools in the group ex- maximum number of tools is 16 per group. ceeded the maximum value. NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY TCODE NOT FOUND In registration of tool life data, a T code was not specified in a block where it was required. 154 The H99 and D99 codes can only be specified for a tool number for which a tool When a tool group was not specified, the H99 group is specified. or D99 code was specified. NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP Check the tool number specified in the T Related parameter: code and the specified tool group. No. 6800 In the machining program, the T code speci- Depending on the conditions, specify the fied with the M06 code in the block did not cor- parameter so that the tool number is igrespond to the tool group being used. When bit nored. 6 of parameter No. 6800 is set to 1, the alarm is ignored. ILLEGAL TCODE IN M06 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND The P and L commands were not specified at the top of the program which set the tool group. 157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be specified exceeded the maximum value. 158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA Too large life period 159 TOOL DATA SETTING INCOMPLETE The power was turned off while the setting program was being executed. 160 G72.1 NESTING ERROR (M series) Code G72.1 was specified again in a subprogram which performed rotational copy specified by G72.1. 161 G72.1 NESTING ERROR Code G72.2 was specified again in a subprogram which performed rotational copy specified by G72.2. 175 ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND A condition for starting or canceling cylindrical interpolation is invalid. Specify the condition in format G07.1 rotationaxisname radiusofcylinder. Correct the program. Correct the program. Execute the program which sets tool groups again. The maximum value that can be set is 4300 minutes or 65535 times. Correct the number of tool groups. Related parameter: No. 6800 Specify the P and L commands at the top of the program. Correct the program. Remedy Remarks

153

155

156

679

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 176 IMPROPER GCODE IN G107 The following G codes cannot be specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode: Remedy Remarks

An invalid G code was specified in the cylindri- 1. G codes for positioning (such as G28, cal interpolation mode. G73, G74, G76, G78, and G81 to G89, including the codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle) 2. G codes for setting a coordinate system (G52 and G92) 3. G codes for selecting a coordinate system (G53 and G54 to G59) Correct the program. 177 CHECK SUM ERROR (G05 MODE) A checksum error occurred. 178 G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 MODE Code G05 was specified in the G41/G42 mode. 179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) SETTING ERROR The number of controlled axes set by parameter No. 7510 exceeds the maximum number. 180 COMMUNICATION ERROR (REMOTE BUF) Check that the parameters match the set- Related parameters tings of the external I/O unit. Check that Nos. 0000, the external unit is connected correctly. 0001, 0020, 0100, Remote buffer line alarm 0131, 0132 Nos. 0133, 0134, 0135, 7501, 7510 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In constant surface speed control, an incorrect axis specification is found. (See the setting of parameter No. 3770.) 199 Check the arithmetic operation and control commands specified by the custom An undefined reserved macro word was used. macro. MACRO WORD UNDEFINED ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In rigid tapping, the specified spindle speed was out of range, or a spindle speed was not specified. 201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID TAP In rigid tapping, a feedrate was not specified. 202 Turn off the power, then turn it on. If the alarm is not reset by turning the power off In rigid tapping, too many pulses were distrib- and on, or if an error occurs when rigid tapping is specified again, contact the uted to the spindle. nearest FANUC Technical Center. POSITION LSI OVERFLOW Correct the program. Correct the program. Axis specification P is beyond the permissible range. Correct the program. Modify the parameter setting. Correct the program. Correct the program.

190

200

680

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID TAPPING In rigid tapping, the rigid M29 or S code was specified in an incorrect position. 204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In rigid tapping, movement along an axis (including tool change) was specified between the rigid M code and the G84 or G74 code. 205 Turn off the power, then turn it on. G61.0 If the alarm is not reset by turning the Although the rigid M code was specified in rigid power off and on, or if an error occurs tapping, the rigid mode DI signal did not go on when rigid tapping is specified again, when the block in which the G84 and G74 contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. codes were specified was executed. RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE (M series) Switching a plane was specified in the rigid mode. 207 RIGID DATA MISMATCH The specified distance was too short or too long in rigid tapping. 210 A program which is executed while being input from the floppy disk cannot call a The M198 and M099 codes were executed in subprogram. scheduled operation. The M198 code was executed in DNC operation. CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT On a plane including an additional axis, optionalangle chamfering/corner rounding is specified. 222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG.EDIT Input and output are executed at a time in the background edition. 224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic operation starts. Reference position return is necessary Related parameter before cycle start. No.1005#0 Perform correct operation. Correct the program. Correct the prgoram. Correct the prgoram. Only when the XY plane (G17) is specified. Specify M29 Sxxxx ; and G84 Zxx Fxxxx ; in succession. Specify M29 Sxxxx ; immediately before the G84 and G74 codes. Remedy Remarks

206

212

681

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 The programmable parameter input, G10 L50 ... had the following format errors: 1) Address N or R was not entered. 2) A parameter number which does not exist was entered. 3) Axis number is too large. 4) Axis number was not specified for the axistype parameter. 5) Axis number was specified for a nonaxis type parameter. 6) An attempt was made to set bit 4 of param eter No. 3204 (NE9) to 0 or change the val ue of parameter No. 3210 when they were protected by a password. 232 TOO MANY HELICAL AXIS COMMANDS Three or more axes (two or more axes in the normal direction control mode) were specified as helical axes in helical interpolation. 233 Stop the function using the RS232C interface. The faulty Mother board is anothThe RS232C interface has been being used er possible cause. by another function. DEVICE BUSY BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed with the function for controlling external I/O units ,background editing was performed. 240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MDI operation. 241 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.2/G03.2 In involute interpolation, the end point, I, J, K, or R is not specified. 242 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.2/G03.2 An incorrect value is specified in involute interpolation. S The specified start point or end point is within the base circle. S 0 was specified in I, J, K, or R. S The start point or end point is located beyond 100 turns from the point at which the involute curve begins. Modify the program. Modify the program. After termination of MDI operation, perform background editing. Perform background editing after punch out operation is completed. Check the program for format. Command format: G10 L50 ; Parameter input mode N R ; N P R ; Parameter data Axis number (1 to 4) Parameter number Canceling parameter input mode Remedy Remarks

G11;

Correct the program.

239

682

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 243 OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The end point is not on the involute curve passing the start point and is beyond the range specified in parameter No. 5610. 246 Check the program number. Check the values set in parameter Nos. When an encrypted program was read, an at- 3222 and 3223. tempt was made to register the program, but its number was beyond the protection range. (See parameter Nos. 3222 and 3223.) ENCODE PROGRAM NUMBER ERROR ILLEGAL CODE USED FOR OUTPUT When an encrypted program is output, the punch code is EIA. 250 Z AXIS WRONG COMMAND (ATC) An attempt was made to specify moving the Z axis simultaneously with a simultaneous positioning command when the tool change operation was specified. 251 ATC ERROR The following errors occurred when the tool change command was issued. 1) An invalid T code was used to specify the tool number. 2) The tool change command was issued when the tool had a Z coordinate greater than that of the machine zero point. 3) The current tool number is set to 0. 4) The tool change command was issued in tool length compensation mode (G43 or G44). 5) The tool change command was issued in the canned cycle mode (G73 to G89). 6) The tool change command was issued in a block in which the reference position return command (G27 to G29) was specified. 7) The machine lock or Zaxis lock was specified for Zaxis movement while the tool was being changed. The cause is indicated in diagnosis mes- Related diagnostic sage No. 530. data No. 530 Correct the program and parameters. 1) Specify a value from one to ten with address T. 2) Issue the tool change command only when the tool is positioned at a Z coordinate smaller than that of the machine zero point. 3) Specify a tool number in parameter No. 7810. 4,5) Be sure to issue the commands for canceling the tool length compensation (G49) and for canceling the canned cycle mode (G80) before specifying the tool change command. 6) The tool change command and reference position return command cannot be specified at the same time. 7) Do not lock the Zaxis while the tool is being changed. Moving the Zaxis cannot be specified together with the tool change command. Specify ISO. Modify the program. Remedy Remarks

247

683

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Diagnostic data related to alarms concerning tool change

Diagnostic data number 530

#7

#6

#5 A99

#4 A98

#3 A97

#2 A96

#1 A95

#0 A43

When A99 is

1: A99 is not for the user.

D Action to be taken A malfunction occurred in the internal signal processing. Contact your nearest FANUC Technical Center. When A98 is 1: The Zaxis was locked while the tool was beingchanged.

D Action to be taken Perform turret recovery. When A97 is 1: The tool change command was issued in the tool length compensation mode (G43, G44) or the cannedcycle mode (G73 to G89). D Action to be taken The alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operators panel. Correct the program so that the command for canceling cutter compensation (G40), tool length compensation (G49) and the canned cycle mode (G80) are issued before the tool change command is issued. The G49 and G80 codes can be specified in the block in which the tool change command is specified. When A96 is 1: The current tool number is set to 0. D Action to be taken Specify a tool number in parameter No. 7810. When A95 is 1: The tool was changed when it was positioned at a Zcoordinate greater than that of the machine zero point. D Action to be taken Perform turret recovery by specifying it in the recovery menu on the quick operation screen. When A43 is 1: An invalid T code is issued in M06 TVV. D Action to be taken The alarm can be reset by pressing the RESET key on the operators panel. Correct the program so that a correct T code (1 to 10) is used.
Number 252 Contents The following errors were detected in spindle operation at tool change. 1) Excessive error in magazine indexing 2) ATC and spindle positioning sequence error 3) LSI overflow 4) Excessive drift 5) Excessive error with the spindle moving 6) Excessive error with the spindle at a rest 7) Excessive spindle distribution Remedy The cause is indicated in diagnosis message No. 531. 1) It is likely that the tool is too heavy or that tool weight is unbalanced excessively. Check the weight of the tool. 2 to 7) It is likely that the parameter setting is incorrect or that the internal processing is improper. Check the diagnosis message and contact the FANUC service center nearby. Remarks

684

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Diagnosis data related to alarm concerning tool change

Diagnostic data number 531 #7 #6 585 #5 584 #4 583 #3 582 #2 581 #1 580 #0 502

When No. 585 is 1: An excessive error occurred in magazine indexing. D Action to be taken The error occurred because the load was too great during magazine indexing. Check on the tool weight and whether the tool weight is balanced. If there is no excessive condition, contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. When No. 584 is 1: An ATC & spindle positioning sequence error occurred. D Action to be taken The internal processing was found incorrect. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. When No. 583 is 1: An LSI overflow occurred. D Action to be taken The internal processing was found incorrect. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. When No. 582 is 1: The drift amount was excessive. D Action to be taken The internal processing was found incorrect. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. When No. 581 is 1: An excessive error occurred when the spindle is moving. D Action to be taken The internal processing was found incorrect. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. When No. 580 is 1: An excessive error occurred when the spindle is at a halt. D Action to be taken The internal processing was found incorrect. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby. When No. 502 is 1: An excessive spindle distribution was detected. D Action to be taken The internal processing was found incorrect. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby.
Message Number Contents 253 G05 IS NOT AVAILABLE Binaryinput operation with a highspeed remote buffer (G05) or highspeed cycle machining (G05) was specified in the lookahead control mode. Specify G08 P0 ; to cancel the look ahead control mode. Remedy Remarks

685

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(2) Background editing (BP/S alarm)

Message Number Contents ??? BP/S alarm The BP/S alarms are issued with the same numbers (070 to 074 and other numbers) as those for the P/S alarms which are issued in normal program editing. 140 BP/S alarm Correct the program. See the note below. Pressing <RESET> is not necessary. Remedy Remarks

The program selected in foreground edit- See the note below. ing cannot be selected in background Pressing <RESET> The program selected in foreground editing editing, or it cannot be deleted in back- is not necessary. was also selected in background editing, or an ground editing. attempt was made to delete it background editing.

NOTE Background editing alarms are indicated not on the ordinary alarm screen, but on the key input line on the background editing screen. These alarms can be released by pressing the <Cancel> key. Never use the <RESET> key to cancel alarms in background editing. Otherwise, a program being executed in the foreground stops.

686

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

(3) Alarms related to the absolute pulse coder (APC)

Message Number Contents 300 APC alarm: nthaxis origin return Motor reference position return is required for n axis. This alarm occurs in a case such as when a motor signal cable is disconnected. 301 APC alarm: nthaxis communication naxis APC communication error 302 APC alarm: nthaxis over time naxis APC timeout error 303 APC alarm: nthaxis framing naxis APC framing error 304 APC alarm: nthaxis parity naxis APC parity error 305 APC alarm: nthaxis pulse error The pulse coder, cable or servo interface module may be faulty. Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still on, contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. The pulse coder, cable or servo interface module may be faulty. Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still on, contact the nearest FANUC Technical Center. If an alarm is issued for the fourth axis, check that the motor for the additional axis is installed. Perform motor reference position return for the specified axis. Remedy Remarks

naxis APC missing pulse error

306

307

308

Check the battery. This alarm also ocAlso check whether the servo motor curs when the cable The voltage of the naxis APC battery has cable is connected. of the Zaxis motor once dropped to the level at which data cannot has been removed be held. when delivered. If an alarm is issued for Replace the pulse coder battery. APC alarm: nthaxis battery low 1 the additional axis, check that the motor The n axis APC battery voltage reaches the for the additional battery replacement level. axis is installed. Check whether the servo motor cable is APC alarm: nthaxis battery low 2 connected. The n axis APC battery voltage reached the If alarm No. 307 occurs simultaneously, battery replacement level (including a case of take action for alarm No. 307. poweroff). APC alarm: nthaxis battery voltage 0 Rotate the motor through one or more turns, then turn the power off, then on An attempt was made to perform reference again, and perform reference position reposition return without rotating the motor turn. through one or more turns. APC ALARM: n AXIS ZRN IMPOSSIBL

309

687

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(4) Alarms related to the serial pulse coder (SPC)

No. Message Description 360 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CHECKSUM (INT) A checksum error occurred in the builtin pulse coder. 361 n AXIS : ABNORMAL PHASE DATA (INT) A phase data error occurred in the builtin pulse coder. 362 n AXIS : ABNORMAL REV.DATA (INT) A rotation speed count error occurred in the builtin pulse coder. 363 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CLOCK (INT) A clock error occurred in the builtin pulse coder. 364 n AXIS : SOFT PHASE ALARM (INT) The digital servo software detected invalid data in the builtin pulse coder. 365 n AXIS : BROKEN LED (INT) An LED error occurred in the builtin pulse coder. 366 n AXIS : PULSE MISS (INT) A pulse error occurred in the builtin pulse coder. 367 n AXIS : COUNT MISS (INT) A count error occurred in the builtin pulse coder. 368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR (INT) Communication data from the builtin pulse coder cannot be received. 369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR (INT) A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being received from the builtin pulse coder. When power off then on and the error occures again, consult our, service department. Remedy

Diagnostic data concerning alarms related to the serial pulse coder

Diagnostic data number 202

#7

#6 CSA

#5 BLA

#4 PHA

#3 RCA

#2 BZA

#1 CKA

#0 SPH

When CSA is 1: Error of the serial pulse coder D Action to be taken Replace the pulse coder. When BLA is 1: The voltage of the battery is too low. D Action to be taken Replace the pulse coder battery for the servo motor. When PHA is 1: Error in the serial pulse coder or the feedback cable
688

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

D Action to be taken Replace the cable or pulse coder. When RCA is 1: Serial pulse coder error D Action to be taken Replace the pulse coder. When BZA is 1: Power was supplied to the serial pulse coder for the first time. D Action to be taken Check that the cable is connected to the motor properly. Turn the power off, then turn it on again. After turning the power off, then on again, perform motor reference position return for the axis for which the alarm occurred. This alarm also occurs if the Zaxis motor or motor cable is disconnected at delivery of the machine. For an additional axis, check whether the additional axis motor has been mounted. This alarm also occurs if the cable is disconnected at installation of an additional axis. This alarm also occurs when the Zaxis motor or the cable of the motor is removed when the machine is delivered. When an additional axis is used, also check that the additionalaxis motor is mounted. This alarm also occurs when the cable is removed at installation of an additional axis. When CKA is 1: Serial pulse coder error D Action to be taken The pulse coder needs to be replaced with a new one. Contact your nearest FANUC Technical Center. When SPH is 1: Error in the serial pulse coder or feedback cable D Action to be taken The cable or pulse coder needs to be replaced with a new one. Contact your nearest FANUC Technical Center. When diagnostic data bit is 0, no alarm has occurred for that bit.
Diagnostic data number 203

#7 DTE

#6 CRC

#5 STB

#4 PRM

#3

#2

#1

#0

When DTE is 1: Transmission error in the serial pulse coder. When CRC is 1: The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback When STB is 1: reception circuit is abnormal. D Action to be taken Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or NC axis board. When PRM is 1: An invalid parameter alarm occurred. An invalid servo parameter alarm (No. 417) is also indicated. D Action to be taken By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAMETER], check NC parameters to see if any parameter modification has been made inappropriately. When any of the above bits is 0, no alarm has occurred for that bit, or the alarm has already been reset.
689

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(5) Sevo alarm

Message Number Contents 401 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS VRDY OFF The servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY) for the naxis went off. 402 SERVO ALARM: SV CARD NOT EXIST The axis control card is not provided. 403 SERVO ALARM: CARD/SOFT MISMATCH The combination of the axis control card and servo software is incorrect. The servo software or monitor software is not installed in flash memory. 404 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS VRDY ON Although the naxis ready signal (MCON) went off, the servo amplifier ready signal (DRDY) does not go off. Alternatively, when the power is turned on, the DRDY is on although the MCON is off (n: X, Y, Z, or an additional axis). (V ready on) 405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT RETURN Perform motor reference position return operation. FAULT) Position control system error. There is a possibility that reference position return is not performed correctly due to an NC internal error or servo system error. (Reference position return error) 409 SERVO ALARM: n AXIS TORQUE ALM An abnormal load was detected. D Check that no chips have collected around the moving axis. D Check that the machine is not operating under conditions or a load that exceeds the capacity of the machine D Check whether collision with the tool, workpiece, jig, and so forth has occurred because of an error such as a program error. By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAMETER], check NC parameters to see if any parameter modification has been made inappropriately. See the troubleshooting procedure. Contact the FANUC technical center useing your locality. Remedy Remarks

690

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 410 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EXCESS ER- Check the weight of the load to be placed Related parameters: on the table. The maximum load capacity No. 1829, No. 1832 ROR of the table is 200 kg. If the load weights Position deviation along the naxis exceeded 100 kg or more, change the setting of the setting when the machine stopped (n: X, Y, permissible mass of workpiece to more Z, or an additional axis). (Excess error) than 100 kg. SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EXCESS ERROR Position deviation along the naxis exceeded the setting during machine operation (n: X, Y, Z, or an additional axis). (Excess error) 413 SERVO ALARM: nth AXIS LSI OVERFLOW The value of the naxis error register exceeded 231 (n: X, Y, Z, or an additional axis). (LSI overflow) The parameter is probably set incorrectly. 415 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS EXCESS SHIFT An attempt was made to specify a speed exceeding 511875 detection units/sec for the n axis (n: X, Y, Z, or an additional axis). (Excess travel). CMR is probably set incorrectly. 417 SERVO ALARM: nTH AXIS PARAMETER By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAMEINCORRECT TER], check NC parameters to see if any This alarm is issued when the parameters are parameter modification has been made set as follows for the naxis (n: X, Y, Z, or an inappropriately. additional axis); (Digital servo system error) 1) Parameter No. 2020 (type of motor) is set to a value which is out of range. 2) Parameter No. 2022 (direction of the motor rotation) is not set to a correct value, 111 or 111. 3) Parameter No. 2023 (the number of speed feedback pulses per motor rotation) is set to an incorrect value, such as 0 or less. 4) Parameter No. 2024 (the number of position feedback pulses per motor rotation) is set to an incorrect value, such as 0 or less. 5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flexible gear feed rate) are not specified. 6) Parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number) is not set to 1, 2, 3, or 4. Alternatively, discrete integers are specified. Related parameters: No. 1023, No. 2020, No. 2022, No. 2023, No. 2024, No. 2084, No. 2085 Related parameter: No. 1820 Related parameters: Nos. 1800 to 1852, Nos. 2000 to 2098 Related parameter: No. 1828 Remedy Remarks

411

691

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 421 By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAIN- Related parameters: TENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAME- No. 2078, No. 2079, The difference between the errors in the semi TER], check NC parameters to see if any closed loop and closed loop has become ex- parameter modification has been made cessive during dual position feedback. Check inappropriately. the values of the dual position conversion coefficients in parameters No. 2078 and 2079. SERVO ALARM: n AXIS EXCESS ER (D) n AXIS : SV. MOTOR OVERHEAT A servo motor overheat occurred. 431 n AXIS : CNV. OVERLOAD PSM: Overheat occurred. 432 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT CONTROL PSM: Phase missing occurred in the input voltage. 433 n AXIS : CNV. LOW VOLT DC LINK PSM: The DC link voltage has dropped. 434 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT CONTROL SVM: The control power supply voltage has dropped. 435 n AXIS : INV. LOW VOLT DC LINK SVM: The DC link voltage has dropped. 436 n AXIS : SOFTTHERMAL (OVC) The digital servo software detected the soft thermal state (OVC). 437 n AXIS : CNV. OVERCURRENT POWER PSM: Overcurrent flowed into the input circuit. 438 n AXIS : INV. ABNORMAL CURRENT SVM: The motor current is too high. Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated, contact the nearest FANUC Terminal Center. Remedy Remarks

430

692

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER PSM: The DC link voltage is too high. 441 n AXIS : ABNORMAL CURRENT OFFSET The digital servo software detected an abnormality in the motor current detection circuit. 442 n AXIS : CNV. CHARGE FAILURE PSM: The spare discharge circuit of the DC link is abnormal. 443 n AXIS : CNV. COOLING FAN FAILURE PSM: The internal stirring fan failed. 444 n AXIS : INV. COOLING FAN FAILURE SVM: The internal stirring fan failed. 445 n AXIS : SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM The digital servo software detected a broken wire in the pulse coder. 446 n AXIS : HARD DISCONNECT ALARM A broken wire in the builtin pulse coder was detected by hardware. 449 n AXIS : INV. IPM ALARM SVM: IPM (intelligent power module) detected an alarm. 453 Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated, contact the The monitor detected a signal error in the a nearest FANUC Terminal Center. pulse coder for the n axis. n AXIS : SPC SOFT DISCONNECT ALARM ILLEGAL CURRENT LOOP The current control interval setting (No. 2004, bit 0 of No. 2003, and bit 0 of No. 2013) is incorrect. Possible problems are as follows: For two servo axes having successive odd and even servo axis numbers (set in parameter No. 1023) in this order (for example, the first axis and second axis, the fifth axis and sixth axis, and so on), different current control interval settings are made. The required number of slaves, type, connection method, and so on for providing the set current control interval are not met. Turn off the power then back on. If the alarm persists even after the power is turned off then back on, contact FANUC Technical Center. Remedy Remarks

456

693

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 457 Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated, contact the When the current control interval was 250 us, nearest FANUC Terminal Center. a setting that uses highspeed HRV was made. ILLEGAL HI HRV (250US) CURRENT LOOP ERROR The current control interval setting and the actual current control interval do not match. 459 HI HRV SETTING ERROR When two servo axes have successive odd and even servo axis numbers (set in parameter No. 1023) in this order (for example, the first axis and second axis, the fifth axis and sixth axis, and so on), highspeed HRV control can be performed for the servo amplifier of one axis but cannot be performed for the servo amplifier of the other axis. Check the servo amplifier specifications. 460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT FSSB communication was disconnected suddenly. The possible causes are as follows: 1) The FSSB communication cable was disconnected or broken. 2) The power to the amplifier was turned off suddenly. 3) A lowvoltage alarm was issued by the amplifier. 461 n AXIS : ILLEGAL AMP INTERFACE The axes of the 2axis amplifier were assigned to the fast type interface. 462 n AXIS : SEND CNC DATA FAILED Because of an FSSB communication error, a slave could not receive correct data. 463 n AXIS : SEND SLAVE DATA FAILED Because of an FSSB communication error, the servo system could not receive correct data. 464 n AXIS : WRITE ID DATA FAILED An attempt was made to write maintenance information on the amplifier maintenance screen, but it failed. Remedy Remarks

458

694

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 465 Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated, contact the At powerup, amplifier initial ID information nearest FANUC Terminal Center. could not be read. n AXIS : READ ID DATA FAILED n AXIS : MOTOR/AMP COMBINATION The maximum current rating for the amplifier does not match that for the motor. 467 n AXIS : ILLEGAL SETTING OF AXIS The servo function for the following has not been enabled when an axis occupying a single DSP (corresponding to two ordinary axes) is specified on the axis setting screen. Highspeed current loop (bit 0 of parameter No. 2004 = 1) 468 HI HRV SETTING ERROR(AMP) Use of highspeed HRV is specified for a controlled axis, but highspeed HRV cannot be used for the amplifier of that axis. 470 Turn off the power (turn off the circuit breaker) then back on. If the alarm perA monitor RAM error occurred. Replace the sists even after the power is turned off axis control card. then back on, contact FANUC Technical Center. n AXIS:SPC SOFT DISCONNECT (MNT) n AXIS:ILLEGAL RAM (MNT) The monitor detected a signal error in the a pulse coder. Replace the a pulse coder. 473 n AXIS:SOFT PHASE ALARM(INT/MNT) The monitor detected a data missing error in the velocity feedback signal for the n axis. Replace the a pulse coder. Alternatively, take noise prevention measures for the feedback cable. 474 n AXIS:EXCESS ERROR (STOP:MNT) When the safety door was open, the positional deviation in stopped state exceeded the default. 475 n AXIS:EXCESS ERROR (MOVE:MNT) When the safety door was open, the positional deviation during movement exceeded the default. Remedy Remarks

466

471

695

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 476 Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated, contact the When the safety door was open, a specified nearest FANUC Terminal Center. feedrate exceeded the safety feedrate (X, Y, Z = 2000 mm/min, additional axes = 700 deg/ min). n AXIS:ILLEGAL SPEED CMD. (MNT) n AXIS:ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.(MNT) When the safety door is open, the machine position is not within the safety area. 478 n AXIS:ILLEGAL AXIS DATA (MNT) An abnormality occurred during axis data transfer. The alarm may be issued as a result of a modification to the servo amplifier configuration. In such a case, perform axis number setting operation for the servo amplifier (set bit 4 of parameter No. 2212 for the axis in question to 1, reset the bit to 0, then turn off the power (also turn off the circuit breaker). 479 ILLEGAL SAFETY DI (MNT) There is an inconsistency in safety input signals monitored by two programs. 480 n AXIS:ILLEGAL SAFETY MODE (MNT) Although the release of the door lock was not specified, the door lock was released. 481 n AXIS:SAFETY PARAM ERROR (MNT) A safety parameter error occurred. 482 n AXIS:AXIS NUMBER NOT SET (MNT) No axis number is set for the servo amplifier. The axis number is set automatically. Turn off the power (and also turn off the circuit breaker). 483 MONITOR SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR The monitor safety function became abnormal. D The monitor safety function was not executed. D The check result of the monitor safety function and the check result of the servo or CNC safety function did not match. D An abnormality occurred during the monitor CPU test. Remedy Remarks

477

696

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 484 Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated, contact the The servo safety function became abnormal. nearest FANUC Terminal Center. n AXIS:SERVO SAFETY FUNCTION ERR D The servo safety function was not executed. D The check result of the servo safety function and the check result of the monitor safety function did not match. D An abnormality occurred during the servo RAM check. D An abnormality occurred during the servo CPU test. 486 ILLEGAL SAFETY DI (CNC) There is an inconsistency in safety input signals monitored by two programs. 487 ILLEGAL SAFETY MODE (CNC) Although the release of the door lock was not specified, the door lock was released. 488 SAFE TEST OVER TIME MCC interruption test could not be executed normally. 489 SAFETY PARAM ERROR (CNC) A safety parameter error occurred. 490 CNC SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR The CNC safety function became abnormal. D The CNC executed. safety function was not Remedy Remarks

D The check result of the CNC safety function and the check result of the monitor or spindle safety function did not match. D An abnormality occurred during the CNC RAM check. D An abnormality occurred during the CPU test of the CPU. D The MCC interruption test was not performed when the CNC was turned on. 491 LOCAL BUS TEST ERROR An abnormality occurred during the local bus test. The mother board may be faulty.

697

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 492 Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated, contact the An abnormality occurred during the FBUS nearest FANUC Terminal Center. test. The mother board or option board may be faulty. FBUS TEST ERROR n AXIS:ILLEGAL SPEED CMD. (CNC) When the safety door was open, a specified feedrate exceeded the safety feedrate (X, Y, Z = 2000 mm/min, additional axes = 700 deg/ min). 495 n AXIS:ILLEGAL MACHINE POS.(CNC) When the safety door is open, the machine position is not within the safety area. 496 n AXIS:ILLEGAL AXIS DATA (CNC) An abnormality occurred during axis data transfer. The alarm may be issued as a result of a modification to the servo amplifier configuration. In such a case, perform axis number setting operation for the servo amplifier (set bit 4 of parameter No. 2212 for the axis in question to 1, reset the bit to 0, then turn off the power (also turn off the circuit breaker). 497 n AXIS:SAFETY PARAM TRANS ERROR An abnormality occurred during safety parameter transfer. 498 n AXIS:AXIS NUMBER NOT SET (CNC) No axis number is set for the servo amplifier. The axis number is set automatically. Turn off the power (and also turn off the circuit breaker). Remedy Remarks

494

698

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

D Details of servo alarm

#7 OVL

The details of servo alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 200, No. 201 and No.204) as shown below.
#6 LV #5 OVC #4 HCA #3 HVA #2 DCA #1 FBA #0 OFA

200

#7 (OVL) : An overload alarm is being generated. (No. 201 shows the details) #6 (LV) : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp. #5 (OVC) : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo. #4 (HCA) : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp. #3 (HVA) : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp. #2 (DCA) : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp. #1 (FBA) : A disconnection alarm is being generated. #0 (OFA) : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
#7 ALD #6 #5 #4 EXP #3 #2 #1 #0

201

When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 400 is being generated): #7 (ALD) 0 : Motor overheating 1 : Amplifier overheating When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200 (servo alarm No. 416 is being generated):
ALD 1 1 0
#7 204 #6 OFS #5 MCC

EXP 0 1 0
#4 LDA

Alarm details Builtin pulse coder disconnection (hardware) Separately installed pulse coder disconnection (hardware) Pulse coder is not connected due to software.
#3 PMS #2 #1 #0

#6 (OFS) #5 (MCC) #4 (LDA) #3 (PMS)

: : : :

A current conversion error has occured in the digital servo. A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has welded. The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective A feedback pulse error has occured because the feedback cable is defective.

699

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(6) Overtravel alarms

Message Number Contents 500 See Releasing overtravel (OT) in Part III, DETAILS OF OPERATIONS. The stroke limit I at the positive side of the n In automatic turret recovery and turret adjustment mode, the values set in NC paaxis was exceeded. rameter Nos. 1326 and 1327 are used as OVER TRAVEL : n the stroke limit values. OVER TRAVEL : +n Stroke limit I at the negative side of the naxis was exceeded. 502 OVER TRAVEL : +n Stroke limit II at the positive side of the naxis was exceeded. 503 OVER TRAVEL : n Stroke limit II was exceeded at the negative side of the naxis. 506 Check the operating area of the addition- Related parameter: al axis. Alternatively, see the description Bit 5 of No. 3004 Hardware OT was exceeded at the positive of the additional axis control in III, DETAILS OF OPERATIONS, and check the side of the naxis. signal lines. When the hard OT is not OVER TRAVEL : n used, set bit 5 of NC parameter No. 3004 to 1. Hardware OT was exceeded at the negative side of the naxis. OVER TRAVEL : +n OVER TRAVEL: +n The pretravel stroke check detected that a block end point is within the inhibited stroke area on the positive side of the N axis. 511 OVER TRAVEL: n The pretravel stroke check detected that a block end point is within the inhibited stroke area on the negative side of the N axis. Correct the program. Related parameters: Nos. 1300, 1310, 1320, 1321, 1322, 1323, 1326, 1327 Remedy Remarks

501

507

510

(7) Servo alarms

Message Number Contents 600 n AXIS: INV. DC LINK OVER CURRENT (1) Check the interphase shortcircuit and grounding of the power line. Remedy Remarks

The DC link current of the servo amplifier is too (2) Check the interphase shortcircuit high. and grounding of the motor winding. (3) Replace the servo amplifier.

700

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 601 n AXIS: INV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE The heat sink cooling fan of the servo amplifier is faulty. 602 n AXIS: INV. OVERHEAT The servo amplifier is overheated. (1) Replace the fan. (2) Replace the servo amplifier. Remedy Remarks

(1) Check the motor use condition. (2) Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier. (3) Check the chiller unit. (4) Replace the servo amplifier.

603

n AXIS: INV. IPM ALARM(OH) The intelligent power module (IPM) of the servo amplifier detected an overheat alarm.

(1) Check the motor use condition. (2) Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier. (3) Check the chiller unit. (4) Replace the servo amplifier.

604

n AXIS: AMP. COMMUNICATION ERROR Communication between the servo amplifier and power supply is abnormal.

(1) Replace the communication cable. (2) Replace the servo amplifier.

606

n AXIS: CNV. RADIATOR FAN FAILURE The external heat sink cooling fan of the power supply is faulty.

(1) Replace the external cooling fan.

607

n AXIS: CNV. SINGLE PHASE FAILURE Phase missing occurred in the input power supply.

(1) Check the power supply voltage

(8) Overheat alarms

Message Number Contents 700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT The CNC overheats. 701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR The fan motor of the CNC is stopped. 704 For heavy cutting, ease the cutting conditions. Check whether the tool is dull. The The spindle overheated during detection of spindle amplifier can also be considered to be faulty. spindle speed fluctuation. OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Check the CNC fan motor located on the rear side of the LCD, and replace it. Remedy Remarks

701

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(9) Spindle alarms

Message Number Contents 740 Select [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTE- Related parameters: NANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAME- 3700 to 4999 While spindle rotation was stopped, a position TER], to make an NC parameter check error during rigid tapping exceeded a predeter- to see if any parameter modification has mined limit. been made inappropriately. RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ERROR RIGID TAP ALARM: EXCESS ERROR While the spindle was rotating, a position error during rigid tapping exceeded a predetermined value. 742 RIGID TAP ALARM: LSI OVERFLOW An LSI overflow occurred on the spindle side during rigid tapping. 749 SSPINDLE LSI ERROR A serial communication error occurred while system activation was in progress after power on. The possible causes of the error are as follows: 1) The optical fiber cable is connected poorly, disconnected, or broken. 2) The mother board is faulty. 3) The spindle amplifier printed circuit board is faulty. 750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START FAULT When a system with a serial spindle is turned on, this alarm is issued if the spindle amplifier cannot be activated normally. The main possible causes of this problem are as follows: 1) The optical fiber cable is connected poorly, or the power to the spindle amplifier is off. 2) The power to the NC was turned on when an alarm other than SU02 or AL24 was indicated on the LED indicator of the spindle amplifier. 3) Others (such as incorrect hardware combination) For details, see internal diagnostic data No. 409. 752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE FAULT The following are not yet completed under control of the serial spindle: D Spindle positioning D Changing the mode to rigid tapping mode, tool change mode, or spindle control mode (The alarm is raised when the spindle control unit does not respond normally to the change command issued by the NC.) Turn off the power (turn off the circuit breaker), then check whether the cables connected to the spindle control unit are attached properly and whether the setting pins of the spindle control unit are set correctly. After checking, turn on the power again to check whether the alarm is released. If the alarm is still issued after the power (circuit breaker) is turned on and off, contact the FANUC technical center serving your locality. Turn off the power (turn off the circuit breaker), then check whether the cables connected to the spindle control unit are attached properly and whether the setting pins of the spindle control unit are set correctly. After checking, turn on the power again to check whether the alarm is released. If the alarm is still issued after the power (circuit breaker) is turned on and off, contact the FANUC technical center serving your locality. Remedy Remarks

741

702

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 754 In case of heavy cutting, ease the cutting Related parameters: conditions. Check whether the tool is Nos. 4247, 4248, 4249, 4250, 4341, Abnormal spindle motor load has been de- dull. By selecting [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINtected. TENANCE/SETTING], then [3:PARAMETER], check NC parameters to see if any parameter modification has been made inappropriately. SPINDLE1 ABNORMAL TORQUE ALM Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still activated, contact the In the spindle, the safety function became ab- nearest FANUC Terminal Center. normal. D The spindle safety function was not executed. D An abnormality occurred during safety parameter transfer. SPINDLE1 SAFETY FUNCTION ERROR BUS ERROR In the spindle, the spindle amplifier connection status and the spindle amplifier hardware setting do not match. The alarm may be issued as a result of a modification to the spindle amplifier configuration. In such a case, make settings on the spindle amplifier side properly. 757 LBUS ERROR When the safety door was open, the spindle motor speed exceeded 200 rpm. Alternatively, the speed determined by the CNC software and the speed determined by the spindle software did not match. Remedy Remarks

755

756

Details of diagnostic data

Diagnostic data number 409

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3 SPE

#2 S2E

#1 S1E

#0 SHE

When SPE = 1: The serial spindle parameter does not satisfy the spindle amplifier activation condition. D Action to be taken Check the parameters related to spindle control. When S1E = 1: In spindle activation, an abnormality was detected on the spindle. D Action to be taken See the list of spindle amplifier alarms. When SHE = 1:An error was detected in the serial communication module in the NC. D Action to be taken Turn the power off then on. If the alarm still exists after the power is turned off then on, it is necessary to replace the mother board. When all bits are 0, no alarm is being raised.
703

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(10) System alarms

Message Number Contents 900 Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still raised, contact the nearROM parity error. est FANUC Technical Center. When a system alarm is issued, the powReinstall the indicated software. eroff button on the operators panel cannot be used. SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) Turn off the circuit breaker. A RAM parity error occurred in the RAM mod- When contacting the FANUC technical center, report all the data displayed on the ule for part program storage (byte 0 to 1). Clear the memory. Alternatively, replace the system alarm screen. SRAM module or mother board. ROM PARITY SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1) A RAM parity error occurred in the RAM module for part program storage (byte 0 to 1). Clear the memory. Alternatively, replace the SRAM module or mother board. 912 to 919 DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 1) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 2) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 3) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 4) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 5) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 6) DRAM PARITY : (BYTE 7) RAM parity error in the DRAM module (BYTE 0 to 7) Replace the DRAM module. 920 SERVO ALARM (14 AXIS) Servo alarm. A watchdog alarm condition occurred, or a RAM parity error occurred in the axis control card. Replace the axis control card. Remedy Remarks

910

911

704

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 921 Turn the power off, then turn it on again. If the alarm is still raised, contact the nearServo alarm. A watchdog alarm condition oc- est FANUC Technical Center. curred, or a RAM parity error occurred in the When a system alarm is issued, the powaxis control card. eroff button on the operators panel canReplace the axis control card. not be used. Turn off the circuit breaker. FSSB ALARM When contacting the FANUC technical center, report all the data displayed on the FSSB alarm. system alarm screen. Replace the axis control card. SERVO ALARM (58 AXIS) CPU INTERRUPT CPU error (abnormal interrupt). The mother board or CPU card may be faulty. 935 SRAM ECC ERROR An error occurred in RAM for part program storage. Replace the SRAM module. 950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM PCxxx YYYYYYYYYYYYYY An error occurred in the PMC. For details, see the list of PMC alarms. 951 PMC WATCH DOG ALARM Error occured in the PMC (Watch dog alarm). The motherboard may be faulty. 972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER MODULE A NMI was generated on a board other than the mother board. An option board may be faulty. 973 NON MASK INTERRUPT An NMI whose cause is unknown occurred. 974 FBUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the FANUC bus. The motherboard or option board may be faulty. 975 BUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the motherboard. The motherboard may be faulty. 976 LBUS ERROR A bus error occurred on the local bus. The motherboard may be faulty. Remedy Remarks

926

930

705

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(11) Machine alarms

Message Number Contents 1000 POWER FAILURE BACKUP MODULE ALM The possible causes are as follows: D The power failure backup module is faulty. D The cable for connecting the power failure backup module is connected incorrectly or broken. An alarm related to the power failure backup D The connector panel or the I/O module on the connector panel is faulty. module was detected. D Parameter setting error (The I/O module on the connector panel is disabled. The power failure backup module is not installed, but is enabled by the parameter.) 1001 FUSE IS BLOWN A fuse on the connector panel printed circuit board has blown. 1002 EXT. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL ON The emergency stop signal input from external eqipment was off. During use of the external emergency stop signal for the external interface, an error occurred in the external equipment, and the emergency stop signal input was off. After checking the circuit, replace the fuses. Remedy Remarks

Using the control unit in the external equipment, check whether an alarm is raised while the external equipment is connected. When no error occurs in the external equipment, check the status of external equipment connection. Eliminating the alarm raised in the external equipment automatically eliminates the machine alarm. If the alarm cannot be eliminated after the connection status is checked when no external equipment is connected, contact the nearest FANUC technical center. Check whether the emergency stop button is pressed. If the emergency stop button is pressed, investigate the reason, then release the button. Releasing the emergency stop button automatically eliminates the machine alarm. If the emergency stop button was not pressed, and the machine alarm cannot be reset, it is likely that the internal circuit is defective. Contact the FANUC Technical Center nearby.

Select [QUICK]Screen, [32:MAINTENANCE/SETTING]Screen, [5:EXT.INTERFACE, FUNCTIONS, then EXTERNAL EMG STOP.

1003

EMERGENCY STOP The emergency stop button was pressed.

1004

DOOR OPEN/CLOSE SW IS DEFECTIVE

Replace the defective limit switch and make necessary adjustment. There is something wrong in a limit switch to Replace the limit switch for splash guard detect whether the automatic door is open. door interlock and adjust it. There is something wrong in a limit switch of If the alarm occurs again after the limit splash guard door interlock. switch is replaced, contact the FANUC A signal indicating a closed door state and sig- Technicall Center nearby. nal indicating an open door state are both on.

X5.6: For checking open state X5.7: For checking closed state

706

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 1005 PROGRAM ERROR (NO TOOL) The spindle rotation command was issued while no tool is mounted on the spindle. The spindle can be rotated only while a tool is mounted. (If the system settings are such that no alarm is issued, even when no tool is mounted on the spindle) 1006 SPINDLE HAS NO TOOL The tool arbor fell free. Rotate the spindle with a tool mounted on X6.1: For checking the spindle. tool clamping Remedy Remarks

If no tool is attached to the spindle, attach a tool to the spindle. Excessive load may be applied during machining, allowing the tool to come off momentarily. Check the machining conditions. If the alarm is still issued after the above items are checked, contact the FANUC technical center.

1007

PROGRAM ERROR (M19)

Spindle positioning cannot be specified during rigid tapping. Correct the program. The rigid tapping (M29) was performed during This alarm can be released by pressing spindle positioning (M19). the <RESET> key. AUTO DOOR TOTAL TIME OVER The automatic door open/close mechanism is abnormal. When the automatic door open/ close option is provided, the operation time from the specification of door open/close operation until operation is completed exceeds the setting. This may be caused by incorrect setting of the door open/close operation time or misadjustment of the door open/close mechanism (the air pressure, the air damper of the flow control valve, and the proximity switch). Check whether the automatic door can Standard timer be opened/closed completely within four value seconds. (Normally the door is opened/ T20=4000 closed in 2 to 3.5 seconds.) Check the timer setting in a PMC parameter. This alarm can be released by pressing the <RESET> key.

1008

1009

TCZ LIMIT SW IS DEFECTIVE

Check the operation of the tool change area detection switch by moving lits lever. The tool change area detection switch may be The switch status is as follows under the defective. normal status: The tool change area has been detected durOut of the ing an operation other than tool change or turIn the tool tool exchange exchange ret recovery. (The switch contacts has area opened.). area When the tool change area detection switch is TCZ 0 1 activated by the dog in the tool change area, both of the switch contacts are opened. TCZ=X6.0 TOOL BREAKAGE WAS DETECTED Replace or check the cutter, or check the spindle load damage level value. The The tool damage detection function (AI moni- alarm can be reset using the reset key on tor function) detected a failure. the operators panel. This alarm is generated when: The current spindle load exceeds a specified damage level value during drilling. A spindle load value greater than or equal to the rated value cannot be detected during drilling. When tool damage is detected, an automatic return to the Zaxis reference point occurs.

1010

707

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 1011 ALL TOOL IN SAME GROUP ARE USED Replace the tools. Clear the tool information on the tool life management screen The tool life management function detected under the quick operation screen. that the operating life of all tools in the same group expired. IN THE TOOL CHANGE AREA The Zaxis stopped in the tool change area (+area). 1013 AI TOOL MONITOR DATA ERROR The programmed data rewrite function (AI tool monitor function) detected an outofrange or invalid command error. 1014 APC ALARM Refer to the operation manual for the An alarm exclusive Kawata Tech pallet changer. for Kawata Tech palAn alarm related to the Kawata Tech pallet let changer. changer occurred. TOOL CHANGE INHIBIT AREA A tool exchange command was issued when the table was in an area where it might interfere with the pallet changer cables. The position switch is used to monitor the interference area. 1016 MAIN CONTACTOR IS WELDING Although the emergency stop state of the ROBODRILL has been cancelled, the main contactor fails to turn on despite the lapse of a preset interval. Alternatively, the main contactor fails to turn off even though the ROBODRILL has entered the emergency stop state. 1017 SPINDLE KEY IS DEFECTIVE Refer to the operation manual for the Keep relay Kawata Tech pallet changer. K2#6 The NC parameters for specifying a pro- K2#7 hibition area are as follows: Xaxis: No. 6914, No. 6934, No. 6954 Yaxis: No. 6915, No. 6935, No. 6955 Press and release the emergency stop button, while checking whether X8.4 is set to 1 and 0, respectively. If the bit can be set to 1 and 0 by pressing and releasing the emergency stop button, replace the main contactor. Check the command. Perform turret recovery operation. Remedy Remarks

1012

1015

If you are holding down the spindle key, release the key. The spindle key on the operators panel is ON The operators panel is considered to be continuously for 5 seconds or more. faulty.

708

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 1018 TCZ SWITCH IS WELDING Related parameters: The tool exchange area detection switch may D Check the parameter values for the No.6938 have malfunctioned. position switch with the data sheet. No.6958 Alternatively, the dog or parameter setting may D Check that the tool exchange area be incorrect. switch operate normally. Under the The alarm occurs under the following condinormal condition, the switch should tion. receive the inputs listed below. D During tool change, the tool has been Out of the detected as being outside the tool change In the tool tool exchange exchange area, even though was still within the area. area area (The tool change area detection switch have closed. Or, the tool change area dog TCZ 0 1 is worn.) TCZ=X6.0 D The TCZ switch has been closed (indicating that the tool is outside the tool change area) while the position switch is outside D Make sure that the two contacts of the the specified range. tool exchange area detection switch work at 15 " 2 mm on the Zaxis. The cables for the tool exchange area detec- D Check the cables. tion switch may be defective or connected Replace them if necessary. incorrectly. 1019 SPINDLE IS DEFECTIVE In the emergency stop state (with the spindle stopped), the spindle stop state could not be detected. Alternatively, in the turret recovery mode, the spindle rotated at a speed higher than the specified value. The CNC or spindle is considered to be Standard timer faulty. value Check the timer setting in a PMC parame- T58 = 4000 ter. After turning the circuit breaker off then on, turn on the power again. If the alarm is still issued, contact the FANUC technical center serving your locality. When a spindlerelated alarm has been issued or when the spindle is coasting, ignore this alarm. Please consult to FANUC service representative. Remedy Remarks

1020

KA4 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE. A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. When the servo contactor control (Y0.0) and MCC offrelay monitor (X7.3) are in the following state, an alarm is issued 200 ms later: Y0.0 = 0 and X7.3 = 0, or Y0.0 = 1 and X7.3 = 1

1021

KA5 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE. A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. When the servo ready (Y0.6) and servo ready relay monitor (X7.4) are in the following state, an alarm is issued 200 ms later: Y0.6 = 0 and X7.4 = 0, or Y0.6 = 1 and X7.4 = 1

Contact the FANUC technical center.

709

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 1022 BREAK RELAY IS DEFECT. (Emergency stop) Please consult to FANUC service representative. A relay for controlling the emergency stop is defective. When emergency stop input and relay contact point input are following status, alarm occurs after 500msec X8.4=0 X8.4=1 or X9.5=0 X9.5=1 BREAK RELAY IS DEFECT. (Z AXIS) A relay for controlling the Zaxis brake is defective. When servo ready SA and relay contact point input are following status, alarm occures after 200msec Y0.2=0 Y0.2=1 or X7.5=0 X7.5=1 1024 KA8 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE. A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. When the guard lock relay monitor (X7.5) and FSSB I/O guard lock relay monitor (X7.6) are in the following state, an alarm is issued 500 ms later: X7.5 = 0 and X7.6 = 1, or X7.5 = 1 and X7.6 = 0 1025 KA9 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE. A relay for the safety circuit is abnormal. When the MCC (X7.0) and FSSB I/O MCC off relay monitor (X7.7) are in the following state, an alarm is issued 8 ms later: X7.0 = 0 and X7.7 = 1, or X7.0 = 1 and X7.7 = 0 1026 DOOR CAN NOT UNLOCK. Pressure may be applied to the front door, preventing the pin of the lock mechanism Although the release of the door lock is speci- from being removed. When releasing the fied, the door lock cannot be released. door lock, be careful not to exert force to the door by, for example, pulling the handle or leaning against the door. CLAMP SPRINGS LIFE OVER. Disassemble the spindle clamp/unclamp Counter mechanism, and check and replace the No. 001 The useful life of the spring for the arbor clamp coned disc spring for clamping the arbor. No. 002 of the spindle has been reached. The number Contact the FANUC Technical Center. of times tools are changed is counted. This alarm is issued when the number of expansions/contractions of the spring for clamping the arbor to the spindle has exceeded the setting. OIL LEVEL IS LOWER THAN LIMIT. The oil level in the centralized lubricant tank is low. Add oil. X9.7: Detection of low oil level Keep relay K12#5 NOTE 1) Remedy Remarks

1023

1027

1028

710

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 1029 KAA3 RELAY IS DEFECTIVE The relay for the automatic side door is abnormal. This alarm is issued 500 msec after the automatic side door operation enable signal (Y0.5) and KAA3 relay monitor signal (X4.0) are set as follows: Y0.5 = 1 and X4.0 = 1 or Y0.5 = 0 and X4.0 = 0 1031 C.T.COOL. PRESSURE ALM (UPPER) The coolant viscosity is too high. The coolant pump is not adjusted properly. The relay KAA3 is considered to be faulty, or the cable is considered to be connected incorrectly or broken. Alternatively, the parameter for enabling automatic side door control is set for a machine that has no automatic side door. Remedy Remarks

1 2 3

Check the coolant viscosity. If the vis- X5.1: Detection of cosity is too high, change the coolant. upper pressure limit Adjust the pressure of the center through pump. If the alarm is still issued after the above actions are applied, check whether there is a switch problem or faulty cabling. Add coolant. X5.3: Detection of Check the piping, and repair any lower pressure limit loose or damaged joints if any. The pump has malfunctioned. Replace it. If the above alarm is still issued after the above actions are applied, check whether there is a switch problem or faulty wiring. Replace the line filter. X5.2: Detection of If the alarm is still issued after the filter clogged state is replaced, check whether there is a switch problem or faulty wiring. There is a program error. Correct the program. Specify M21 before the block containing M22.

1032

C.T.COOL. PRESSURE ALM (LOWER)

The coolant level is low. There is coolant leakage due to the use of the 3 wrong piping or damage to the piping. 4

1 2

1033

FILTER LOADING (C.T.COOLANT) The line filter has been clogged for more than 100 hours.

1 2

1034

NOT READY C.T.COOLANT PUMP

M22 is specified before the centerthrough 2 pump starts. 1035 C.T.COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT

Check the following items, and take ap- X5.4: Detection of propriate action: overload The centerthrough coolant motor is over- 1 Check whether idling is performed. loaded. 2 Check whether the set pressure is too high. 3 Check whether the suction filter is clogged and whether there is any leakage from the suction pipe. 4 Check whether there is any leakage from the pump. 5 If the pump leaks, replace the pump. COOLANT LOWER LIMIT The coolant level is low. 1 2 Add coolant. X5.0: Detection of If the alarm is still issued after coolant lower limit is added, check whether there is a NOTE 1) switch problem or faulty wiring.

1036

711

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 1037 TIME OVER (M CODE) Check the peripheral equipment corresponding to the M code command that The M code operation time exceeds the speci- caused the timeout alarm. fied value (standard: 30 s). DUST CATCHER ALARM. An alarm is issued in the dust collector. 1039 CYCLE START SIGNAL IS DEFECTIVE. The start button must be pressed only Keep relay when needed. The start button (X21.6) K6#5 The start button was pressed at the end of a may be faulty. program or when operation stopped. PROBE SYSTEM ERROR The probe system is defective. 1041 PROBE ON/OFF ERROR Check the wire connections, cabling, and Keep relay external interface settings. K17#1 The probe or receiving sensor may be defective. Refer to the manual on the dust collector. X5.7: Alarm Remedy Remarks

1038

1040

Check the probe and receiving sensor orientations, and check whether the probe and receiving sensor window are There is no response to a probe ON/OFF com- dirty. This error may be due to a probe switchmand. ing problem, dead battery, or receiving sensor failure. PROBE SIGNAL ERROR An error signal was output from the probe. Check the wire connections, cabling, and Keep relay external interface settings. K17#1 The probe battery may be dead. Replace the battery.

1042

1043

PROBE BATTERY LOW The voltage of the probe battery has lowered.

1044

OVER TRAVEL (STYLUS)

Check the setting of the working probe. Check the various settings of the NC proThe stylus on the scanning probe manufac- gram and offset data. tured by RENISHAW is bent excessively. PROBE ERROR The scanning probe manufactured by RENISHAW does not operate normally. For details, refer to the manual of the scanning probe.

1045

1046

PROBE IS MOUNTING A tool change or spindle rotation was specified with a cable connected to the scanning probe manufactured by RENISHAW.

An operation that rotates the spindle is prohibited.

712

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 1047 INTERNAL FAN STOP (SERVO AMP.) The fan installed on the top of the servo amplifier case stopped. 1048 EXTERNAL FAN STOP (SERVO AMP.) The fan for cooling the servo amplifier heat sink stopped. 1049 INTERNAL FAN STOP (PWR SUPPLY) The cooling fan inside the power supply stopped. 1050 EXTERNAL FAN STOP (PWR SUPPLY) The fan for cooling the power supply heat sink stopped. 1051 OVERHEAT (POWER SUPPLY) The power supply is overheated. 1052 OVERHEAT (SERVO AMP.) The servo amplifier is overheated. 1053 SPINDLE ROTATION IS PROHIBITED While the probe is attached to the spindle, spindle rotation is not permitted. A spindle rotation was specified with the probe The number of the magazine to which the probe is attached is set in PMC parameattached to the spindle. ter data table D100. Turn off the circuit breaker, and halt operation for a while. If an alarm cannot be released, contact the FANUC technical center. Replace the fan. Remedy Remarks

NOTE 1 These alarms are detected in the following cases: D When the power is turned on (when the servo system is activated) D When machining ends (when any of the following codes is specified: M00, M01 (when the M01 stop button on the operators panel is ON), M02, M30, M60, M61, M62, M63, M64, and M65)

713

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(12) Alarms related to the conversational programming function A) SUPER C.A.P iM: Alarms other than alarms in contouring (number: 3175)
Message INPUT VALUE IS ERRONEOUS COPIED DOUBLE DEFINITION ERROR IN COPY TOTAL WORK COORD. SELLING COM. UNAPPLI, TOOL WAS SETTED DATA IS LACKING OFFSET VALUE IS UNDER 0 INTERFERE WITH WORK (RING) CHAMF, TOOL EXCEDS Z POINT CHAMF. TOOL ANGLE IS SMALL OFFSET VALUE IS 0 DIA. IS BIGGER THAN R. TAPER IS INSUFFICIENT Explanation Necessary data is not input. Input data is not correct. An already set copy was set again. Related menu All menus Copy

The total number of copies is incorrect. Copy (random) The number of inputs is insufficient for the total number of copies. Although all/group copy is specified, the workpiece coordinate All menus system is used for each menu. A tool of unusable type is specified. Drilling

Although both X and Y must be specified, only X or Y is specified. Copy (random) Point group The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0 or less. Facing The tool interferes with the opposite face. Ring machining

The chamfering tool interferes with the bottom plane (Z point) dur- Side machining ing chamfering. Pocket cutting During machining such as tapering of a side face, the tapering tool Side machining angle is smaller than the taper angle. The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0. Side machining Pocket cutting

Because the cutter diameter is larger than the corner radius, the Side machining corner cannot be rounded. Pocket cutting When tapering was performed with reference to the top surface, Side machining the cutting allowance at the bottom became insufficient because of the too large taper angle. In internal side face machining, side faces intersect, so there is no Side machining bottom. This is because the taper angle is too large. Because the approach amount is too large, interference with an Side machining opposite side occurs. Pocket cutting Because of the cutting width, the travel distance per cut is 0.00001 Pocket cutting or less. Because of the too large cutter diameter, machining is impossible. Side machining Pocket cutting The T code is blank or invalid. No chamfering tool angle is set in the tool file. All menus Side machining Pocket cutting

TAPER ANGLE IS TOO BIG APPROACH AMOUNT IS BIG CUT WAIDTH IS TOO SMALL TOOL IS TOO BIG TCODE IS NOT CORRECT CHAMF.TOOL ANGLE IS LACK.

714

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

B) SUPER C.A.P iM: Alarms in contouring

Alarm No. 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3191 3191 3191 3191 3191 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 3190, 3191, 3192 Message LACKING BOTTOM REMOV LACKING Z POINT LACKING SIDE REMOVE LACKING RGH. TOOL ID NO. LACKING FIN. TOOL ID NO. LACKING CHM. TOOL ID NO. LACKING RGH. SPINDLE SPEED LACKING FIN.SPINDLE SPEED LACKING CHM. SPINDLE SPEED UNABLE TO EXECUTE TOOL TRACE CLOSE TO OUTER AND ISLAND TOOL IS TOO SMALL UNABLEBIDIRECTIONAL CUTTING TO T. ISLAND GT 6 EFFICTIVE CUTTING WIDTH IS 0 TOOL OFF SET MEASUREMENT IS 0 BOTTOM REMOV. LT BOTTOM FIN. SIDE REMOV. LT SIDE FINSH LACKING RGH. HCODE NO. LACKING FIN. HCODE NO. LACKING CHM. HCODE NO. LACKING RGH. DCODE NO. LACKING FIN. DCODE NO. LACKING CHM. DCODE NO. Explanation The cutting allowance is 0. The coordinates of the Z point are not input. The cutting allowance is 0. The tool ID number is not input. The tool ID number is not input. The tool ID number is not input. The spindle speed is not input. The spindle speed is not input. The spindle speed is not input. The loci of the pocket outside wall and island outside wall interfere. There is a conflict in mesh search. In machining of an outside wall, the start point and end point of the tool path are not closed. Bidirectional cutting can be performed only for simple shapes with no island. Up to six islands are permitted. The valid cutting width is 0. No cutter compensation data is set. The cutting allowance of the bottom is smaller than the finishing allowance. The cutting allowance of the side face is smaller than the finishing allowance. No length compensation number is input. No length compensation number is input. No length compensation number is input. No diameter compensation number is input. No diameter compensation number is input. No diameter compensation number is input. There is no input data for inquiry item OFFSET DIRECTION. There is no input data for inquiry item CUTTING DIRECTION. There is no input data for pocket island continuation.

3191 INCORRECT OFFSET DIRECTION Pocket outside wall Pocket island 3191 3191 INCORRECT CUTTING DIRECTION INCORRECT END OF ISLAND

715

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

C) Manual Guide
Alarm No. 3001 Message INPUT VALUE IS ERRONEOUS. Explanation Necessary data is not entered. Or entered data is invalid. Display the block data of popup window, at which is occurred the alarm, and enter the correct data after confirming it. The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0 or less. Confirm the D code, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the offset table. The tool interferes with the opposite surface. Confirm the tool, at which is occurred the alarm and select the tool of smaller radius than the last time. Machining is impossible because the cutter diameter is too large. Confirm the tool, at which is occurred the alarm and select the tool of smaller radius than the last time. The tool interferes with the opposite edge because the length of approach is too long. Confirm the approach data, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the approach. Corner R interferes with the opposite one because the radius of corner R is too large. Confirm the radius of corner R, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the radius. Corner C interferes with the opposite one because the chamfer amount is too large. Confirm the chamfer amount of corner C, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to the chamfer. Corner R machining can not be performed because the cutter diameter is larger than corner R. Confirm the tool, at which is occurred the alarm and select the tool of smaller radius than the last time. The chamfering tool interferes with the bottom surface (Z point) in chamfering. Confirm the block data related to chamfer tool, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. The angle at which the chamfering tool is placed is not specified. Confirm the block data related to chamfer tool, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. The tool path can not create because the memory for the calculation is over the limitation. Divide the entered contour figure block or machining area. The tool path can not create because the contour shape is not correct. Confirm the block data of the contour shape, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. The tool path can not create because the data of cutting condition is not correct. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it.

3002

OFFSET VALUE IS UNDER 0.

3003

INTERFERE WITH WORK (RING)

3004

TOOL IS TOO BIG.

3005

APPROACH AMOUNT IS BIG.

3006

CORNER RADIUS (R) IS BIG.

3007

CHAMFER AMOUNT IS BIG.

3008

DIA. IS BIGGER THAN R.

3012

CHAMF. TOOL EXCEDS A POINT

3013

CHAMF. TOOL ANGLE IS LACK

3014

MEMORY IS NOT SUFFICIENT

3015

INCORRECT MACHINING FIGURE

3016

INCORRECT CUT CONDITIONS

716

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Alarm No. 3017

Message INCORRECT START POINT

Explanation The machining can not be performed because the cutting start point positions at the outer machining field. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contour shape, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. The cutting start point can not be calculated because the data is not correct. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contour shape, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. The maximum allowable number of cuts was exceeded. Check the machining figure and machining condition data of the block that caused the alarm, then reenter correct values. The tool interferes with the machining shape. Confirm the block data related to the cutting condition and contour shape, at which is occurred the alarm and enter the correct data to it. D code is not specified. Before the block at which is occurred the alarm, specify D code by using Tool Setting menu. No input item is entered for argument address A. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address B. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address C. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address I. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address J. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address K. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address D. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address E. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address F. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address H. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address M. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address Q. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address R. Enter data.

3018

START POING NOT OBTAINED

3019

NUMBER OF CUTS OVER LIMIT

3020

INTERFERES MACHINING FIG.

3022

DCODE IS NOT SPECIFIED

3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3106 3107 3108 3109 3111 3113 3117 3118

SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. A SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. B SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. C SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. I SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. J SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. K SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. D SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. E SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. F SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. H SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. M SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. Q SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. R

717

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Alarm No. 3119 3120 3121 3122 3123 3124 3125 3126 3130 3131

Message SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. S SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. T SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. U SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. V SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. W SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. X SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. Y SETTING DATA ERROR. ADD. Z ERROR:PROBE LENGTH ERROR:STYLUS BALL DIAM. X

Explanation No input item is entered for argument address S. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address T. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address U. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address V. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address W. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address X. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address Y. Enter data. No input item is entered for argument address Z. Enter data. The probe length is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. The stylus ball diameter along the Xaxis is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. The stylus ball diameter along the Yaxis is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. The Xaxis compensation amount at the stylus position is null. Enter data. The Yaxis compensation amount at the stylus position is null. Enter data. The feedrate (f) in the first measurement is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. The first measurement distance (a) is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. The second measurement value (b) is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. The overrun amount (g) at measurement is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. The approach feedrate (fa) at measurement is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data. Return amount (e) after the second contact is null or not greater than 0. Enter correct data.

3132

ERROR:STYLUS BALL DIAM. Y

3133 3134 3135

ERROR:STYLUS BALL OFS X ERROR:STYLUS BALL OFS. Y ERROR:MEASURING 1ST FEED

3136 3137 3138

ERROR:MEASURING 1ST DIST ERROR:MEASURING 2ND DIST ERROR:MEASURING OVERLAP

3139

ERROR:FEED FOR APPROACH

3140

ERROR:ESCAPE OFFSET

718

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Alarm No. 3141

Message CHECK SENSOR SIGNAL

Explanation The G31 skip signal was already ON before measurement. (The skip signal was turned ON at the measurement start position.) Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth. Even when the overrun amount has been reached, the signal was not turned ON. Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth. Check whether the power to the touch probe is on. The G31 skip signal went ON before the measurement start point was reached. Check the touch probe wire connections and so forth. Check the measurement program to see if there is probe contact during approach. 0 is set in parameter No. 9150. Check the setting. (Standard value: 800) 0 is set in parameter No. 12050. Check the setting. (Standard value: 19) There is no measurement cycle option. Add the option.

3142

NO TOUCH

3143

PROBE TOUCHED WHILE APPR.

3147 3148 3149

PARAM. NO. 9150 IS UNDEFINED PARAM NO. 12050 IS UNDEF. NO OPTION

719

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(13) Program errors (P/S alarms 5000 and up)

Message Number Contents 5000 ILLEGAL COMMAND CODE The specified code was incorrect in the highprecision contour control mode. (Highprecision contour control) 5003 ILLEGAL PARAMETER (HPCC) There is an invalid parameter. (Highprecision contour control) 5004 HPCC NOT READY The RISC board is not operable. (AI high precision contour control) 5006 TOO MANY WORD IN ONE BLOCK The number of words specified in a block exceeded 26. (Highprecision contour control) 5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE In the HPCC mode, the machine moved beyond the limit. (Highprecision contour control) 5009 PARAMETER ZERO (DRY RUN) The maximum feedrate (parameter No. 1422) or the feedrate in dry run (parameter No. 1410) is 0. (Highprecision contour control) 5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified. I/O is incorrect. modify the program. 5011 PARAMETER ZERO(CUT MAX) The maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422)is 0. (Highprecision contour control) 5012 G05 P10000 ILLEGAL START UP (HPCC) Function category: Highprecision contour control Alarm details: G05 P10000 has been specified in a mode from which the system cannot enter HPCC mode. (Highprecision contour control) 5013 HPCC: CRC OFS REMAIN AT CANCEL G05P0 has been specified in G41/G42 mode or with offset remaining. (Highprecision contour control) 5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND Transfer cannot be performed because no trace data exists. 5015 NO ROTATION AXIS The specified rotation axis does not exist for tool axis direction handle feed. 5016 ILLEGAL COMBINATION OF M CODE M codes which belonged to the same group were specified in a block. Alternatively,an M code which must be specified without other M codes in the block was specified in a block with other M codes.

720

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 5043 TOO MANY G68 NESTING Threedimensional coordinate conversion G68 has been specified three or more times. 5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR A G68 command block contains a format error. This alarm is issued in the following cases: 1. I, J, or K is missing from a G68 command block (missing coordinate rotation option). 2. I, J, and K are 0 in a G68 command block. 3. R is missing from a G68 command block. 5050 ILLCOMMAND IN CHOPPING MODE A command for switching the major axis has been specified for circular threading. Alternatively, a command for setting the length of the major axis to 0 has been specified for circular threading. 5059 RADIUS IS OUT OF RANGE A radius exceeding nine digits has been specified for circular interpolation with the center of the arc specified with I, J, and K. 5060 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G02.3/G03.3 There is a parameter setting error. Parameter No. 5641 (linear axis setting) is not set. The axis set in parameter No. 5641 is not a linear axis. Parameter No. 5642 (rotation axis setting) is not set. The axis set in parameter No. 5642 is not a rotation axis. The linear axis and rotation axis cannot be controlled by the CNC. (More than the value set in parameter No. 1010 is set.) 5061 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G02.3/G03.3 There is a format error in the exponential interpolation command (G02.3/G03.3). Address I, J, or K is not specified. 0 is set in address I, J, or K. 5062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G02.3/G03.3 An illegal value is specified in the exponential interpolation command (G02.3/G03.3). A value that makes exponential interpolation impossible is specified. (For example, a negative value is specified in In.) 5064 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT (ISB, ISC) Circular interpolation has been specified on a plane consisting of axes having different increment systems. 5067 G05 PO COMMANDED IN G68/G51 MODE (HPCC) Highprecision contour control mode cannot be canceled during G51 (scaling) or G68 (coordinate system rotation). Correct the program. 5068 G31 FORMAT ERROR One of the following errors is found in the continuous highspeed skip command: 1. The movement axis is not specified. 2. More than one movement axis is specified.

721

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 5073 NO DECIMAL POINT No decimal point has been specified for an address requiring a decimal point. 5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a single block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same group have been specified in a single block. 5082 DATA SERVER ERROR This alarm is detailed on the data server message screen. 5110 NOT STOP POSITION (G05.1 G1) An illegal G code is specified in modeller control mode (G5.1 Q1). 5111 IMPROPER MODEL GCODE (G05.1 G1) When modeller control mode (G5.1 Q1) is specified, an illegal G code is modal. 5112 G08 CAN NOT BE COMMANDED (G05.1 G1) Lookahead control (G08) is specified in modeller control mode (G5.1 Q1). 5113 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE (G05.1) Simple highprecision contour control (G05.1) was specified in MDI mode. 5114 NOT STOP POSITION (G05.1 Q1) At the time of restart after manual intervention, the coordinates at which the manual intervention occurred have not been restored. 5115 SPL : ERROR There is an error in the specification of the rank. No knot is specified. The knot specification has an error. The number of axes exceeds the limits. Other program errors 5116 SPL : ERROR There is a program error in a block under lookahead control. Monotone increasing of knots is not observed. In NURBS interpolation mode, a mode that cannot be used together is specified. 5117 SPL : ERROR The first control point of NURBS is incorrect. 5118 SPL : ERROR After manual intervention with manual absolute mode set to on, NURBS interpolation was restarted.

722

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 5122 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SPIRAL There is a specification error in spiral interpolation or conical interpolation. Specifically, this alarm is issued for the following causes: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 5123 L=0 is specified. Q=0 is specified. R/, R/, C is specified. Height increment 0 is specified. Three axes or more are specified as the height axes. When there are two height axes, height increment is specified. Although there is no helical interpolation option, conical interpolation is specified. When difference in radius > 0, Q < 0 is specified. When difference in radius < 0, Q > 0 is specified. Although no height axis is specified, height increment is specified.

OVER TOLERANCE OF END POINT The difference between the specified end point position and the calculated end point position exceeds the permissible range (parameter No. 3471).

5124

CAN NOT COMMAND SPIRAL Spiral interpolation or conical interpolation was specified in the following modes: 1) 2) 3) Scaling Programmable mirror image Polar coordinate interpolation

In cutter compensation C mode, the start point is set to the center, or the end point is set to the center. 5134 FSSB : OPEN READY TIME OUT Initialization did not place FSSB in the open ready state. 5135 FSSB : ERROR MODE FSSB has entered error mode. 5136 FSSB : NUMBER OF AMPS IS SMALL In comparison with the number of controlled axes, the number of amplifiers recognized by FSSB is not enough. 5137 FSSB : CONFIGURATION ERROR FSSB detected a configuration error. 5138 FSSB : AXIS SETTING NOT COMPLETE In automatic setting mode, axis setting has not been made yet. 5139 FSSB : ERROR Servo initialization did not terminate normally. The optical fiber cable may be faulty, or connection to an amplifier or between modules may be incorrect. Check the optical fiber cable and connection.

723

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 5157 PARAMETER ZERO (AICC) Zero is set in the parameter for the maximum cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1422 or 1432). Zero is set in the parameter for the acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (parameter No. 1770 or 1771). Set the parameter correctly. 5196 ILLEGAL OPERATION (HPCC) Detachment was performed during highprecision contour control. When detachment is performed during highprecision contour control, this alarm is issued after the currently executed block terminates. 5197 FSSB : OPEN TIME OUT The CNC permitted FSSB to open, but FSSB was not opened. 5198 FSSB : ID DATA NOT READ Temporary assignment failed, so amplifier initial ID information could not be read. 5199 FINE TORQUE SENSING PARAMETER There is an error in a parameter related to the fine torque sensing function. D The storage interval is invalid. D An invalid axis number is set for a target axis. Correct the parameter. 5212 SCREEN COPY : PARAMETER ERROR There is a parameter setting error. Check whether 4 is set as the I/O channel. 5213 SCREEN COPY : COMMUNICATION ERROR The memory card cannot be used. Check the memory card. (Check whether the card is writeprotected or defective.) 5214 SCREEN COPY : DATA TRANSFER ERROR Data transfer to a memory card failed. Check for the available space on the memory card. Also check whether the memory card was removed during data transfer. 5219 CAN NOT RETURN You cannot perform manual intervention and restoration during threedimensional coordinate conversion. 5220 REFERENCE POINT ADJUSTMENT MODE A parameter for automatically setting the reference position is set (bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 = 1). Perform automatic setting. (Position the machine to the reference position manually, then perform manual reference position return.) Supplement: Automatic setting sets bit 2 of parameter No. 1819 to 0. 5222 SRAM CORRECTABLE ERROR An SRAM correctable error cannot be removed. Cause: A problem occurred in memory during memory initialization. Action: Replace the SRAM module. 5257 G41/G42 NOT ALLOWED IN MDI MODE G41/G42 (cutter compensation C) was specified in MDI mode. (The setting of bit 4 of parameter No. 5008 is followed.)

724

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Message Number Contents 5300 SET ALL OFFSET DATAS AGAIN When the setting for enabling or disabling the inch/metric automatic conversion function of tool offset data (bit 0 of parameter No. 5006) has been changed, all tool offset data must be set again. This is posted to the operator. When this alarm is issued, set all tool offset data again. If the machine is used without setting data again, the machine will malfunction. 5302 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G68 MODE Setting of a coordinate system was specified in the coordinate system rotation mode. 5306 MODE CHANGE ERROR In onetouch macro call, mode switching at the start time is not performed correctly. 5307 INTERNAL DATA OVER FLOW In the following function, internal data exceeds the permissible range: 1) Improvement in rotation axis feedrate 5311 FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTION FSSB connection is invalid. 1. This alarm is issued when axes with adjacent odd and even servo axis numbers (parameter No. 1023) are assigned to amplifiers connected to different FSSB systems. 2. This alarm issued when the system does not satisfy the requirements for highspeed HRV control, two FSSBs use different current control intervals, and the pulse module used is connected to a different FSSB system. 5400 SPL:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND There is an axis specification error in spline interpolation or smooth interpolation. When an axis that is not a spline axis is specified in the spline interpolation mode, this alarm is issued. The spline axis refers to an axis specified in the block containing G06.1 or the following block. In case of smooth interpolation, the axis specified in G5.1Q2 is illegal. 5401 SPL:ILLEGAL COMMAND In a G code mode in which G06.1 must not be specified, G06.1 is specified. 5402 SPL:ILLEGAL AXIS MOVING A movement was made along an axis that was not a spline interpolation axis. For example, when spline interpolation with the X and Yaxes set as two spline axes is performed in the threedimensional tool compensation mode in which the three components of the offset vector include the X, Y, and Zaxes, a movement along the Zaxis occurs, causing this alarm. 5411 NURBS:ILLEGAL ORDER The number of steps is specified incorrectly. 5412 NURBS:NO KNOT COMMAND No knot is specified. Alternatively, in NURBS interpolation mode, a block not relating to NURBS interpolation is specified. 5413 NURBS:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND An axis not specified with controlled points is specified in the first block.

725

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 5414 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT The number of blocks containing knots only is insufficient. 5415 NURBS:ILLEGAL CANCEL Although NURBS interpolation is not completed yet, the NURBS interpolation mode is turned off. 5416 NURBS:ILLEGAL MODE A mode that cannot be used with NURBS interpolation mode is specified in NURBS interpolation mode. 5417 NURBS:ILLEGAL MULTIKNOT As many knots as the number of steps are not specified at the start and end points. 5418 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT VALUE Knots do not increase in monotone. 5425 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE
The offset number is illegal.

5440

ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS SELECTED The hole machining axis specified for the hole machining canned cycle is illegal. The Z point of the hole machining axis is not specified in the block specifying a canned cycle G code. Alternatively, when there is a parallel axis, the axis parallel to the hole machining axis is also specified simultaneously.

5446

CRC:NO AVOIDANCE Because there is no interference evade vector, the interference check evade function of cutter compensation cannot evade interference.

5447

CRC:DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE The interference check evade function of cutter compensation determines that an evade operation will lead to danger.

5448

CRC:INTERFERENCE TO AVD. In the interference check evade function of cutter compensation, a further interference occurs for an already created interference evade vector.

5455

ILLEGAL ACC. PARAMETER There is an error in permissible acceleration parameters for optimum torque acceleration/deceleration. The cause is one of the following: 1) The ratio of the deceleration to the acceleration is lower than the limit. 2) The time for decelerating the feedrate to 0 exceeds the maximum value.

726

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

F.2
SPINDLE AMPLIFIER

F.2.1
Alarms
CNC screen display 7101 9001

SPM indication 01

Description

Action

MOTOR OVERHEAT

2 3 4 7102 9002 02 EXCESSIVE VELOCITY ERROR 1 2 7103 9003 7104 9004 7106 9006 7107 9007 03 DC LINK FUSE BLOWN 1 2

Check the ambient temperature and load status (cutting condition and acceleration/deceleration frequency). If the cooling fan stops, replace it. Check and correct the parameter. Replace the feedback cable. Check and correct the cutting conditions to decrease the load. Correct parameter No. 4082. Replace the spindle amplifier. Check the motor insulation status.

04 06

INPUT POWER SUPPLY OPEN PHASE AND POWER MOTOR THERMAL DETECTION DISCONNECTED OVERSPEED

Check the state of power input to the power supply. 1 2 1 2 Check and correct the parameter. Replace the feedback cable. Replace the feedback cable. Check for a sequence error. (For example, check whether spindle synchronization was specified when spindle motor could not be turned.) Improve the heat sink cooling status. Check load status. Check the power supply selection. Replace the power supply. Check the motor insulation status. Check the parameter specific to each motor model. Replace the spindle amplifier. Check the ladder program. Replace the magnetic contactor for switching.

07

7109 9009 7111 9011 7112 9012

09

MAIN CIRCUIT OVERLOAD/IPM OVERLOAD DC LINK OVERVOLTAGE

1 2 1 2 1 2 3

11

12

DC LINK OVERCURRENT/IPM ALARM

7115 9015 7116 9016 7118 9018 7119 9019

15

SPEED RANGE SWITCHING AND SPINDLE SWITCHING ALARM SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT PROGRAM DATA ERROR IN SUMCHECK PHASE U CURRENT DETECTOR CIRCUIT EXCESSIVE OFFSET

1 2

16 18 19

Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Replace the spindle amplifier.

727

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

CNC screen display 7120 9020 7121 9021 7124 9024

SPM indication 20 21 24

Description

Action

PHASE V CURRENT DETECTOR CIRCUIT EXCESSIVE OFFSET WRONG SETTING IN ROTATIONAL DIRECTION OF POSITION SENSOR SERIAL TRANSFER DATA ERROR

Replace the spindle amplifier. Check and correct the parameters. (No. 4001#4) 1 2 Place the CNCtospindle cable away from the power cable. Replace the communication cable. Replace the cable. Readjust the preamplifier. Replace the feedback cable. Replace the position coder.

7126

26

SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT CVELO DETECT POSITION CODER SIGNAL DISCONNECTED SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT CPOS DETECT SHORTPERIOD OVERLOAD PSM MAIN CIRCUIT OVER CURRENT

1 2 1 2

7127 9027 7128 7129 9029 7130 9030 7131 9031 7132 9032 7133 9033 7134 9034 7135 9035 7136 9036

27

28 29 30

1 Replace the cable. 2 Readjust the preamplifier. Check and correct the load status. 1 2 Replace the power supply. Check the reactor specifications.

31

SPEED DETECTION SIGNAL Check and correct the load status. DISCONNECTED AND MOTOR LOCK ALARM SERIAL COMMUNICATION LSI INTERNAL RAM ERROR DC LINK PRECHARGE FAILURE PARAMETER DATA OUT OF SPECIFICATION SPN_n_ : EX SETTING GEAR RATIO ERROR COUNTER OVERFLOW Replace the spindle amplifier contrCheck and correct the load status.ol PC board. Replace the power supply. Correct the parameter setting. Correct the parameter setting. 1 Check and correct the gear ratio, position error, and the parameter for position detector mounting direction setting. Check and correct the sequence.

32 33 34 35 36

2 7137 9037 7139 37 39 SPEED DETECTOR PARAMETER ERROR SPN_n_ : 1ROT Cs SIGNAL ERROR

Modify the speed detector parameter setting. 1 Adjust the onerotation signal in the preamplifier. 2 Check the shield status of the cable. 3 Replace the cable. Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. Check and correct the parameter. Replace the feedback cable. Replace the position coder.

7140 9040 7141 9041

40 41

SPN_n_ : NO 1ROT Cs SIGNAL DETECT

POSITION CORDER ONEROTATION 1 SIGNAL DETECTION ERROR 2 3

728

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

CNC screen display 7142 9042 7143 9043 7144 9044 7146 9046

SPM indication 42

Description

Action

POSITION CORDER ONEROTATION 1 SIGNAL NOT DETECTED 2

Replace the feedback cable. Replace the position coder.

43 44 46

SPN_n_ : DISCON. PC FOR DIF. SP. Replace the cable. MODE SPN_n_ : CONTROL CIRCUIT(AD) ERROR Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. Check and correct the parameter. Replace the feedback cable. Replace the position detector. Replace the feedback cable. Replace the position coder.

POSITION CORDER ONEROTATION 1 SIGNAL DETECTION ERROR 2 DURING THREAD CUTTING 3 POSITION CORDER SIGNAL ERROR 1 2

7147 9047 7149 9049 7150 9050

47

49 50

SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. DIF. SPEED EXCESSIVE SPEED COMMAND COMPUTED VALUE DURING THE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL OF THE SPINDLE DC LINK UNDER VOLTAGE

Check whether the calculated differential rate exceeds the maximum motor speed. Check and correct the gear ratio and position gain settings.

7151 9051 7152 9052

51

1 2 1 2 1 2

Check and correct the power supply voltage. Replace the magnetic contactor. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board in the CNC. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board in the CNC.

52

ITP SIGNAL ERROR I

7153 9053

53

ITP SIGNAL ERROR II

7154 9054 7155 9055 7156 9056 7157 9057 7158 9058 7159 9059 7162 9062 7166 9066

54 55

OVERLOAD CURRENT ALARM POWER LINE STATE ERROR AT SPINDLE OR SPEED RANGE SWITCHING CONTROL CIRCUIT COOLING FAN STOPPED EXCESSIVE CONVERTER DECELERATION POWER PSM MAIN CIRCUIT OVERLOAD

Review the load state. 1 2 Replace the magnetic contactor. Check and correct the sequence.

56 57 58

Replace the cooling fan inside the spindle amplifier. Reduce the acceleration/deceleration duty cycle. 1 2 Check the cooling state of the power supply. Replace the power supply.

59 62 66

PSM COOLING FAN STOPPED OVER RANGE IN MOTOR SPEED COMMAND SPM/SPM TRANSMISSION DATA ERROR (EGB MODE)

Replace the cooling fan inside the power supply. Check and correct the parameters. (No. 4021, 4056 to 4059) 1 2 Replace the cable. Check and correct the connection.

729

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

CNC screen display 7169 9069 7170 9070 7171 9071 7172 9072 7173 9073

SPM indication 69 70 71 72 73

Description

Action

SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETY SPEED EXCEEDED) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (AXIS DATA ERROR) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETY PARAMETER ERROR) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (MOTOR SPEED DECISION MISMATCH) SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR DISCONNECTED

Check the parameter. Check the spindle amplifier setting. Turn off the power then turn on the power. Turn off the power then turn on the power. 1 2 3 4 Replace the feedback cable. Check the shield processing. Check and correct the connection. Adjust the sensor.

7174 9074 7175 9075 7176 9072 7177 9072 7178 9072 7179 9079 7181 9081

74 75 76 77 78 79 81

HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TEST ERROR 1 (CPU) HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TEST ERROR 2 (CPU) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (CPU TEST ERROR) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (AXIS NUMBER DECISION MISMATCH) SERIAL SPINDLE ERROR (SAFETY PARAMETER DECISION MISMATCH) HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC TEST ERROR 3 (INITIAL CHECK) ONEROTATION SIGNAL DETECTION ERROR IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR ONEROTATION SIGNAL IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR NOT DETECTED SIGNAL ERROR IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR MOTOR SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL FEEDBACK DISCONNECTED

Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. Replace the spindle amplifier. Turn off the power then turn on the power. Turn off the power then turn on the power. Replace the spindle amplifier control PC board. 1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 Check and correct the parameter. Replace the feedback cable. Adjust the sensor. Replace the feedback cable. Adjust the sensor. Replace the feedback cable. Adjust the sensor. Replace the feedback cable. Check the shield processing. Check and correct the connection. Check and correct the parameter. Adjust the sensor. Check and correct the parameter. Replace the feedback cable. Adjust the sensor.

7182 9082 7183 9083 7184 9084

82

83

84

7185 9085

85

ONEROTATION SIGNAL DETECTION ERROR IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL FEEDBACK

730

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

CNC screen display 7186 9086

SPM indication 86

Description

Action

ONEROTATION SIGNAL IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL FEEDBACK NOT DETECTED SIGNAL ERROR IN SPINDLE SENSOR SIGNAL FOR EXTERNAL FEEDBACK SPN_n_ : COOLING RADIFAN FAILURE SPN_n_ : OTHER SPINDLE ALARM SPN_n_ : OTHER CONVERTER ALARM SPN_n_ : AMP COMMUNICATION ERROR

1 2

Replace the feedback cable. Adjust the sensor.

7187 9087 7188 9088 7197 9097 7198 9098 9110

87

1 2

Replace the feedback cable. Adjust the sensor.

88 97 98 b0

Replace the external cooling fan of the spindle amplifier. Check the alarm indication of the spindle amplifier. Check the alarm indication of the power supply. 1 Replace the communication cable between the amplifier modules. 2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board or power supply control printed circuit board. Replace the power supply control printed circuit board. 1 Check the regenerative resistor connection. 2 Check the selected motor. 3 Replace the power supply unit. Replace the cooling fan. 1 Replace the communication cable between the CNC and spindle amplifier. 2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. 3 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board on the CNC side. 1 Replace the communication cable between the CNC and spindle amplifier. 2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. 3 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board on the CNC side. 1 Replace the communication cable between the CNC and spindle amplifier. 2 Replace the spindle amplifier control printed circuit board. 3 Replace the spindle interface printed circuit board on the CNC side.

9111 9112

b1 b2

SPN_n_ : CONV.LOW VOLT CONTROL SPN_n_ : CONV.EXDISCHARGE POW. SPN_n_ : CONV.COOLING FAN FAILURE SPN_n_ : COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR

9113 9120

b3 c0

9121

c1

SPN_n_ : COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR

9122

c2

SPN_n_ : COMMUNICATION DATA ERROR

731

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

F.2.2
List of Error Codes

If a parameter is set incorrectly or the sequence is incorrect, the error LED (yellow) of the indicator on the spindle amplifier is turned on, and an error number is displayed. Check the error number displayed on the amplifier indicator, and take an action according to the table below.
Description of error Action Check the *ESP and MRDY sequence. (For MRDY, pay attention to the parameter setting regarding the use of the MRDY signal (bit 0 of parameter No. 4001).)

Indication 01

Although neither *ESP (emergency stop signal; there are two types of signals including the PMC signal and PSM contact signal(*2)) nor MRDY (machine ready signal) is input, SFR (forward rotation signal)/SRF (reverse rotation signal)/ORCM (orientation command) is input.

02

When the spindle motor is equipped with a highresolu- Check the setting of the parameter. tion magnetic pulse coder (CS sensor), 128 /rev (bits 2, (bit 2, 1 and 0 of parameter 4011) 1, and 0 of parameter No. 4011 = 0, 0, 0) must be set for the speed detector, but other than 123 /rev is set. In this case, the motor is not activated. Although setting for use of a highresolution magnetic Check the setting of the parameter. pulse coder (bit 5 of parameter No. 4001 = 1) or setting (bit 5 of parameter 4001, bit 4 of parameter 4018) for use of the Cs contour control function by the a sensor (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1) is not made, a Cs control command is input. In this case, the motor is not activated. Although parameter setting for use of the position coder Check the setting of the parameter. signal (bit 2 of parameter No. 4001 = 1) is not made, the (bit 2 of parameter 4001) servo mode (rigid tapping and spindle positioning) or spindle synchronization is specified. In this case, the motor is not activated. The option parameter of the orientation function is not Check the parameter setting of the orientation set, but ORCM (orientation command) is input. function. The option parameter of the output switch control func- Check the parameter setting of the output switch tion is not set, but a lowspeed winding is selected (RCH control function and the power line state check sig= 1). nal (RCH). A Cs contour control command is input, but SFR (forward Check the sequence rotation command)/SRV (reverse rotation command) is not input. A command for controlling a servo mode (such as rigid Check the sequence tapping and spindle positioning) is input, but SFR (forward rotation command)/SRV (reverse rotation command) is not input. A spindle synchronization control command is input, but Check the sequence SFR (forward rotation command)/SRV (reverse rotation command) is not input. A Cs contour control command is input, but another During execution of the Caxis control command, mode (servo mode, spindle synchronization, or orienta- do not specify another operation mode. Before ention) is specified. tering another mode, cancel the Cs contour control command. A command for a servo mode (such as rigid tapping and During execution of the servo mode command, do spindle synchronization) is input, but another mode (Cs not specify another operation mode. Before entercontour control, spindle synchronization, or orientation) ing another mode, cancel the servo mode. is specified.

03

04

05 06

07

08

09

10

11

732

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Indication 12

Description of error

Action

A spindle synchronization command is input, but another During execution of the spindle synchronization mode (Cs contour control, servo mode, or orientation) is command, do not specify another operation mode. specified. Before entering another mode, cancel the spindle synchronization command. An orientation command is input, but another mode (Cs While orientation is specified, do no switch to contour control, servo mode, or spindle synchronization) another mode. is specified. Before switching to another mode, cancel the orientation command. The SFT and SRV signals are both input at the same Specify one of the commands. time. The parameter (bit 5 of No. 4000 = 1) is set for using the Check the parameter setting and the input signal. differential speed control function, but a Cs contour control command is input. The parameter (bit 5 of No. 4000 = 0) is set for not using Check the parameter setting and the differential the differential speed control, but DEFMD (differential mode command. mode command) is input. The parameter setting (bits 2, 1, 0 of No. 4011) for the Check the setting of the parameter. speed detector is incorrect. No pertinent speed detector exists. The parameter (bits 3, 2, 1, 0 of No. 4002 = 0, 0, 0, 0) is Check the parameter setting and the input signal. set for not using a position sensor (for not exercising position control), but orientation based on the position coder is specified. A command for orientation based on the magnetic sen- During execution of the orientation command, do sor is input, but another mode (Cs contour control, servo not specify another operation mode. Before entermode, or spindle synchronization) is specified. ing another mode, cancel the orientation command. When continuous indexing is performed in orientation based on the position coder, an incremental operation (INCMD = 1) is first performed, then an absolute position command (INCMD = 0) is input. Check INCMD (incremental command). To execute an absolute position command sequentially, be sure to perform absolute position command orientation first.

13

14 15

16

17

18

19

24

25

Although spindle amplifier SPM Type4 is not used, set- Check the setting of the parameter. ting for use of the Cs contour control function by the (bit 4 of parameter 4018) sensor (bit 4 of parameter No. 4018 = 1) is made. The parameters (bit 6 of No. 4018 = 0, No. 4320 through With the ai series spindle amplifier, the shortest No. 4323 0 0) are set for using the shortest time orienta- time orientation function cannot be used. Use tion. another type of orientation.

29

The table below does not indicate alarm states, but indicates normal operation modes.
Indication NOT READY READY LED display 0 Description Indicates that the motor is not ready for being driven. Indicates that the AC voltage charging is completed, and the motor is ready for being driven.

733

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

F.3
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
CNC screen display 437 7130 9030 443 7159 9059 431 7158 9058 433 7151 9051 442 7133 9033 432 7104 9004 439 7111 9011 606 7188 9088 607 7197 9097 Alarm indication 1 Description Action

OVERCURRENT INPUT

(1) Check the power supply voltage. (2) Check the operation condition. (3) Replace the power supply. (1) Replace the internal cooling fan.

INTERNAL COOLING FAN STOPPED OVERHEAT

(1) The cooling fan is faulty. (2) Contamination by dust (3) Check the operation condition. (1) Check the power supply voltage (including momentary power failures). (2) Check the DC link cabling (for shortcircuits). (1) Check the DC link cabling (for shortcircuits). (2) Replace the power supply. (1) Check the input power supply (200 V). (2) Check the intermodule cables for shortcircuits. (3) Replace the power supply. (1) Excessive regenerative power (insufficient PSM capability) (2) Check the DC link and input power supply cabling. (3) Replace the power supply. (1) Replace the external cooling fan.

DC LINK SECTION UNDERVOLTAGE

CHARGE ERROR

CONTROL POWER SUPPLY UNDERVOLTAGE DC LINK SECTION OVERVOLTAGE

EXTERNAL COOLING FAN STOPPED POWER SUPPLY MISSING PHASE

(1) Check the power supply voltage.

The following indications are not alarms. They correspond to the normal operating statuses of the unit.
Type LED indication Description The power supply module is not ready for driving a motor. The power supply module has charged its DC voltage section and is now ready for driving a motor.

NOT READY

READY

734

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

F.4
SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE
CNC screen display 444 Alarm indication 1 Description Action

INTERNAL COOLING FAN STOPPED CONTROL POWER SUPPLY UNDERVOLTAGE DC LINK SECTION UNDERVOLTAGE

(1) Replace the fan. (2) Replace the servo amplifier. (1) Check 24 V control power output from the power supply. (2) Replace the intermodule cables. (3) Replace the servo amplifier. (1) Check the input power supply voltage. (2) Check whether the short bar for the DC link is screwed tightly. (3) Replace the servo amplifier. (1) (2) (3) (4) Check the motor use condition. Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier. Check the chiller unit. Replace the servo amplifier.

434

435

602

OVERHEAT

601

HEAT SINK COOLING FAN STOPPED COMMUNICATION ERROR BETWEEN AMPLIFIER MODULES ABNORMAL LAXIS DC LINK CURRENT ABNORMAL MAXIS DC LINK CURRENT ABNORMAL NAXIS DC LINK CURRENT LAXIS IPM ALARM MAXIS IPM ALARM NAXIS IPM ALARM LAXIS IPM ALARM (OH) MAXIS IPM ALARM (OH) NAXIS IPM ALARM (OH) ABNORMAL LAXIS MOTOR CURRENT ABNORMAL MAXIS MOTOR CURRENT ABNORMAL NAXIS MOTOR CURRENT

(1) Replace the fan. (2) Replace the servo amplifier. (1) Replace the communication cables. (2) Replace the servo amplifier. (1) Check the interphase shortcircuit and grounding of the power line. (2) Check the interphase shortcircuit and grounding of the motor winding. (3) Replace the servo amplifier.

604

600 600 600 449 449 449 603 603 603 438 438 438

8 9 A 8. 9. A. 8. 9. A. b C d

(1) Check the interphase shortcircuit and grounding of the power line. (2) Check the interphase shortcircuit and grounding of the motor winding. (3) Replace the servo amplifier. (1) (2) (3) (4) Check the motor use condition. Check the ambient temperature of the amplifier. Check the chiller unit. Replace the servo amplifier.

(1) Check the settings of the motor ID No. and ID. (2) Check the interphase shortcircuit and grounding of the power line. (3) Check the interphase shortcircuit and grounding of the motor winding. (4) Replace the servo amplifier. (5) Replace the servo motor.

735

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

The following indications are not alarms. They correspond to the normal operating statuses of the unit.
Type LED indication Description The servo amplifier module is not ready for driving a motor. DC power has been charged and it is ready for driving a motor.

NOT READY READY

736

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

F.5
LIST OF ALARMS (PMC)
(1) Alarm messages (PMC)
Alarm number ER01 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Faulty location/corrective action Contents

1) Reinput the ladder program. The ladder program is invalid. 2) Replace the master printed circuit board. 1) Reduce the ladder program. 1) Reduce the ladder program. The ladder program is too large.The ladder program is invalid. The ladder program is too large.

ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER ER03 PROGRAM SIZE ERROR (OPTION) ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH

By using FAPT LADDERIII, convert the The setting of the type in the ladder proladder program to a one for use with the gram differs from the actual type. correct PMC type (SB7). Set the parameter again. 1) Contact FANUC. The CNC parameter is not set correctly. An unsupported function is used in the ladder program.

ER07 NO OPTION(LADDER STEP) ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK ERRORPLEASE TURN ON POWER AGAIN WITH PUSH O&Z. (CLEAR PMC SRAM)

1) While holding down both of the keys With a change in the PMC type, for exam2 and 5, turn on the power to the ple, the retentiontype memory of the CNC. Execute 7.PMC SRAM PMC must be initialized. CLEAR from the ROBOMACHINE IPL menu. 2) Replace the backup battery. 3) Replace the master printed circuit board. Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is not management software. loaded correctly. Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is invalmanagement software. id.(The series of BASIC and OPTION do not match.) Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is invalmanagement software. id.(The editions of BASIC and OPTION do not match.) Replace the master printed circuit board. The initialization of the memory used to store the ladder program failed. 1) Reinput the ladder program. The parity of the ladder program is inval2) Replace the master printed circuit id. board. Reinput the ladder program. While the ladder program was being read, an interrupt command was generated.

ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING (xxxx) ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR(xxxx)

ER14 OPTION AREA VERSION ERROR (xxxx) ER16 RAM CHECK ERROR (PROGRAM RAM) ER17 PROGRAM PARITY

ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR BY I/O ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR

Display the Ladder edit screen again and During Ladder editing, the system was exit from editing by using the [<<] key. forcibly switched to the CNC screen with a function key.

737

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Alarm number ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA ERROR ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

Display the symbol/comment edit screen During symbol/comment editing, the again and exit from editing by using the system was forcibly switched to the CNC [<<] key. screen with a function key. Display the message data edit screen During message data editing, the system again and exit from editing by using the was forcibly switched to the CNC screen [<<] key. with a function key. 1) Reinput the ladder program. The ladder program is empty. 2) Replace the master printed circuit board. Turn the CNC off and then back on. With a change in the PMC type, for example, the power must be turned off and then back on.

ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING

ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER

ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION ERROR (PMCAOPT) ER26 PMC CONTROL MODULE ERROR(PMCAOPT)

Contact FANUC to reconfigure the PMC The PMC management software is invalmanagement software. id.(The edition of PMCAOPT does not match.) 1) Contact FANUC to reconfigure the The initialization of the PMC managePMC management software. ment software failed. 2) Replace the master printed circuit board. Modify the ladder program. Change the An outofrange parameter number is parameter number of the function specified with function instruction TMR, instruction to a value within the valid TMRB, CTR, DIFU, or DIFD. range. 1) Check that the I/O device is on. An I/O device such as the I/O Link, con2) Check that the I/O device was turned nection unit, and Power Mate is not connected. on before the CNC was turned on. 3) Check the connection of the cable. Replace the master printed circuit board. The LSI of the I/O Link is defective. 1) Check the connection of the cable In a slave in group xx, an error occurred leading to a device in group xx. in communication with an I/O device. 2) Check that the I/O device was turned on before the CNC. 3) Replace that device in group xx in which the PMC control module is installed. Reduce the amount of output data in The amount of output data in I/O Link group xx. group xx exceeds the limit (33 bytes). The excess data is nullified. Reduce the amount of input data in The amount of input data in I/O Link group xx. group xx exceeds the limit (33 bytes). The excess data is nullified. Modify the total amount of output data in The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient.(The each group to 128 bytes or less. allocation of any group after group xx on the output side is nullified.) Modify the total amount of input data in The I/O Link I/O area is insufficient.(The each group to 128 bytes or less. allocation of any group after group xx on the input side is nullified.)

ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM IS OUT OF RANGE

ER32 NO I/O DEVICE

ER33 I/O LINK ERROR ER34 I/O LINK ERROR (xx)

ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT DATA IN GROUP (xx) ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA IN GROUP (xx) ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT DATA OVER (xx) ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT DATA OVER (xx)

738

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Alarm number ER40 I/O LINKII SETTING ERROR (CHx) ER41 I/O LINKII MODE ERROR (CHx) ER42 I/O LINKII STATION NO.ERROR (CHx)

Faulty location/corrective action Set I/O LinkII again.

Contents The I/O LinkII setting is illegal. (CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondary board) The I/O LinkII mode setting is illegal. (CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondary board) The I/O LinkII station number setting is illegal. (CH1: Primary board, CH2: Secondary board)

Set I/O LinkII again.

Set I/O LinkII again.

ER97 I/O LINK (CHxyyGROUP)

1) Check the cabling of the I/O units of Assignment of the I/O modules of the yy the yy group. group does not match the number of I/O 2) Check the power supply of the I/O units actually connected. units. 3) Check the parameter setting for the I/O link assignment data selection function.

WN02 OPERATE ADDRESS ERROR WN03 ABORT NCWINDOW/EXIN

Modify the setting of the PMC system pa- The setting of the PMC system paramerameter, address of the operators panel ter, address of the operators panel for for Series 0. Series 0, is invalid. 1) Check that the Ladder program is free from problems and then restart the Ladder program (by pressing the RUN key). 2) Turn the CNC off and then back on. The Ladder program was stopped during communication between the CNC and PMC.Function instructions such as WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, and DISPB may not be executed normally.

WN05 PMC TYPE NO CONVERSION

By using FAPT LADDERIII, convert the The setting of the type in the ladder proladder program to a one for use with the gram differs from the actual type. correct PMC type. (Example: For the PMCSB5, the Ladder program of the PMCSA3/SA5 was transferred.) Modify the ladder program so that the For a subprogram call with the function subprogram nesting level is eight or less. instruction CALL or CALLU, the nesting level is too deep (exceeds 8).

WN07 LADDER SP ERROR (STACK)

739

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(2) System alarm messages

Alarm number PC004 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC006 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC009 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC010 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC012 CPU ERR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC030 RAM PARITY aa:bb Faulty location/corrective action Contents

1) Replace the master printed circuit A CPU error occurred in the PMC.xxxxxxxx board. and yyyyyyyyy are internal error codes. 2) If the error recurs even after the replacement, contact FANUC to report the status (displayed message, system configuration, operation, when the error occurs, occurrence frequency, etc.).

1) Replace the master printed circuit A RAM parity error occurred in the PMC.aa board. and bb are internal error codes. 2) If the error recurs even after the replacement, contact FANUC to report the status (displayed message, system configuration, operation, when the error occurs, occurrence frequency, etc.) and the above internal error codes. 1) Check that the I/O allocation data matches the actual I/O device connection. 2) Check that the cable is connected properly. 3) Check the cable specifications. 4) Replace the I/O device interface module, cable, master printed circuit board, etc. A communication error occurred in the I/O LINK.aa, bb and cc are internal error codes.If this alarm is generated, probable causes include the following: 1) Although the base expansion is assigned when the I/O Unit A is used, the base is not connected. 2) A cable is not connected securely. 3) Cabling is faulty. 4) I/O equipment (I/O unit, Power Mate, etc.) is faulty. 5) Power failure of Master or Slave device on I/O Link 6) Short circuit of DO terminal on I/O device 7) The motherboard is faulty.

PC050 I/O LINK(CH1) aa:bb aa:bb PC050 IOLINK CH1 aaaabbbb:cccc

PC060 FBUS xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy 1) Replace the master printed circuit A bus error occurred in the PMC. PC061 FLR xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy board. PC062 FLWa 2) If the error recurs even after the rexxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy placement, contact FANUC to report the status (displayed message, system configuration, operation, when the error occurs, occurrence frequency, etc.). PC070 SUB65 CALL (STACK) Check the correspondence between the CALL/CALLU and SPE instructions. A stack error occurred in Ladder function instruction CALL/CALLU.

740

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Alarm number PC080 SYS EMG xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy PC081 FL EMG xxxxxxxx:yyyyyyyy

Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

Report to FANUC the conditions in which A system alarm was caused by other softthis error occurred (display message, ware. system configuration, operation, time at which the error occurred, error frequency, and so on) and the LED status on each board. 1) Replace the master printed circuit An error occurred in a RAM check. board. 2) If the error recurs even after the replacement, contact FANUC to report the status (displayed message, system configuration, operation, when the error occurs, occurrence frequency, etc.).

PC097 PARITY ERR (LADDER) PC098 PARITY ERR (DRAM)

741

F. ERROR CODES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

(3) Alarm messages (For EDIT 1)

Error message PROGRAM NOTHING ERASE ERROR FROM WRITE ERROR 13 FROM WRITE ERROR 28 WRITE ERROR FROM WRITE ERROR 12 FROM WRITE ERROR 29 READ ERROR ANOTHER USED FROM WRITE ERROR 9 FROM WRITE ERROR 36 FROM WRITE ERROR 10 FROM WRITE ERROR 37 I/O OPEN ERROR nn Flash ROM is used by other than PMC. Contents and solution There is no program on flash ROM. Flash ROM is abnormal. Replacement is required. Ask FANUC Service Representative for replacement.

The CNC is not placed in the emergency stop state. nn = 1: RS232C is used by other than PMC. Remedy) Check whether RS232C is used by other than PMC. On the online setting screen (see Section 8.5.1 in III), check that NOT USE is indicated for RS232C. nn = 6: The RS232C option is not found. nn = 20: RS232C connection is incorrect. Remedy) Check whether channel setting, connection, baud rate, and other settings are correct. nn = 20: RS232C connection is incorrect. Remedy) Check whether channel setting, connection, baud rate, and other settings are correct. nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly. Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken. nn = 20: RS232C connection is incorrect. Remedy) Check whether channel setting, connection, baud rate, and other settings are correct. nn = 22: Communication cannot be performed correctly. Remedy) Check whether the cable is broken. Illegal data was read. Remedy) Check the cable and setting (speed). An attempt was made to output data, but the data was illegal. Remedy) Check the alarm on the alarm screen. The memory card is protected. Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF. The specified file number or file name is not found. Remedy) With LIST, check the file name or file number.

I/O WRITE ERROR nn

I/O READ ERROR nn

DATA ERROR PROGRAM DATA ERROR WRITE PROTECT FILE NOT FOUND

742

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

F. ERROR CODES

Error message I/O WRITE ERROR nn I/O READ ERROR nn I/O COMPARE ERROR nn I/O DELETE ERROR nn I/O LIST ERROR nn I/O FORMAT ERROR nn

Contents and solution nn = 30: No memory card is installed. Remedy) Check whether a memory card is installed. nn = 31: The memory card cannot be written to. Remedy) Set the protect switch of the memory card to OFF. Replace the memory card with an SRAM card. nn = 32: The battery for the memory card is too weak. Remedy) Replace the memory card battery. nn = 102: There is not enough free space on the memory card. Remedy) Delete files to create free space. nn = 135: The memory card is unformatted. nn = 105: The memory card is unformatted. Remedy) Format the memory card. nn = 114: The specified file is not found. Remedy) With LIST, check the file name or file number. nn = 115: The specified file is protected. Remedy) Check the file attribute. Data differs between the device and PMC. XXXXXX: Address aa: Data on the PMC bb: Data on the device Remedy) To continue operation, enter Y; otherwise, enter N. Then, press the INPUT key.

COMPARE ERR XXXXXX=AA : BB CONT? (Y/N)

743

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

744

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

G.1
OPERATOR MESSAGES

Message Number Contents 2000 COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT The thermal relay for the coolant motor on the relay and interface PCB was tripped. (The coolant motor overheated.) When the motor rotates rapidly and overheats because of insufficient coolant, or and when the motor does not move because the inside of the motor is clogged with cuttings, excessive load is applied to the motor, and the current of the motor increases. A current greater than the specified current flows through the MCC (magnetic conductor) that controls the coolant motor. The thermal relay is then activated, raising the alarm. This alarm may also be raised when the load to the coolant motor increases because the viscosity of the coolant is high. The alarm is also raised when the rated current of the motor is high during use of the FANUC standard coolant unit. Close the splash guard door. Turn off the coolant unit and wait a while until the coolant motor has cooled off. Check the level gage in the coolant unit. If the coolant tank is short of coolant, replenish the coolant. Check whether the coolant motor is running. If the motor is not running, or if an unusual sound is heard while it is running, the inside of the motor requires cleaning, or the motor must be replaced. When cuttings or similar materials accumulate on the bottom of the coolant tank, clean the inside of the tank. Use a coolant with the lowest possible viscosity. When using concentrated coolant, dilute it down to a solution suitable for the workpiece to be machined. When a unit other than the FANUC standard coolant unit is used, check the permissible current range for the coolant control MCC, then use a motor whose rated current is in the specified range. Since there is a difference between the rated output (W) of the motor and the current value (A) during normal operation, the rated current of the motor must be correct when the motor is used. Also check the value of the current used to start the motor. Turn off the power to release the tripped thermal relay in the coolant control MCC. Turning on the power again automatically eliminates the alarm. Permissible current range for the MCC for the coolant motor: 2.2 A max. Normal setting: 1.8 A X 20.4:Overload Remedy Remarks

2001

THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD IS Close the front door. OPEN. The front door is not locked.

2002

AIR PRESSURE LOW

Check the pressure regulating valve and X6.4: Low air presair supply source of the regulator. sure The air supply pressure for the regulator is low. Check the air hose connection. TIME OVER (M100M109) Check the external device. Alternatively, change the input monitoring period for the A command between M100 and M109 was operation completion signal (M CODE specified, but the external device did not send OUTPUT of quick screen EXT. INTERthe corresponding operation completion sig- FACE). nal within the predetermined period.

2003

745

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 2004 DOOR LOCK IS RELEASED BY FORCE Set the electromagnetic lock switch to LOCK by using the release key. Even when the electromagnetic lock switch is set to LOCK, the message is displayed if The electromagnetic lock switch at the top of the front door is stopped immediately bethe front door is unlocked by the release key. fore being completely closed. However, the message thus output does not represent a failure. DISK SPRING LIFE OVER The spindle clamp/unclamp mechanism must be disassembled to inspect and The disc spring for the arbor clamp of the replace the disc spring for clamping the spindle was detected as requiring replace- arbor. Contact the nearest FANUC techment. (i.e., the disc spring was used the speci- nical center. fied number of times.) This alarm is raised when the number of times the disc spring for clamping the arbor to the spindle opens and closes exceeds the specified value after the number of times tools are changed is counted. TURN OFF THE POWER Adjustment parameters were set. 2007 OVERHEAT (EXTERNAL TRANSFORMER) Stop operation until the external transformer is cooled. When the external transformer is overheated, spindle rotation, coolant output, intramachine cleaning coolant output are turned off. Programmed operation is disabled. X6.5: Overheat detection. Set to 0 at the time of overheat. Turn off the power. Remedy Remarks

2005

2006

The external transformer is overheated.

746

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

Message Number Contents 2008 THE FLOOD COOLANT MOTOR THERMAL RELAY ON THE POWER PANEL PCB OPERATED (FLOOD COOLANT MOTOR OVERHEAT) The thermal relay for the flood coolant motor on the relay and interface PCB was tripped. (The flood coolant motor overheated.) When the motor rotates rapidly and overheats because of insufficient coolant, or when the motor does not move because the inside of the motor is clogged with cuttings, excessive load is applied to the motor, and the current of the motor increases. A current greater than the specified current flows through the MCC (magnetic conductor) that controls the flood coolant motor. The thermal relay is then activated, raising the alarm. This alarm may also be raised because the viscosity of the coolant is high when the load to the coolant motor increases. The alarm is also raised when the rated current of the motor is high during use of the FANUC standard flood coolant unit. Turn off the coolant unit and wait a while until the coolant motor has cooled off. Check the oil level gage in the coolant unit. If the coolant tank is short of the coolant, replenish the coolant. Check whether the flood coolant motor is running. If the motor is not running, or if an unusual is heard while it is running, the inside of the motor requires cleaning, or the motor must be replaced. When cuttings or similar materials accumulate on the bottom of the coolant tank, clean the inside of the tank. Use the coolant whose viscosity is as low as possible. Before using concentrated coolant, dilute it down to a sulution suitable for the workpiece to be machined. When a unit other than the FANUC standard flood coolant unit is used, check the permissible current range for the flood coolant control MCC, then use a motor whose rated current is in the specified range. Since there is a difference between the rated output (W) of the motor and the current value (A) during normal operation, the rated current of the motor must be correct when the motor is used. Also check the value of the current used to start the motor. Turn off the power to release the tripped thermal relay in the flood coolant control MCC. Turning on the power again automatically eliminates the alarm. Permissible current range for the MCC for the coolant motor: 2.6 A max. Normal setting: 2.1 A X 20.5:Overload Remedy Remarks

2009

SPINDLE SHOULD BE TURNED BEFORE Before restarting the program, set manuCYCLE Y START al mode, and turn the spindle. Then, set automatic mode, and press the cycle After the spindle rotation was stopped be- start button. cause program operation was halted, program operation was restarted without restarting the spindle rotation. OILS LEVEL IS LOWER THAN LIMIT There is little central lubricant oil left. Add oil. If there is sufficient oil, check the X9.7: Detection of cable connection for oil level detection or low oil level the setting of PMC parameter K12#5. Keep relay K12#5 Wait until the cutter has returned to the reference position.

2010

2013

EXECUTING TOOL ESCAPE The tool breakage detection subfunction of the AI tooL monitor function was activated. The cutter is automatically returned to the reference position along the Zaxis.

2015

PRODUCTION IS COMPLETED The PRODUCTION COUNT has reached or exceeded the PLANNED PRODUCTION COUNT specified on the PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT FUNCTION screen (a QUICK screen).

Reset the production count.

747

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Message Number Contents 2017 COOLANT LOWER LIMIT The coolant level is low. 2018 FILTER LOADING (C.T.COOL. TANK) The line filter is clogged. 2019 ROTALY UNION LIFE OVER The operation time of the rotary union has exceeded 9999 hours. 2020 C.T.COOLANT PUMP LIFE OVER The operation time of the centerthrough coolant pump has exceeded 9999 hours. 2021 ADJUST C.T.COOLANT PRESSURF The operation time of the centerthrough coolant pump has reached 3000 hours, 6000 hours, or 9000 hours. 2022 SUCTION FILTER LOADING The suction filter of the center through coolant pump is clogged. 2024 PRESS A PALLET SET UP WHEN READY Machining is completed. 2025 PRESS B PALLET SET UP WHEN READY Machining is completed. Replace the centerthrough coolant pump. Replace the rotary union. Replace the line filter. Add coolant. X5.0: Lower limit of coolant level Keep relay K3#6 X5.2: Filter clogged state Remedy Remarks

Adjust the pressure of the center through coolant.

Replace the suction filter.

X5.5: Filter clogged state

Set workpieces in each pallet, then press With pallet changer the setup button on the pallet changer op- manufactured by erators panel. After pallets are changed, Kawata Tec machining is restarted.

748

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

G.2
DIAGNOS MESSAGES
Namber 0001 0005 0006 0011 0012 0013 0014 0016 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 INTERLOCK:ZAXIS (TOOL CHANGE AREA) INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (DOOR OPEND) INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (PROGRAM STOP) INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (SPINDLE SPEED CHECK) INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (EXTERNAL SIGNAL) Because the Zaxis is in the tool change area, axis movement is inhibited. Because the door is open, axis movement is inhibited. Because program operation is halted by operation such as door open operation, axis movement is inhibited. Because program operation is halted, and the spindle speed is below the specified speed, axis movement is inhibited. Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF, axis movement is inhibited. The use of allaxis interlock, indicated by selecting QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 5: EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, is specified. Because the power OFF button has been pressed on the operators panel, axis movement is inhibited. Because the spindle rotation/stop button is pressed on the operators panel, program operation is disabled. Because the door is not locked, program operation is disabled. Because the thermal relay for the coolant motor for cleaning the inside of the machine trips, program operation is disabled. Because the stop button is pressed on the operators panel, program operation is disabled. Because the thermal relay for the coolant motor trips, program operation is disabled. M00 or M01 is specified, so program operation is currently stopped. In the production management function on QUICK screen, the following condition is detected, so program operation is currently stopped: Scheduled production quantity x production quantity Keep relay K7#5 is set to 1. INTERLOCK: nAXIS (PALLET CHNGER) INTERLOCK: mAXIS (mAXIS UNCLAMP UNFINISHED) INTERLOCK: nAXIS (mAXIS CLAMP UNFINISHED) Because the additional axis is not yet clamped, axis movement is inhibited. Keep relay K3#3 is set to 1. (When m = 4) Because the additional axis is not yet unclamped, the movement on the additional axis is inhibited. Keep relay K3#2 is set to 1. (When m = 4) Axis movement is inhibited by the pallet changer. Message INTERLOCK: nAXIS (COSTOM PMC) Detailed Axis movement is inhibited by the custom PMC. Keep relay K14#5 is set to 1.

0022 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0035 0036

INTERLOCK: ALL AXES (POWER OFF) HOLD (SPINDLE STOP BUTTON) HOLD (DOOR OPEND) HOLD (FLOOD COOLANT MOTER OVERHEAT) HOLD (FEED HOLD BUTTON) HOLD (COOLANT MOTER OVERHEAT) HOLD (M00, M01, STOP) HOLD (PRODUCTION COMPRETED)

749

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Namber 0037

Message HOLD (HOST COMPUTER)

Detailed Program operation is currently stopped by a command from the host computer. Keep relay K3#1 is set to 1. Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF, program operation is disabled. The use of external feed hold, indicated by selecting QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 5: EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, is specified. Program operation is inhibited by the custom PMC. Keep relay K14#7 is set to 1. Because a command from M100 to M109 was specified and the completion signal was not input within the defined time, program operation is currently stopped. The output type, indicated by selecting QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 5: EXT. INTERFACE, then M CODE OUTPUT, is the FIN type. Because manual mode is set, program operation is disabled. Because the power OFF button has been pressed on the operators panel, program operation is disabled. Because the signal from the dust collector is OFF, program operation is disabled. Because the side door is not locked, program operation is disabled. The system is now in turret adjustment mode. Keep relay K11#0 is set to 1. Because the air pressure supplied to the regulator is low, program operation is disabled. The external transformer is overheated. Programmed operation is disabled. Because a signal from a peripheral device is ON, reset operation is being performed. The custom PMC outputs the reset command. According to the command from the host computer, reset operation is being performed. Keep relay K3#1 is set to 1. The system is in the emergency stop state because the emergency stop button has been pressed on the operators panel. Because a signal from a peripheral device is OFF, the system is in the emergency stop state. The use of the external emergency stop function, indicated by selecting QUICK screen, 32: MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 5: EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, is specified. According to the command from the custom PMC, the emergency stop state has been entered. Keep relay K14#6 is set to 1.

0038

HOLD (EXTERNAL SIGNAL)

0039 0040

HOLD (CUSTOM PMC) HOLD (M100M109)

0041 0042 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0050 0051 0052

HOLD (MANUAL OPERATION MODE) HOLD (POWER OFF) HOLD (DUST CATCHER) HOLD (SIDE DOOR OPENED) HOLD (ADJUSTABLE MODE) HOLD (AIR PRESSURE LOW) HOLD (EXTERNAL TRANSFORMER OVERHEAT) RESET (EXTERNAL SIGNAL) RESET (CUSTOM PMC) RESET (HOST COMPUTER)

0060

EMERGENCY STOP (OPERATORS PANEL) EMERGENCY STOP (EXTERNAL SIGNAL)

0061

0062

EMERGENCY STOP (CUSTOM PMC)

750

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

Namber 0063

Message EMERGENCY STOP (TOOL UNCLAMP)

Detailed No tool is attached to the spindle, so the system is in the emergency stop state. Keep relay K1#0 is set to 0. According to the command from the pallet changer, the emergency stop state has been entered. Because an alarm is issued in the spindle, the system is in the emergency stop state. Because of abnormality in the automatic door, the system is in the emergency stop state. Because the operation ready signal is not input, the system is in the emergency stop state. Because of a power failure, the system is in the emergency stop state. Because the door is not locked, program operation cannot be started. Because the servo system is not ready, program operation cannot be started. A command to inhibit start was issued from the host PC, so the start disable state has been entered. (Drill monitor function)

0064 0065 0066 0067 0068 0080 0081 0083

EMERGENCY STOP (PALLET CHANGER) EMERGENCY STOP (SPINDLE ALARM) EMERGENCY STOP (AUTO.DOOR SWITCH IS DEFECTIVE) EMERGENCY STOP (UNREADY) EMERGENCY STOP (POWER FAILURE BACKUP MODULE) STARTLOCK (DOOR OPENED) STARTLOCK (SERVO UNREADY) STARTLOCK (HOST COMPUTER)

0084 0085 0090 0091 0092 0093 0100 0105 0110 0111 0115 0116 0117 0118

STARTLOCK (POWER FAILURE BACK- Because the power failure backup module is not ready, proUP MODULE) gram operation cannot be started. STARTLOCK (AUTOMATIC POWER OFF) DETACHED: mAXIS Because the automatic power cutoff function is operating, program operation cannot be started. The signal line of the mth axis (additional axis) is not connected, so the mth axis is in the detach state (axis disconnection). Keep relay K12#3 is set to 0. Because the mth axis (additional axis) is clamped, the axis is in the servo off state (excitation OFF). Keep relay K2#1 is set to 1. (When m = 4) An ATC alarm is issued. **** indicates the cause of the alarm. This message appears for about one second when the start of operation is specified in automatic or MDI mode. The mirror image function for the nth axis is activated.

SERVO OFF: mAXIS

ATC ALARM (****)

START SIGNAL ON MIRROR IMAGE ON: nAXIS

FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% MACHINE LOCK ON

The feedrate override is set to 0%. The jog override is set to 0%. The machine lock function is activated. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen, all axes are set for machine lock. The Zaxis lock function is activated. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen, the Zaxis is set for machine lock.

0119

ZAXIS LOCK ON

751

G. OPERATOR MESSAGES, DIAGNOS MESSAGES

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Namber 0120

Message IN REMOTE OPERATION

Detailed Remote operation mode is selected. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen, remote mode is set to ON. (For the standard type operators panel) The remote operation button on the operators panel is on. (For the fullkeypad type operators panel) The custom PMC is programmed so that the start button is disabled. Keep relay K8#2 is set to 1. On 31: SEQ SELECTION selected from QUICK screen, the item for disabling mode switching is set to ON. (For the CE specification only) Keep relay K16#0 is set to 1, and the use of the operators panel of the ROBODRILL is inhibited by the custom PMC. A cutting feed override is specified by the custom PMC or the like. Bit 1 of PMC parameter K14 is set. A spindle override is specified by the custom PMC or the like. Bit 1 of PMC parameter K14 is set. Spindle rotation is disabled by the custom PMC (SO9.6). Because the automatic side door is open, spindle rotation is disabled. Because a special tool (specified in D100) is attached to the spindle, spindle rotation is disabled.

0121 0122 0123

START COMMAND WAS IGNORED. (OPERATORS PANEL) TOOL CHANGE OF MODE IS PROHIBITED. A CHANGE OF MODE IS PROHIBITED.

0124 0125 0126 0140 0141 0142

THE OPERATORS PANEL IS UNAVAILABLE. THE CUTTING OVERRIDE SWITCH IS UNAVAILABLE. THE SPINDLE OVERRIDE BUTTON IS UNAVAILABLE. SPINDLE ROT. IS PROHIBITED (CUSTOM PMC) SPINDLE ROT. IS PROHIBITED (SIDE DOOR OPENED) SPINDLE ROT. IS PROHIBITED (SPECIAL TOOL)

752

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

H
[Timer]
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

PMC PARAMETERS

Address T 00 T 02 T 04 T 06 T 08 T 10 T 12 T 14 T 16 T 18 T 20 T 22 T 24 T 26 T 28 T 30 T 32 T 34 T 36 T 38 T 40 T 42 T 44 T 46 T 48 T 50 T 52 T 54

Default 60000 60000 300000 300000

Function Standby time until the centerthrough coolant pump stops automatically. Wait time until coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine stops automatically Wait time until spindle air purge stops Wait time until alarm output 2 (for buzzer) stops

272 1000 4000 120 144 104 48 0 48 96 200 296 296 10000 5000 3000 1000 30000 0 0

Wait time from door lock until operation starts Start button ON time from automatic door closure until operation starts Automatic door total time For checking automatic door close M81, M82 output duration Wait time until automatic door lock is released For spindle speed zero detection For adjustment of rigid tapping mode setting Spindle activation completed in rigid tap mode For monitoring the switch of tool exchange area. For checking automatic door close Centerthrough coolant air purge pulse output ON time Time during which air blow pulse output is OFF Air seal valve OFF delay Monitoring time for abnormal coolant pressure (upper limit) Monitoring time for abnormal low coolant pressure (lower limit) Delay from issue of a servo alarm until the spindle stops M code monitoring time (Reserved) Spindle restart check before operation

753

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Timer]
No. 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Address T 56 T 58 T 60 T 62 T 64 T 66 T 68 T 70 T 72 T 74 T 76 T 78 T 80 T 82 T 84 T 86 T 88 T 90 T 92 T 94 T 96 T 98 Default 800 4000 5000 480 2000 5000 32 60000 5000 248 48 1000 2000 2000 104 744 736 3000 5000 Spindle restart check For spindle abnormality detection (only for the CE marking specification) Wait time until power is turned off automatically For external reset adjustment Wait time until the FACTOLINK screen is called automatically Time for monitoring low air pressure condition Tool unclamp state monitoring delay time Spindle air purge restart wait time Spindle air purge execution time at restart Spindle load monitor start delay after decrease in the feedrate For judging the spindle load warning level For monitoring attained spindle speed Door lock operation monitoring time Wait time from a singleblock stop until the door is unlocked. Alarm 1006 ignore time after tool change completion Blinking ON time for state indication and so forth Blinking OFF time for state indication and so forth Wait time until remote operation is canceled forcibly Wait time until poweroff is specified by remote operation Function

754

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Counter]
No. 1 C 02 C 04 2 C 06 C 08 3 C 10 C 12 4 C 14 C 16 5 C 18 C 20 6 C 22 C 24 7 C 26 C 28 8 C 30 C 32 9 C 34 C 36 10 C 38 C 40 11 C 42 C 44 12 C 46 C 48 13 C 50 C 52 14 C 54 C 56 15 C 58 C 60 16 C 62 0 (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) 0 0 Current value for DI/DO test (Not used) 0 120 (Not used) Preset value for DI/DO test 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) **** 0 Current value of the centerthrough coolant pump operation time (Not used) **** 9999 Current value of the rotary union operation time Preset value of the centerthrough coolant pump operation time **** 9999 Current value of monitoring time for cloggedfilter alarm Preset value of the rotary union operation time **** 100 Current value for the time allowed before the internal light goes off automatically. Preset value of monitoring time for cloggedfilter alarm **** 10 Current number of spindle axis override stages Preset value for the time allowed before the internal light goes off automatically. **** 20 Current value for conical disc spring lifetime ( 10000) Preset number of spindle axis override stages **** 9999 Current value for conical disc spring lifetime ( 1) Preset lifetime of conical disc spring Address C 00 Default 9999 Function Preset lifetime of conical disc spring

755

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Counter]
No. 17 C 66 C 68 18 C 70 C 72 19 C 74 C 76 20 C 78 **** Current number of feedrate deceleration stages 0 10 Current value for external equipment control Preset number of feedrate deceleration stages 0 3 (Not used) Preset value for external equipment control 0 0 (Not used) (Not used) Address C 64 Default 0 (Not used) Function

756

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 0.0 Setting f f f f f f 0 1 K 0.1 0 1 K 0.2 0 1 K 0.3 0 1 K 0.4 0 1 K 0.5 0 1 K 0.6 Function Uses the high-speed interface for M/S/T/B code processing Uses the standard interface for M/S/T/B code processing Does not allow the edit button to display DATA I/O. Allows the edit button to display DATA I/O. Automatic setting of work coordinate screen is X and Y axis Automatic setting of work coordinate screen is X, Y and Z axis Does not OFF Flood coolant at emergency stop OFF flood coolant at emergency stop Tool weight 3kg Tool weight 2kg Disables the alarm/diagnostic window automatic display function. Enables the alarm/diagnostic window automatic display function.

K 0.7 f K 1.0 f K 1.1 f f f f f f

0 1 0 1 0 1

Does not restart the coolant after changing the tool Restarts the coolant after changing the tool Outputs an alarm at tool unclamp Does not output an alarm at tool unclamp Executes an even parity check Executes an odd parity check The spindle does not stop when the allaxis interlock signal is off The spindle stops when the allaxis interlock signal is off Turret release is disabled if the program is in the protected state Turret release is enabled if the program is in the protected state The override values are initialized when power is turned on The override values are not initialized when power is turned on The tool life expiration advance notice value is set by cycle quantity or time The tool life expiration advance notice value is set by percent When QUICK screen or COORDINATES/OFFSET screen is being displayed, pressing the menu operation button switches between screens. When QUICK screen or COORDINATES/OFFSET screen is being displayed, pressing the menu operation button does not switch between screens. Pressing the reset key does not stop the spindle or coolant Pressing the reset key stops the spindle and coolant

K 1.2

0 1

K 1.3

0 1

K 1.4

0 1

K 1.5

0 1

K 1.6

0 1

K 1.7

0 1

757

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 2.0 f K 2.1 f Setting 0 1 0 1 K 2.2 K 2.3 f f f f f 0 1 K 2.4 0 1 K 2.5 0 1 K 2.6 0 1 K 2.7 0 1 K 3.0 f K 3.1 (Note) K 3.2 f f f 0 1 0 1 0 1 K 3.3 0 1 K 3.4 f f f f 0 1 K 3.5 0 1 K 3.6 0 1 K 3.7 0 1 M63 does not turn on the machine status output (with Kawata Tech APC) M63 turns on the machine status output (with Kawata Tech APC) Does not extend the output duration of the spindle taper air blow. Extends the output duration of the spindle taper air blow. Use the position switch signal 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 of external interface. Use the position switch signal 1, 2, 3, 4, 7 of external interface. A tool exchange enabled area is set up using the position switch A tool exchange disabled area is set up using the position switch The tool exchange disabled area setting function is disabled. The tool exchange disabled area setting function is enabled. Energy saving control is exercised for spindle air purge operation. Spindle air purge operation is turned on at all times. Disables the interface for the automatic laser measurement test. Enables the interface for the automatic laser measurement test. Does not use the fourth-axis clamp/unclamp command Uses the fourth-axis clamp/unclamp command Enables movement along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes in the fourth-axis unclamp state Disables movement along the X-, Y-, or Z-axes in the fourth-axis unclamp state Performs ON/OFF control of the centerthrough coolant pump. Keeps the centerthrough coolant pump ON at all times. Enables automatic control of the centerthrough coolant pump. Disables automatic control of the centerthrough coolant pump. Disables the detection of the lower coolant limit. Enables the detection of the upper coolant limit. The preview control ON parameter is set. The preview control OFF parameter is set. Function Neither operator message 2005 nor 2010 is treated as alarm Both operator messages 2005 and 2010 are treated as alarm Does not deactivate the fourth axis in the clamp state Deactivates the fourth axis in the clamp state

NOTE Be sure to set 0.

758

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 4.0 K 4.1 f f f 0 1 K 4.2 0 1 K 4.3 0 1 K 4.4 f f f f 0 1 K 4.5 0 1 K 4.6 0 1 K 4.7 0 1 K 5.0 K 5.1 K 5.2 K 5.3 K 5.4 0 1 K 5.5 K 5.6 K 5.7 (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) Disables centerthrough coolant control. Enables centerthrough coolant control. (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) Disables the control of the manual button for the center through coolant. Enables the control of the manual button for the center through coolant. Disables the detection of the clogging of the suction filter. Enables the detection of the clogging of the suction filter. When the coolant oil level becomes low, a message is just displayed. When the coolant oil level becomes low, cycle termination occurs and an alarm is displayed. Centerthrough coolant air purge is turned off by M09. Centerthrough coolant air purge is turned off by M24. Outputs the parity check signal to contact a Outputs the parity check signal to contact b When production is completed, an operator message is displayed. When production is completed, no operator message is displayed. Does not monitor the M code operation time. Monitors the M code operation time. Setting Function

759

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 6.0 Setting f f f f f 0 1 K 6.1 0 1 K 6.2 0 1 K 6.3 0 1 K 6.4 0 1 K 6.5 f f f f f f f f f 0 1 K 6.6 0 1 K 6.7 0 1 K 7.0 0 1 K 7.1 0 1 K 7.2 0 1 K 7.3 0 1 K 7.4 0 1 K 7.5 0 1 K 7.6 f f 0 1 K 7.7 (Note) 0 1 Function Displays a message when the door is opened by M00 Does not display a message when the door is opened by M00 Displays an operator message when the door is opened Does not display an operator message when the door is opened Does not stop alarm output 2 automatically. Stops alarm output 2 automatically. Does not automatically stop coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine. Automatically stops coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine. Specifies M06 in TOOL CHANGE selected from MENU OPERATION. Does not specify M06 in TOOL CHANGE selected from MENU OPERATION. Disables the cycle start signal check function. Enables the cycle start signal check function. Does not turn on the DMMC signal at remote operation. Turns on the DMMC signal at remote operation. Outputs the auto mode signal in a mode other than manual mode Outputs the auto mode signal in AUTO mode Does not light the feed hold lamp in the operation stop state Lights the feed hold lamp in the operation stop state Enables the external door control signal in a mode other than AUTO mode Always enables the external door control signal The remote mode is set for remote operation. The remote mode is set for direct operation. Does not restart coolant/air blow at a restart of operation. Restarts coolant/air blow at a restart of operation. Turns the M83 output OFF at the end of a cycle. Does not turn the M83 output OFF at the end of a cycle. Does not stop operation upon the completion of machining by M91 or M92 Disables the stop operation by M91 or M92 upon the completion of machining Does not cancel the screen saver when the door is opened. Cancels the screen saver when the door is opened. Disables the side automatic door adjustment function Enables the side automatic door adjustment function

NOTE Be sure to set 0.

760

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 8.0 Setting f f f f 0 1 K 8.1 0 1 K 8.2 0 1 K 8.3 0 1 K 8.4 f f f 0 1 K 8.5 0 1 K 8.6 0 1 K 8.7 f 0 1 K 9.0 f 0 1 Function The internal light is turned on or off according to the setting on the screen. The internal light is turned on or off according to an external signal. ON the block skip function on the operators panel screen setting. ON the block skip signal on the external signal. Enables the tool change button on the operators panel. Disables the tool change button on the operators panel. Enables activation of the single block function from the machine operators panel Enables activation of the single block function by the input of an external signal Enables activation of the dry run function from the machine operators panel Enables activation of the dry run function by the input of an external signal Does not use feed by singledigit F code. Uses feed by singledigit F code. Turns off warning-level or breakage-level detection output upon a reset Turns off warning-level or breakage-level detection output upon a reset or when the tool is changed Enables a warning level and destruction level to be detected and output when the AI tool monitor function is used. Enables a warning level and destruction level to be detected and output, regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used. Displays FACTOLINK and the screen when the program protection key is protection. (K9#6=1) Does not display FACTOLINK and the screen when the program protection key is protection. (K9#6=1) K 9.1 f 0 1 K 9.2 (Note 3) 1 K 9.3 (Note 3) 1 K 9.4 f f 0 1 K 9.5 0 1 f 0 f 0 The logging data operation time is determined from NC parameters Nos. 6751 and 6752. The logging data operation time is determined from NC parameters Nos. 6757 and 6758. Does not turn machine state output 2 ON when the message transfer flashing light turnon command is issued. Turns machine state output 2 when the message transfer flashing light turn on command is issued. Does not turn machine state output 3 ON when the message transfer flashing light turnon command is issued. Turns machine state output 3 ON when the message transfer flashing light turnon command is issued. Does not display the order, lot number, and ID code on COUNTER screen. Displays the order, lot number, and ID code on COUNTER screen. The flashing light is turned on when a flashing light turnon command is specified with message transfer. The flashing light blinks when a flashing light turnon command is specified with message transfer.

761

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 9.6 Setting f 0 1 K 9.7 Function Does not switch the screen display to the FACTOLINK screen even when you press an alphanumeric key. Switches the screen display to the FACTOLINK screen when you press an alphanumeric key.

NOTE When K9.2 and K9.3 are equal to 0 or when K9.2 and K9.3 are equal to 1, machine state output 1 turns ON.
[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)
Keep relay K 10.0 Setting f 0 1 K 10.1 K 10.2 f f f 0 1 K 10.3 0 1 K 10.4 0 1 K 10.5 K 10.6 K 10.7 K 11.0 f f f 0 1 K 11.1 0 1 K 11.2 0 1 K 11.3 f f 0 1 K 11.4 0 1 K 11.5 K 11.6 K 11.7 f 0 1 (For adjustment) Makes turret adjustment mode invalid. Makes turret adjustment mode valid. The door is not unlocked at singleblock operation stop time. The door is unlocked at singleblock operation stop time. Enables the automatic door open/close button, regardless of the operation mode. Enables the automatic door open/close button in the manual mode only. Enables spindle rotation when the door is unlocked. Disables spindle rotation when the door is unlocked. When a special tool is mounted, spindle orientation is enabled. When a special tool is mounted, spindle orientation is disabled. (Reservation) (Reservation) The door is not unlocked with M00/M01. The door is unlocked with M00/M01. (Reservation) Lamp checking function OFF Lamp checking function ON For FACTOLINK For FACTOLINK Disables the hard copy function. Enables the hard copy function. Function

762

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 12.0 f K 12.1 K 12.2 K 12.3 f 0 1 K 12.4 f f Uses the detach function and overtravel function for the fourth and fifth axes Does not use the detach function and overtravel function for the fourth and fifth axes (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) Setting 0 1 Function The air pressure drop signal is normally open. The air pressure drop signal is normally closed.

K 12.5

0 1

Sets the oil level signal to normal open Sets the oil level signal to normal close The door will not be unlocked when M02 or M30 is executed (only for the CE marking specification). The door will be unlocked when M02 or M30 is executed. Door lock control A Door lock control B (Reservation)

K 12.6

0 1

K 12.7

0 1

K 13.0 K 13.1 f 0 1

Does not turn on the start button and automatic operation inprogress signal while the automatic door is being opened and closed. Turns on the start button and automatic operation inprogress signal while the automatic door is being opened and closed.

K 13.2

0 1

The automatic door is closed when the start button is released. The automatic door is closed when the start button is pressed. (Reservation)

K 13.3 K 13.4 K 13.5 K 13.6 K 13.7

(Reservation) (Reservation) (For adjustment)

763

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 14.0 Setting f f 0 1 K 14.1 0 1 K 14.2 f K 14.3 f K 14.4 f 0 1 0 1 0 1 Enables custom PMC editing. Disables custom PMC editing. The custom PMC function does not control spindle and cutting feed overrides. The custom PMC function controls spindle and cutting feed overrides. Turns on SI8.0 in the MEM mode/remote mode. Turns on SI8.0 in the MEM mode. Uses the additional axis clamp control signal as standard. Assigns the additional axis clamp control signal with the custom PMC function. Does not allow the custom PMC function to control the coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine. Allows the custom PMC function to control the coolant for cleaning the inside of the machine. Does not execute axis interlock control using the custom PLC function Executes axis interlock control using the custom PLC function Does not execute emergency stop control using the custom PLC function Executes emergency stop control using the custom PLC function Does not execute feed hold control using the custom PLC function Executes feed hold control using the custom PLC function (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Factory-adjusted according to the specifications of the machine) Function

K 14.5

f f f

0 1

K 14.6

0 1

K 14.7

0 1

K 15.0 K 15.1 K 15.2 K 15.3 K 15.4 K 15.5 K 15.6 K 15.7 f f f 0 1 K 16.0 0 1 K 16.1 0 1 K 16.2 f 0 1

Does not use the custom PLC function Uses the custom PLC function Disables the operators panel disable function. Enables the operators panel disable function. While the operators panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button is also disabled. While the operators panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button is enabled. While the operators panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close button is also disabled. (For CE mark specifications only) While the operators panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close button is enabled. (For CE mark specifications only)

764

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 16.3 Setting f 0 1 K 16.4 K 16.5 K 16.6 K 16.7 (Systemreserved) (Systemreserved) Function While the operators panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supply are canceled. While the operators panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supply are not canceled.

765

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 17.0 K 17.1 f f 0 1 K 17.2 0 1 K 17.3 K 17.4 K 17.5 K 17.6 K 17.7 K 18.0 K 18.1 K 18.2 K 18.3 K 18.4 K 18.5 K 18.6 K 18.7 K 19.0 K 19.1 K 19.2 K 19.3 K 19.4 K 19.5 K 19.6 K 19.7 (Reservation) (Reservation) (Reservation) (Reservation) (Factoryadjusted according to the specifications of the machine) (Reservation) (Reservation) (Reservation) Setting (Reservation) Disables the thermal displacement compensation function. Enables the thermal displacement compensation function. Renishaws touch probe is not controlled. Renishaws touch probe is controlled. Function

766

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 20.0 Setting f f 0 1 K 20.1 0 1 K 20.2 f f f 0 1 K 20.3 0 1 K 20.4 0 1 K 20.5 K 20.6 f 0 1 K 20.7 f 0 1 K 21.0 K 21.1 K 21.2 K 21.3 K 21.4 K 21.5 K 21.6 K 21.7 K 22.0 K 22.1 K 22.2 K 22.3 K 22.4 K 22.5 K 22.6 K 22.7 K 23.0 In remote operation, the screen switch and display keys on the operators panel can be used. In remote operation, the screen switch and display keys on the operators panel cannot be used. When MDI mode is selected by remote operation, the screen display is not changed to the menu operation screen. When MDI mode is selected by remote operation, the screen display is changed to the menu operation screen. Function The remote operators panel is of the standard type. The remote operators panel is of the full keypad type. In remote operation, operations on the standard selection screen are disabled. In remote operation, operations on the standard selection screen are not disabled. In remote operation, program editing and data setting are not permitted. In remote operation, program editing and data setting are permitted. Spindle override from the PC is specified with an override value. Spindle override from the PC is specified as the number of stages. At remote mode key switching on the operators panel, operation is stopped. At remote mode key switching on the operators panel, operation is not stopped.

767

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Keep relay] (A circle indicates the default)

Keep relay K 23.1 K 23.2 K 23.3 K 23.4 K 23.5 K 23.6 K 23.7 Setting Function

768

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Data table] (A circle indicates the default)

Address D0 D2 D4 D6 D8 D 10 D 12 D 14 D 16 D 18 D 20 D 22 D 24 D 26 D 28 D 30 D 32 D 34 D 36 D 38 D 40 D 42 D 44 D 46 D 48 D 50 D 52 D 54 D 56 D 58 D 60 **** **** **** **** **** **** Values of NC parameter No. 1620X and No. 6171X when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1620Y and No. 6171Y when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1621X and No. 6191X when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1621Y and No. 6191Y when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1620X and No. 6171X when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1620Y and No. 6171Y when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected 155 165 173 179 183 185 187 189 191 193 195 0 3000 96 Override of feed deceleration stage 0 Override of feed deceleration stage 1 Override of feed deceleration stage 2 Override of feed deceleration stage 3 Override of feed deceleration stage 4 Override of feed deceleration stage 5 Override of feed deceleration stage 6 Override of feed deceleration stage 7 Override of feed deceleration stage 8 Override of feed deceleration stage 9 Override of feed deceleration stage 10 Magazine number for which no alarm is issued at tool unclamp time. Interval for monitoring center through coolant pump operation time Used for additional axis reference position return adjustment Default 11 130 **** 11 0 **** 0 0 Function Number of feed deceleration stages in the warning level Constant for calculating the warning level Constant for calculating the breakage level Constant for calculating the breakage level Constant for calculating the breakage level No-load level (For adjustment) (For adjustment)

769

H. PMC PARAMETERS

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

[Data table] (A circle indicates the default)

Address D 62 D 64 D 66 D 68 D 70 D 72 D 74 D 76 D 78 D 80 D 82 D 84 D 86 D 88 D 90 D 92 D 94 D 96 D 98 D 100 D 850 D 851 D 852 D 853 D 854 D 855 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Magazine number of special tool T1 spindle taper air blow extension time T2 spindle taper air blow extension time T3 spindle taper air blow extension time T4 spindle taper air blow extension time T5 spindle taper air blow extension time T6 spindle taper air blow extension time Default **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** **** Function Values of NC parameter No. 1621X and No. 6191X when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1621Y and No. 6191Y when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6172X when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6172Y when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6192X when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6192Y when a table load less than 100 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6172X when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6172Y when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6192X when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6192Y when a table load of 100 kg or more is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1620Z and No. 6171Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1621Z and No. 6191Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1620Z and No. 6171Z when a tool weight of 2 kg is selected Values of NC parameter No. 1621Z and No. 6191Z when a tool weight of 2 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6172Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6192Z when a tool weight of 3 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6172Z when a tool weight of 2 kg is selected Value of NC parameter No. 6192Z when a tool weight of 2 kg is selected

770

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

H. PMC PARAMETERS

[Data table] (A circle indicates the default)

Address D 856 D 857 D 858 D 859 D 860 D 861 D 862 D 863 D 864 D 865 D 866 D 867 D 868 D 869 D 870 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Function T7 spindle taper air blow extension time T8 spindle taper air blow extension time T9 spindle taper air blow extension time T10 spindle taper air blow extension time T11 spindle taper air blow extension time T12 spindle taper air blow extension time T13 spindle taper air blow extension time T14 spindle taper air blow extension time T15 spindle taper air blow extension time T16 spindle taper air blow extension time T17 spindle taper air blow extension time T18 spindle taper air blow extension time T19 spindle taper air blow extension time T20 spindle taper air blow extension time T21 spindle taper air blow extension time

771

I. RECOMMENDED ATA CARD

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

RECOMMENDED ATA CARD

1. Card standard PCMCIA (personal Computer Memory Card International Association) PC Card standard Release 2.1, PCMCIA PC Card ATA Release 1.02 2. Card configuration PCMCIA TYPE I to TYPE II 3. Card operation mode PCATA specification 4. Power supply voltage 5V type or 5V/3.3V type (automatic change) 5. Flash ATA card which Fanuc has checked the operations
Manufacturer Product Name Memory Capacity 8MB 15MB 30MB 45MB 16MB 32MB 48MB 12MB 20MB 40MB 4MB 8MB 16MB 20MB 32MB 40MB Under volume production Power supply voltage Discontinued

(C) HITACHI

HB286008A3 HB286015A3 HB286030A3 HB286045A3 HB289016A4 HB289032A4 HB289048A4

(C) MATSUSHITA BN012AB BN020AB BN040AB (C) SanDisk SDP3B4 SDP3B8 SDP3B16 SDP3B20 SDP3B32 SDP3B40

772

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

I. RECOMMENDED ATA CARD

NOTE 1 Recommended for data input/output. Operation for other applications is not guaranteed. 2 Fanuc canot guarantee Flash ATA card except aboe cards. 3 The cards above support automatic switching between 5 V and 3.3 V, and can be used with T14iA, T14iB, and T14iC only. With models other than T14iA, T14iB, and T14iC, the cards above can be physically inserted into the memory card slot, but the memory card or CNC control unit is electrically destroyed when the power is turned on. Be careful when handling the cards above. 4 Its impossible to use 3.3V type card.

773

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function for Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isB.

774

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.1
EMBEDDED ETHERNET AND PCMCIA ETHERNET

The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot to the left of the front LCD for temporary communication. The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot to the left of the front LCD for temporary communication. NOTE 1 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card for temporary communication only. Do not use the PCMCIA Ethernet card for routine communication. 2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot to the left of the LCD. This means that some part of the card is projected. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, be careful not to damage the card by hitting the card with an object. After using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, remove the card immediately to prevent the card from being damaged. 3 With FS21iB, the builtin Ethernet port cannot be used. 4 In the description of the PCMCIA Ethernet card given here, the card is assumed to be installed in the Series 16i/18i/21iB. When the PCMCIA Ethernet card is installed in the Series 160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isB, the card cannot be used for the embedded Ethernet function.

775

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.2
LIST OF FUNCTIONS

With the embedded Ethernet function, the following functions can be operated: S FACTOLINK function S FOCAS1/Ethernet function S DNC1/Ethernet function S FTP file transfer function

J.2.1
FACTOLINK Function

With the FACTOLINK function, data such as work instructions can be displayed on the CNC screen, and NC data can be transferred by operations on the NC. For details, refer to FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operators Manual (B75054EN). NOTE The FACTOLINK function is usable with the control software for the builtin Ethernet function series 656A and edition 02 and later.

Screen display

Data such as work instructions created using a personal computer can be displayed on the NC screen by operations on the NC. The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the NC: D NC program D NC file data H Parameter H Ladder program H C language executor execution form H Macro executor execution form H NC system file D PMC data H Addresses T, K, C, D

NC data transfer

Logging

Machine state information can be automatically sent to the personal computer.

J.2.2
FOCAS1/Ethernet Function

The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotely control and monitor the CNC. The FOCAS1/Ethernet function can transfer a wider range of NC data than the DNC1/Ethernet function. For details, refer to FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/Ethernet CNC/PMC Data Window Library Description. The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the personal computer: D Data related to control axes/spindles H Absolute position
776

NC data transfer

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

D D D

D D

D D D D D D D D

H Relative position H Machine position H Remaining travel amount H Actual speed NC program Part program storage directory information NC data file H Parameter H Tool offset value H Custom macro variable H Workpiece origin offset H Setting data H P code macro variable H Pitch error compensation Tool life management data History data H Operation history data H Alarm history data Servo/spindlerelated data Data related to waveform diagnosis Modal data Diagnosis data A/D conversion data Alarm information NC system identification information PMC data H Addresses G, F, Y, X, A, R, T, K, C, D H Extended nonvolatile data

Remote operation

From the personal computer, the following operations can be performed: D NC program selection D NC program deletion D External reset NOTE With the FOCAS1/Ethernet function of the builtin Ethernet function, DNC operation cannot be performed.

777

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.2.3
DNC1/Ethernet Function

The DNC1/Ethernet function allows a personal computer to remotely control and monitor the CNC. The DNC1/Ethernet function provides software libraries in a simpler function call format when compared with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function. For details, refer to FANUC Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operators Manual (B75044EN). The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the personal computer: D NC program D Part program storage directory information D NC file data H Parameter H Tool offset value H Custom macro variable D Alarm information D NC system identification information D PMC data H Addresses G, F, Y, X, A, R, T, K, C, D

NC data transfer

Remote operation

From the personal computer, the following operations can be performed: D NC program selection D NC program deletion D External reset NOTE With the DNC1/Ethernet function of the builtin Ethernet function, DNC operation cannot be performed.

778

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Differences between the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernet function Compared with the FOCAS1/Ethernet function, the DNC1/Ethernet function provides software libraries in a simpler function call format for frequently used functions.

J.2.4
FTP File Transfer Function

The FTP file transfer function transfers files with FTP. The function can read and punch NC programs and various types of NC data. NOTE The FTP file transfer function is usable with the control software for the builtin Ethernet function series 656A and edition 02 and later.

NC data transfer [Personal computer Part program storage]

The following NC data can be transferred by operations on the NC: D NC program D NC file data H Parameter H Tool offset value H Workpiece origin offset H Pitch error compensation H M code group (Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180isB only) D History data H Operation history data
779

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.2.5
Functional Differences between the Embedded Ethernet Function and the Ethernet Function Based on the Option Board

The table below indicates the differences between the embedded Ethernet function and the Ethernet function based on the option board.
Embedded Ethernet FOCAS1/Ethernet function CNC screen display function DNC operation Data server function FACTOLINK function Available Not available Not available Not available (NOTE 1) Available Option board Available Available Available Available Available

780

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

NOTE 1 The builtin Ethernet function includes the FTP file transfer function. This function is equivalent to the NC data transfer function in the FTP mode of the data server function of the option board. 2 Compared with the option board, the builtin Ethernet function allows a smaller number of FOCAS1/Ethernet clients to be connected simultaneously.
Embedded Ethernet Number of clients that can be connected simultaneously 5 clients maximum Ethernet board 10 clients maximum 10 units maximum Fast Ethernet board 20 clients maximum 20 units maximum

Number of personal 1 unit computers that can be connected simultaneously (recommended)

3 Communications using the builtin Ethernet function is processed by the CPU of the CNC. This means that the operation state of the CNC can affect the performance of communication based on the builtin Ethernet function, and communication based on the builtin Ethernet function can affect the processing of the CNC. The builtin Ethernet function has lower priority than axisbyaxis processing such as automatic operation processing and manual operation. So, when automatic operation is being performed or many controlled axes are involved, communication may become slower. On the contrary, the builtin Ethernet function has higher priority over CNC screen display processing, C language executor processing (excluding highlevel tasks), and macro executor processing (excluding execution macros). So, communication based on the builtin Ethernet function can decrease the performance of such processing. 4 Note that when the builtin Ethernet function is connected to an intranet that handles large volumes of broadcast data, for example, the processing of broadcast data can take a longer time, resulting in a decrease in performance of processing such as CNC screen display processing.

781

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.3
SETTING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This section describes the setting of the parameters for the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isB.

J.3.1
Parameter Setting of the FACTOLINK Function

This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FACTOLINK function when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isB is used.

J.3.1.1
Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time
CAUTION When using the builtin Ethernet function for the first time, make various settings including IP address setting carefully and conduct a communication test sufficiently, consulting with your network manager. Note that if an incorrect IP address is set, for example, the entire network can suffer from a communication error.

NOTE 1 When the FACTOLINK function is used, the optional function corresponding to a CNC used is required. Series 16iTB A02B0281S708 Series 16iMB A02B0282S708 Series 18iTB A02B0283S708 Series 18iMB A02B0284S708 Series 21iTB A02B0285S708 Series 21iMB A02B0286S708 2 With the FACTOLINK function, only one FACTOLINK server can be connected to one CNC.

782

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.3.1.2
FACTOLINK parameter setting screen
Display

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FACTOLINK function.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key
SYSTEM

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The Ethernet parameter setting screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. 5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the embedded Ethernet port can be set. By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set. NOTE The parameters for the builtin Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. 6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys, enter and update data.
783

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

7 Switch the screen display with the page keys If data is already registered, the data is displayed.

PAGE PAGE

784

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Display item and setting items

Display item related to the embedded Ethernet function Embedded Ethernet TCP/IP setting items

The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.

Item MAC ADDRESS Description Embedded Ethernet MAC address

Set the TCP/IPrelated items of the embedded Ethernet.

Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Description Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Example of specification format: 192.168.1.1) Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: 255.255.255.0) Specify the IP address of the router.Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: 192.168.1.254)

ROUTER IP ADDRESS

FACTOLINK setting items

Set the items related to the host computer with which the FACTOLINK server operates.
Item IP ADDRESS Description Specify the IP address of a personal computer to be accessed by the FACTOLINK function. (Example of specification format: 192.168.1.100) Specify a port number to be used with the FACTOLINK function. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535. A specified port number must match ocsnc of the services file of the personal computer. For details, refer to FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operators Manual (B75054EN).

PORT NUMBER

J.3.1.3
Parameters Parameters
0802

The NC parameters related to the FACTOLINK function are described below.

Communicationchannel

[Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 21: Select the embedded Ethernet.
#7 0810 #6 #5 MONO #4 TIME #3 #2 #1 #0 BGS

[Data type] Bit BGS When the FACTOLINK screen is not displayed: 1 : Logging is performed in the background. 0 : Logging is not performed.
785

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

TIME For time display: 1 : 97/11/12 00:00 format is used. 0 : Wed Nov 12 00:00:00 format is used. MONO When the FACTOLINK screen is displayed: 1 : Twotone monochrome display is used. 0 : Color display is used.
0811 Type of logging

[Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0, 1, 10, 20, 21 0 : D address area 1 : R address area 10 : Fixed data only 20 : D address area + fixed data 21 : R address area + fixed data
0812 PMC address for logging data

[Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 Set a start PMC address for storing logging data.
0813 Data length of logging data

[Data type] Word [Unit of data] Number of bytes [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 Set the data length of logging data.
0814 Trigger PMC address for logging

[Data type] Word [Valid data range] 0 to 65535 Set a PMC address that serves as a trigger for specifying logging data.
0815 Logging data transmission interval

[Data type] Doubleword [Unit of data] Seconds [Valid data range] 0 to 4294967295 Set a time interval used for transmitting logging data (fixed data only). If 0 is set, logging data is transmitted at connection time only.

786

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

0820 0821 0822 0823 0824 0825 0826 0827 0828

Machine name posted to the host computer (1st byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (2nd byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (3rd byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (4th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (5th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (6th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (7th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (8th byte) Machine name posted to the host computer (9th byte)

[Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 32 to 126 Set a machine name that is unique to each CNC and is required for the host computer to identify each CNC. Use ASCII codes in decimal for alphanumeric characters and blanks to set a machine name.
#7 NPA #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

3111

[Data type] Bit NPA When an alarm is issued while the FACTOLINK screen is displayed: 1 : The screen display does not switch to the alarm screen. 0 : The screen display switches to the alarm screen.

787

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.3.1.4
Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network

An example of minimum setting required to operate the FACTOLINK function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FACTOLINK. D On personal computer 1, the server of the FACTOLINK function operates. D On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the client of the FACTOLINK function operates.

10BASET or 100BASETX

CNC 1

CNC 2

PC 1

CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address IP address Port number NC parameter No. 802 NC parameter No. 820 NC parameter No. 821 NC parameter No. 822 NC parameter No. 823 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 None 192.168.1.100 9000 21 67 C 78 N 67 C 49 1 PC 1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway ocsnc ocscomm ocsapplication

CNC 2 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 None 192.168.1.100 9000 21 67 C The parameter screen is used for setting. 78 N 67 C 50 2 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.

192.168.0.100 255.255.255.0 None 9000/TCP 9001/TCP 9002/TCP Refer to FANUC FACTOLINK Script Function Operators Manual (B75054EN). Microsoft TCP/IP property of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting.

788

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.3.1.5
Configuring a large network

When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address.

J.3.2
Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function

This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FOCAS1/Ethernet function (or DNC1/Ethernet function) when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isB is used.

J.3.2.1
Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time
CAUTION When using the builtin Ethernet function for the first time, make various settings including IP address setting carefully and conduct a communication test sufficiently, consulting with your network manager. Note that if an incorrect IP address is set, for example, the entire network can suffer from a communication error.

NOTE 1 The FOCAS1/Ethernet function allows up to five FOCAS1/Ethernet clients to be connected to one CNC. 2 If multiple application software products or multiple personal computers access the CNC simultaneously, the communication load on the CNC can increase, resulting in decreased communication speed and degraded CNC screen display processing.

789

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.3.2.2
FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen
Display

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FOCAS1/Ethernet function.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key
SYSTEM

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The Ethernet parameter setting screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. 5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the embedded Ethernet port can be set. By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set. NOTE The parameters for the builtin Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. 6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys, enter and update data. 7 Switch the screen display with the page keys
PAGE PAGE

790

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

If data is already registered, the data is displayed.

791

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Display item and setting items

Display item related to the embedded Ethernet function

The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.

Item MAC ADDRESS Description Embedded Ethernet MAC address

Embedded Ethernet TCP/IP setting items

Set the TCP/IPrelated items of the embedded Ethernet.

Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Description Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Example of specification format: 192.168.1.1) Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: 255.255.255.0) Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: 192.168.1.254)

ROUTER IP ADDRESS

FOCAS1/Ethernet setting items

Set the items related to the FOCAS1/Ethernet function.

Item PORT NUMBER (TCP) Description Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS1/ Ethernet function. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535. When using a port number for the DNC1/Ethernet function, refer to FANUC Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operators Manual (B75044EN). Specify this item when using the DNC1/Ethernet function. Specify a UDP port number for transmitting UDP broadcast data. The valid input range is 5001 to 65535. For details, refer to FANUC Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operators Manual (B75044EN). Set 0 when using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function or when transmitting no UDP broadcast data. Specify this item when using the DNC1/Ethernet function. Specify a time interval at which UDP broadcast data specified above with a UDP port number is transmitted. The unit is 10 ms. The valid input range is 10 to 65535. This means that a value less than 100 ms cannot be specified. Set 0 when using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function or when transmitting no UDP broadcast data. Example)100: Broadcast data is transmitted at intervals of one second [1000 ms] (= 100 10).

PORT NUMBER (UDP)

TIME INTERVAL (NOTE 1)

792

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

NOTE 1 When a small value is set for the item of time interval, communication load increases, and the performance of the network can be adversely affected. 2 The parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are set to the following default values before shipment: IP address: 192.168.1.1 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Router IP address: None TCP port number: 8193 UDP port number: 0 Time interval: 0

793

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.3.2.3
Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network

An example of minimum setting required to operate the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FOCAS1/Ethernet. D On personal computer 1, the client of the FOCAS1/Ethernet function operates. D On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the server of the FOCAS1/Ethernet function operates.

10BASET or 100BASETX

CNC 1

CNC 2

PC 1

CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address TCP port number UDP port number Time interval 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 None 8193 0 0

CNC 2 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 None 8193 0 0 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.

PC 1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway CNC 1 NC IP address NC TCP port number CNC 2 NC IP address NC TCP port number 192.168.1.101 255.255.255.0 None 192.168.1.1 8193 192.168.1.2 8193 The arguments of the data window library function cnc_allclibhndl3 are used for setting. Microsoft TCP/IP property of the personal computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000) is used for setting.

794

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.3.2.4
Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network

An example of minimum setting required to operate the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network is provided below. In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through DNC1/Ethernet. D On personal computer 1, the client of the DNC1/Ethernet function operates. D On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the server of the DNC1/Ethernet function operates.

10BASET or 100BASETX

CNC 1

CNC 2

PC 1

CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address TCP port number UDP port number Time interval 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 None 8193 8192 100 PC 1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway FANUC_C4_SERVER CNC 1 NC IP address NC TCP port number CNC 2 NC IP address NC TCP port number

CNC 2 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 None 8193 8192 100 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.

192.168.1.101 255.255.255.0 None 8192/udp Machine No. 1 192.168.1.1 8193 Machine No. 2 192.168.1.2 8193

Microsoft TCP/IP property of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting.

Refer to FANUC Personal Computer FA System Windows NT Version Operators Manual.

795

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.3.2.5
Configuring a large network

When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address.

J.3.3
Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function

This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FTP file transfer function when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isB is used.

J.3.3.1
Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time
CAUTION When using the builtin Ethernet function for the first time, make various settings including IP address setting carefully and conduct a communication test sufficiently, consulting with your network manager. Note that if an incorrect IP address is set, for example, the entire network can suffer from a communication error.

NOTE With the FTP file transfer function, only one FTP session can be established with one CNC.

796

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.3.3.2
FTP file transfer parameter setting screen
Display

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FTP file transfer function.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key
SYSTEM

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The Ethernet parameter setting screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. 5 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key, the parameters for the embedded Ethernet port can be set. By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set. NOTE The parameters for the builtin Ethernet port and the parameters for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other. 6 By using the MDI keys and soft keys, enter and update data.
797

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

7 Switch the screen display with the page keys If data is already registered, the data is displayed.

PAGE PAGE

798

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Display item and setting items

Display item related to the embedded Ethernet function

The item related to the embedded Ethernet function is displayed.

Item MAC ADDRESS Description Embedded Ethernet MAC address

Embedded Ethernet TCP/IP setting items

Set the TCP/IPrelated items of the embedded Ethernet.

Item IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK Description Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet. (Example of specification format: 192.168.1.1) Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network. (Example of specification format: 255.255.255.0) Specify the IP address of the router. Specify this item when the network contains a router. (Example of specification format: 192.168.1.254)

ROUTER IP ADDRESS

FTP file transfer setting items

Make settings related to the FTP file transfer function. Settings for up to three host computers can be made.
Item PORT NUMBER Description Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file transfer function. An FTP session is used, so that 21 is to be specified usually. Specify the IP address of the host computer. (Example of specification format: 192.168.1.150) Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the host computer with FTP. (Up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specify a password for the user name specified above. Be sure to set a password. (Up to 31 characters can be specified.) Specify a work directory to be used when logging in to the host computer. (Up to 127 characters can be specified.)

IP ADDRESS USERNAME

PASSWORD

LOGIN DIR

799

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.3.3.3
Parameters Parameters
0020

The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are described below.

I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection

[Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 9: Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.
0931 0932 0933 0934 0935 Special character (No. 1) Special character (No. 2) Special character (No. 3) Special character (No. 4) Special character (No. 5)

[Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 32 to 126 NC parameters No. 931 to No. 935 enable soft keys to substitute for characters unavailable with the MDI keys. When a number other than 0 is set in each of these parameters, [CHAR1] to [CHAR5] are displayed in the input soft keys for special characters. Example) When 33 is set in parameter No. 931, pressing the [CHAR1] soft key enters !.

800

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.3.3.4
Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network

An example of minimum setting required to operate the FTP file transfer function on a small network is provided below. (Windows NT 4.0 Workstation is used as the OS for the personal computer.) In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through the FTP file transfer function. D On personal computer 1, the FTP server function operates. D On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file transfer function.

10BASET or 100BASETX

CNC 1

CNC 2

PC 1

CNC 1 IP address Subnet mask Router IP address Connection host Port number 1 IP address User name Password Login DIR NC parameter No. 20 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 None 21 192.168.1.150 FANUC FANUC None 9 PC 1 IP address Subnet mask Default gateway User name Password Login DIR 192.168.1.150 255.255.255.0 None FANUC FANUC Default

CNC 2 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 None 21 192.168.1.150 FANUC FANUC None 9 The parameter screen is used for setting. The Ethernet parameter screen is used for setting.

Microsoft TCP/IP property of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting.

User manager of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting.

Internet service manager of the personal computer (Windows NT) is used for setting.

801

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.3.3.5
Configuring a large network

When configuring a large network or expanding an existing network, consult with your network manager to set an IP address, subnet mask, and router IP address.

J.3.4
Communication Parameter Input Method

This subsection describes the method of parameter input when the embedded Ethernet function for the Series 16i/18i/21i160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210isB is used.

Basic method of data input The basic method of data input is described below, using an example of IP address input. 1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen. 3 Move the cursor to a desired input item with cursor keys. 4 Type data with MDI keys. 5 Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key
INPUT

Procedure

to enter the data.

NOTE When deleting numeric data already set, enter 0. When deleting character data already set, enter SP (space). Example) Setting 192.168.1.1 as IP address data (a) Move the cursor to the item of IP address.

802

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

(b) Type 192.168.1.1 with the MDI keys.

(c) Press the [INPUT] soft key or the function key

INPUT

to enter the

data. This stores the parameter in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC.

NOTE To make the new parameter settings effective, turn the power off then back on, or select the [RESET] soft key on the maintenance screen of the embedded Ethernet.

803

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Method of lowercase character input The method of entering lowercase characters when specifying a user name, password, and login DIR is described below.

Procedure

1 2 3 4

Place the CNC in the MDI mode. Display the Ethernet parameter screen. Move the cursor to a desired input item with cursor keys. When the [UNLOCK] soft key is displayed, uppercase characters are actually entered through MDI keys. For lowercase character input, press the [UNLOCK] soft key. The soft key display changes from [UNLOCK] to [LOCK]. 5 Then, press the MDI keys A through Z. All of these characters are entered as lowercase characters.

6 To enter uppercase characters, press the [LOCK] soft key.

804

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Method of entering a long character string The method of entering a character string longer than 32 characters for specifying a login DIR is described below. As an example, the processing for setting the character string /NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP002 is described.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen. 3 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys.

4 Press the [STRING] soft key. The cursor position and soft key display change as shown below.

805

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

5 Type /NCDATA/NCPROGRAM/LINE001/GROUP0 with the MDI keys, then press the [INPUT] soft key.

6 Next, type the remaining character string 02 with the MDI keys, then press the [INPUT] soft key.

[Tip] If the maximum number of characters specifiable at one time, that is, 32 characters, is not used, but the character string is divided into /NCDATA/NCPROGRAM and /LINE001/GROUP002 for two input operations, for example, the same result can be obtained.

806

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

7 To insert /FACTORY0010 between NCPROGRAM and /LINE001, move the cursor to / prefixed to LINE001 then type /FACTORY0010 with the MDI keys. Finally, press the [INSERT] soft key.

8 To delete a character, move the cursor to the character to be deleted, then press the [DEL.CH] soft key. This operation deletes a character on which the cursor is placed one at a time. 9 To overwrite a character, move the cursor to the character to be overwritten, then type a desired character with the MDI key. Finally, press the [INPUT] soft key. This operation overwrites a character on which the cursor is placed. 10 Upon completion of character string input, press the [RETURN] soft key. This operation returns the cursor position and soft key display to the state of step 1, and stores the set data in the nonvolatile memory of the CNC.

807

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Method of entering special characters The method of entering special characters such as \ unavailable with the MDI keys is described below. As an example, the procedure for setting the character string PROG$ is described.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Display the Ethernet parameter screen. 3 Move the cursor to LOGIN DIR with cursor keys. 4 Type PROG with the MDI keys, then press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.

NOTE Those characters unavailable with the MDI keys that are used frequently such as :, \, $, and _ can be entered using soft keys. To enter a character other than these characters, set the ASCII code of the character in a parameter from parameters No. 931 through No. 935. For details, see Subsection 17.3.3.3, Parameters.

808

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

5 Press the [$] soft key.

6 Press the [INPUT] soft key.

809

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.4
SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES
Procedure

There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices.

1 Place the CNC in the MDI mode. 2 Press the function key
SYSTEM

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [ETHPRM] soft key. The Ethernet parameter setting screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed.

810

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

5 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The screen for switching between the embedded Ethernet port and the PCMCIA Ethernet card appears.

6 Press the [PCMCIA] soft key. A confirmation message appears. Press the [EXEC] soft key to switch the device. NOTE Information about the switched device is stored in the nonvolatile memory. So, when you turn on the power next time, the previously selected device can be used directly.

811

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.5
EMBEDDED ETHERNET OPERATIONS J.5.1
FACTOLINK Function
Display

This section describes the operation required of each embedded Ethernet function.

The operation of the FACTOLINK function is described below.

Procedure

1 Press the function key

MESSAGE

2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display.

3 Press the [FALINK] soft key. The FACTOLINK screen appears. The screen shown below is a sample FACTOLINK screen.

812

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.5.2
FTP File Transfer Function

The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below.

J.5.2.1
Host file list display Procedure

A list of the files held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer is displayed. 1 Press the function key .

PROG

2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 3 Press the [HOST] soft key. The host file list screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. 4 When you press the [EMBEDD] soft key, a list of the files held on the host computer specified with the embedded Ethernet port is displayed. If the usable embedded Ethernet function device is the PCMCIA card, the [PCMCIA] soft key is displayed instead of the [EMBEDD] soft key. When you press the [PCMCIA] soft key, a list of the files held on the host computer specified with the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.

813

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

NOTE 1 File names including kanji, hiragana, or katanana characters are not displayed correctly. 2 Depending on the FTP server software, the number of displayed programs may differ between the host file list screen above and the host file list (detail) screen described below. 5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be switched using the page keys
PAGE PAGE

6 Press the [UPDATE] soft key to update the screen display. 7 Press the [SWITCH] soft key. The host file list (detail) screen appears.

814

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

NOTE The host file list (detail) screen shown above is an example of screen display, and information displayed may vary according to the specification of the FTP server used with the host computer.

Display items D Number of registered program files D Currently connected host List of operations D SWITCH D UPDATE D STOP D SEARCH This operation switches between normal display and detail display. This operation updates information displayed. This operation stops [SEARCH] operation. This operation updates screen information so that a file specified by its file number is placed at the start of the list. This operation deletes a file held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. This operation reads a file held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer to the CNC part program storage. This soft key is displayed only when 9 is set as the input/output device number of the CNC, and the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode. This operation outputs a file held in the CNC part program storage to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer. This soft key is displayed only when 9 is set as the input/output device number of the CNC, and the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode. The number of files registered in the directory (folder) of the host computer currently connected is displayed. The number of the host currently connected is displayed.

D DELETE

D READ

D PUNCH

815

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.5.2.2
Host file search Procedure

When a list of the files held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer is displayed, a file can be placed at the start of the list by specifying its file number. 1 Display the host file list screen. 2 Press the [SEARCH] soft key. 3 Type the file number of a file to be displayed at the start of the list with the MDI keys. [Input format] <filenumber> 4 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 5 During search, SEARCH blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

J.5.2.3
Host file deletion Procedure

A file held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be deleted.

1 Display the host file list screen. 2 Press the [DELETE] soft key. 3 Type the file number or file name of a file to be deleted, with the MDI keys. [Input format] <filenumber> or <filename> 4 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 5 During deletion, DELETED blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen. NOTE 1 When a file number is used for deletion, only a file displayed on the host file list screen can be deleted. 2 The information displayed at the right end of the host file list (detail) screen is recognized as a file name. So, when deleting a host file from the host file list (detail) screen by specifying its file number, check that a file name is displayed at the right end of the screen, before specifying the file number. 3 When a host file to be deleted includes a kanji, hiragana, or katakaka character, switch from the host file list (detail) screen to the host file list screen then specify its file number for deletion.

816

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.5.2.4
NC program input

A file (NC program) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be read to the part program storage.

For the host file list screen

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the host file list screen. 3 Press the [READ] soft key. 4 Type the file number or file name of an NC program to be input, with the MDI keys. [Input format] <filenumber> or <filename> 5 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 6 During input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen. CAUTION 1 If the part program storage holds an NC program that has the same O number as that of an NC program to be input, the NC program in the part program storage is overwritten when bit 2 of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1. 2 If an NC program is input when bit 0 of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, all NC programs in the part program storge are automatically deleted before NC program input. [Example of use] When a file with the file name O0001.DAT held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer is to be input to the part program storage, enter O001.DAT. Note, however, that the O number input to the part program storage depends on the O number described in the file named O0001.DAT.

NOTE When a file is input from this screen to the part program storage, the O number described in the file is input.

817

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

For the program screen

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROG

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [READ] soft key. Type the O number of an NC program to be input, with the MDI keys. [Input format] <Onumber> 9 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 10 During input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen. CAUTION 1 If the part program storage holds an NC program that has the same O number as that of an NC program to be input, the NC program in the part program storage is overwritten when bit 2 of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1. 2 If an NC program is input when bit 0 of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, all NC programs in the part program storge are automatically deleted before NC program input.

NOTE The valid O number of a file to be input to the part program storage is Oxxxx (with xxxx representing a number) only.

J.5.2.5
NC program output

A file (NC program) held in the part program storage can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.

For the host file list screen

Procedure

1 2 3 4

Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. Display the host file list screen. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. Type the O number of an NC program to be output, with the MDI keys. [Input format] <Onumber> 5 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 6 During output, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.
818

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

[Example of use] When an NC program (O0001) held in the part program storage is to be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer, enter O0001.

NOTE A file name to be output to the hard disk built into the host computer is Oxxxx at all times.

For the program screen

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8
PROG

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. Type the O number of an NC program to be output, with the MDI keys. [Input format] <Onumber> 9 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 10 During output, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen. NOTE A file name to be output to the hard disk built into the host computer is Oxxxx at all times.

J.5.2.6
Input/output of various types of data

With the FTP file transfer function, the types of data listed below can be input/output. This subsection describes the input/output method. 1) NC parameter 2) Tool offset value 3) Custom macro variable 4) Workpiece origin offset 5) Pitch error compensation 6) M code group 7) Operation history data
819

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Parameter input The file (NC parameter) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SYSTEM

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [READ] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key. During input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

Parameter output

The fixed file name PRAMETER is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

The file (NC parameter) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SYSTEM

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key. During output, UTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name PRAMETER is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

820

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Tool offset value input The file (tool offset value) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
OFFSET SETTING

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [OFFSET] soft key. The tool compensation screen appears. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [READ] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key. During input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

Tool offset value output The file (tool offset value) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
OFFSET SETTING

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [OFFSET] soft key. The tool compensation screen appears. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key. During output, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name TOOLOFS is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

821

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Workpiece origin offset input The file (workpiece origin offset) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key
OFFSET SETTING

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [COORSYS] soft key. The workpiece coordinate system setting screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 7 Press the [READ] soft key. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name WORKOFS is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

Workpiece origin offset output The file (workpiece origin offset) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key
OFFSET SETTING

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [COORSYS] soft key. The workpiece coordinate system setting screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During output, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name WORKOFS is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

822

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Pitch error compensation input The file (pitch error compensation) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SYSTEM

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PITCH] soft key. The pitch error setting screen appears. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [READ] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key. During input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name PITCH is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

Pitch error compensation output The file (pitch error compensation) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SYSTEM

Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PITCH] soft key. The pitch error setting screen appears. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. Press the [EXEC] soft key. During output, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name PITCH is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

823

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

M code group input The file (M code group) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key
SYSTEM

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [M CODE] soft key. The M code group setting screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 7 Press the [READ] soft key. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name MCODE is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

M code group output The file (M code group) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key
SYSTEM

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [M CODE] soft key. The M code group setting screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During output, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name MCODE is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

824

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Operation history data input The file (operation history data) held on the hard disk embeddedto the host computer can be input to the CNC memory.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key
SYSTEM

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [OPRTHISTORY] soft key. The operation history screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 7 Press the [READ] soft key. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name HISTORY is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

Operation history data output The file (operation history data) held in the CNC memory can be output to the hard disk embeddedto the host computer.

Procedure

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key
SYSTEM

3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [OPRTHISTORY] soft key. The operation history screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. 6 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 7 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. 8 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 9 During output, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.

File name File format, restrictions

The fixed file name HISTORY is used. Refer to the operators manual of each CNC.

825

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.5.2.7
Checking and changing of the connection host Procedure

The host computer to which the FTP file transfer function attempts to make a connection as the current communication destination can be checked. 1 Press the function key .

PROG

2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 3 Press the [CNCTHOST] soft key. The connection host change screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. 4 When you press the [EMBEDD] soft key, a list of the connection host computers specified with the embedded Ethernet port is displayed. If the usable embedded Ethernet function device is the PCMCIA card, the [PCMCIA] soft key is displayed instead of the [EMBEDD] soft key. When you press the [PCMCIA] soft key, a list of the connection host computers specified with the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.

826

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

NOTE The title of the host computer that is the current communication destination of the data server board is displayed in reverse video. 5 The connected host can be changed by pressing the [CON1], [CON2], or [CON3] soft key. Display items D Port number, IP address, user name, login DIR List of operations D CON1 D CON2 D CON3 This operation changes the connected host to host 1. This operation changes the connected host to host 2. This operation changes the connected host to host 3. Those values that are set on the Ethernet parameter setting screen are displayed.

827

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.6
EMBEDDED ETHERNET ERROR MESSAGE SCREEN
Display

If an error occurs with each function of the embedded Ethernet function, the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function displays an error message.

Procedure

1 Press the function key

MESSAGE

2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 3 Press the [ETHLOG] soft key. The Ethernet log screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. 4 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key or the [PCMCIA] soft key, the error message screen for the embedded Ethernet function can be displayed. The error message screen does not differ between the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The same screen is shared.

828

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

5 Switch the screen display with the page keys

PAGE PAGE

[Tip] The latest error message is displayed at the top of the screen. To the right of an error message, the date and time data of the occurrence of the error is displayed. The format of date and time data is ddhhmmss where dd represents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss represents seconds. Configuration The embedded Ethernet log screen consists of the screens below. (1) EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to set the parameters of the embedded Ethernet function and display error messages at the time of embedded Ethernet initialization (2) EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to display error messages related to the FOCAS1/Ethernet function (DNC1/Ethernet function) (3) EMB_ETH PMC LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to display error messages related to the PMC online monitor functions such as FAPT LADDERIII (4) EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to display error messages related to the FACTOLINK function (5) EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG screen (2 screens) Log screen used to display error messages related to the FTP file transfer function
829

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.7
EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN
Display

With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is available. The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the embedded Ethernet function operates abnormally.

Procedure

1 Press the function key

SYSTEM

2 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 3 Press the [ETHMNT] soft key. The Ethernet maintenance screen appears. The Ethernet functions currently available are displayed.

The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. 4 By pressing the [EMBEDD] soft key or the [PCMCIA] soft key, the maintenance screen for the embedded Ethernet function can be displayed. The maintenance screen does not differ between the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card. The same screen is shared. 5 Switch the screen display with the page keys
PAGE PAGE

830

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

6 The screen below is used to check the state of the communication cable and whether a communication destination exists. Enter the IP address of a communication destination through MDI keys, then press the [PING] soft key. Communication is performed three times with the specified communication destination, and the results are displayed.

Messages displayed: Reply from IPaddress This message indicates that a response was received from the specified communication destination and that the specified communication destination exists on the network. Request Timed out IPaddress This message indicates that no response was received from the specified communication destination and that the specified communication destination does not exist on the network. Check if the power to the communication destination equipment is turned on. Check also the parameter settings and network installation for errors. IP address Error (IPaddress) The specified IP address is incorrect. Check the entered IP address.

831

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

7 The screen below is used to check the communication state of the embedded Ethernet function and the error detection count of the Ethernet controller.

The screen consists of two pages: one page for an error detection count for transmission, and the other for an error detection count for reception. By pressing the [CLEAR] soft key, the error detection counters for transmission and reception can be cleared to 0. By pressing the [RESET] soft key, the current communication device can be initialized and communication can be performed from the initial state. Use this key to reset communication based on the embedded Ethernet function.
832

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

8 The screen below is used to check the state of each task of the embedded Ethernet function.

Symbol MASTER CTRL E D W P S FOCAS1 #0 X E C O N FOCAS1 #1, #2 X C D W UDP X E D W

Meaning Ethernet controller being initialized Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) Waiting for parameter setting Parameters being set Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Being activated Waiting for connection from the personal computer Connection being processed FOCAS1/Ethernet execution disabled Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Waiting for connection from the personal computer Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) Not executed yet. Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization. Being activated Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE)

833

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

Symbol PMC X D W FTP X D W FACTOLINK X D W

Meaning Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE) Waiting for completion of Ethernet controller initialization Data being processed(NOTE) Waiting for data processing(NOTE)

NOTE A state change occurs between the states Data being processed and Waiting for data processing even when communication is not performed actually. 9 Information about the interface between the FTP file transfer function and CNC is displayed.

834

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

Item EMPTY COUNTER

Description Indicates a buffer empty count during NC program transfer from the FTP file transfer function to the CNC.This counter is initialized to 0 at poweron, then is incremented each time a certain condition is satisfied. Indicates the total number of bytes transferred when one NC program is transferred using the FTP file transfer function. Indicates internal buffer management information when the FTP file transfer function is used.

TOTAL SIZE

READ POINTERWRITE POINTER

835

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.8
TROUBLESHOOTING J.8.1
Check Items Related to Connection with the HUB

This section describes troubleshooting and check items associated with the embedded Ethernet function.

1) Is an STP cable used for connection between the hub and embedded Ethernet? 2) Is the STP cable connected correctly? In general, a straight cable is used for connection between the hub and communication device. 3) Is the power to the hub turned on? 4) The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used only with 10BASET. Is a hub for 10BASET used when the PCMCIA Ethernet card is used? 5) Is the link LED turned on when the embedded Ethernet port is used? The link LED is not turned on when the hub is not connected or the power to the hub is not turned on. 6) Is the LED (for link display) of the connected hub turned on? (Some hubs are not provided with a link LED.) The LED is not turned on when the hub is not connected with the embedded Ethernet or the power to the CNC is not turned on.

J.8.2
Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone

This subsection can be ignored when a network is built only with a hub to which the embedded Ethernet is connected. The general check items are listed below. For network installation, consult with vendors specialized in this area. Install cables away from noise sources.

When a 10BASE5 backbone is used 1) Are transceivers connected to the backbone cable correctly? S If the transceivers are connected correctly, the resistance between the backbone shield and central conductor is about 25 ohms (when terminating resistors are attached). S A special tool may be required for transceiver installation. (The special tool varies from one vendor to another. For details, refer to the relevant manual of each vendor.) S At a location where a transceiver was once installed, do not install a transceiver again. (The backbone cable can be damaged.) 2) Are transceivers installed at correct intervals? S Transceivers need to be spaced from each other by 2.5 m or more. It is recommended that transceivers be installed at intervals of an integral multiple of 2.5 m. Usually, installation locations are marked on a backbone cable. 3) Are terminating resistors attached? S A terminating resistor (50 ohms) needs to be attached to each end of the backbone cable. 4) Is the length of the backbone cable 500 m or less? 5) Does the cable (transceiver cable) connecting a hub to a transceiver satisfy the specified length?
836

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

S Usually, the maximum allowable length of a transceiver cable is 50 m. However, the maximum allowable length of some thin cables may be less than 50 m. Check the specification of the cable. When a 10BASE2 backbone is used 1) Is the length of one cable 0.5 m or more? S The minimum allowable span between nodes (devices) is 0.5 m. 2) Is the length of the backbone cable (total length of the cables) 185 m or less? 3) Are terminating resistors attached? S A terminating resistor (50 ohms) needs to be attached to each end of the backbone cable.

J.8.3
Checking the Setting of Each Parameter

This subsection describes how to check the minimum settings required for communication.

Checking the settings on the embedded Ethernet side 1) Is the MAC address of the embedded Ethernet displayed? S The MAC address of a embedded Ethernet port is set for each CNC, and can be checked on the parameter setting screen. S A unique MAC address is assigned to each PCMCIA Ethernet card. When a PCMCIA Ethernet card is selected and inserted, MAC address display is provided. 2) Is a correct IP address set? S Check if an IP address already specified for another device is set. 3) Is a correct subnet mask set? S The subnet mask setting must match the subnet mask setting on the communication destination device. 4) Is a correct router IP address set when communication via a router is performed? Checking the settings on the personal computer side 1) Is a correct IP address set? S Check if an IP address already specified for another device is set. 2) Is a correct subnet mask set? S The subnet mask setting must match the subnet mask setting on the communication destination device. 3) Is a correct router IP address set when communication via a router is performed?
837

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

J.8.4
Checking Communication

This subsection describes how to check the state of communication between the CNC and personal computer.

Checking the connection status and settings If communication with the CNC is not satisfactory or fails from time to time, check the communication link by using the method described below. The ping command is used to check communication.

Checking from the embedded Ethernet side

See Item 6 of Section J.7, EMBEDDED ETHERNET MAINTENANCE SCREEN. If no response is received from the remote device, the cause is considered to be a hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Check the hardware connection and software settings.

Checking from the personal computer side

An example where a personal computer (OS: Windows NT 4.0) is used is described below. Method of checking: Open the command prompt, then enter ping NCIPaddress. A normal connection has been established if a response is received. The example below supposes that the IP address of the CNC is 192.168.1.1. 1) When a response is received (normal)

838

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

2) When no response is received (error)

If no response is received from the CNC, the cause is considered to be a hardware connection error and/or software setting error. Check the hardware connection and software settings. Checking the influence of noise The method of checking communication errors caused by noise is described below. The ping command is used for this checking as well. The t option of the ping command is used. Until the Ctrl and C keys are pressed simultaneously, ping packets are transmitted.

839

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

1. Influence of noise from peripheral equipment (device) 1) Turn on the power to the machine with the embedded Ethernet function for which a noise influence check is to be made, and ensure that communication is enabled. 2) Press the emergency stop button of the machine to turn off servo/spindle amplifier activation, then issue a ping command from the personal computer. 3) Count the number of lost packets (to which no response is returned). If lost packets occur in this state, there is probably an influence of noise from peripheral equipment. Action: Locate the noise source and recheck the cabling to eliminate the influence of noise. 2. Influence of noise from the installed machine 1) Next, release the emergency stop state of the machine to turn on servo/spindle amplifier activation, then issue another ping command from the personal computer. 2) Count the number of lost packets. If this number is greater than the number of Item 1 above, the cause is considered to be noise generated by the machine itself. In general, the grounding of the machine or the grounding of the communication destination is defective. Action: Check the grounding of the machine and the communication destination, and insulate the machine from the communication backbone.

840

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.9
ERROR MESSAGES

If an error occurs with the embedded Ethernet function, the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function displays an error message. This section describes error messages displayed on the log screen. The major error messages are described below. If an error occurs, display the log screen and check the error message to identify the cause of the error. Multiple error messages may be displayed for an error. So, check the display times of error messages.

J.9.1
EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL LOG Screen

D OWN IP ADDRESS IS NOTHING: The IP address of the local node is not set. Set an IP address correctly. D OWN IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the IP address of the local node is incorrect. Correct the IP address. D SUBNET MASK IS NOTHING: The subnet mask of the local node is not set. Set a correct subnet mask. D SUBNET MASK (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the subnet mask of the local node is incorrect. Correct the subnet mask. D ROUTER IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the IP address of the router is incorrect. Correct the IP address of the router. D TCP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCP port number. D UDP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the UDP port number is incorrect. Correct the UDP port number. D UDP INTERVAL TIME (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the time interval for UDP transmission is incorrect. Correct the time interval. D Embedded LANC SelfTest Error [???]: An error was detected when the LAN controller of the embedded Ethernet was initialized. The error code is [???]. Hardware replacement is needed.

J.9.2
EMB_ETH FOCAS1/ETHER LOG Screen

D TCP PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID: The setting (???) of the TCP port number is incorrect. Correct the TCP port number. D Illegal Broadcast IP ADDRESS: The broadcast address for UDP transmission is incorrect. Correct the subnet mask and IP address of the local node. D Illegal Poweron Date or Time: The current time setting of the CNC is incorrect. Correct the clock of the CNC.
841

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

D ALL TASKS (C1) ARE BUSY: The FOCAS1/Ethernet function or DNC1/Ethernet function is already engaged in communication with five applications. Terminate unnecessary communication applications on the personal computer. If the cable is disconnected before communication is completed, the embedded Ethernet may need to be reset and initialized. D Err accept ( ) [???]: An error occurred when a connection request from the personal computer is being awaited. The error code is [???]. This error message is output, for example, when the embedded Ethernet is reset. D Err recv ( ) [???]: An error occurred during data reception. The error code is [???]. This error message is output, for example, when the embedded Ethernet is reset before communication is closed.

J.9.3
EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER LOG Screen

D Login User is invalid: The setting of the user name or password is incorrect. Check the user name and password. D Parameters are invalid: The port number and IP address of the host computer set on the parameter setting screen are incorrect. Check the settings of the port number and IP address. D (???) is not found: The host computer with which an attempt is made to perform FTP communication cannot be found on the network. The IP address of the host computer to be connected with is indicated by (???). Check if the power to the host computer is turned on and if the host computer is connected to the network correctly.

J.9.4
EMB_ETH FACTOLINK LOG Screen

D FACTOLINK#1 IP ADDRESS (???) IS INVALID: The setting of the IP address (???) of the FACTOLINK server is incorrect. Check the setting of the IP address. D FACTOLINK#1 PORT NUMBER (???) IS INVALID: The port number (???) of the FACTOLINK server is incorrect. Check the setting of the program number. D Err ALREADY CONNECTED: An additional request is made for connection with a port already connected. The embedded Ethernet needs to be reset.

842

B85014EN/01

APPENDIXES

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

J.10
GLOSSARY FOR ETHERNET
TCP/IP

This section briefly describes Ethernetrelated terms. The descriptions below provide minimum information only. For further information, refer to relevant publications available on the market.

For Ethernetbased communication, the TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) protocol is generally used. A protocol is a set of rules used to ensure smooth communication between communication devices connected via a transmission line. The TCP/IP protocol is a part of the hierarchical structure consisting of the protocols and services indicated below.
Hierarchy Application layer Transport layer Network layer Data link layer Protocols such as ARP and RARP MAC layer Physical layer Hardware such as cables and devices Protocol/network service User services such as FTP Protocols such as TCP and UDP Protocols such as IP and ICMP

In general, the TCP/IP protocol is a generic term that represents the protocols installed in the transport layer and network layer.

IP address (INET address)

With TCP/IP, an address referred to as an IP address (INET address) is used to identify a specified communication device among the communication devices connected via Ethernet. So, for communication using TCP/IP, each communication device connected to Ethernet must have a unique IP address assigned. An IP address is four octets (bytes) long. Usually, an IP address is represented by four 8bit (octet or byte) fields separated by a period from each other. Each octet can have a value from 0 to 255. An IP address consists of the address of the network to which the communication device is connected, and the host address of the communication device. Networks are classified into three classes by group size: class A, class B, and class C.
First octet value Network address section xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Host address section xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

Class A Class B Class C

0 to 127 128 to 191 192 to 223

(A hatched portion indicates the section of each address.) If a network supports no more than 255 communication devices, class C is generally used. The IP addresses of all communication devices on one network have the same network address, and only the host address of each communication device is unique on the network.
843

J. EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

APPENDIXES

B85014EN/01

An IP address with its network address and host address all set to 0 or 255 is unusable. IP addresses are internationally managed systematically. This means that before an IP address can be used, the IP address must be obtained formally from the international organization. In Japan, a formal IP address can be obtained from Japan Network Information Center (JPNIC). For the method of application, visit the home page of JPNIC (URL:http://www.nic.ad.jp/indexj.html) where the document for application released by JPNIC is available. If the network used by a user is a local network closed within the users environment (not connected to an outside network), unique IP addresses may be set freely under the control and responsibility of the user. For a local network, the following network addresses can be used without formal registration: 1 address (10) for class A, 16 addresses (172.16 to 172.31) for class B, and 256 addresses (192.168.0 to 192.168.255) for class C. So, it is recommended that IP addresses with these network addresses be used for a local network.

Subnet mask (mask address)

Mask address for indicating the network address section of an IP address. For a network of class A, specify 255.0.0.0. For a network of class B, specify 255.255.0.0. For a network of class C, specify 255.255.255.0. A MAC address is assigned to the Ethernet control board of each communication device, and is used to identify each communication device on the MAC layer (lower part of the data link layer). A unique address obtained from an international organization is used so that no address duplication occurs among Ethernet control board suppliers. The port number is a 16bit integer used to associate the transport layer (TCP or UDP) of TCP/IP and a process of the application layer. Port numbers from 0 to about 8000 are called wellknown port numbers and assigned to standard applications (such as Telnet and FTP). The assignment of port numbers is described in Assigned Numbers [RFC1340]. When using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function and DNC1/Ethernet function, assign port numbers other than the wellknown port numbers. Transmitting a message to all nodes in the same segment Device or application that requests a service Device or application that provides a service

MAC address (Ethernet address)

Port number

Broadcast Client Server

844

B85014EN/01

Index
[Symbols]
Basic Operation, 631 Basic Operations, 19 Battery Replacement Method, 618 Blower Control Function (Option), 365

Tool Change Key, 179

[A]
Acceleration and Servo Delay Compensation (Type A/B), 482 Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table, 398 Additional Axis Cable for the Index Table (Japan and Export St, 396 Additional Axis Control (Option), 372 Additional Parameters, 494 Address, 483 Adjusting the Relief Valve, 465 Adjusting Thermal Displacement Compensation, 354 Adjustment Procedure, 355 AI HighPrecision Contour Control Function/Modeler Control II Function (Option), 479 AI Tool Monitor, 284 Air Supply Shutoff Method, 93 Alarm, 500 Alarm Message, 189 Alarm Messages and Releasing Method, 415 Alarm Operator Messages, 473 Alarms, 516, 727 Animated Simulation, 269 Appearance and Configuration of the Coolant Unit, 450 Appearance of the Coolant Unit, 450 Arrangement of the Letter Keys, 22 Auto and MDI Operation, 571 Automatic Door, 160 Automatic Operation Screen, 117 Automatic Power Supply ShutOff, 358 Automatic Running [CNC Operation], 88, 162 Automatic Tool Length Measurement, 409 Automatic Turnoff Operation of the Touch Probe, 518 Automatic Turret Restoration, 626 Axis Movement, 161

Browse Mode and Edit Mode, 208

[C]
Cabling and Phase Matching, 46 Calculating the Flexible Feed Gear (Detection Multiply DMR), 376 Calling a Program in Memory, 132 Cancellation, 493 Canned Cycles, 489 Centerthrough Coolant (Option), 446 Centerthrough Coolant Control, 471 Centerthrough Pump Unit, 448 Changing OFFSET Data, 152 Changing Parameters, 149 Changing Workpiece Coordinate System Data, 154 Check Items Related to Connection with a Backbone, 836 Checking and changing of the connection host, 826 Checking Communication, 838 Checking Installation Requirements, 37 Checking Operation After Installation, 459 Checking Parameters, 633 Checking Program Nos. in Memory, 132 Checking the Setting of Each Parameter, 837 Cheek Items Related to Connection with the HUB, 836 Circuit Diagram of Center through Coolant and Compressed Air, 468 Cleaning, 592, 596 Cleaning the #150 Suction Filter, 461 CNC Screen, 189 CNC Screen Switching, 20 Command, 483 Command Format, 411 Command M Codes, 460 Commands in a Program, 460, 471 Commands with M Codes, 178 Common to CNC Screen and Quick Screen, 192

[B]
Back Ground Editing, 574 i1

Common to Screens, 191 Communication Parameter Input Method, 802

Index

B85014EN/01

Compensation Method by Using Automatic Tool Length Measurement, 412 Compressed Air Circuit Diagram, 470 Concentrated lubrication with Intermittent Oiling System, 609 Configuring a large network, 789, 796, 802 Confirming the Current Status and Clearing, 295 Connecting the Compressed Air Supply, 51 Connecting the Power Supply, 46 Connection, 335, 339, 341, 347, 485, 513 Connectors, 396, 397 Constitution of Quick Screen, 99 Control, 472 Controller Rack, 12 Conversational Programming Function, 224 Convert to NC Format, 560 Coolant, 32 Coolant (Option), 360 Coolant Circuit Diagram of Centerthrough Coolant Unit, 469 Coolant Supply, 81 Coolant Unit, 447, 449 Coolant Unit (Option), 361 Coordinate/Tool Compensation, 106 Copy and Deleting of NC Program, 568 Copy and Move (by Line), 216 Counter, 118 Creating a Machining Program, 239 Creating a Program, 127, 128 Creating a program, 577 Creation of NC Program, 529 Cursor Jump, 217 Custom Macro Variables, 156 Cutting Condition File, 229, 278

Deleting a Line, 220 Deleting a Program, 132 Deleting the Program, 213 Descriptions of Screen Displays, 100 Detailed Specifications, 429 Details of the Related Parameters, 197 DI/DO, 475 Diagnos Messages, 749 Diagnose/Alarm Screen, 191 Diagnosis/Alarm, 126 Differences from Conventional G73 and G81 through G83 Codes, 492 Dimensions of the End of the Spindle, 657 Dimensions of the Inside of the Splash Guard, 653 Dimensions of the Machine, 646 Dimensions of the System around the Coolant Outlets, 656 Dimensions of the Table Surface and T Groove (nominal width: 14), 650 Displaying Alarm, Operator, and Diagnostic Messages, 188 Displaying and Changing Parameters, 145 Displaying Parameters, 146 DNC Operation Using the DNC Operation Management Package, 445 DNC1/Ethernet Function, 778 Drawing Function and NC Statement Conversion Function, 586 Dry Run After Replacement of the Line Filter, 464

[E]
Editing a Program, 128 Editing Function, 563 Editing Function of QUICK EDITOR, 212 Electric Control Circuit Diagram of Center Through Coolant, 476 Electric Power Supply Shutoff Method, 94 EMB_ETH FACTOLINK Log Screen, 842 EMB_ETH FOCAS1/Ether Log Screen, 841 EMB_ETH FTP TRANSFER Log Screen, 842 EMB_ETH MASTER CTRL Log Screen, 841 Embedded Ethernet and PCMCIA Ethernet, 775 Embedded Ethernet Error Message Screen, 828 Embedded Ethernet Function, 774 Embedded Ethernet Maintenance Screen, 830 Embedded Ethernet Operations, 812 i2

[D]
Daily Checkup, 592 Daily Inspection, 461 Daily Maintenance, 591 Data I/O, 276 Data I/O Screen, 110 Data Setting, 526 Default File, 283

B85014EN/01

Index

Emergency Stop, 70, 333 Enabling the Zaxis Thermal Displacement Compensation Function, 353 Entering a Comment, 219 Entering a Macro Statement, 218 Entering Alphabetic Characters, 22 Entering Alphabetic Characters and Symbols, 209 Error code displayed on LCD, 669 Error Codes, 668 Error Messages, 841 Example of Cycle Operation, 496 Explanation of Each Screen, 103 Explanation of Sample Program, 522 External Interface Function, 302 External Interface Signal Assignment, 514 External Power Supply, 334

Grid Shift, 377

[H]
HighSpeed Positioning and Drilling Canned Cycle Functions, 487 HighSpeed Serial Bus (HSSB) Interface Function (Option), 444 HighSpeed Skip Function (Option), 480 History of the Amounts of Estimated Thermal Displacements, 354 Host file deletion, 816 Host file list display, 813 Host file search, 816

[I]
If The Safety Door Is Unlocked During Operation, 74 Index Table Function (Option), 390 Input Function of QUICK EDITOR, 209 Input Signal Specifications, 486 Input/output of various types of data, 819 Input/Output Parameters for External Devices, 195 Input/Output Signals, 307 Input/OutputInput, 478 Input/OutputOutput, 477 Inserting a Line, 220 Inspecting Cutters, 593 Inspecting Each Section, 593, 596 Installation, 42, 457 Installation Area, 457 Installing Leveling Bolts and Blocks, 43 Installing the Coolant Unit, 58 Internal connection diagram, 335 Internal Light (Option), 370

[F]
FACTOLINK Function, 776, 812 FACTOLINK Functions, 433 FACTOLINK parameter setting screen, 783 Features, 4 Features and Notes of QUICK EDITOR, 206 Features of QUICK EDITOR, 206 Feedrate Override Dial (FEEDRATE OVERRIDE), 174 Flowchart, 416 Fluorescent Lamp in the Inside Light Unit, 618 FOCAS1/Ethernet Function, 776 FOCAS1/Ethernet parameter setting screen, 790 FTP File Transfer Function, 779, 813 FTP file transfer parameter setting screen, 797 Function, 512 Functional Differences between the Embedded Ethernet Function and the Ethernet Function Based on the Option Board, 780 Fuse, 618

[J]
Jigs, 31

[G]
G Codes, 659 Glossary for Ethernet, 843 Greasing, 601 Greasing and Oiling Interval, 613 i3 Level Adjusting, 56 Line Filter, 466

[L]
List of Alarms (PMC), 737 List of Error Codes, 732

Index

B85014EN/01

List of Functions, 776 Locking the Safety Door, 72 Logging Data Format, 443 Logging Data Function, 440 Lubricating Each Section, 601

Mounting a ZAxis Motor at Machine Installation, 54 Mounting Jigs and Workpieces, 79 Mounting Tools, 57, 78

[N]
Names and Functions of the Parts, 453 NC Parameter, 146 NC program input, 817 NC program output, 818 NC Statement Output Function, 274 Note, 509 Notes, 449, 495, 521 Notes on Installation, 457 Notes on using the FACTOLINK function for the first time, 782 Notes on using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function for the first time, 789 Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time, 796

[M]
M codes, 471 M01 Stop (OPT STOP), 174 Machine, 10 Machine Cleaning Coolant Control (Optional), 364 Machining Program Check, 261 Machining Program Optimization, 251 Macro Call Using G Code, 502 Macro Program, 421 Maintenance of AC Spindle Motor, 617 Maintenance Parts, 466 Maintence/Setting, 124 Manual Guide, 519 Manual Operation, 460, 471 Manual Operation of the Spindle, 159 Manual Running [CNC Operation], 158 Manual Running Execution During Automatic Running, 173 MDI Command Execution During Automatic Running, 173 MDI Running, 163 Measurement Cycle Function (Option), 576 Measurement Cycle Operation, 586 Measures When an Error Occurs During Tool Change, 180 Measuring Limit, 413 Memory Running (MEM), 167 Memory Running Operation, 168 Menu Operation, 104 MENU OPERATION Keytriggered Screen Switching, 102 Menu Screen, 103 Method Using the M Code, 182 Method Using the Spindle Key (Manual) on the Operators Panel, 182 Miscellaneous Function (M Function), 134 Mist Collector Mounting Hole Dimensions, 658 Modifying a Program, 129 i4

[O]
Opening and Closing the Automatic Door (Option), 366 Opening and Closing the Door when the Power is Off, 75 Opening/Closing the SplashGuard Door, 71 Operating Positions, 65 Operation, 224, 460, 663 Operation of the Manual Guide, 522 Operator Message, 190 Operator Messages, 745 Operator Messages, Diagnos Messages, 744 Operators Panel, 14 Optimal Process Editing Algorithm, 255 Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration), 253 Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration), 258 Optional Block Skip, 175 Ordering information, 336, 340, 346, 350 Other Maintenance, 465 Other Maintenance Parts, 466 Other Operations, 211 Other Related Parameters (Standard Setting), 375 Outline of the Function, 425

B85014EN/01

Index

Output of Measurement Results to Custom Macro Variables, 586 Output Signal Check Function, 306 Outside dimensions, 337, 340, 346, 350 Overview, 341, 347, 504, 511, 520 Overview (Super C.A.P iM), 223

Quick Editor, 204 QUICK EDITOR Screen, 207 Quick Screen, 97, 191

[R]
Rapid Traverse Overlapping, 493 Rapid Traverse Rate Override (TRVRS LOW, TRVRS 25%, TRVRS 100%), 175 Rating, 337 Recommended ATA Card, 772 Recommended Lubricants (Grease and Oil), 616 Registering a Tool Length Compensation Value, 294 Registering Parameters, 634 Registering the Program, 215 Related Parameters (Standard Settings), 431 Relay Module, 335 Relay Terminal Block Module, 341 Relay Terminal Block Module B, 347 Releasing Overtravel, 193 Releasing the Tool Trapping State, 194 Remote Running (REMOT), 170 Remote Running Operation, 170 Removal of Corrosion Preventive Grease, 53 Removing Auxiliary Axes, 378 Removing Cut Scraps, 594 Removing the Eyebolts for Lifting the Machine, 44 Removing the Packing Plate, 45 Replacing Expendable Parts, 618 Replacing the Line Filter, 463 Replenishing the Tank with Coolant, 592 Resetting Parameters, 632 Restarting Automatic Running, 91 Restarting Automatic Running After Feed Hold or Stop, 173 Restriction, 475 Restrictions on the Operation of the Machine with the Safety Door Open, 73 Retreat Operation, 493 Return to Initial Point/Point R, 493 Rigid Tapping Cycle (Function M29), 139 Rigid Tapping Return Function, 635 Rotation of the Spindle, 182

[P]
Packing, 62 Pallet Setting Screen (Option), 115 Parameter Reset, Check, and Registration Functions, 630 Parameter Setting of the FACTOLINK Function, 782 Parameter Setting of the FOCAS1/Ethernet Function, 789 Parameter Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function, 796 Parameters, 484, 501, 506, 515, 785, 800 Parameters (PMC Parameters), 474 Parameters and Macro Variables, 414 Part Names, 9 Periodical Maintenance, 599, 617 Pin allocation, 336 Piping, 457 Playback, 143 PMC Parameter, 148 PMC Parameters, 753 Positioning Operation, 493 Power Shutoff Methods, 92 Power Supply, 476 Power Supply Module, 734 PreTool File, 234, 282 Preparation, 576 Preparation Before Transportation, 39 Preparing Programs [CNC Operation], 82 Procedure for Displaying QUICK EDITOR Screen, 207 Program Check (Graphic), 557 Program Creation, 294 Programming, 133

[Q]
Quick Conversational Programming (Super C.A.P iM), 222 i5 Safety Precautions, 77

[S]

Index

B85014EN/01

Scheduled Maintenance, 461 Screen Change and Program Selection after Editing, 221 Screen Number and PAGE Key Triggered Screen Switching, 101 Screen Switching, 20 Screen Switching Methods, 101 Search for the Specified Word, 217 Select Function, 442 Selecting a Coolant, 449 Selecting an Edit Function, 208 Selecting the Function, 220 Selecting the Program, 212 Selection of NC Program, 527 Sequence, 505 Sequence Selection, 120 Servo Amplifier Module, 735 Servo Motor Origin Restoration, 621 Servo Parameters (Standard), 379 Setting and Cancel of Continuous Line, 219 Setting and Displaying Common Variables, 157 Setting Input/Output Signals and Functions, 304 Setting NC Parameters, 439 Setting of Input Power Supply, 50 Setting of Inserting or Overwriting Mode, 220 Setting Servo Parameters, 373 Setting Several Data, 228 Setting the Embedded Ethernet Function, 782 Setting the SmallHole Peck Drilling Cycle Mode, 428 Setting Up Ethernet, 435 Setting Up FACTOLINK, 438 Settings, 435 Settings and Operations of Automatic Running, 172 Settings for Memory Running, 167 Settings for Remote Running, 170 Shape and Dimensions of the Machine, 647 Signal Output, 301 Simple Input of G and M Codes, 210 Simple input of words by input key, 211 Single Block (SINGL BLOCK), 172 SingleBlock Stop, 493 SmallHole Peck Drilling Cycle (Option), 424 Soft Keytriggered Screen Switching, 101 i6

Sound Pressure Level, 8 Specification, 499 Specifications, 346, 350, 447, 639 Specified Brands of Lubricant, 616 Spindle, 447 Spindle Air Blow Time Extension Function, 503 Spindle Amplifier, 727 Spindle Load Meter, 185 Spindle Motor Characteristic, 187 Spindle Orientation (M19), 186 Spindle Orientation Function (M19 Function), 138 Spindle Override, 184 Spindle Rotation Disable Function, 517 Spindle Rotation When the Safety Door is Open, 183 Spindle Runin (for 15000min1 Specification), 597 Spindle Speed Function (S Function), 133 SpindleSpeed Functions, 181 Standard Data, 278 Starting and Ending the CNC Screen Display Function, 445 Starting Automatic Running, 89 Status Lights (Option), 371 Status List, 666 Stopping Automatic Running, 90 Supplement to Program Commands, 297 Switching Between the Embedded Ethernet Devices, 810 Switching between the QUICK Screen and CNC Screen, 20 Switching of Safety Door Lock Control, 76 Switching Over to Manual Guide Screen, 524 Switching Power Off, 69 Switching Power On, 68 Switching Power On and Off, 67 Switching to Factolink Screen, 441

[T]
Tool Change, 176 Tool Change Precautions, 177 Tool File, 231, 279 Tool Function (T Function), 137 Tool Geometry Compensation, 236 Tool Life Management Screen, 112 Tool Path Drawing, 261

B85014EN/01

Index

Tools, 24 Touch Probe Control Function, 510 Transportation, 41 Transportation Procedure, 38 Trial Run, 83 Troubleshooting, 836 Wiring, 458

[V]
View and Components of the Operators Panel, 13

[W] [U]
Work at Closing Time, 594 Workpiece Coordinate System, 237

Usage, 427 Use of the Machine, 5 User Terminal Block Module, 338 Using the DNC1/Ethernet function on a small network, 795 Using the FACTOLINK function on a small network, 788 Using the FOCAS1/Ethernet function on a small network, 794 Using the FTP file transfer function on a small network, 801

[Y]
Yaxis Telescopic Cover (Ycover F), 61

[Z]
Zaxis Thermal Displacement Compensation Function, 351

i7

Revision Record

FANUC ROBODRILL T14iCe/iCLe/iCSe, T21iCe/iCLe/iCSe OPERATORS MANUAL (B85014EN)

01

Jul., 2002

Edition

Date

Contents

Edition

Date

Contents